Difference between revisions of "RFC1045"

From RFC-Wiki
Line 1: Line 1:
 
 
 
Network Working Group                                    David Cheriton
 
Network Working Group                                    David Cheriton
 
Request for Comments:  1045                          Stanford University
 
Request for Comments:  1045                          Stanford University
                                                          February 1988
+
                                                        February 1988
 
 
 
 
              VMTP: VERSATILE MESSAGE TRANSACTION PROTOCOL
 
                        Protocol Specification
 
 
 
  
 +
          VMTP: VERSATILE MESSAGE TRANSACTION PROTOCOL
 +
                      Protocol Specification
  
 
STATUS OF THIS MEMO
 
STATUS OF THIS MEMO
Line 16: Line 11:
 
community.  Comments are encouraged.  Distribution of this document is
 
community.  Comments are encouraged.  Distribution of this document is
 
unlimited.
 
unlimited.
 
  
 
OVERVIEW
 
OVERVIEW
Line 32: Line 26:
 
simple controllers, to mention but a few examples.
 
simple controllers, to mention but a few examples.
  
 +
                        Table of Contents
  
 +
== Introduction                                                        1 ==
  
 +
1.1. Motivation                                                    2
 +
    1.1.1. Poor RPC Performance                                    2
 +
    1.1.2. Weak Naming                                              3
 +
    1.1.3. Function Poor                                            3
 +
1.2. Relation to Other Protocols                                    4
 +
1.3. Document Overview                                              5
  
RFC 1045                      VMTP                        February 1988
+
== Protocol Overview                                                  6 ==
  
 +
2.1. Entities, Processes and Principals                            7
 +
2.2. Entity Domains                                                9
 +
2.3. Message Transactions                                          10
 +
2.4. Request and Response Messages                                11
 +
2.5. Reliability                                                  12
 +
    2.5.1. Transaction Identifiers                                13
 +
    2.5.2. Checksum                                                14
 +
    2.5.3. Request and Response Acknowledgment                    14
 +
    2.5.4. Retransmissions                                        15
 +
    2.5.5. Timeouts                                                15
 +
    2.5.6. Rate Control                                            18
 +
2.6. Security                                                      19
 +
2.7. Multicast                                                    21
 +
2.8. Real-time Communication                                      22
 +
2.9. Forwarded Message Transactions                                24
 +
2.10. VMTP Management                                              25
 +
2.11. Streamed Message Transactions                                25
 +
2.12. Fault-Tolerant Applications                                  28
 +
2.13. Packet Groups                                                29
 +
2.14. Runs of Packet Groups                                        31
 +
2.15. Byte Order                                                  32
 +
2.16. Minimal VMTP Implementation                                  33
 +
2.17. Message vs. Procedural Request Handling                      33
 +
2.18. Bibliography                                                34
  
                          Table of Contents
+
== VMTP Packet Formats                                                37 ==
  
1. Introduction                                                        1
+
3.1. Entity Identifier Format                                      37
 +
3.2. Packet Fields                                                38
  
  1.1. Motivation                                                    2
+
Cheriton                                                        [page i]
      1.1.1. Poor RPC Performance                                    2
 
      1.1.2. Weak Naming                                              3
 
      1.1.3. Function Poor                                            3
 
  1.2. Relation to Other Protocols                                    4
 
  1.3. Document Overview                                              5
 
  
2. Protocol Overview                                                  6
+
3.3. Request Packet                                                45
 +
3.4. Response Packet                                              47
  
  2.1. Entities, Processes and Principals                            7
+
== Client Protocol Operation                                         49 ==
  2.2. Entity Domains                                                9
 
  2.3. Message Transactions                                         10
 
  2.4. Request and Response Messages                                11
 
  2.5. Reliability                                                  12
 
      2.5.1. Transaction Identifiers                                13
 
      2.5.2. Checksum                                                14
 
      2.5.3. Request and Response Acknowledgment                    14
 
      2.5.4. Retransmissions                                        15
 
      2.5.5. Timeouts                                                15
 
      2.5.6. Rate Control                                            18
 
  2.6. Security                                                      19
 
  2.7. Multicast                                                    21
 
  2.8. Real-time Communication                                      22
 
  2.9. Forwarded Message Transactions                                24
 
  2.10. VMTP Management                                              25
 
  2.11. Streamed Message Transactions                                25
 
  2.12. Fault-Tolerant Applications                                  28
 
  2.13. Packet Groups                                                29
 
  2.14. Runs of Packet Groups                                        31
 
  2.15. Byte Order                                                  32
 
  2.16. Minimal VMTP Implementation                                  33
 
  2.17. Message vs. Procedural Request Handling                      33
 
  2.18. Bibliography                                                34
 
  
3. VMTP Packet Formats                                               37
+
4.1. Client State Record Fields                                    49
 +
4.2. Client Protocol States                                        51
 +
4.3. State Transition Diagrams                                    51
 +
4.4. User Interface                                                52
 +
4.5. Event Processing                                              53
 +
4.6. Client User-invoked Events                                    54
 +
    4.6.1. Send                                                    54
 +
    4.6.2. GetResponse                                            56
 +
4.7. Packet Arrival                                                56
 +
    4.7.1. Response                                               58
 +
4.8. Management Operations                                        61
 +
    4.8.1. HandleNoCSR                                            62
 +
4.9. Timeouts                                                      64
  
  3.1. Entity Identifier Format                                      37
+
== Server Protocol Operation                                          66 ==
  3.2. Packet Fields                                                38
 
  
 +
5.1. Remote Client State Record Fields                            66
 +
5.2. Remote Client Protocol States                                66
 +
5.3. State Transition Diagrams                                    67
 +
5.4. User Interface                                                69
 +
5.5. Event Processing                                              70
 +
5.6. Server User-invoked Events                                    71
 +
    5.6.1. Receive                                                71
 +
    5.6.2. Respond                                                72
 +
    5.6.3. Forward                                                73
 +
    5.6.4. Other Functions                                        74
 +
5.7. Request Packet Arrival                                        74
 +
5.8. Management Operations                                        78
 +
    5.8.1. HandleRequestNoCSR                                      79
 +
5.9. Timeouts                                                      82
  
 +
== Concluding Remarks                                                84 ==
  
 +
I. Standard VMTP Response Codes                                      85
  
 +
II. VMTP RPC Presentation Protocol                                    87
  
 +
Cheriton                                                      [page ii]
  
 +
II.1. Request Code Management                                      87
  
Cheriton                                                        [page i]
+
III. VMTP Management Procedures                                      89
  
 +
III.1. Entity Group Management                                    100
 +
III.2. VMTP Management Digital Signatures                        101
  
 +
IV. VMTP Entity Identifier Domains                                  102
  
RFC 1045                      VMTP                        February 1988
+
IV.1. Domain 1                                                    102
 +
IV.2. Domain 3                                                    104
 +
IV.3. Other Domains                                              105
 +
IV.4. Decentralized Entity Identifier Allocation                  105
  
 +
V. Authentication Domains                                            107
  
  3.3. Request Packet                                                45
+
V.1. Authentication Domain 1                                      107
  3.4. Response Packet                                              47
+
V.2. Other Authentication Domains                                107
  
4. Client Protocol Operation                                          49
+
VI. IP Implementation                                                108
  
  4.1. Client State Record Fields                                    49
+
VII. Implementation Notes                                            109
  4.2. Client Protocol States                                        51
 
  4.3. State Transition Diagrams                                    51
 
  4.4. User Interface                                                52
 
  4.5. Event Processing                                              53
 
  4.6. Client User-invoked Events                                    54
 
      4.6.1. Send                                                    54
 
      4.6.2. GetResponse                                            56
 
  4.7. Packet Arrival                                                56
 
      4.7.1. Response                                                58
 
  4.8. Management Operations                                        61
 
      4.8.1. HandleNoCSR                                            62
 
  4.9. Timeouts                                                      64
 
  
5. Server Protocol Operation                                          66
+
VII.1. Mapping Data Structures                                    109
 +
VII.2. Client Data Structures                                    111
 +
VII.3. Server Data Structures                                    111
 +
VII.4. Packet Group transmission                                  112
 +
VII.5. VMTP Management Module                                    113
 +
VII.6. Timeout Handling                                          114
 +
VII.7. Timeout Values                                            114
 +
VII.8. Packet Reception                                          115
 +
VII.9. Streaming                                                  116
 +
VII.10. Implementation Experience                                117
  
  5.1. Remote Client State Record Fields                            66
+
VIII. UNIX 4.3 BSD Kernel Interface for VMTP                        118
  5.2. Remote Client Protocol States                                66
 
  5.3. State Transition Diagrams                                    67
 
  5.4. User Interface                                               69
 
  5.5. Event Processing                                              70
 
  5.6. Server User-invoked Events                                    71
 
      5.6.1. Receive                                                71
 
      5.6.2. Respond                                                72
 
      5.6.3. Forward                                                73
 
      5.6.4. Other Functions                                        74
 
  5.7. Request Packet Arrival                                        74
 
  5.8. Management Operations                                        78
 
      5.8.1. HandleRequestNoCSR                                      79
 
  5.9. Timeouts                                                      82
 
  
6. Concluding Remarks                                                84
+
Index                                                                120
  
I. Standard VMTP Response Codes                                      85
+
Cheriton                                                      [page iii]
  
II. VMTP RPC Presentation Protocol                                    87
+
                        List of Figures
  
 +
Figure 1-1:  Relation to Other Protocols                          4
 +
Figure 3-1:  Request Packet Format                                45
 +
Figure 3-2:  Response Packet Format                              47
 +
Figure 4-1:  Client State Transitions                            52
 +
Figure 5-1:  Remote Client State Transitions                      68
 +
Figure III-1:  Authenticator Format                              92
 +
Figure VII-1:  Mapping Client Identifier to CSR                  109
 +
Figure VII-2:  Mapping Server Identifiers                        110
 +
Figure VII-3:  Mapping Group Identifiers                        111
  
 +
Cheriton                                                      [page iv]
  
 +
== Introduction ==
  
 +
The Versatile Message Transaction Protocol (VMTP) is a transport
 +
protocol designed to support remote procedure call (RPC) and general
 +
transaction-oriented communication.  By transaction-oriented
 +
communication, we mean that:
  
 +
- Communication is request-response:  A client sends a request
 +
  for a service to a server, the request is processed, and the
 +
  server responds.  For example, a client may ask for the next
 +
  page of a file as the service.  The transaction is terminated
 +
  by the server responding with the next page.
  
 +
- A transaction is initiated as part of sending a request to a
 +
  server and terminated by the server responding.  There are no
 +
  separate operations for setting up or terminating associations
 +
  between clients and servers at the transport level.
  
 +
- The server is free to discard communication state about a
 +
  client between transactions without causing incorrect behavior
 +
  or failures.
  
Cheriton                                                      [page ii]
+
The term message transaction (or transaction) is used in the reminder of
 +
this document for a request-response exchange in the sense described
 +
above.
  
 +
VMTP handles the error detection, retransmission, duplicate suppression
 +
and, optionally, security required for transport-level end-to-end
 +
reliability.
  
 +
The protocol is designed to provide a range of behaviors within the
 +
transaction model, including:
  
RFC 1045                      VMTP                        February 1988
+
- Minimal two packet exchanges for short, simple transactions.
  
 +
- Streaming of multi-packet requests and responses for efficient
 +
  data transfer.
  
  II.1. Request Code Management                                      87
+
- Datagram and multicast communication as an extension of the
 +
  transaction model.
  
III. VMTP Management Procedures                                      89
+
Example Uses:
  
  III.1. Entity Group Management                                    100
+
- Page-level file access - VMTP is intended as the transport
  III.2. VMTP Management Digital Signatures                        101
+
  level for file access, allowing simple, efficient operation on
 +
  a local network. In particular, VMTP is appropriate for use
 +
  by diskless workstations accessing shared network file
  
IV. VMTP Entity Identifier Domains                                  102
+
Cheriton                                                        [page 1]
  
  IV.1. Domain 1                                                    102
+
  servers.
  IV.2. Domain 3                                                    104
 
  IV.3. Other Domains                                              105
 
  IV.4. Decentralized Entity Identifier Allocation                  105
 
  
V. Authentication Domains                                            107
+
- Distributed programming - VMTP is intended to provide an
 +
  efficient transport level protocol for remote procedure call
 +
  implementations, distributed object-oriented systems plus
 +
  message-based systems that conform to the request-response
 +
  model.
  
  V.1. Authentication Domain 1                                      107
+
- Multicast communication with groups of servers to:  locate a
  V.2. Other Authentication Domains                                107
+
  specific object within the group, update a replicated object,
 +
  synchronize the commitment of a distributed transaction, etc.
  
VI. IP Implementation                                                108
+
- Distributed real-time control with prioritized message
 +
  handling, including datagrams, multicast and asynchronous
 +
  calls.
  
VII. Implementation Notes                                            109
+
The protocol is designed to operate on top of a simple unreliable
 +
datagram service, such as is provided by IP.
  
  VII.1. Mapping Data Structures                                    109
+
=== Motivation ===
  VII.2. Client Data Structures                                    111
 
  VII.3. Server Data Structures                                    111
 
  VII.4. Packet Group transmission                                  112
 
  VII.5. VMTP Management Module                                    113
 
  VII.6. Timeout Handling                                          114
 
  VII.7. Timeout Values                                            114
 
  VII.8. Packet Reception                                          115
 
  VII.9. Streaming                                                  116
 
  VII.10. Implementation Experience                                117
 
  
VIII. UNIX 4.3 BSD Kernel Interface for VMTP                        118
+
VMTP was designed to address three categories of deficiencies with
 +
existing transport protocols in the Internet architecture. We use TCP
 +
as the key current transport protocol for comparison.
  
Index                                                                120
+
==== Poor RPC Performance ====
  
 +
First, current protocols provide poor performance for remote procedure
 +
call (RPC) and network file access.  This is attributable to three key
 +
causes:
  
 +
- TCP requires excessive packets for RPC, especially for
 +
  isolated calls.  In particular, connection setup and clear
 +
  generates extra packets over that needed for VMTP to support
 +
  RPC.
  
 +
- TCP is difficult to implement, speaking purely from the
 +
  empirical experience over the last 10 years.  VMTP was
 +
  designed concurrently with its implementation, with focus on
 +
  making it easy to implement and providing sensible subsets of
 +
  its functionality.
  
 +
- TCP handles packet loss due to overruns poorly.  We claim that
 +
  overruns are the key source of packet loss in a
 +
  high-performance RPC environment and, with the increasing
  
 +
Cheriton                                                        [page 2]
  
 +
  performance of networks, will continue to be the key source.
 +
  (Older machines and network interfaces cannot keep up with new
 +
  machines and network interfaces.  Also, low-end network
 +
  interfaces for high-speed networks have limited receive
 +
  buffering.)
  
 +
VMTP is designed for ease of implementation and efficient RPC.  In
 +
addition, it provides selective retransmission with rate-based flow
 +
control, thus addressing all of the above issues.
  
 +
==== Weak Naming ====
  
 +
Second, current protocols provide inadequate naming of transport-level
 +
endpoints because the names are based on IP addresses.  For example, a
 +
TCP endpoint is named by an Internet address and port identifier.
 +
Unfortunately, this makes the endpoint tied to a particular host
 +
interface, not specifically the process-level state associated with the
 +
transport-level endpoint.  In particular, this form of naming causes
 +
problems for process migration, mobile hosts and multi-homed hosts.
 +
VMTP provides host-address independent names, thereby solving the above
 +
mentioned problems.
  
 +
In addition, TCP provides no security and reliability guarantees on the
 +
dynamically allocated names.  In particular, other than well-known
 +
ports, (host-addr, port-id)-tuples can change meaning on reboot
 +
following a crash.  VMTP provides large identifiers with guarantee of
 +
stability, meaning that either the identifier never changes in meaning
 +
or else remains invalid for a significant time before becoming valid
 +
again.
  
 +
==== Function Poor ====
  
Cheriton                                                      [page iii]
+
TCP does not support multicast, real-time datagrams or security.  In
 
+
fact, it only supports pair-wise, long-term, streamed reliable
 
+
interchanges.  Yet, multicast is of growing importance and is being
 
+
developed for the Internet (see RFC 966 and 988).  Also, a datagram
RFC 1045                      VMTP                        February 1988
+
facility with the same naming, transmission and reception facilities as
 
+
the normal transport level is a powerful asset for real-time and
 
+
parallel applications.  Finally, security is a basic requirement in an
                            List of Figures
+
increasing number of environments.  We note that security is natural to
 
+
implement at the transport level to provide end-to-end security (as
  Figure 1-1:  Relation to Other Protocols                          4
+
opposed to (inter)network level security).  Without security at the
  Figure 3-1:  Request Packet Format                                45
+
transport level, a transport level protocol cannot guarantee the
  Figure 3-2:  Response Packet Format                              47
+
standard transport level service definition in the presence of an
  Figure 4-1:  Client State Transitions                            52
+
intruder.  In particular, the intruder can interject packets or modify
  Figure 5-1:  Remote Client State Transitions                      68
 
  Figure III-1:  Authenticator Format                              92
 
  Figure VII-1:  Mapping Client Identifier to CSR                  109
 
  Figure VII-2:  Mapping Server Identifiers                        110
 
  Figure VII-3:  Mapping Group Identifiers                        111
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 +
Cheriton                                                        [page 3]
  
 +
packets while updating the checksum, making mockery out of the
 +
transport-level claim of "reliable delivery".
  
 +
In contrast, VMTP provides multicast, real-time datagrams and security,
 +
addressing precisely these weaknesses.
  
 +
In general, VMTP is designed with the next generation of communication
 +
systems in mind.  These communication systems are characterized as
 +
follows.  RPC, page-level file access and other request-response
 +
behavior dominates.  In addition, the communication substrate, both
 +
local and wide-area, provides high data rates, low error rates and
 +
relatively low delay.  Finally, intelligent, high-performance network
 +
interfaces are common and in fact required to achieve performance that
 +
approximates the network capability.  However, VMTP is also designed to
 +
function acceptably with existing networks and network interfaces.
  
 +
=== Relation to Other Protocols ===
  
 +
VMTP is a transport protocol that fits into the layered Internet
 +
protocol environment.  Figure 1-1 illustrates the place of VMTP in the
 +
protocol hierarchy.
  
 +
+-----------+ +----+ +-----------------+ +------+
 +
|File Access| |Time| |Program Execution| |Naming|... Application
 +
+-----------+ +----+ +-----------------+ +------+      Layer
 +
    |          |          |            |      |
 +
    +-----------+-----------+-------------+------+
 +
                            |
 +
                    +------------------+
 +
                    | RPC Presentation |          Presentation
 +
                    +------------------+          Layer
 +
                              |
 +
        +------+          +--------+
 +
        |  TCP |          | VMTP  |              Transport
 +
        +------+          +--------+              Layer
 +
            |                  |
 +
        +-----------------------------------+
 +
        |      Internet Protocol & ICMP    |      Internetwork
 +
        +-----------------------------------+      Layer
  
 +
            Figure 1-1:  Relation to Other Protocols
  
 +
The RPC presentation level is not currently defined in the Internet
 +
suite of protocols.  Appendix II defines a proposed RPC presentation
 +
level for use with VMTP and assumed for the definition of the VMTP
 +
management procedures.  There is also a need for the definition of the
  
 +
Cheriton                                                        [page 4]
  
 +
Application layer protocols listed above.
  
 +
If internetwork services are not required, VMTP can be used without the
 +
IP layer, layered directly on top of the network or data link layers.
  
 +
=== Document Overview ===
  
 +
The next chapter gives an overview of the protocol, covering naming,
 +
message structure, reliability, flow control, streaming, real-time,
 +
security, byte-ordering and management.  Chapter 3 describes the VMTP
 +
packet formats.  Chapter 4 describes the client VMTP protocol operation
 +
in terms of pseudo-code for event handling.  Chapter 5 describes the
 +
server VMTP protocol operation in terms of pseudo-code for event
 +
handling.  Chapter 6 summarizes the state of the protocol, some
 +
remaining issues and expected directions for the future.  Appendix I
 +
lists some standard Response codes.  Appendix II describes the RPC
 +
presentation protocol proposed for VMTP and used with the VMTP
 +
management procedures.  Appendix III lists the VMTP management
 +
procedures.  Appendix IV proposes initial approaches for handling entity
 +
identification for VMTP.  Appendix V proposes initial authentication
 +
domains for VMTP.  Appendix VI provides some details for implementing
 +
VMTP on top of IP.  Appendix VII provides some suggestions on host
 +
implementation of VMTP, focusing on data structures and support
 +
functions.  Appendix VIII describes a proposed program interface for
 +
UNIX 4.3 BSD and its descendants and related systems.
  
 +
Cheriton                                                        [page 5]
  
 +
== Protocol Overview ==
  
 +
VMTP provides an efficient, reliable, optionally secure transport
 +
service in the message transaction or request-response model with the
 +
following features:
  
 +
- Host address-independent naming with provision for multiple
 +
  forms of names for endpoints as well as associated (security)
 +
  principals.  (See Sections 2.1, 2.2, 3.1 and Appendix IV.)
  
 +
- Multi-packet request and response messages, with a maximum
 +
  size of 4 megaoctets per message.  (Sections 2.3 and 2.14.)
  
 +
- Selective retransmission. (Section 2.13.)  and rate-based flow
 +
  control to reduce overrun and the cost of overruns.  (Section
 +
  2.5.6.)
  
 +
- Secure message transactions with provision for a variety of
 +
  encryption schemes.  (Section 2.6.)
  
 +
- Multicast message transactions with multiple response messages
 +
  per request message.  (Section 2.7.)
  
 +
- Support for real-time communication with idempotent message
 +
  transactions with minimal server overhead and state (Section
 +
  2.5.3), datagram request message transactions with no
 +
  response, optional header-only checksum, priority processing
 +
  of transactions, conditional delivery and preemptive handling
 +
  of requests (Section 2.8)
  
 +
- Forwarded message transactions as an optimization for certain
 +
  forms of nested remote procedure calls or message
 +
  transactions.  (Section 2.9.)
  
 +
- Multiple outstanding (asynchronous) message transactions per
 +
  client.  (Section 2.11.)
  
 +
- An integrated management module, defined with a remote
 +
  procedure call interface on top of VMTP providing a variety of
 +
  communication services (Section 2.10.)
  
 +
- Simple subset implementation for simple clients and simple
 +
  servers.  (Section 2.16.)
  
 +
This chapter provides an overview of the protocol as introduction to the
 +
basic ideas and as preparation for the subsequent chapters that describe
 +
the packet formats and event processing procedures in detail.
  
 +
Cheriton                                                        [page 6]
  
 +
In overview, VMTP provides transport communication between network-
 +
visible entities via message transactions.  A message transaction
 +
consists of a request message sent by the client, or requestor, to a
 +
group of server entities followed by zero or more response messages to
 +
the client, at most one from each server entity.  A message is
 +
structured as a message control portion and a segment data portion.  A
 +
message is transmitted as one or more packet groups.  A packet group  is
 +
one or more packets (up to a maximum of 32 packets) grouped by the
 +
protocol for acknowledgment, sequencing, selective retransmission and
 +
rate control.
  
 +
Entities and VMTP operations are managed using a VMTP management
 +
mechanism that is accessed through a procedural interface (RPC)
 +
implemented on top of VMTP.  In particular, information about a remote
 +
entity is obtained and maintained using the Probe VMTP management
 +
operation.  Also, acknowledgment information and requests for
 +
retransmission are sent as notify requests to the management module.
 +
(In the following description, reference to an "acknowledgment" of a
 +
request or a response refers to a management-level notify operation that
 +
is acknowledging the request or response.)
  
 +
=== Entities, Processes and Principals ===
  
 +
VMTP defines and uses three main types of identifiers:  entity
 +
identifiers, process identifiers and principal identifiers, each 64-bits
 +
in length.  Communication takes place between network-visible entities,
 +
typically mapping to, or representing, a message port or procedure
 +
invocation.  Thus, entities are the VMTP communication endpoints.  The
 +
process associated with each entity designates the agent behind the
 +
communication activity for purposes of resource allocation and
 +
management.  For example, when a lock is requested on a file, the lock
 +
is associated with the process, not the requesting entity, allowing a
 +
process to use multiple entity identifiers to perform operations without
 +
lock conflict between these entities.  The principal associated with an
 +
entity specifies the permissions, security and accounting designation
 +
associated with the entity.  The process and principal identifiers are
 +
included in VMTP solely to make these values available to VMTP users
 +
with the security and efficiency provided by VMTP.  Only the entity
 +
identifiers are actively used by the protocol.
  
 +
Entity identifiers are required to have three properties;
  
Cheriton                                                      [page iv]
+
Uniqueness      Each entity identifier is uniquely defined at any given
 +
            time.  (An entity identifier may be reused over time.)
  
RFC 1045                      VMTP                        February 1988
+
Stability      An entity identifier does not change between valid
  
 +
Cheriton                                                        [page 7]
  
1. Introduction
+
            meanings without suitable provision for removing
 +
            references to the entity identifier.  Certain entity
 +
            identifiers are strictly stable, (i.e. never changing
 +
            meaning), typically being administratively assigned
 +
            (although they need not be bound to a valid entity at
 +
            all times), often called well-known identifiers.  All
 +
            other entity identifiers are required to be T-stable,
 +
            not change meaning without having remained invalid for
 +
            at least a time interval T.
  
The Versatile Message Transaction Protocol (VMTP) is a transport
+
Host address independent
protocol designed to support remote procedure call (RPC) and general
+
            An entity identifier is unique independent of the host
transaction-oriented communicationBy transaction-oriented
+
            address of its current host.  Moreover, an entity
communication, we mean that:
+
            identifier is not tied to a single Internet host
 +
            address.  An entity can migrate between hosts, reside on
 +
            a mobile host that changes Internet addresses or reside
 +
            on a multi-homed hostIt is up to the VMTP
 +
            implementation to determine and maintain up to date the
 +
            host addresses of entities with which it is
 +
            communicating.
  
  - Communication is request-response:  A client sends a request
+
The stability of entity identifiers guarantees that an entity identifier
    for a service to a server, the request is processed, and the
+
represents the same logical communication entity and principal (in the
    server responds.  For example, a client may ask for the next
+
security sense) over the time that it is valid.  For example, if an
    page of a file as the serviceThe transaction is terminated
+
entity identifier is authenticated as having the privileges of a given
    by the server responding with the next page.
+
user account, it continues to have those privileges as long as it is
 +
continuously valid (unless some explicit notice is provided otherwise).
 +
Thus, a file server need not fully authenticate the entity on every file
 +
access requestWith T-stable identifiers, periodically checking the
 +
validity of an entity identifier with period less than T seconds detects
 +
a change in entity identifier validity.
  
  - A transaction is initiated as part of sending a request to a
+
A group of entities can form an entity group, which is a set of zero or
    server and terminated by the server respondingThere are no
+
more entities identified by a single entity identifierFor example,
    separate operations for setting up or terminating associations
+
one can have a single entity identifier that identifies the group of
    between clients and servers at the transport level.
+
name servers.  An entity identifier representing an entity group is
 
+
drawn from the same name space as entity identifiers. However, single
  - The server is free to discard communication state about a
+
entity identifiers are flagged as such by a bit in the entity
    client between transactions without causing incorrect behavior
+
identifier, indicating that the identifier is known to identify at most
    or failures.
+
one entity.  In addition to the group bit, each entity identifier
 
+
includes other standard type flags. One flag indicates whether the
The term message transaction (or transaction) is used in the reminder of
+
identifier is an alias for an entity in another domain (See Section 2.2
this document for a request-response exchange in the sense described
+
below.).  Another flag indicates, for an entity group identifier,
above.
+
whether the identifier is a restricted group or not.  A restricted group
 +
is one in which an entity can be added only by another entity with group
 +
management authorization.  With an unrestricted group, an entity is
 +
allowed to add itself. If an entity identifier does not represent a
  
VMTP handles the error detection, retransmission, duplicate suppression
+
Cheriton                                                        [page 8]
and, optionally, security required for transport-level end-to-end
 
reliability.
 
  
The protocol is designed to provide a range of behaviors within the
+
group, a type bit indicates whether the entity uses big-endian or
transaction model, including:
+
little-endian data representation (corresponding to Motorola 680X0 and
 +
VAX byte orders, respectively).  Further specification of the format of
 +
entity identifiers is contained in Section 3.1 and Appendix IV.
  
  - Minimal two packet exchanges for short, simple transactions.
+
An entity identifier identifies a Client, a Server or a group of
 +
Servers <1>.  A Client is always identified by a T-stable identifier.  A
 +
server or group of servers may be identified by a a T-stable identifier
 +
(group or single entity) or by strictly stable (statically assigned)
 +
entity group identifier.  The same T-stable identifier can be used to
 +
identify a Client and Server simultaneously as long as both are
 +
logically associated with the same entity.  The state required for
 +
reliable, secure communication between entities is maintained in client
 +
state records (CSRs), which include the entity identifier of the Client,
 +
its principal, its current or next transaction identifier and so on.
  
  - Streaming of multi-packet requests and responses for efficient
+
=== Entity Domains ===
    data transfer.
 
  
  - Datagram and multicast communication as an extension of the
+
An entity domain is an administration or an administration mechanism
    transaction model.
+
that guarantees the three required entity identifier properties of
 
+
uniqueness, stability and host address independence for the entities it
Example Uses:
+
administers. That is, entity identifiers are only guaranteed to be
 
+
unique and stable within one entity domain.  For example, the set of all
  - Page-level file access - VMTP is intended as the transport
+
Internet hosts may function as one domain.  Independently, the set of
    level for file access, allowing simple, efficient operation on
+
hosts local to one autonomous network may function as a separate domain.
    a local networkIn particular, VMTP is appropriate for use
+
Each entity domain is identified by an entity domain identifier, Domain.
    by diskless workstations accessing shared network file
+
Only entities within the same domain may communicate directly via VMTP.
 
+
However, hosts and entities may participate in multiple entity domains
 
+
simultaneously, possibly with different entity identifiersFor
Cheriton                                                        [page 1]
+
example, a file server may participate in multiple entity domains in
 +
order to provide file service to each domain.  Each entity domain
 +
specifies the algorithms for allocation, interpretation and mapping of
 +
entity identifiers.
  
 +
Domains are necessary because it does not appear feasible to specify one
 +
universal VMTP entity identification administration that covers all
 +
entities for all time.  Domains limit the number of entities that need
 +
to be managed to maintain the uniqueness and stability of the entity
  
 +
_______________
  
RFC 1045                      VMTP                       February 1988
+
<1>  Terms such as Client, Server, Request, Response, etc.  are
 +
capitalized in this document when they refer to their specific meaning
 +
in VMTP.
  
 +
Cheriton                                                        [page 9]
  
    servers.
+
name space.  Domains can also serve to separate entities of different
 +
security levels.  For instance, allocation of a unclassified entity
 +
identifier cannot conflict with secret level entity identifiers because
 +
the former is interpreted only in the unclassified domain, which is
 +
disjoint from the secret domain.
  
  - Distributed programming - VMTP is intended to provide an
+
It is intended that there be a small number of domains.  In particular,
    efficient transport level protocol for remote procedure call
+
there should be one (or a few) domains per installation "type", rather
    implementations, distributed object-oriented systems plus
+
than per installation.  For example, the Internet is expected to use one
    message-based systems that conform to the request-response
+
domain per security level, resulting in at most 8 different domains.
    model.
+
Cluster-based internetwork architectures, those with a local cluster
 +
protocol distinct from the wide-area protocol, may use one domain for
 +
local use and one for wide-area use.
  
  - Multicast communication with groups of servers to:  locate a
+
Additional details on the specification of specific domains is provided
    specific object within the group, update a replicated object,
+
in Appendix IV.
    synchronize the commitment of a distributed transaction, etc.
 
  
  - Distributed real-time control with prioritized message
+
=== Message Transactions ===
    handling, including datagrams, multicast and asynchronous
 
    calls.
 
  
The protocol is designed to operate on top of a simple unreliable
+
The message transaction is the unit of interaction between a Client that
datagram service, such as is provided by IP.
+
initiates the transaction and one or more Servers.  A message
 
+
transaction starts with a request message  generated by a client.  At
 
+
the service interface, a server becomes involved with a transaction by
1.1. Motivation
+
receiving and accepting the request. A server terminates its
 
+
involvement with a transaction by sending a response message.  In a
VMTP was designed to address three categories of deficiencies with
+
group message transaction, the server entity designated by the client
existing transport protocols in the Internet architectureWe use TCP
+
corresponds to a group of entities. In this case, each server in the
as the key current transport protocol for comparison.
+
group receives a copy of the request. In the client's view, the
 +
transaction is terminated when it receives the response message or, in
 +
the case of a group message transaction, when it receives the last
 +
response message.  Because it is normally impractical to determine when
 +
the last response message has been receivedthe current transaction is
 +
terminated by VMTP when the next transaction is initiated.
  
 +
Within an entity domain, a transaction is uniquely identified by the
 +
tuple (Client, Transaction, ForwardCount).  where Transaction is a
 +
32-bit number and ForwardCount is a 4-bit value.  A Client uses
 +
monotonically increasing Transaction identifiers for new message
 +
transactions.  Normally, the next higher transaction number, modulo
 +
2**32, is used for the next message transaction, although there are
 +
cases in which it skips a small range of Transaction identifiers.  (See
 +
the description of the STI control flag.)  The ForwardCount is used when
 +
a message transaction is forwarded and is zero otherwise.
  
1.1.1. Poor RPC Performance
+
A Client generates a stream of message transactions with increasing
 +
transaction identifiers, directed at a diversity of Servers. We say a
  
First, current protocols provide poor performance for remote procedure
+
Cheriton                                                      [page 10]
call (RPC) and network file access.  This is attributable to three key
 
causes:
 
  
  - TCP requires excessive packets for RPC, especially for
+
Client has a transaction outstanding if it has invoked a message
    isolated calls.  In particular, connection setup and clear
+
transaction, but has not received the last Response (or possibly any
    generates extra packets over that needed for VMTP to support
+
Response).  Normally, a Client has only one transaction outstanding at a
    RPC.
+
time.  However, VMTP allows a Client to have multiple message
 +
transactions outstanding simultaneously, supporting streamed,
 +
asynchronous remote procedure call invocations.  In addition, VMTP
 +
supports nested calls where, for example, procedure A calls procedure B
 +
which calls procedure C, each on a separate host with different client
 +
entity identifiers for each call but identified with the same process
 +
and principal.
  
  - TCP is difficult to implement, speaking purely from the
+
=== Request and Response Messages ===
    empirical experience over the last 10 years.  VMTP was
 
    designed concurrently with its implementation, with focus on
 
    making it easy to implement and providing sensible subsets of
 
    its functionality.
 
  
  - TCP handles packet loss due to overruns poorlyWe claim that
+
A message transaction consists of a request message and one or more
    overruns are the key source of packet loss in a
+
Response messagesA message is structured as message control block
    high-performance RPC environment and, with the increasing
+
(MCB) and segment data, passed as parameters, as suggested below.
  
 +
  +-----------------------+
 +
  | Message Control Block |
 +
  +-----------------------+
 +
  +-----------------------------------+
 +
  |      segment data                |
 +
  +-----------------------------------+
  
Cheriton                                                        [page 2]
+
In the request message, the MCB specifies control information about the
 
+
request plus an optional data segment.  The MCB has the following
 +
format:
 +
  0                  1                  2                  3
 +
  0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1
 +
+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
 +
+                        ServerEntityId  (8 octets)            +
 +
+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
 +
|  Flags      |        RequestCode                          |
 +
+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
 +
+                        CoresidentEntity (8 octets)          +
 +
+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
 +
>                        User Data (12 octets)                <
 +
+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
 +
|                        MsgDelivery                          |
 +
+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
 +
|                        SegmentSize                          |
 +
+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
  
 +
The ServerEntityId is the entity to which the Request MCB is to be sent
 +
(or was sent, in the case of reception).  The Flags indicate various
 +
options in the request and response handling as well as whether the
  
RFC 1045                      VMTP                        February 1988
+
Cheriton                                                      [page 11]
  
 +
CoresidentEntity, MsgDelivery and SegmentSize fields are in use.  The
 +
RequestCode field specifies the type of Request.  It is analogous to a
 +
packet type field of the Ethernet, acting as a switch for higher-level
 +
protocols.  The CoresidentEntity field, if used, designates a subgroup
 +
of the ServerEntityId group to which the Request should be routed,
 +
namely those members that are co-resident with the specified entity (or
 +
entity group).  The primary intended use is to specify the manager for a
 +
particular service that is co-resident with a particular entity, using
 +
the well-known entity group identifier for the service manager in the
 +
ServerEntityId field and the identifier for the entity in the
 +
CoresidentEntity field.  The next 12 octets are user- or
 +
application-specified.
  
    performance of networks, will continue to be the key source.
+
The MsgDelivery field is optionally used by the RPC or user level to
    (Older machines and network interfaces cannot keep up with new
+
specify the portions of the segment data to transmit and on reception,
    machines and network interfacesAlso, low-end network
+
the portions received. It provides the client and server with
    interfaces for high-speed networks have limited receive
+
(optional) access to, and responsibility for, a simple selective
    buffering.)
+
transmission and reception facilityFor example, a client may request
 
+
retransmission of just those portions of the segment that it failed to
VMTP is designed for ease of implementation and efficient RPCIn
+
receive as part of the original Response.  The primary intended use is
addition, it provides selective retransmission with rate-based flow
+
to support highly efficient multi-packet reading from a file server.
control, thus addressing all of the above issues.
+
Exploiting user-level selective retransmission using the MsgDelivery
 +
field, the file server VMTP module need not save multi-packet Responses
 +
for retransmissionRetransmissions, when needed, are instead handled
 +
directly from the file server buffers.
  
 +
The SegmentSize field indicates the size of the data segment, if
 +
present.  The CoresidentEntity, MsgDelivery and SegmentSize fields are
 +
usable as additional user data if they are not otherwise used.
  
1.1.2. Weak Naming
+
The Flags field provides a simple mechanism for the user level to
 +
communicate its use of VMTP options with the VMTP module as well as for
 +
VMTP modules to communicate this use among themselves. The use of these
 +
options is generally fixed for each remote procedure so that an RPC
 +
mechanism using VMTP can treat the Flags as an integral part of the
 +
RequestCode field for the purpose of demultiplexing to the correct stub.
  
Second, current protocols provide inadequate naming of transport-level
+
A Response message control block follows the same format except the
endpoints because the names are based on IP addresses.  For example, a
+
Response is sent from the Server to the Client and there is no
TCP endpoint is named by an Internet address and port identifier.
+
Coresident Entity field (and thus 20 octets of user data).
Unfortunately, this makes the endpoint tied to a particular host
 
interface, not specifically the process-level state associated with the
 
transport-level endpoint.  In particular, this form of naming causes
 
problems for process migration, mobile hosts and multi-homed hosts.
 
VMTP provides host-address independent names, thereby solving the above
 
mentioned problems.
 
  
In addition, TCP provides no security and reliability guarantees on the
+
=== Reliability ===
dynamically allocated names.  In particular, other than well-known
 
ports, (host-addr, port-id)-tuples can change meaning on reboot
 
following a crash.  VMTP provides large identifiers with guarantee of
 
stability, meaning that either the identifier never changes in meaning
 
or else remains invalid for a significant time before becoming valid
 
again.
 
  
 +
VMTP provides reliable, sequenced transfer of request and response
 +
messages as well as several variants, such as unreliable datagram
 +
requests.  The reliability mechanisms include: transaction identifiers,
  
1.1.3. Function Poor
+
Cheriton                                                      [page 12]
  
TCP does not support multicast, real-time datagrams or security.  In
+
checksums, positive acknowledgment of messages and timeout and
fact, it only supports pair-wise, long-term, streamed reliable
+
retransmission of lost packets.
interchanges.  Yet, multicast is of growing importance and is being
 
developed for the Internet (see RFC 966 and 988).  Also, a datagram
 
facility with the same naming, transmission and reception facilities as
 
the normal transport level is a powerful asset for real-time and
 
parallel applications.  Finally, security is a basic requirement in an
 
increasing number of environments.  We note that security is natural to
 
implement at the transport level to provide end-to-end security (as
 
opposed to (inter)network level security). Without security at the
 
transport level, a transport level protocol cannot guarantee the
 
standard transport level service definition in the presence of an
 
intruder.  In particular, the intruder can interject packets or modify
 
  
 +
==== Transaction Identifiers ====
  
Cheriton                                                        [page 3]
+
Each message transaction is uniquely identified by the pair (Client,
 +
Transaction).  (We defer discussion of the ForwardCount field to Section
 +
2.9.)  The 32-bit transaction identifier is initialized to a random
 +
value when the Client entity is created or allocated its entity
 +
identifier.  The transaction identifier is incremented at the end of
 +
each message transaction.  All Responses with the same specified
 +
(Client, Transaction) pair are associated with this Request.
  
 +
The transaction identifier is used for duplicate suppression at the
 +
Server.  A Server maintains a state record for each Client for which it
 +
is processing a Request, identified by (Client, Transaction).  A Request
 +
with the same (Client, Transaction) pair is discarded as a duplicate.
 +
(The ForwardCount field must also be equal.)  Normally, this record is
 +
retained for some period after the Response is sent, allowing the Server
 +
to filter out subsequent duplicates of this Request.  When a Request
 +
arrives and the Server does not have a state record for the sending
 +
Client, the Server takes one of three actions:
  
 +
1. The Server may send a Probe request, a simple query
 +
  operation, to the VMTP management module associated with the
 +
  requesting Client to determine the Client's current
 +
  Transaction identifier (and other information), initialize a
 +
  new state record from this information, and then process the
 +
  Request as above.
  
RFC 1045                      VMTP                       February 1988
+
2. The Server may reason that the Request must be a new request
 +
  because it does not have a state record for this Client if it
 +
  keeps these state records for the maximum packet lifetime of
 +
  packets in the network (plus the maximum VMTP retransmission
 +
  time) and it has not been rebooted within this time period.
 +
  That is, if the Request is not new either the Request would
 +
  have exceeded the maximum packet lifetime or else the Server
 +
  would have a state record for the Client.
  
 +
3. The Server may know that the Request is idempotent or can be
 +
  safely redone so it need not care whether the Request is a
 +
  duplicate or not.  For example, a request for the current
 +
  time can be responded to with the current time without being
 +
  concerned whether the Request is a duplicate.  The Response
 +
  is discarded at the Client if it is no longer of interest.
  
packets while updating the checksum, making mockery out of the
+
Cheriton                                                      [page 13]
transport-level claim of "reliable delivery".
 
  
In contrast, VMTP provides multicast, real-time datagrams and security,
+
==== Checksum ====
addressing precisely these weaknesses.
 
  
In general, VMTP is designed with the next generation of communication
+
Each VMTP packet contains a checksum to allow the receiver to detect
systems in mindThese communication systems are characterized as
+
corrupted packets independent of lower level checksThe checksum field
follows.  RPC, page-level file access and other request-response
+
is 32 bits, providing greater protection than the standard 16-bit IP
behavior dominatesIn addition, the communication substrate, both
+
checksum (in combination with an improved checksum algorithm)The
local and wide-area, provides high data rates, low error rates and
+
large packets, high packet rates and general network characteristics
relatively low delay.  Finally, intelligent, high-performance network
+
expected in the future warrant a stronger checksum mechanism.
interfaces are common and in fact required to achieve performance that
 
approximates the network capability.  However, VMTP is also designed to
 
function acceptably with existing networks and network interfaces.
 
  
 +
The checksum normally covers both the VMTP header and the segment data.
 +
Optionally (for real-time applications), the checksum may apply only to
 +
the packet header, as indicated by the HCO control bit being set in the
 +
header.  The checksum field is placed at the end of the packet to allow
 +
it to be calculated as part of a software copy or as part of a hardware
 +
transmission or reception packet processing pipeline, as expected in the
 +
next generation of network interfaces.  Note that the number of header
 +
and data octets is an integral multiple of 8 because VMTP requires that
 +
the segment data be padded to be a multiple of 64 bits.  The checksum
 +
field is appended after the padding, if any.  The actual algorithm is
 +
described in Section 3.2.
  
1.2. Relation to Other Protocols
+
A zero checksum field indicates that no checksum was transmitted with
 +
the packet. VMTP may be used without a checksum only when there is a
 +
host-to-host error detection mechanism and the VMTP security facility is
 +
not being used. For example, one could rely on the Ethernet CRC if
 +
communication is restricted to hosts on the same Ethernet and the
 +
network interfaces are considered sufficiently reliable.
  
VMTP is a transport protocol that fits into the layered Internet
+
==== Request and Response Acknowledgment ====
protocol environment.  Figure 1-1 illustrates the place of VMTP in the
 
protocol hierarchy.
 
  
 +
VMTP assumes an unreliable datagram network and internetwork interface.
 +
To guarantee delivery of Requests and Response, VMTP uses positive
 +
acknowledgments, retransmissions and timeouts.
  
+-----------+ +----+ +-----------------+ +------+
+
A Request is normally acknowledged by receipt of a Response associated
|File Access| |Time| |Program Execution| |Naming|... Application
+
with the Request, i.e. with the same (Client, Transaction)With
  +-----------+ +----+ +-----------------+ +------+      Layer
+
streamed message transactions, it may also be acknowledged by a
      |          |          |            |      |
+
subsequent Response that acknowledges previous Requests in addition to
      +-----------+-----------+-------------+------+
+
the transaction it explicitly identifies. A Response may be explicitly
                              |
+
acknowledged by a NotifyVmtpServer operation requested of the manager
                        +------------------+
+
for the ServerIn the case of streaming, this is a cumulative
                        | RPC Presentation |          Presentation
+
acknowledgment, acknowledging all Responses with a lower transaction
                        +------------------+          Layer
+
identifier as well.) In addition, with non-streamed communication, a
                                  |
+
subsequent Request from the same Client acknowledges Responses to all
            +------+          +--------+
+
previous message transactions (at least in the sense that either the
            | TCP |          | VMTP  |              Transport
+
client received a Response or is no longer interested in Responses to
            +------+          +--------+              Layer
 
                |                  |
 
          +-----------------------------------+
 
          |      Internet Protocol & ICMP    |      Internetwork
 
          +-----------------------------------+      Layer
 
 
 
              Figure 1-1:  Relation to Other Protocols
 
 
 
The RPC presentation level is not currently defined in the Internet
 
suite of protocolsAppendix II defines a proposed RPC presentation
 
level for use with VMTP and assumed for the definition of the VMTP
 
management proceduresThere is also a need for the definition of the
 
  
 +
Cheriton                                                      [page 14]
  
Cheriton                                                        [page 4]
+
those earlier message transactions).  Finally, a client response timeout
 +
(at the server) acknowledges a Response at least in the sense that the
 +
server need not be prepared to retransmit the Response subsequently.
 +
Note that there is no end-to-end guarantee of the Response being
 +
received by the client at the application level.
  
 +
==== Retransmissions ====
  
 +
In general, a Request or Response is retransmitted periodically until
 +
acknowledged as above, up to some maximum number of retransmissions.
 +
VMTP uses parameters RequestRetries(Server) and ResponseRetries(Client)
 +
that indicate the number of retransmissions for the server and client
 +
respectively before giving up.  We suggest the value 5 be used for both
 +
parameters based on our experience with VMTP and Internet packet loss.
 +
Smaller values (such as 3) could be used in low loss environments in
 +
which fast detection of failed hosts or communication channels is
 +
required.  Larger values should be used in high loss environments where
 +
transport-level persistence is important.
  
RFC 1045                      VMTP                        February 1988
+
In a low loss environment, a retransmission only includes the MCB and
 
+
not the segment data of the Request or Response, resulting in a single
 
+
(short) packet on retransmissionThe intended recipient of the
Application layer protocols listed above.
+
retransmission can request selective retransmission of all or part of
 
+
the segment data as necessaryThe selective retransmission mechanism
If internetwork services are not required, VMTP can be used without the
+
is described in Section 2.13.
IP layer, layered directly on top of the network or data link layers.
 
 
 
 
 
1.3. Document Overview
 
 
 
The next chapter gives an overview of the protocol, covering naming,
 
message structure, reliability, flow control, streaming, real-time,
 
security, byte-ordering and management.  Chapter 3 describes the VMTP
 
packet formatsChapter 4 describes the client VMTP protocol operation
 
in terms of pseudo-code for event handling.  Chapter 5 describes the
 
server VMTP protocol operation in terms of pseudo-code for event
 
handling.  Chapter 6 summarizes the state of the protocol, some
 
remaining issues and expected directions for the future.  Appendix I
 
lists some standard Response codes.  Appendix II describes the RPC
 
presentation protocol proposed for VMTP and used with the VMTP
 
management procedures.  Appendix III lists the VMTP management
 
procedures.  Appendix IV proposes initial approaches for handling entity
 
identification for VMTP.  Appendix V proposes initial authentication
 
domains for VMTP.  Appendix VI provides some details for implementing
 
VMTP on top of IP.  Appendix VII provides some suggestions on host
 
implementation of VMTP, focusing on data structures and support
 
functionsAppendix VIII describes a proposed program interface for
 
UNIX 4.3 BSD and its descendants and related systems.
 
 
 
 
 
  
 +
If a Response is specified as idempotent, the Response is neither
 +
retransmitted nor stored for retransmission.  Instead, the Client must
 +
retransmit the Request to effectively get the Response retransmitted.
 +
The server VMTP module responds to retransmissions of the Request by
 +
passing the Request on to the server again to have it regenerate the
 +
Response (by redoing the operation), rather than saving a copy of the
 +
Response.  Only Request packets for the last transaction from this
 +
client are passed on in this fashion; older Request packets from this
 +
client are discarded as delayed duplicates.  If a Response is not
 +
idempotent, the VMTP module must ensure it has a copy of the Response
 +
for retransmission either by making a copy of the Response (either
 +
physically or copy-on-write) or by preventing the Server from continuing
 +
until the Response is acknowledged.
  
 +
==== Timeouts ====
  
 +
There is one client timer for each Client with an outstanding
 +
transaction.  Similarly, there is one server timer for each Client
 +
transaction that is "active" at the server, i.e. there is a transaction
  
 +
Cheriton                                                      [page 15]
  
 +
record for a Request from the Client.
  
 +
When the client transmits a new Request (without streaming), the client
 +
timer  is set to roughly the time expected for the Response to be
 +
returned.  On timeout, the Request is retransmitted with the APG
 +
(Acknowledge Packet Group) bit set.  The timeout is reset to the
 +
expected roundtrip time to the Server because an acknowledgment should
 +
be returned immediately unless a Response has been sent.  The Request
 +
may also be retransmitted in response to receipt of a VMTP management
 +
operation indicating that selected portions of the Request message
 +
segment need to be retransmitted.  With streaming, the timeout applies
 +
to the oldest outstanding message transaction in the run of outstanding
 +
message transactions.  Without streaming, there is one message
 +
transaction in the run, reducing to the previous situation.  After the
 +
first packet of a Response is received, the Client resets the timeout to
 +
be the time expected before the next packet in the Response packet group
 +
is received, assuming it is a multi-packet Response.  If not, the timer
 +
is stopped.  Finally, the client timer is used to timeout waiting for
 +
second and subsequent Responses to a multicast Request.
  
 +
The client timer is set at different times to four different values:
  
 +
TC1(Server)    The expected time required to receive a Response from
 +
            the Server.  Set on initial Request transmission plus
 +
            after its management module receives a NotifyVmtpClient
 +
            operation, acknowledging the Request.
  
 +
TC2(Server)    The estimated round trip delay between the client and
 +
            the server.  Set when retransmitting after receiving no
 +
            Response for TC1(Server) time and retransmitting the
 +
            Request with the APG bit set.
  
 +
TC3(Server)    The estimated maximum expected interpacket time for
 +
            multi-packet Responses from the Server.  Set when
 +
            waiting for subsequent Response packets within a packet
 +
            group before timing out.
  
 +
TC4            The time to wait for additional Responses to a group
 +
            Request after the first Response is received.  This is
 +
            specified by the user level.
  
 +
These values are selected as follows.  TC1 can be set to TC2 plus a
 +
constant, reflecting the time within which most servers respond to most
 +
requests.  For example, various measurements of VMTP usage at Stanford
 +
indicate that 90 percent of the servers respond in less than 200
 +
milliseconds.  Setting TC1 to TC2 + 200 means that most Requests receive
 +
a Response before timing out and also that overhead for retransmission
  
 +
Cheriton                                                      [page 16]
  
 +
for long running transactions is insignificant.  A sophisticated
 +
implementation may make the estimation of TC1 further specific to the
 +
Server.
  
 +
TC2 may be estimated by measuring the time from when a Probe request is
 +
sent to the Server to when a response is received.  TC2 can also be
 +
measured as the time between the transmission of a Request with the APG
 +
bit set to receipt of a management operation acknowledging receipt of
 +
the Request.
  
 +
When the Server is an entity group, TC1 and TC2 should be the largest of
 +
the values for the members of the group that are expected to respond.
 +
This information may be determined by probing the group on first use
 +
(and using the values for the last responses to arrive).  Alternatively,
 +
one can resort to default values.
  
 +
TC3 is set initially to 10 times the transmission time for the maximum
 +
transmission unit (MTU) to be used for the Response.  A sophisticated
 +
implementation may record TC3 per Server and refine the estimate based
 +
on measurements of actual interpacket gaps.  However, a tighter estimate
 +
of TC3 only improves the reaction time when a packet is lost in a packet
 +
group, at some cost in unnecessary retransmissions when the estimate
 +
becomes overly tight.
  
 +
The server timer, one per active Client, takes on the following values:
  
 +
TS1(Client)    The estimated maximum expected interpacket time.  Set
 +
            when waiting for subsequent Request packets within a
 +
            packet group before timing out.
  
 +
TS2(Client)    The time to wait to hear from a client before
 +
            terminating the server processing of a Request.  This
 +
            limits the time spent processing orphan calls, as well
 +
            as limiting how out of date the server's record of the
 +
            Client state can be.  In particular, TS2 should be
 +
            significantly less than the minimum time within which it
 +
            is reasonable to reuse a transaction identifier.
  
Cheriton                                                        [page 5]
+
TS3(Client)    Estimated roundtrip time to the Client,
  
 +
TS4(Client)    The time to wait after sending a Response (or last
 +
            hearing from a client) before discarding the state
 +
            associated with the Request which allows it to filter
 +
            duplicate Request packets and regenerate the Response.
  
 +
TS5(Client)    The time to wait for an acknowledgment after sending a
 +
            Response before retransmitting the Response, or giving
  
RFC 1045                      VMTP                        February 1988
+
Cheriton                                                      [page 17]
  
 +
            up (after some number of retransmissions).
  
2. Protocol Overview
+
TS1 is set the same as TC3.
  
VMTP provides an efficient, reliable, optionally secure transport
+
The suggested value for TS2 is TC1 + 3*TC2 for this server, giving the
service in the message transaction or request-response model with the
+
Client time to timeout waiting for a Response and retransmit 3 Request
following features:
+
packets, asking for acknowledgments.
  
  - Host address-independent naming with provision for multiple
+
TS3 is estimated the same as TC1 except that refinements to the estimate
    forms of names for endpoints as well as associated (security)
+
use measurements of the Response-to-acknowledgment times.
    principals.  (See Sections 2.1, 2.2, 3.1 and Appendix IV.)
 
  
  - Multi-packet request and response messages, with a maximum
+
In the general case, TS4 is set large enough so that a Client issuing a
    size of 4 megaoctets per message.  (Sections 2.3 and 2.14.)
+
series of closely-spaced Requests to the same Server reuses the same
 +
state record at the Server end and thus does not incur the overhead of
 +
recreating this state.  (The Server can recreate the state for a Client
 +
by performing a Probe on the Client to get the needed information.)  It
 +
should also be set low enough so that the transaction identifier cannot
 +
wrap around and so that the Server does not run out of CSR's. We
 +
suggest a value in the range of 500 milliseconds.  However, if the
 +
Server accepts non-idempotent Requests from this Client without doing a
 +
Probe on the Client, the TS4 value for this CSR is set to at least 4
 +
times the maximum packet lifetime.
  
  - Selective retransmission. (Section 2.13.) and rate-based flow
+
TS5 is TS3 plus the expected time for transmission and reception of the
    control to reduce overrun and the cost of overruns(Section
+
ResponseWe suggest that the latter be calculated as 3 times the
    2.5.6.)
+
transmission time for the Response data, allowing time for reception,
 +
processing and transmission of an acknowledgment at the Client endA
 +
sophisticated implementation may refine this estimate further over time
 +
by timing acknowledgments to Responses.
  
  - Secure message transactions with provision for a variety of
+
==== Rate Control ====
    encryption schemes.  (Section 2.6.)
 
  
  - Multicast message transactions with multiple response messages
+
VMTP is designed to deal with the present and future problem of packet
    per request message(Section 2.7.)
+
overrunsWe expect overruns to be the major cause of dropped packets
 
+
in the future. A client is expected to estimate and adjust the
  - Support for real-time communication with idempotent message
+
interpacket gap times so as to not overrun a server or intermediate
    transactions with minimal server overhead and state (Section
+
nodes.  The selective retransmission mechanism allows the server to
    2.5.3), datagram request message transactions with no
+
indicate that it is being overrun (or some intermediate point is being
    response, optional header-only checksum, priority processing
+
overrun). For example, if the server requests retransmission of every
    of transactions, conditional delivery and preemptive handling
+
Kth block, the client should assume overrun is taking place and increase
    of requests (Section 2.8)
+
the interpacket gap times. The client passes the server an indication
 
+
of the interpacket gap desired for a responseThe client may have to
  - Forwarded message transactions as an optimization for certain
+
increase the interval because packets are being dropped by an
    forms of nested remote procedure calls or message
+
intermediate gateway or bridge, even though it can handle a higher rate.
    transactions(Section 2.9.)
+
A conservative policy is to increase the interpacket gap whenever a
 
+
packet is lost as part of a multi-packet packet group.
  - Multiple outstanding (asynchronous) message transactions per
 
    client. (Section 2.11.)
 
 
 
  - An integrated management module, defined with a remote
 
    procedure call interface on top of VMTP providing a variety of
 
    communication services (Section 2.10.)
 
  
  - Simple subset implementation for simple clients and simple
+
Cheriton                                                      [page 18]
    servers.  (Section 2.16.)
 
  
This chapter provides an overview of the protocol as introduction to the
+
The provision of selective retransmission allows the rate of the client
basic ideas and as preparation for the subsequent chapters that describe
+
and the server to "push up" against the maximum rate (and thus lose
the packet formats and event processing procedures in detail.
+
packets) without significant penalty.  That is, every time that packet
 +
transmission exceeds the rate of the channel or receiver, the recovery
 +
cost to retransmit the dropped packets is generally far less than
 +
retransmitting from the first dropped packet.
  
 +
The interpacket gap is expressed in 1/32nd's of the MTU packet
 +
transmission time.  The minimum interpacket gap is 0 and the maximum gap
 +
that can be described in the protocol is 8 packet times.  This places a
 +
limit on the slowest receivers that can be efficiently used on a
 +
network, at least those handling multi-packet Requests and Responses.
 +
This scheme also limits the granularity of adjustment.  However, the
 +
granularity is relative to the speed of the network, as opposed to an
 +
absolute time.  For entities on different networks of significantly
 +
different speed, we assume the interconnecting gateways can buffer
 +
packets to compensate<2>. With different network speeds and intermediary
 +
nodes subject to packet loss, a node must adjust the interpacket gap
 +
based on packet loss.  The interpacket gap parameter may be of limited
 +
use.
  
Cheriton                                                        [page 6]
+
=== Security ===
  
 +
VMTP provides an (optional) secure mode that protects against the usual
 +
security threats of peeking, impostoring, message tampering and replays.
 +
Secure VMTP must be used to guarantee any of the transport-level
 +
reliability properties unless it is guaranteed that there are no
 +
intruders or agents that can modify packets and update the packet
 +
checksums.  That is, non-secure VMTP provides no guarantees in the
 +
presence of an intelligent intruder.
  
 +
The design closely follows that described by Birrell [1].  Authenticated
 +
information about a remote entity, including an encryption/decryption
 +
key, is obtained and maintained using a VMTP management operation, the
 +
authenticated Probe operation, which is executed as a non-secure VMTP
 +
message transaction.  If a server receives a secure Request for which
 +
the server has no entity state, it sends a Probe request to the VMTP
  
RFC 1045                      VMTP                        February 1988
+
_______________
 
 
  
In overview, VMTP provides transport communication between network-
+
<2>  Gateways must also employ techniques to preserve or intelligently
visible entities via message transactions.  A message transaction
+
modify (if appropriate) the interpacket gapsIn particular, they must
consists of a request message sent by the client, or requestor, to a
+
be sure not to arbitrarily remove interpacket gaps as a result of their
group of server entities followed by zero or more response messages to
+
forwarding of packets.
the client, at most one from each server entityA message is
 
structured as a message control portion and a segment data portion.  A
 
message is transmitted as one or more packet groups.  A packet group  is
 
one or more packets (up to a maximum of 32 packets) grouped by the
 
protocol for acknowledgment, sequencing, selective retransmission and
 
rate control.
 
  
Entities and VMTP operations are managed using a VMTP management
+
Cheriton                                                      [page 19]
mechanism that is accessed through a procedural interface (RPC)
 
implemented on top of VMTP.  In particular, information about a remote
 
entity is obtained and maintained using the Probe VMTP management
 
operation.  Also, acknowledgment information and requests for
 
retransmission are sent as notify requests to the management module.
 
(In the following description, reference to an "acknowledgment" of a
 
request or a response refers to a management-level notify operation that
 
is acknowledging the request or response.)
 
  
 +
management module of the client, "challenging" it to provide an
 +
authenticator that both authenticates the client as being associated
 +
with a particular principal as well as providing a key for
 +
encryption/decryption.  The principal can include a real and effective
 +
principal, as used in UNIX <3>.  Namely, the real principal is the
 +
principal on whose behalf the Request is being performed whereas the
 +
effective principal is the principal of the module invoking the request
 +
or remote procedure call.
  
2.1. Entities, Processes and Principals
+
Peeking is prevented by encrypting every Request and Response packet
 
+
with a working Key that is shared between Client and Server.
VMTP defines and uses three main types of identifiers:  entity
+
Impostoring and replays are detected by comparing the Transaction
identifiers, process identifiers and principal identifiers, each 64-bits
+
identifier with that stored in the corresponding entity state record
in length.  Communication takes place between network-visible entities,
+
(which is created and updated by VMTP as needed)Message tampering is
typically mapping to, or representing, a message port or procedure
+
detected by encryption of the packet including the Checksum fieldAn
invocation.  Thus, entities are the VMTP communication endpoints.  The
+
intruder cannot update the checksum after modifying the packet without
process associated with each entity designates the agent behind the
+
knowing the Key.  The cost of fully encrypting a packet is close to the
communication activity for purposes of resource allocation and
+
cost of generating a cryptographic checksum (and of course, encryption
managementFor example, when a lock is requested on a file, the lock
+
is needed in the general case), so there is no explicit provision for
is associated with the process, not the requesting entity, allowing a
+
cryptographic checksum without packet encryption.
process to use multiple entity identifiers to perform operations without
 
lock conflict between these entitiesThe principal associated with an
 
entity specifies the permissions, security and accounting designation
 
associated with the entity.  The process and principal identifiers are
 
included in VMTP solely to make these values available to VMTP users
 
with the security and efficiency provided by VMTP.  Only the entity
 
identifiers are actively used by the protocol.
 
  
Entity identifiers are required to have three properties;
+
A Client determines the Principal of the Server and acquires an
 +
authenticator for this Server and Principal using a higher level
 +
protocol.  The Server cannot decrypt the authenticator or the Request
 +
packets unless it is in fact the Principal expected by the Client.
  
Uniqueness      Each entity identifier is uniquely defined at any given
+
An encrypted VMTP packet is flagged by the EPG bit  in the VMTP packet
                time.  (An entity identifier may be reused over time.)
+
header.  Thus, encrypted packets are easily detected and demultiplexed
 +
from unencrypted packets.  An encrypted VMTP packet is entirely
 +
encrypted except for the Client, Version, Domain, Length and Packet
 +
Flags fields at the beginning of the packetClient identifiers can be
 +
assigned, changed and used to have no real meaning to an intruder or to
 +
only communicate public information (such as the host Internet address).
 +
They are otherwise just a random means of identification and
 +
demultiplexing and do not therefore divulge any sensitive information.
 +
Further secure measures must be taken at the network or data link levels
 +
if this information or traffic behavior is considered sensitive.
  
Stability      An entity identifier does not change between valid
+
VMTP provides multiple authentication domains  as well as an encryption
 +
qualifier to accommodate different encryption algorithms and their
  
 +
_______________
  
Cheriton                                                        [page 7]
+
<3>  Principal group membership must be obtained, if needed, by a
 +
higher level protocol.
  
 +
Cheriton                                                      [page 20]
  
 +
corresponding security/performance trade-offs.  (See Appendix V.)  A
 +
separate key distribution and authentication protocol is required to
 +
handle generation and distribution of authenticators and keys.  This
 +
protocol can be implemented on top of VMTP and can closely follow the
 +
Birrell design as well.
  
RFC 1045                      VMTP                       February 1988
+
Security is optional in the sense that messages may be secure or
 +
non-secure, even between consecutive message transactions from the same
 +
client.  It is also optional in that VMTP clients and servers are not
 +
required to implement secure VMTP (although they are required to respond
 +
intelligently to attempts to use secure VMTP).  At worst, a Client may
 +
fail to communicate with a Server if the Server insists on secure
 +
communication and the Client does not implement security or vice versa.
 +
However, a failure to communicate in this case is necessary from a
 +
security standpoint.
  
 +
=== Multicast ===
  
                meanings without suitable provision for removing
+
The Server entity identifier in a message transaction can identify an
                references to the entity identifier.  Certain entity
+
entity group, in which case the Request is multicast to every Entity in
                identifiers are strictly stable, (i.e. never changing
+
this group (on a best-efforts basis). The Request is retransmitted
                meaning), typically being administratively assigned
+
until at least one Response is received (or an error timeout occurs)
                (although they need not be bound to a valid entity at
+
unless it is a datagram RequestThe Client can receive multiple
                all times), often called well-known identifiersAll
+
Responses to the Request.
                other entity identifiers are required to be T-stable,
 
                not change meaning without having remained invalid for
 
                at least a time interval T.
 
  
Host address independent
+
The VMTP service interface does not directly provide reliable multicast
                An entity identifier is unique independent of the host
+
because it is expensive to provide, rarely needed by applications, and
                address of its current host.  Moreover, an entity
+
can be implemented by applications using the multiple Response feature.
                identifier is not tied to a single Internet host
+
However, the protocol itself is adequate for reliable multicast using
                addressAn entity can migrate between hosts, reside on
+
positive acknowledgmentsIn particular, a sophisticated Client
                a mobile host that changes Internet addresses or reside
+
implementation could maintain a list of members for each entity group of
                on a multi-homed host. It is up to the VMTP
+
interest and retransmit the Request until acknowledged by all members.
                implementation to determine and maintain up to date the
+
No modifications are required to the Server implementations.
                host addresses of entities with which it is
 
                communicating.
 
  
The stability of entity identifiers guarantees that an entity identifier
+
VMTP supports a simple form of subgroup addressing.  If the CRE  bit is
represents the same logical communication entity and principal (in the
+
set in a Request, the Request is delivered to the subgroup of entities
security sense) over the time that it is validFor example, if an
+
in the Server group that are co-resident with one or more entities in
entity identifier is authenticated as having the privileges of a given
+
the group (or individual entity) identified by the CoresidentEntity
user account, it continues to have those privileges as long as it is
+
field of the RequestThis is commonly used to send to the manager
continuously valid (unless some explicit notice is provided otherwise).
+
entity for a particular entity, where Server specifies the group of such
Thus, a file server need not fully authenticate the entity on every file
+
managers.  Co-resident means "using the same VMTP module", and logically
access request.  With T-stable identifiers, periodically checking the
+
on the same network host. In particular, a Probe request can be sent to
validity of an entity identifier with period less than T seconds detects
+
the particular VMTP management module for an entity by specifying the
a change in entity identifier validity.
+
VMTP management group as the Server and the entity in question as the
 +
CoResidentEntity.
  
A group of entities can form an entity group, which is a set of zero or
+
Cheriton                                                      [page 21]
more entities identified by a single entity identifier.  For example,
 
one can have a single entity identifier that identifies the group of
 
name servers.  An entity identifier representing an entity group is
 
drawn from the same name space as entity identifiers.  However, single
 
entity identifiers are flagged as such by a bit in the entity
 
identifier, indicating that the identifier is known to identify at most
 
one entity.  In addition to the group bit, each entity identifier
 
includes other standard type flags.  One flag indicates whether the
 
identifier is an alias for an entity in another domain (See Section 2.2
 
below.).  Another flag indicates, for an entity group identifier,
 
whether the identifier is a restricted group or not.  A restricted group
 
is one in which an entity can be added only by another entity with group
 
management authorization.  With an unrestricted group, an entity is
 
allowed to add itself.  If an entity identifier does not represent a
 
  
 +
As an experimental aspect of the protocol, VMTP supports the Server
 +
sending a group Response which is sent to the Client as well as members
 +
of the destination group of Servers to which the original Request was
 +
sent.  The MDG bit indicates whether the Client is a member of this
 +
group, allowing the Server module to determine whether separately
 +
addressed packet groups are required to send the Response to both the
 +
Client and the Server group.  Normally, a Server accepts a group
 +
Response only if it has received the Request and not yet responded to
 +
the Client.  Also, the Server must explicitly indicate it wants to
 +
accept group Responses.  Logically, this facility is analogous to
 +
responding to a mail message sent to a distribution list by sending a
 +
copy of the Response to the distribution list.
  
Cheriton                                                        [page 8]
+
=== Real-time Communication ===
 
 
  
 +
VMTP provides three forms of support for real-time communication, in
 +
addition to its standard facilities, which make it applicable to a wide
 +
range of real-time applications.  First, a priority is transmitted in
 +
each Request and Response which governs the priority of its handling.
 +
The priority levels are intended to correspond roughly to:
 +
 +
- urgent/emergency.
  
RFC 1045                      VMTP                        February 1988
+
- important
  
 +
- normal
  
group, a type bit indicates whether the entity uses big-endian or
+
- background.
little-endian data representation (corresponding to Motorola 680X0 and
+
 
VAX byte orders, respectively)Further specification of the format of
+
with additional gradations for each levelThe interpretation and
entity identifiers is contained in Section 3.1 and Appendix IV.
+
implementation of these priority levels is otherwise host-specific, e.g.
 +
the assignment to host processing priorities.
  
An entity identifier identifies a Client, a Server or a group of
+
Second, datagram Requests allow the Client to send a datagram to another
Servers <1>.  A Client is always identified by a T-stable identifier.  A
+
entity or entity group using the VMTP naming, transmission and delivery
server or group of servers may be identified by a a T-stable identifier
+
mechanism, but without blocking, retransmissions or acknowledgment.
(group or single entity) or by strictly stable (statically assigned)
+
(The client can still request acknowledgment using the APG bit although
entity group identifier.  The same T-stable identifier can be used to
+
the Server does not expect missing portions of a multi-packet datagram
identify a Client and Server simultaneously as long as both are
+
Request to be retransmitted even if some are not received.)  A datagram
logically associated with the same entityThe state required for
+
Request in non-streamed mode supersedes all previous Requests from the
reliable, secure communication between entities is maintained in client
+
same ClientA datagram Request in stream mode is queued (if necessary)
state records (CSRs), which include the entity identifier of the Client,
+
after previous datagram Requests on the same stream.  (See Section
its principal, its current or next transaction identifier and so on.
+
2.11.)
  
 +
Finally, VMTP provides several control bit flags to modify the handling
 +
of Requests and Responses for real-time requirements.  First, the
  
2.2. Entity Domains
+
Cheriton                                                      [page 22]
  
An entity domain is an administration or an administration mechanism
+
conditional message delivery (CMD) flag causes a Request to be discarded
that guarantees the three required entity identifier properties of
+
if the recipient is not waiting for it when it arrives, similarly for
uniqueness, stability and host address independence for the entities it
+
the Response.  This option allows a client to send a Request that is
administersThat is, entity identifiers are only guaranteed to be
+
contingent on the server being able to process it immediatelyThe
unique and stable within one entity domain. For example, the set of all
+
header checksum only (HCO) flag indicates that the checksum has been
Internet hosts may function as one domain.  Independently, the set of
+
calculated only on the VMTP header and not on the data segment.
hosts local to one autonomous network may function as a separate domain.
+
Applications such as voice and video can avoid the overhead of
Each entity domain is identified by an entity domain identifier, Domain.
+
calculating the checksum on data whose utility is insensitive to typical
Only entities within the same domain may communicate directly via VMTP.
+
bit errors without losing protection on the header information.
However, hosts and entities may participate in multiple entity domains
+
Finally, the No Retransmission (NRT) flag indicates that the recipient
simultaneously, possibly with different entity identifiers.  For
+
of a message should not ask for retransmission if part of the message is
example, a file server may participate in multiple entity domains in
+
missing but rather either use what was received or discard it.
order to provide file service to each domain.  Each entity domain
 
specifies the algorithms for allocation, interpretation and mapping of
 
entity identifiers.
 
  
Domains are necessary because it does not appear feasible to specify one
+
None of these facilities introduce new protocol states.  In fact, the
universal VMTP entity identification administration that covers all
+
total processing overhead in the normal case is a bit flag test for CMD,
entities for all time.  Domains limit the number of entities that need
+
HCO or NRT plus assignment of priority on packet transmission and
to be managed to maintain the uniqueness and stability of the entity
+
reception.  (In fact, CMD and NRT are not tested in the normal case.)
 
+
The additional code complexity is minimal.  We feel that the overhead
_______________
+
for providing these real-time facilities is minimal and that these
 
+
facilities are both important and adequate for a wide class of real-time
<1>  Terms such as Client, Server, Request, Response, etc.  are
+
applications.
capitalized in this document when they refer to their specific meaning
 
in VMTP.
 
  
 +
Several of the normal facilities of VMTP appear useful for real-time
 +
applications.  First, multicast is useful for distributed, replicated
 +
(fault-tolerant) real-time applications, allowing efficient state query
 +
and update for (for example) sensors and control state.  Second, the DGM
 +
or idempotent flag for Responses has some real-time benefits, namely:  a
 +
Request is redone to get the latest values when the Response is lost,
 +
rather than just returning the old values.  The desirability of this
 +
behavior is illustrated by considering a request for the current time of
 +
day.  An idempotent handling of this request gives better accuracy in
 +
returning the current time in the case that a retransmission is
 +
necessary.  Finally, the request-response semantics (in the absence of
 +
streaming) of each new Request from a Client terminating the previous
 +
message transactions from that Client, if any, provides the "most recent
 +
is most important" handling of processing that most real-time
 +
applications require.
  
Cheriton                                                        [page 9]
+
In general, a key design goal of VMTP was provide an efficient
 +
general-purpose transport protocol with the features required for
 +
real-time communication.  Further experience is required to determine
 +
whether this goal has been achieved.
  
 +
Cheriton                                                      [page 23]
  
 +
=== Forwarded Message Transactions ===
  
RFC 1045                      VMTP                        February 1988
+
A Server may invoke another Server to handle a Request.  It is fairly
 +
common for the invocation of the second Server to be the last action
 +
performed by the first Server as part of handling the Request.  For
 +
example, the original Server may function primarily to select a process
 +
to handle the Request.  Also, the Server may simply check the
 +
authorization on the Request.  Describing this situation in the context
 +
of RPC, a nested remote procedure call may be the last action in the
 +
remote procedure and the return parameters are exactly those of the
 +
nested call.  (This situation is analogous to tail recursion.)
  
 +
As an optimization to support this case, VMTP provides a Forward
 +
operation that allows the server to send the nested Request to the other
 +
server and have this other server respond directly to the Client.
  
name space.  Domains can also serve to separate entities of different
+
If the message transaction being forwarded was not multicast, not secure
security levels.  For instance, allocation of a unclassified entity
+
or the two Servers are the same principal and the ForwardCount of the
identifier cannot conflict with secret level entity identifiers because
+
Request is less than the maximum forward count of 15, the Forward
the former is interpreted only in the unclassified domain, which is
+
operation is implemented by the Server sending a Request onto the next
disjoint from the secret domain.
+
Server with the forwarded Request identified by the same Client and
 +
Transaction as the original Request and a ForwardCount one greater than
 +
the Request received from the Client.  In this case, the new Server
 +
responds directly to the Client.  A forwarded Request is illustrated in
 +
the following figure.
  
It is intended that there be a small number of domains. In particular,
+
  +---------+  Request      +----------+
there should be one (or a few) domains per installation "type", rather
+
| Client  +---------------->| Server 1 |
than per installation. For example, the Internet is expected to use one
+
  +---------+                +----------+
domain per security level, resulting in at most 8 different domains.
+
  ^                        |
Cluster-based internetwork architectures, those with a local cluster
+
  |                        | forwarded Request
protocol distinct from the wide-area protocol, may use one domain for
+
  |                        V
local use and one for wide-area use.
+
  |  Response          +----------+
 +
  +----------------------| Server 2 |
 +
                          +----------+
  
Additional details on the specification of specific domains is provided
+
If the message transaction does not meet the above requirements, the
in Appendix IV.
+
Server's VMTP module issues a nested call and simply maps the returned
 +
Response to a Response to original Request without further Server-level
 +
processing.  In this case, the only optimization over a user-level
 +
nested call is one fewer VMTP service operation; the VMTP module handles
 +
the return to the invoking call directly.  The Server may also use this
 +
form of forwarding when the Request is part of a stream of message
 +
transactions.  Otherwise, it must wait until the forwarded message
 +
transaction completes before proceeding with the subsequent message
 +
transactions in the stream.
  
 +
Cheriton                                                      [page 24]
  
2.3. Message Transactions
+
Implementation of the user-level Forward operation is optional,
 +
depending on whether the server modules require this facility. Handling
 +
an incoming forwarded Request is a minor modification of handling a
 +
normal incoming Request.  In particular, it is only necessary to examine
 +
the ForwardCount field when the Transaction of the Request matches that
 +
of the last message transaction received from the Client.  Thus, the
 +
additional complexity in the VMTP module for the required forwarding
 +
support is minimal; the complexity is concentrated in providing a highly
 +
optimized user-level Forward primitive, and that is optional.
  
The message transaction is the unit of interaction between a Client that
+
2.10. VMTP Management
initiates the transaction and one or more Servers. A message
+
 
transaction starts with a request message  generated by a client.  At
+
VMTP management includes operations for creating, deleting, modifying
the service interface, a server becomes involved with a transaction by
+
and querying VMTP entities and entity groupsVMTP management is
receiving and accepting the requestA server terminates its
+
logically implemented by a VMTP management server module that is invoked
involvement with a transaction by sending a response message.  In a
+
using a message transaction addressed to the Server, VMTP_MANAGER_GROUP,
group message transaction, the server entity designated by the client
+
a well-known group entity identifier, in conjunction with Coresident
corresponds to a group of entities.  In this case, each server in the
+
Entity mechanism introduced in Section 2.7A particular Request may
group receives a copy of the requestIn the client's view, the
+
address the local module, the module managing a particular entity, the
transaction is terminated when it receives the response message or, in
+
set of modules managing those entities contained in a specific group or
the case of a group message transaction, when it receives the last
+
all management modules, as appropriate.
response message.  Because it is normally impractical to determine when
 
the last response message has been received.  the current transaction is
 
terminated by VMTP when the next transaction is initiated.
 
  
Within an entity domain, a transaction is uniquely identified by the
+
The VMTP management procedures are specified in Appendix III.
tuple (Client, Transaction, ForwardCount).  where Transaction is a
 
32-bit number and ForwardCount is a 4-bit value.  A Client uses
 
monotonically increasing Transaction identifiers for new message
 
transactions.  Normally, the next higher transaction number, modulo
 
2**32, is used for the next message transaction, although there are
 
cases in which it skips a small range of Transaction identifiers.  (See
 
the description of the STI control flag.)  The ForwardCount is used when
 
a message transaction is forwarded and is zero otherwise.
 
  
A Client generates a stream of message transactions with increasing
+
2.11. Streamed Message Transactions
transaction identifiers, directed at a diversity of Servers. We say a
 
  
 +
Streamed message transactions refer to two or more message transactions
 +
initiated by a Client before it receives the response to the first
 +
message transaction, with each transaction being processed and responded
 +
to in order but asynchronous relative to the initiation of the
 +
transactions.  A Client streams messages transactions, and thereby has
 +
multiple message transactions outstanding, by sending them as part of a
 +
single run of message transactions.  A run  of message transactions is a
 +
sequence of message transactions with the same Client and Server and
 +
consecutive Transaction identifiers, with all but the first and last
 +
Requests and Responses flagged with the NSR (Not Start Run)  and NER
 +
(Not End Run)  control bits.  (Conversely, the first Request and
 +
Response does not have the NSR set and the last Request and Response
 +
does not have the NER bit set.)  The message transactions in a run use
  
Cheriton                                                      [page 10]
+
Cheriton                                                      [page 25]
  
 +
consecutive transaction identifiers (except if the STI bit <4> is used
 +
in one, in which case the transaction identifier for the next message
 +
transaction is 256 greater, rather than 1).
  
 +
The Client retains a record for each outstanding transaction until it
 +
gets a Response or is timed out in error.  The record provides the
 +
information required to retransmit the Request.  On retransmission
 +
timeout, the client retransmits the last Request for which it has not
 +
received a Response the same as is done with non-streamed communication.
 +
(I.e. there need be only one timeout for all the outstanding message
 +
transactions associated with a single client.)
  
RFC 1045                      VMTP                        February 1988
+
The consecutive transaction identifiers within a run of message
 +
transactions are used as sequence numbers for error control.  The Server
 +
handles each message transaction in the sequence specified by its
 +
transaction identifier.  When it receives a message transaction that is
 +
not marked as the beginning of a run, it checks that it previously
 +
received a message transaction with the predecessor transaction
 +
identifier, either 1 less than the current one or 256 less if the
 +
previous one had the STI bit set.  If not, the Server sends a
 +
NotifyVmtpClient operation to the Client's manager indicating either:
 +
(1) the first message transaction was not fully received, or else (2) it
 +
has no record of the last one received.  If the NRT control flag is set,
 +
it does not await nor expect retransmission but proceeds with handling
 +
this Request.  This flag is used primarily when datagram Requests are
 +
used as part of a stream of message transactions.  If NRT was not
 +
specified, the Client must retransmit from the first message transaction
 +
not fully received (either at all or in part) before the Server can
 +
proceed with handling this run of Requests or else restart the run of
 +
message transactions.
  
 +
The Client expects to receive the Responses in a consecutive sequence,
 +
using the Transaction identifier to detect missing Responses.  Thus, the
 +
Server must return Responses in sequence except possibly for some gaps,
 +
as follows.  The Server can specify in the PGcount field in a Response,
 +
the number of consecutively previous Responses that this Response
  
Client has a transaction outstanding if it has invoked a message
+
_______________
transaction, but has not received the last Response (or possibly any
 
Response).  Normally, a Client has only one transaction outstanding at a
 
time.  However, VMTP allows a Client to have multiple message
 
transactions outstanding simultaneously, supporting streamed,
 
asynchronous remote procedure call invocations.  In addition, VMTP
 
supports nested calls where, for example, procedure A calls procedure B
 
which calls procedure C, each on a separate host with different client
 
entity identifiers for each call but identified with the same process
 
and principal.
 
  
 +
<4>  The STI bit is used by the Client to effectively allocate 255
 +
transaction identifiers for use by the Server in returning a large
 +
Response or stream of Responses.
  
2.4. Request and Response Messages
+
Cheriton                                                      [page 26]
 
 
A message transaction consists of a request message and one or more
 
Response messages.  A message is structured as message control block
 
(MCB) and segment data, passed as parameters, as suggested below.
 
  
  +-----------------------+
+
corresponds to, up to a maximum of 255 previous Responses <5>.  Thus,
  | Message Control Block |
+
for example, a Response with Transaction identifier 46 and PGcount 3
  +-----------------------+
+
represents Responses 43, 44, 45 and 46.  This facility allows the Server
  +-----------------------------------+
+
to eliminate sending Responses to Requests that require no Response,
  |      segment data                |
+
effectively batching the Responses into one.  It also allows the Server
  +-----------------------------------+
+
to effectively maintain strictly consecutive sequencing when the Client
 +
has skipped 256 Transaction identifiers using the STI bit and the Server
 +
does not have that many Responses to return.
  
In the request message, the MCB specifies control information about the
+
If the Client receives a Response that is not consecutive, it
request plus an optional data segment.  The MCB has the following
+
retransmits the Request(s) for which the Response(s) is/are missing
format:
+
(unless, of course, the corresponding Requests were sent as datagrams).
  0                  1                  2                  3
+
The Client should wait at the end of a run of message transactions for
  0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1
+
the last one to complete.
+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
 
+                        ServerEntityId  (8 octets)           +
 
+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
 
|  Flags      |        RequestCode                          |
 
+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
 
+                        CoresidentEntity (8 octets)           +
 
+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
 
>                        User Data (12 octets)                 <
 
+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
 
|                        MsgDelivery                          |
 
+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
 
|                        SegmentSize                          |
 
+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
 
  
The ServerEntityId is the entity to which the Request MCB is to be sent
+
When a Server receives a Request with the NSR bit clear and a higher
(or was sent, in the case of reception)The Flags indicate various
+
transaction identifier than it currently has for the Client, it
options in the request and response handling as well as whether the
+
terminates all processing and discards Responses associated with the
 +
previous RequestsThus, a stream of message transactions is
 +
effectively aborted by starting a new run, even if the Server was in the
 +
middle of handling the previous run.
  
 +
Using a mixture of datagram and normal Requests as part of a stream of
 +
message transactions, particularly with the use of the NRT bit, can lead
 +
to complex behavior under packet loss.  It is recommended that a run of
 +
message transactions be all of one type to avoid problems, i.e. all
 +
normal or all datagrams.  Finally, when a Server forwards a Request that
 +
is part of a run, it must suspend further processing of the subsequent
 +
Requests until the forwarded Request has been handled, to preserve order
 +
of processing.  The simplest handling of this situation is to use a real
 +
nested call when forwarding with streamed message transactions.
  
Cheriton                                                      [page 11]
+
Flow control of streamed message transactions relies on rate control at
 +
the Client plus receipt (or non-receipt) of management notify operations
 +
indicating the presence of overrunning.  A Client must reduce the number
 +
of outstanding message transactions at the Server when it receives a
 +
NotifyVmtpServer operation with the MSGTRANS_OVERFLOW ResponseCode.  The
 +
transact parameter indicates the last packet group that was accepted.
  
 +
_______________
  
RFC 1045                      VMTP                        February 1988
+
<5>  PGcount actually corresponds to packet groups which are described
 +
in Section 2.13.  This (simplified) description is accurate when there
 +
is one Request or Response per packet group.
  
 +
Cheriton                                                      [page 27]
  
CoresidentEntity, MsgDelivery and SegmentSize fields are in use.  The
+
The implementation of multiple outstanding message transactions requires
RequestCode field specifies the type of Request.  It is analogous to a
+
the ability to record, timeout and buffer multiple outstanding message
packet type field of the Ethernet, acting as a switch for higher-level
+
transactions at the Client end as well as the Server endHowever, this
protocolsThe CoresidentEntity field, if used, designates a subgroup
+
facility is optional for both the Client and the ServerClient systems
of the ServerEntityId group to which the Request should be routed,
+
with heavy-weight processes and high network access cost are most likely
namely those members that are co-resident with the specified entity (or
+
to benefit from this facilityServers that serve a wide variety of
entity group)The primary intended use is to specify the manager for a
+
client machines should implement streaming to accommodate these types of
particular service that is co-resident with a particular entity, using
+
clients.
the well-known entity group identifier for the service manager in the
 
ServerEntityId field and the identifier for the entity in the
 
CoresidentEntity fieldThe next 12 octets are user- or
 
application-specified.
 
  
The MsgDelivery field is optionally used by the RPC or user level to
+
2.12. Fault-Tolerant Applications
specify the portions of the segment data to transmit and on reception,
 
the portions received. It provides the client and server with
 
(optional) access to, and responsibility for, a simple selective
 
transmission and reception facility. For example, a client may request
 
retransmission of just those portions of the segment that it failed to
 
receive as part of the original Response.  The primary intended use is
 
to support highly efficient multi-packet reading from a file server.
 
Exploiting user-level selective retransmission using the MsgDelivery
 
field, the file server VMTP module need not save multi-packet Responses
 
for retransmission.  Retransmissions, when needed, are instead handled
 
directly from the file server buffers.
 
  
The SegmentSize field indicates the size of the data segment, if
+
One approach to fault-tolerant systems is to maintain a log of all
presentThe CoresidentEntity, MsgDelivery and SegmentSize fields are
+
messages sent at each node and replay the messages at a node when the
usable as additional user data if they are not otherwise used.
+
node fails, after restarting it from the last checkpoint <6>As an
 +
experimental facility, VMTP provides a Receive Sequence Number field in
 +
the NotifyVmtpClient and NotifyVmtpServer operations as well as the Next
 +
Receive Sequence (NRS) flag in the Response packet to allow a sender to
 +
log a receive sequence number with each message sent, allowing the
 +
packets to be replayed at a recovering node in the same sequence as they
 +
were originally received, thereby recovering to the same state as
 +
before.
  
The Flags field provides a simple mechanism for the user level to
+
Basically, each sending node maintains a receive sequence number for
communicate its use of VMTP options with the VMTP module as well as for
+
each receiving node.  On sending a Request to a node, it presume that
VMTP modules to communicate this use among themselves.  The use of these
+
the receive sequence number is one greater than the one it has recorded
options is generally fixed for each remote procedure so that an RPC
+
for that node.  If not, the receiving node sends a notify operation
mechanism using VMTP can treat the Flags as an integral part of the
+
indicating the receive sequence number assigned the Request.  The NRS in
RequestCode field for the purpose of demultiplexing to the correct stub.
+
the Response confirms that the Request message was the next receive
 +
sequence number, so the sender can detect if it failed to receive the
 +
notify operation in the previous case.  With Responses, the packets are
 +
ordered by the Transaction identifier except for multicast message
 +
transactions, in which there may be multiple Responses with the same
 +
identification.  In this case, NotifyVmtpServer operations are used to
 +
provide receive sequence numbers.
  
A Response message control block follows the same format except the
+
This experimental extension of the protocol is focused on support for
Response is sent from the Server to the Client and there is no
+
fault-tolerant real-time distributed systems required in various
Coresident Entity field (and thus 20 octets of user data).
+
critical applications.  It may be removed or extended, depending on
 +
further investigations.
  
 +
_______________
  
2.5. Reliability
+
<6>  The sender-based logging is being investigated by Willy Zwaenepoel
 +
of Rice University.
  
VMTP provides reliable, sequenced transfer of request and response
+
Cheriton                                                      [page 28]
messages as well as several variants, such as unreliable datagram
 
requests.  The reliability mechanisms include: transaction identifiers,
 
  
 +
2.13. Packet Groups
  
Cheriton                                                      [page 12]
+
A message (whether Request or Response) is sent as one or more packet
 +
groups.  A packet group is one or more packets, each containing the same
 +
transaction identification and message control block.  Each packet is
 +
formatted as below with the message control block logically embedded in
 +
the VMTP header.
  
 +
+------------------------------------++---------------------+
 +
|            VMTP Header            ||                    |
 +
+------------+-----------------------||  segment data      |
 +
|VMTP Control| Message Control Block ||                    |
 +
+------------+-----------------------++---------------------+
  
 +
The some fields of the VMTP control portion of the packet and data
 +
segment portion can differ between packets within the same packet group.
  
RFC 1045                      VMTP                       February 1988
+
The segment data portion of a packet group represents up to 16
 
+
kilooctets of the segment specified in the message control block.  The
 
+
portion contained in each packet is indicated by the PacketDelivery
checksums, positive acknowledgment of messages and timeout and
+
field contained in the VMTP header.  The PacketDelivery field as a bit
retransmission of lost packets.
+
mask has a similar interpretation to the MsgDelivery field in that each
 +
bit corresponds to a segment data block of 512 octets.  The
 +
PacketDelivery field limits a packet group to 16 kilooctets and a
 +
maximum of 32 VMTP packets (with a minimum of 1 packet).  Data can be
 +
sent in fewer packets by sending multiple data blocks per packet.  We
 +
require that the underlying datagram service support delivery of (at
 +
minimum) the basic 580 octet VMTP packet <7>.  To illustrate the use of
 +
the PacketDelivery field, consider for example the Ethernet which has a
 +
MTU of 1536 octets.  so one would send 2 512-octet segment data blocks
 +
per packet.  (In fact, if a third block is last in the segment and less
 +
than 512 octets and fits in the packet without making it too big, an
 +
Ethernet packet could contain three data blocks.  Thus, an Ethernet
 +
packet group for a segment of size 0x1D00 octets (14.5 blocks) and
 +
MsgDelivery 0x000074FF consists of 6 packets indicated as follows <8>.
  
 +
_______________
  
2.5.1. Transaction Identifiers
+
<7>  Note that with a 20 octet IP header, a VMTP packet is 600
 +
octets. We propose the convention that any host implementing VMTP
 +
implicitly agrees to accept IP/VMTP packets of at least 600 octets.
  
Each message transaction is uniquely identified by the pair (Client,
+
<8> We use the C notation 0xHHHH to represent a hexadecimal number.
Transaction). (We defer discussion of the ForwardCount field to Section
 
2.9.)  The 32-bit transaction identifier is initialized to a random
 
value when the Client entity is created or allocated its entity
 
identifier.  The transaction identifier is incremented at the end of
 
each message transaction.  All Responses with the same specified
 
(Client, Transaction) pair are associated with this Request.
 
  
The transaction identifier is used for duplicate suppression at the
+
Cheriton                                                      [page 29]
Server.  A Server maintains a state record for each Client for which it
 
is processing a Request, identified by (Client, Transaction).  A Request
 
with the same (Client, Transaction) pair is discarded as a duplicate.
 
(The ForwardCount field must also be equal.)  Normally, this record is
 
retained for some period after the Response is sent, allowing the Server
 
to filter out subsequent duplicates of this Request.  When a Request
 
arrives and the Server does not have a state record for the sending
 
Client, the Server takes one of three actions:
 
  
  1. The Server may send a Probe request, a simple query
+
Packet
      operation, to the VMTP management module associated with the
+
Delivery  1 1  1 1  1 1  1 1  0 0  1 0  1 0  1 0  0 0 0 0 0 . . .
      requesting Client to determine the Client's current
+
        0000 0400 0800 0C00 1000 1400 1800 1C00
      Transaction identifier (and other information), initialize a
+
      +----+----+----+----+----+----+----+-+
      new state record from this information, and then process the
+
Segment  |....|....|....|....|....|....|....|.|
      Request as above.
+
      +----+----+----+----+----+----+----+-+
 +
      :    :    :    :    :    :  : /  /  :
 +
      v    v    v    v    v    v  v  /|  v
 +
      +----+----+----+----+    +----+  +---+
 +
Packets  |  1 |  2 |  3 |  4 |    |  5 |  | 6 |
 +
      +----+----+----+----+    +----+  +---+
  
  2. The Server may reason that the Request must be a new request
+
Each '.' is 256 octets of data.  The PacketDelivery masks for the 6
      because it does not have a state record for this Client if it
+
packets are: 0x00000003, 0x0000000C, 0x00000030, 0x000000C0, 0x00001400
      keeps these state records for the maximum packet lifetime of
+
and 0x00006000, indicating the segment blocks contained in each of the
      packets in the network (plus the maximum VMTP retransmission
+
packets. (Note that the delivery bits are in little endian order.)
      time) and it has not been rebooted within this time period.
 
      That is, if the Request is not new either the Request would
 
      have exceeded the maximum packet lifetime or else the Server
 
      would have a state record for the Client.
 
 
 
  3. The Server may know that the Request is idempotent or can be
 
      safely redone so it need not care whether the Request is a
 
      duplicate or not.  For example, a request for the current
 
      time can be responded to with the current time without being
 
      concerned whether the Request is a duplicate.  The Response
 
      is discarded at the Client if it is no longer of interest.
 
  
 +
A packet group is sent as a single "blast" of packets with no explicit
 +
flow control.  However, the sender should estimate and transmit at a
 +
rate of packet transmission to avoid congesting the network or
 +
overwhelming the receiver, as described in Section 2.5.6.  Packets in a
 +
packet group can be sent in any order with no change in semantics.
  
 +
When the first packet of a packet group is received (assuming the Server
 +
does not decide to discard the packet group), the Server saves a copy of
 +
the VMTP packet header, indicates it is currently receiving a packet
 +
group, initializes a "current delivery mask" (indicating the data in the
 +
segment received so far) to 0, accepts this packet (updating the current
 +
delivery mask) and sets the timer for the packet group.  Subsequent
 +
packets in the packet group update the current delivery mask.
  
Cheriton                                                      [page 13]
+
Reception of a packet group is terminated when either the current
 +
delivery mask indicates that all the packets in the packet group have
 +
been received or the packet group reception timer expires (set to TC3 or
 +
TS1).  If the packet group reception timer expires, if the NRT bit is
 +
set in the Control flags then the packet group is discarded if not
 +
complete unless MDM is set.  In this case, the MsgDelivery field in the
 +
message control block is set to indicate the segment data blocks
 +
actually received and the message control block and segment data
 +
received is delivered to application level.
  
 +
If NRT is not set and not all data blocks have been received, a
 +
NotifyVmtpClient (if a Request) or NotifyVmtpServer (if a Response) is
 +
sent back with a PacketDelivery field indicating the blocks received.
 +
The source of the packet group is then expected to retransmit the
 +
missing blocks.  If not all blocks of a Request are received after
 +
RequestAckRetries(Client) retransmissions, the Request is discarded and
  
 +
Cheriton                                                      [page 30]
  
RFC 1045                      VMTP                       February 1988
+
a NotifyVmtpClient operation with an error response code is sent to the
 +
client's manager unless MDM is set.  With a Response, there are
 +
ResponseAckRetries(Server) retransmissions and then, if MDM is not set,
 +
the requesting entity is returned the message control block with an
 +
indication of the amount of segment data received extending contiguously
 +
from the start of the segment.  E.g. if the sender sent 6 512-octet
 +
blocks and only the first two and the last two arrived, the receiver
 +
would be told that 1024 octets were received.  The ResponseCode field is
 +
set to BAD_REPLY_SEGMENT.  (Note that VMTP is only able to indicate the
 +
specific segment blocks received if MDM is set.)
  
 +
The parameters RequestAckRetries(Client) and ResponseAckRetries(Server)
 +
could be set on a per-client and per-server basis in a sophisticated
 +
implementation based on knowledge of packet loss.
 +
 +
If the APG flag is set, a NotifyVmtpClient or NotifyVmtpServer
 +
operation is sent back at the end of the packet group reception,
 +
depending on whether it is a Request or a Response.
  
2.5.2. Checksum
+
At minimum, a Server should check that each packet in the packet group
 +
contains the same Client, Server, Transaction identifier and SegmentSize
 +
fields. It is a protocol error for any field other than the Checksum,
 +
packet group control flags, Length and PacketDelivery in the VMTP header
 +
to differ between any two packets in one packet group. A packet group
 +
containing a protocol error of this nature should be discarded.
  
Each VMTP packet contains a checksum to allow the receiver to detect
+
Notify operations should be sent (or invoked) in the manager whenever
corrupted packets independent of lower level checksThe checksum field
+
there is a problem with a unicast packet.  i.e. negative acknowledgments
is 32 bits, providing greater protection than the standard 16-bit IP
+
are always sent in this case.  In the case of problems with multicast
checksum (in combination with an improved checksum algorithm)The
+
packets, the default is to send nothing in response to an error
large packets, high packet rates and general network characteristics
+
condition unless there is some clear reason why no other node can
expected in the future warrant a stronger checksum mechanism.
+
respond positively.  For example, the packet might be a Probe for an
 +
entity that is known to have been recently existing on the receiving
 +
host but now invalid and could not have migratedIn this case, the
 +
receiving host responds to the Probe indicating the entity is
 +
nonexistent, knowing that no other host can respond to the ProbeFor
 +
packets and packet groups that are received and processed without
 +
problems, a Notify operation is invoked only if the APG bit is set.
  
The checksum normally covers both the VMTP header and the segment data.
+
2.14. Runs of Packet Groups
Optionally (for real-time applications), the checksum may apply only to
 
the packet header, as indicated by the HCO control bit being set in the
 
header. The checksum field is placed at the end of the packet to allow
 
it to be calculated as part of a software copy or as part of a hardware
 
transmission or reception packet processing pipeline, as expected in the
 
next generation of network interfaces.  Note that the number of header
 
and data octets is an integral multiple of 8 because VMTP requires that
 
the segment data be padded to be a multiple of 64 bits.  The checksum
 
field is appended after the padding, if any.  The actual algorithm is
 
described in Section 3.2.
 
  
A zero checksum field indicates that no checksum was transmitted with
+
A run of packet groups is a sequence of packet groups, all Request
the packet.  VMTP may be used without a checksum only when there is a
+
packets or all Response packets, with the same Client and consecutive
host-to-host error detection mechanism and the VMTP security facility is
+
transaction identifiers, all but the first and last packets flagged with
not being used.  For example, one could rely on the Ethernet CRC if
+
the NSR (Not Start Run) and NER (Not End Run) control bits.  When each
communication is restricted to hosts on the same Ethernet and the
+
packet group in the run corresponds to a single Request or Response, it
network interfaces are considered sufficiently reliable.
 
  
 +
Cheriton                                                      [page 31]
  
2.5.3. Request and Response Acknowledgment
+
is identical to a run of message transactions. (See Section 2.11)
 +
However, a Request message or a Response message may consists of up to
 +
256 packet groups within a run, for a maximum of 4 megaoctets of segment
 +
data. A message that is continued in the next packet group in the run
 +
is flagged in the current packet group by the CMG flag. Otherwise, the
 +
next packet group in the run (if any) is treated as a separate Request
 +
or Response.
  
VMTP assumes an unreliable datagram network and internetwork interface.
+
Normally, each Request and Response message is sent as a single packet
To guarantee delivery of Requests and Response, VMTP uses positive
+
group and each run consists of a single packet group.  In this case
acknowledgments, retransmissions and timeouts.
+
neither NSR or NER are set. For multi-packet group messages, the
 +
PacketDelivery mask in the i-th packet group of a message corresponds to
 +
the portion of the segment offset by i-1 times 16 kilooctets,
 +
designating the the first packet group to have i = 1.
  
A Request is normally acknowledged by receipt of a Response associated
+
2.15. Byte Order
with the Request, i.e. with the same (Client, Transaction).  With
 
streamed message transactions, it may also be acknowledged by a
 
subsequent Response that acknowledges previous Requests in addition to
 
the transaction it explicitly identifies.  A Response may be explicitly
 
acknowledged by a NotifyVmtpServer operation requested of the manager
 
for the Server.  In the case of streaming, this is a cumulative
 
acknowledgment, acknowledging all Responses with a lower transaction
 
identifier as well.)  In addition, with non-streamed communication, a
 
subsequent Request from the same Client acknowledges Responses to all
 
previous message transactions (at least in the sense that either the
 
client received a Response or is no longer interested in Responses to
 
  
 +
For purposes of transmission and reception, the MCB is treated as
 +
consisting of 8 32-bit fields and the segment is a sequence of bytes.
 +
VMTP transmits the MCB in big-endian order, performing byte-swapping, if
 +
necessary, before transmission.  A little-endian host must byte-swap the
 +
MCB on reception.  (The data segment is transmitted as a sequence of
 +
bytes with no reordering.)  The byte order of the sender of a message is
 +
indicated by the LEE  bit in the entity identifier for the sender, the
 +
Client field if a Request and the Server field if a Response.  The
 +
sender and receiver of a message are required to agree in some higher
 +
level protocol (such as an RPC presentation protocol) on who does
 +
further swapping of the MCB and data segment if required by the types of
 +
the data actually being transmitted.  For example, the segment data may
 +
contain a record with 8-bit, 16-bit and 32-bit fields, so additional
 +
transformation is required to move the segment from a host of one byte
 +
order to another.
  
Cheriton                                                      [page 14]
+
VMTP to date has used a higher-level presentation protocol in which
 
+
segment data is sent in the native order of the sending host and
 +
byte-swapped as necessary by the receiving host.  This approach
 +
minimizes the byte-swapping overhead between machines of common byte
 +
order (including when the communication is transparently local to one
 +
host), avoids a strong bias in the protocol to one byte-order, and
 +
allows for the sending entity to be sending to a group of hosts with
 +
different byte orders.  (Note that the byte-swap overhead for the MCB is
 +
minimal.)  The presentation-level overhead is minimal because most
 +
common operations, such as file access operations, have parameters that
 +
fit the MCB and data segment data types exactly.
  
 +
Cheriton                                                      [page 32]
  
RFC 1045                      VMTP                       February 1988
+
2.16. Minimal VMTP Implementation
  
 +
A minimal VMTP client needs to be able to send a Request packet group
 +
and receive a Response packet group as well as accept and respond to
 +
Requests sent to its management module, including Probe and NotifyClient
 +
operations.  It may also require the ability to invoke Probe and Notify
 +
operations to locate a Server and acknowledge responses.  (the latter
 +
only if it is involved in transactions that are not idempotent or
 +
datagram message transactions.  However, a simple sensor, for example,
 +
can transmit VMTP datagram Requests indicating its current state with
 +
even less mechanism.)  The minimal client thus requires very little code
 +
and is suitable as a basis for (e.g.) a network boot loader.
  
those earlier message transactions).  Finally, a client response timeout
+
A minimal VMTP server implements idempotent, non-encrypted message
(at the server) acknowledges a Response at least in the sense that the
+
transactions, possibly with no segment data support.  It should use an
server need not be prepared to retransmit the Response subsequently.
+
entity state record for each Request but need only retain it while
Note that there is no end-to-end guarantee of the Response being
+
processing the Request.  Without segment data larger than a packet,
received by the client at the application level.
+
there is no need for any timers, buffering (outside of immediate request
 +
processing) or queuingIn particular, it needs only as many records as
 +
message transactions it handles simultaneously (e.g. 1). The entity
 +
state record is required to recognize and respond to Request
 +
retransmissions during request processing.
  
 +
The minimal server need only receive Requests and and be able to send
 +
Response packets.  It need have only a minimal management module
 +
supporting Probe operations.  (Support for the NotifyVmtpClient
 +
operation is only required if it does not respond immediately to a
 +
Request.)  Thus the VMTP support for say a time server, sensor, or
 +
actuator can be extremely simple.  Note that the server need never issue
 +
a Probe operation if it uses the host address of the Request for the
 +
Response and does not require the Client information returned by the
 +
Probe operation.  The minimal server should also support reception of
 +
forwarded Requests.
  
2.5.4. Retransmissions
+
2.17. Message vs. Procedural Request Handling
  
In general, a Request or Response is retransmitted periodically until
+
A request-response protocol can be used to implement two forms of
acknowledged as above, up to some maximum number of retransmissions.
+
semantics on reception.  With procedural handling of a Request, a
VMTP uses parameters RequestRetries(Server) and ResponseRetries(Client)
+
Request is handled by a process associated with the Server that
that indicate the number of retransmissions for the server and client
+
effectively takes on the identity of the calling process, treating the
respectively before giving upWe suggest the value 5 be used for both
+
Request message as invoking a procedure, and relinquishing its
parameters based on our experience with VMTP and Internet packet loss.
+
association to the calling process on return. VMTP supports multiple
Smaller values (such as 3) could be used in low loss environments in
+
nested calls spanning multiple machinesIn this case, the distributed
which fast detection of failed hosts or communication channels is
+
call stack that results is associated with a single process from the
requiredLarger values should be used in high loss environments where
+
standpoint of authentication and resource management, using the
transport-level persistence is important.
+
ProcessId field supported by VMTPThe entity identifiers effectively
 +
 
 +
Cheriton                                                      [page 33]
  
In a low loss environment, a retransmission only includes the MCB and
+
link these call frames together.  That is, the Client field in a Request
not the segment data of the Request or Response, resulting in a single
+
is effectively the return link to the previous call frame.
(short) packet on retransmission.  The intended recipient of the
 
retransmission can request selective retransmission of all or part of
 
the segment data as necessary.  The selective retransmission mechanism
 
is described in Section 2.13.
 
  
If a Response is specified as idempotent, the Response is neither
+
With message handling of a Request, a Request message is queued for a
retransmitted nor stored for retransmissionInstead, the Client must
+
server processThe server process dequeues, reads, processes and
retransmit the Request to effectively get the Response retransmitted.
+
responds to the Request message, executing as a separate process.
The server VMTP module responds to retransmissions of the Request by
+
Subsequent Requests to the same server are queued until the server asks
passing the Request on to the server again to have it regenerate the
+
to receive the next Request.
Response (by redoing the operation), rather than saving a copy of the
 
Response.  Only Request packets for the last transaction from this
 
client are passed on in this fashion; older Request packets from this
 
client are discarded as delayed duplicates.  If a Response is not
 
idempotent, the VMTP module must ensure it has a copy of the Response
 
for retransmission either by making a copy of the Response (either
 
physically or copy-on-write) or by preventing the Server from continuing
 
until the Response is acknowledged.
 
  
 +
Procedural semantics have the advantage of allowing each Request (up to
 +
the resource limits of the Server) to execute concurrently at the
 +
Server, with Request-specific synchronization.  Message semantics have
 +
the advantage that Requests are serialized at the Server and that the
 +
request processing logically executes with the priority, protection and
 +
independent execution of a separate process.  Note that procedural and
 +
message handling of a request appear no differently to the client
 +
invoking the message transaction, except possibly for differences in
 +
performance.
  
2.5.5. Timeouts
+
We view the two Request handling approaches as appropriate under
 +
different circumstances. VMTP supports both models.
  
There is one client timer for each Client with an outstanding
+
2.18. Bibliography
transaction. Similarly, there is one server timer for each Client
 
transaction that is "active" at the server, i.e. there is a transaction
 
  
 +
The basic protocol is similar to that used in the original form of the V
 +
kernel [3, 4] as well as the transport protocol of Birrell and
 +
Nelson's [2] remote procedure call mechanism.  An earlier version of the
 +
protocol was described in SIGCOMM'86 [6].  The rate-based flow control
 +
is similar to the techniques of Netblt [9].  The support for idempotency
 +
draws, in part, on the favorable experience with idempotency in the V
 +
distributed system.  Its use was originally inspired by the Woodstock
 +
File Server [11].  The multicast support draws on the multicast
 +
facilities in V [5] and is designed to work with, and is now implemented
 +
using, the multicast extensions to the Internet [8] described in RFC 966
 +
and 988.  The secure version of the protocol is similar to that
 +
described by Birrell [1] for secure RPC.  The use of runs of packet
 +
groups is similar to Fletcher and Watson's delta-T protocol [10].  The
 +
use of "management" operations implemented using VMTP in place of
 +
specialized packet types is viewed as part of a general strategy of
 +
using recursion to simplify protocol architectures [7].
  
Cheriton                                                      [page 15]
+
Finally, this protocol was designed, in part, to respond to the
 
+
requirements identified by Braden in RFC 955.  We believe that VMTP
 +
satisfies the requirements stated in RFC 955.
  
 +
Cheriton                                                      [page 34]
  
RFC 1045                      VMTP                        February 1988
+
[1]  A.D. Birrell, "Secure Communication using Remote Procedure
 +
  Calls", ACM. Trans. on Computer Systems 3(1), February, 1985.
  
 +
[2]  A. Birrell and B. Nelson, "Implementing Remote Procedure Calls",
 +
  ACM Trans. on Computer Systems 2(1), February, 1984.
  
record for a Request from the Client.
+
[3]  D.R. Cheriton and W. Zwaenepoel, "The Distributed V Kernel and its
 +
  Performance for Diskless Workstations", In Proceedings of the 9th
 +
  Symposium on Operating System Principles,  ACM, 1983.
  
When the client transmits a new Request (without streaming), the client
+
[4]  D.R. Cheriton, "The V Kernel: A Software Base for Distributed
timer  is set to roughly the time expected for the Response to be
+
  Systems", IEEE Software 1(2), April, 1984.
returned.  On timeout, the Request is retransmitted with the APG
 
(Acknowledge Packet Group) bit set.  The timeout is reset to the
 
expected roundtrip time to the Server because an acknowledgment should
 
be returned immediately unless a Response has been sent.  The Request
 
may also be retransmitted in response to receipt of a VMTP management
 
operation indicating that selected portions of the Request message
 
segment need to be retransmitted.  With streaming, the timeout applies
 
to the oldest outstanding message transaction in the run of outstanding
 
message transactions.  Without streaming, there is one message
 
transaction in the run, reducing to the previous situation.  After the
 
first packet of a Response is received, the Client resets the timeout to
 
be the time expected before the next packet in the Response packet group
 
is received, assuming it is a multi-packet Response.  If not, the timer
 
is stopped.  Finally, the client timer is used to timeout waiting for
 
second and subsequent Responses to a multicast Request.
 
  
The client timer is set at different times to four different values:
+
[5]  D.R. Cheriton and W. Zwaenepoel, "Distributed Process Groups in
 +
  the V Kernel", ACM Trans. on Computer Systems 3(2), May, 1985.
  
TC1(Server)    The expected time required to receive a Response from
+
[6]  D.R. Cheriton, "VMTP: A Transport Protocol for the Next
                the Server.  Set on initial Request transmission plus
+
  Generation of Communication Systems", In Proceedings of
                after its management module receives a NotifyVmtpClient
+
  SIGCOMM'86, ACM, Aug 5-7, 1986.
                operation, acknowledging the Request.
 
  
TC2(Server)    The estimated round trip delay between the client and
+
[7]  D.R. Cheriton, "Exploiting Recursion to Simplify an RPC
                the server. Set when retransmitting after receiving no
+
  Communication Architecture", in preparation, 1988.
                Response for TC1(Server) time and retransmitting the
 
                Request with the APG bit set.
 
  
TC3(Server)    The estimated maximum expected interpacket time for
+
[8]  D.R. Cheriton and S.E. Deering, "Host Groups: A Multicast
                multi-packet Responses from the Server. Set when
+
  Extension for Datagram Internetworks", In 9th Data Communication
                waiting for subsequent Response packets within a packet
+
  Symposium, IEEE Computer Society and ACM SIGCOMM, September, 1985.
                group before timing out.
 
  
TC4            The time to wait for additional Responses to a group
+
[9]  D.D. Clark and M. Lambert and L. Zhang, "NETBLT: A Bulk Data
                Request after the first Response is received.  This is
+
  Transfer Protocol", Technical Report RFC 969, Defense Advanced
                specified by the user level.
+
  Research Projects Agency, 1985.
  
These values are selected as follows. TC1 can be set to TC2 plus a
+
[10]  J.G. Fletcher and R.W. Watson, "Mechanism for a Reliable Timer-
constant, reflecting the time within which most servers respond to most
+
  based Protocol", Computer Networks 2:271-290, 1978.
requests.  For example, various measurements of VMTP usage at Stanford
 
indicate that 90 percent of the servers respond in less than 200
 
milliseconds. Setting TC1 to TC2 + 200 means that most Requests receive
 
a Response before timing out and also that overhead for retransmission
 
  
 +
Cheriton                                                      [page 35]
  
Cheriton                                                      [page 16]
+
[11] D. Swinehart and G. McDaniel and D. Boggs, "WFS: A Simple File
 +
  System for a Distributed Environment", In Proc. 7th Symp.
 +
  Operating Systems Principles, 1979.
  
 +
Cheriton                                                      [page 36]
  
 +
== VMTP Packet Formats ==
  
RFC 1045                      VMTP                       February 1988
+
VMTP uses 2 basic packet formats corresponding to Request packets and
 +
Response packets.  These packet formats are identical in most of the
 +
fields to simplify the implementation.
  
 +
We first describe the entity identifier format and the packet fields
 +
that are used in general, followed by a detailed description of each of
 +
the packet formats.  These fields are described below in detail.  The
 +
individual packet formats are described in the following subsections.
 +
The reader and VMTP implementor may wish to refer to Chapters 4 and 5
 +
for a description of VMTP event handling and only refer to this detailed
 +
description as needed.
  
for long running transactions is insignificant.  A sophisticated
+
=== Entity Identifier Format ===
implementation may make the estimation of TC1 further specific to the
 
Server.
 
  
TC2 may be estimated by measuring the time from when a Probe request is
+
The 64-bit non-group entity identifiers have the following substructure.
sent to the Server to when a response is received.  TC2 can also be
 
measured as the time between the transmission of a Request with the APG
 
bit set to receipt of a management operation acknowledging receipt of
 
the Request.
 
  
When the Server is an entity group, TC1 and TC2 should be the largest of
+
  0                  1                  2                  3
the values for the members of the group that are expected to respond.
+
  0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1
This information may be determined by probing the group on first use
+
+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
(and using the values for the last responses to arrive). Alternatively,
+
  |R| |L|R|
one can resort to default values.
+
|A|0|E|E|      Domain-specific structure
 +
|E| |E|S|
 +
+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
 +
            Domain-specific structure                        |
 +
+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
  
TC3 is set initially to 10 times the transmission time for the maximum
+
The field meanings are as follows:
transmission unit (MTU) to be used for the Response.  A sophisticated
 
implementation may record TC3 per Server and refine the estimate based
 
on measurements of actual interpacket gaps.  However, a tighter estimate
 
of TC3 only improves the reaction time when a packet is lost in a packet
 
group, at some cost in unnecessary retransmissions when the estimate
 
becomes overly tight.
 
  
The server timer, one per active Client, takes on the following values:
+
RAE            Remote Alias Entity - the entity identifier identifies
 +
            an entity that is acting as an alias for some entity
 +
            outside this entity domain.  This bit is used by
 +
            higher-level protocols.  For instance, servers may take
 +
            extra security and protection measures with aliases.
  
TS1(Client)    The estimated maximum expected interpacket time.  Set
+
GRP            Group - 0, for non-group entity identifiers.
                when waiting for subsequent Request packets within a
 
                packet group before timing out.
 
  
TS2(Client)     The time to wait to hear from a client before
+
LEE            Little-Endian Entity - the entity transmits data in
                terminating the server processing of a Request.  This
+
            little-endian (VAX) order.
                limits the time spent processing orphan calls, as well
 
                as limiting how out of date the server's record of the
 
                Client state can be.  In particular, TS2 should be
 
                significantly less than the minimum time within which it
 
                is reasonable to reuse a transaction identifier.
 
  
TS3(Client)    Estimated roundtrip time to the Client,
+
RES              Reserved - must be 0.
  
TS4(Client)    The time to wait after sending a Response (or last
+
The 64-bit entity group identifiers have the following substructure.
                hearing from a client) before discarding the state
 
                associated with the Request which allows it to filter
 
                duplicate Request packets and regenerate the Response.
 
  
TS5(Client)    The time to wait for an acknowledgment after sending a
+
Cheriton                                                      [page 37]
                Response before retransmitting the Response, or giving
 
  
 +
  0                  1                  2                  3
 +
  0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1
 +
+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
 +
|R| |U|R|
 +
|A|1|G|E|      Domain-specific structure
 +
|E| |P|S|
 +
+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
 +
            Domain-specific structure                        |
 +
+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
  
Cheriton                                                      [page 17]
+
The field meanings are as follows:
  
 +
RAE            Remote Alias Entity - same as for non-group entity
 +
            identifier.
  
 +
GRP            Group - 1, for entity group identifiers.
  
RFC 1045                      VMTP                        February 1988
+
UGP            Unrestricted Group - no restrictions are placed on
 +
            joining this group.  I.e. any entity can join limited
 +
            only by implementation resources.
  
 +
RES              Reserved - must be 0.
  
                up (after some number of retransmissions).
+
The all-zero entity identifier is reserved and guaranteed to be
 
+
unallocated in all domains.  In addition, a domain may reserve part of
TS1 is set the same as TC3.
+
the entity identifier space for statically allocated identifiers.
 +
However, this is domain-specific.
 +
 
 +
Description of currently defined entity identifier domains is provided
 +
in Appendix IV.
 +
 
 +
=== Packet Fields ===
 +
 
 +
Client          64-bit identifier for the client entity associated with
 +
            this packet.  The structure, allocation and binding of
 +
            this identifier is specific to the specified Domain.  An
 +
            entity identifier always includes 4 types bits as
 +
            specified in Section 3.1.
  
The suggested value for TS2 is TC1 + 3*TC2 for this server, giving the
+
Version        The 3-bit identifier specifying the version of the
Client time to timeout waiting for a Response and retransmit 3 Request
+
            protocol.  Current version is version 0.
packets, asking for acknowledgments.
 
  
TS3 is estimated the same as TC1 except that refinements to the estimate
+
Domain          The 13-bit identifier specifying the naming and
use measurements of the Response-to-acknowledgment times.
+
            administration domain for the client and server named in
 +
            the packet.
  
In the general case, TS4 is set large enough so that a Client issuing a
+
Cheriton                                                      [page 38]
series of closely-spaced Requests to the same Server reuses the same
 
state record at the Server end and thus does not incur the overhead of
 
recreating this state.  (The Server can recreate the state for a Client
 
by performing a Probe on the Client to get the needed information.)  It
 
should also be set low enough so that the transaction identifier cannot
 
wrap around and so that the Server does not run out of CSR's.  We
 
suggest a value in the range of 500 milliseconds.  However, if the
 
Server accepts non-idempotent Requests from this Client without doing a
 
Probe on the Client, the TS4 value for this CSR is set to at least 4
 
times the maximum packet lifetime.
 
  
TS5 is TS3 plus the expected time for transmission and reception of the
+
Packet Flags: 3 bits. (The normal case has none of the flags set.)
Response. We suggest that the latter be calculated as 3 times the
 
transmission time for the Response data, allowing time for reception,
 
processing and transmission of an acknowledgment at the Client end.  A
 
sophisticated implementation may refine this estimate further over time
 
by timing acknowledgments to Responses.
 
  
 +
  HCO          Header checksum only - checksum has only been calculated
 +
            on the header.  This is used in some real-time
 +
            applications where the strict correctness of the data is
 +
            not needed.
  
2.5.6. Rate Control
+
  EPG          Encrypted packet group - part of a secure message
 +
            transaction.
  
VMTP is designed to deal with the present and future problem of packet
+
  MPG          Multicast packet group - packet was multicast on
overruns. We expect overruns to be the major cause of dropped packets
+
            transmission.
in the futureA client is expected to estimate and adjust the
+
 
interpacket gap times so as to not overrun a server or intermediate
+
Length          A 13-bit field that specifies the number of 32-bit words
nodes.  The selective retransmission mechanism allows the server to
+
            in the segment data portion of the packet (if any),
indicate that it is being overrun (or some intermediate point is being
+
            excluding the checksum field(Every VMTP packet is
overrun).  For example, if the server requests retransmission of every
+
            required to be a multiple of 64 bits, possibly by
Kth block, the client should assume overrun is taking place and increase
+
            padding out the segment data.) The minimum legal Length
the interpacket gap times.  The client passes the server an indication
+
            is 0, the maximum length is 4096 and it must be an even
of the interpacket gap desired for a response.  The client may have to
+
            number.
increase the interval because packets are being dropped by an
 
intermediate gateway or bridge, even though it can handle a higher rate.
 
A conservative policy is to increase the interpacket gap whenever a
 
packet is lost as part of a multi-packet packet group.
 
  
 +
Control Flags: 9 bits. (The normal case has none of the flags set.)
  
Cheriton                                                      [page 18]
+
  NRS          Next Receive Sequence - the associated Request message
 +
            (in a Response) or previous Response (if a Request) was
 +
            received consecutive with the last Request from this
 +
            entity.  That is, there was no interfering messages
 +
            received.
  
 +
  APG          Acknowledge Packet Group - Acknowledge packet group on
 +
            receipt.  If a Request, send back a Request to the
 +
            client's manager providing an update on the state of the
 +
            transaction as soon as the request packet group is
 +
            received, independent of the response being available.
 +
            If a Response, send an update to the server's manager as
 +
            soon as possible after response packet group is received
 +
            providing an update on the state of the transaction at
 +
            the client
  
 +
  NSR          Not Start Run - 1 if this packet is not part of the
 +
            first packet group of a run of packet groups.
  
RFC 1045                      VMTP                        February 1988
+
  NER          Not End Run - 1 if this packet is not part of the last
 +
            packet group of a run of packet groups.
  
 +
  NRT          No Retransmission - do not ask for retransmissions of
 +
            this packet group if not all received within timeout
  
The provision of selective retransmission allows the rate of the client
+
Cheriton                                                      [page 39]
and the server to "push up" against the maximum rate (and thus lose
 
packets) without significant penalty.  That is, every time that packet
 
transmission exceeds the rate of the channel or receiver, the recovery
 
cost to retransmit the dropped packets is generally far less than
 
retransmitting from the first dropped packet.
 
  
The interpacket gap is expressed in 1/32nd's of the MTU packet
+
            period, just deliver or discard.
transmission time.  The minimum interpacket gap is 0 and the maximum gap
 
that can be described in the protocol is 8 packet times.  This places a
 
limit on the slowest receivers that can be efficiently used on a
 
network, at least those handling multi-packet Requests and Responses.
 
This scheme also limits the granularity of adjustment.  However, the
 
granularity is relative to the speed of the network, as opposed to an
 
absolute time.  For entities on different networks of significantly
 
different speed, we assume the interconnecting gateways can buffer
 
packets to compensate<2>. With different network speeds and intermediary
 
nodes subject to packet loss, a node must adjust the interpacket gap
 
based on packet loss.  The interpacket gap parameter may be of limited
 
use.
 
  
 +
  MDG          Member of Destination Group - this packet is sent to a
 +
            group and the client is a member of this group.
  
2.6. Security
+
  CMG          Continued Message - the message (Request or Response) is
 +
            continued in the next packet group. The next packet
 +
            group has to be part of the same run of packet groups.
  
VMTP provides an (optional) secure mode that protects against the usual
+
  STI          Skip Transaction Identifiers - the next transaction
security threats of peeking, impostoring, message tampering and replays.
+
            identifier that the Client plans to use is the current
Secure VMTP must be used to guarantee any of the transport-level
+
            transaction plus 256, if part of the same run and at
reliability properties unless it is guaranteed that there are no
+
            least this big if not.  In a Request, this authorizes
intruders or agents that can modify packets and update the packet
+
            the Server to send back up to 256 packet groups
checksumsThat is, non-secure VMTP provides no guarantees in the
+
            containing the Response.
presence of an intelligent intruder.
+
 
 +
  DRT          Delay Response Transmission - set by request sender if
 +
            multiple responses are expected (as indicated by the MRD
 +
            flag in the RequestCode) and it may be overrun by
 +
            multiple responses. The responder(s) should then
 +
            introduce a short random delay in sending the Response
 +
            to minimize the danger of overrunning the Client.  This
 +
            is normally only used for responding to multicast
 +
            Requests where the Client may be receiving a large
 +
            number of Responses, as indicated by the MRD flag in the
 +
            Request flags.  Otherwise, the Response is sent
 +
            immediately.
 +
 
 +
RetransmitCount:
 +
            3 bits - the ordinal number of transmissions of this
 +
            packet group prior to this one, modulo 8.  This field is
 +
            used in estimation of roundtrip times.  This count may
 +
            wrap around during a message transaction.  However, it
 +
            should be sufficient to match acknowledgments and
 +
            responses with a particular transmission.
 +
 
 +
ForwardCount:  4 bits indicating the number of times this Request has
 +
            been forwarded.  The original Request is always sent
 +
            with a ForwardCount of 0.
 +
 
 +
Interpacket Gap: 8 bits. 
 +
            Indicates the recommended time to use between subsequent
 +
            packet transmissions within a multi-packet packet group
 +
            transmissionThe Interpacket Gap time is in 1/32nd of
 +
            a network packet transmission time for a packet of size
 +
            MTU for the node.  (Thus, the maximum gap time is 8
 +
            packet times.)
  
The design closely follows that described by Birrell [1].  Authenticated
+
Cheriton                                                      [page 40]
information about a remote entity, including an encryption/decryption
 
key, is obtained and maintained using a VMTP management operation, the
 
authenticated Probe operation, which is executed as a non-secure VMTP
 
message transaction.  If a server receives a secure Request for which
 
the server has no entity state, it sends a Probe request to the VMTP
 
  
_______________
+
PGcount: 8 bits
 +
            The number of packet groups that this packet group
 +
            represents in addition to that specified by the
 +
            Transaction field.  This is used in acknowledging
 +
            multiple packet groups in streamed communication.
  
<2>  Gateways must also employ techniques to preserve or intelligently
+
Priority        4-bit identifier for priority for the processing of this
modify (if appropriate) the interpacket gapsIn particular, they must
+
            request both on transmission and receptionThe
be sure not to arbitrarily remove interpacket gaps as a result of their
+
            interpretation is:
forwarding of packets.
 
  
 +
            1100            urgent/emergency
  
Cheriton                                                      [page 19]
+
            1000            important
  
 +
            0000            normal
  
 +
            0100            background
  
RFC 1045                      VMTP                        February 1988
+
            Viewing the higher-order bit as a sign bit (with 1
 +
            meaning negative), low values are high priority and high
 +
            values are low priority.  The low-order 2 bits indicate
 +
            additional (lower) gradations for each level.
  
 +
Function Code: 1 bit - types of VMTP packets.  If the low-order bit of
 +
            the function code is 0, the packet is sent to the
 +
            Server, else it is sent to the Client.
  
management module of the client, "challenging" it to provide an
+
            0              Request
authenticator that both authenticates the client as being associated
 
with a particular principal as well as providing a key for
 
encryption/decryption.  The principal can include a real and effective
 
principal, as used in UNIX <3>.  Namely, the real principal is the
 
principal on whose behalf the Request is being performed whereas the
 
effective principal is the principal of the module invoking the request
 
or remote procedure call.
 
  
Peeking is prevented by encrypting every Request and Response packet
+
            1              Response
with a working Key that is shared between Client and Server.
+
 
Impostoring and replays are detected by comparing the Transaction
+
Transaction: 32 bits:  
identifier with that stored in the corresponding entity state record
+
            Identifier for this message transaction.
(which is created and updated by VMTP as needed). Message tampering is
 
detected by encryption of the packet including the Checksum field.  An
 
intruder cannot update the checksum after modifying the packet without
 
knowing the Key.  The cost of fully encrypting a packet is close to the
 
cost of generating a cryptographic checksum (and of course, encryption
 
is needed in the general case), so there is no explicit provision for
 
cryptographic checksum without packet encryption.
 
  
A Client determines the Principal of the Server and acquires an
+
PacketDelivery: 32 bits: 
authenticator for this Server and Principal using a higher level
+
            Delivery indicates the segment blocks contained in this
protocolThe Server cannot decrypt the authenticator or the Request
+
            packet.  Each bit corresponds to one 512-octet block of
packets unless it is in fact the Principal expected by the Client.
+
            segment dataA 1 bit in the i-th bit position
 +
            (counting the LSB as 0) indicates the presence of the
 +
            i-th segment block.
  
An encrypted VMTP packet is flagged by the EPG bit  in the VMTP packet
+
Server: 64 bits
headerThus, encrypted packets are easily detected and demultiplexed
+
            Entity identifier for the server or server group
from unencrypted packets.  An encrypted VMTP packet is entirely
+
            associated with this transactionThis is the receiver
encrypted except for the Client, Version, Domain, Length and Packet
+
            when a Request packet and the sender when a Response
Flags fields at the beginning of the packet.  Client identifiers can be
+
            packet.
assigned, changed and used to have no real meaning to an intruder or to
 
only communicate public information (such as the host Internet address).
 
They are otherwise just a random means of identification and
 
demultiplexing and do not therefore divulge any sensitive information.
 
Further secure measures must be taken at the network or data link levels
 
if this information or traffic behavior is considered sensitive.
 
  
VMTP provides multiple authentication domains  as well as an encryption
+
Cheriton                                                      [page 41]
qualifier to accommodate different encryption algorithms and their
 
  
_______________
+
Code: 32 bits  The Request Code and Response Code, set either at the
 +
            user level or VMTP level depending on use and packet
 +
            type.  Both the Request and Response codes include 8
 +
            high-order bits from the following set of control bits:
  
<3>   Principal group membership must be obtained, if needed, by a
+
   CMD          Conditional Message Delivery -  only deliver the request
higher level protocol.
+
            or response if the receiving entity is waiting for it at
 +
            the time of delivery, otherwise drop the message.
  
 +
  DGM          DataGram Message - indicates that the message is being
 +
            sent as a datagram.  If a Request message, do not wait
 +
            for reply, or retransmit.  If a Response message, treat
 +
            this message transaction as idempotent.
  
Cheriton                                                      [page 20]
+
  MDM          Message Delivery Mask - indicates that the MsgDelivery
 +
            field is being used.  Otherwise, the MsgDelivery field
 +
            is available for general use.
  
 +
  SDA          Segment Data Appended - segment data is appended to the
 +
            message control block, with the total size of the
 +
            segment specified by the SegmentSize field.  Otherwise,
 +
            the segment data is null and the SegmentSize field is
 +
            not used by VMTP and available for user- or RPC-level
 +
            uses.
  
 +
  CRE          CoResident Entity - indicates that the CoResidentEntity
 +
            field in the message should be interpreted by VMTP.
 +
            Otherwise, this field is available for additional user
 +
            data.
  
RFC 1045                      VMTP                       February 1988
+
  MRD          Multiple Responses Desired - multiple Responses are
 +
            desired to to this Request if it is multicast.
 +
            Otherwise, the VMTP module can discard subsequent
 +
            Responses after the first Response.
  
 +
  PIC          Public Interface Code - Values for Code with this bit
 +
            set are reserved for definition by the VMTP
 +
            specification and other standard protocols defined on
 +
            top of VMTP.
  
corresponding security/performance trade-offs. (See Appendix V.)  A
+
  RES          Reserved for future use. Must be 0.
separate key distribution and authentication protocol is required to
 
handle generation and distribution of authenticators and keys.  This
 
protocol can be implemented on top of VMTP and can closely follow the
 
Birrell design as well.
 
  
Security is optional in the sense that messages may be secure or
+
CoResidentEntity
non-secure, even between consecutive message transactions from the same
+
            64-bit Identifier for an entity or group of entities
client. It is also optional in that VMTP clients and servers are not
+
            with which the Server entity or entities must be
required to implement secure VMTP (although they are required to respond
+
            co-resident, i.e. route only to entities (identified by
intelligently to attempts to use secure VMTP).  At worst, a Client may
+
            Server) on the same host(s) as that specified by
fail to communicate with a Server if the Server insists on secure
 
communication and the Client does not implement security or vice versa.
 
However, a failure to communicate in this case is necessary from a
 
security standpoint.
 
  
 +
Cheriton                                                      [page 42]
  
2.7. Multicast
+
            CoResidentEntity, Only meaningful if CRE is set in the
 +
            Code field.
  
The Server entity identifier in a message transaction can identify an
+
User Data      12 octets Space in the header for the VMTP user to
entity group, in which case the Request is multicast to every Entity in
+
            specify user-specific control and data.
this group (on a best-efforts basis).  The Request is retransmitted
 
until at least one Response is received (or an error timeout occurs)
 
unless it is a datagram Request.  The Client can receive multiple
 
Responses to the Request.
 
  
The VMTP service interface does not directly provide reliable multicast
+
MsgDelivery: 32 bits
because it is expensive to provide, rarely needed by applications, and
+
            The segment blocks being transmitted (in total) in this
can be implemented by applications using the multiple Response feature.
+
            packet group following the conventions for the
However, the protocol itself is adequate for reliable multicast using
+
            PacketDelivery field.  This field is ignored by the
positive acknowledgments.  In particular, a sophisticated Client
+
            protocol and treated as an additional user data field if
implementation could maintain a list of members for each entity group of
+
            MDM is 0.  On transmission, the user level sets the
interest and retransmit the Request until acknowledged by all members.
+
            MsgDelivery to indicate those portions of the segment to
No modifications are required to the Server implementations.
+
            be transmitted.  On receipt, the MsgDelivery field is
 +
            modified by the VMTP module to indicate the segment data
 +
            blocks that were actually received before the message
 +
            control block is passed to the user or RPC level.  In
 +
            particular, the kernel does not discard the packet group
 +
            if segment data blocks are missing.  A Server or Client
 +
            entity receiving a message with a MsgDelivery in use
 +
            must check the field to ensure adequate delivery and
 +
            retry the operation if necessary.
  
VMTP supports a simple form of subgroup addressing.  If the CRE  bit is
+
SegmentSize: 32 bits
set in a Request, the Request is delivered to the subgroup of entities
+
            Size of segment in octets, up to a maximum of 16
in the Server group that are co-resident with one or more entities in
+
            kilooctets without streaming and 4 megaoctets with
the group (or individual entity) identified by the CoresidentEntity
+
            streaming, if SDA is setOtherwise, this field is
field of the Request.  This is commonly used to send to the manager
+
            ignored by the protocol and treated as an additional
entity for a particular entity, where Server specifies the group of such
+
            user data field.
managersCo-resident means "using the same VMTP module", and logically
 
on the same network host.  In particular, a Probe request can be sent to
 
the particular VMTP management module for an entity by specifying the
 
VMTP management group as the Server and the entity in question as the
 
CoResidentEntity.
 
  
 +
Segment Data: 0-16 kilooctets
 +
            0 octets if SDA is 0, else the portion of the segment
 +
            corresponding to the Delivery Mask, limited by the
 +
            SegmentSize and the MTU, padded out to a multiple of 64
 +
            bits.
  
 +
Checksum: 32 bits. 
 +
            The 32-bit checksum for the header and segment data.
  
Cheriton                                                      [page 21]
+
The VMTP checksum algorithm <9> develops a 32-bit checksum by computing
  
 +
_______________
  
 +
<9>  This algorithm and description are largely due to Steve Deering of
 +
Stanford University.
  
RFC 1045                      VMTP                        February 1988
+
Cheriton                                                      [page 43]
  
 +
two 16-bit, ones-complement sums (like IP), each covering different
 +
parts of the packet.  The packet is divided into clusters of 16 16-bit
 +
words.  The first, third, fifth,... clusters are added to the first sum,
 +
and the second, fourth, sixth,... clusters are added to the second sum.
 +
Addition stops at the end of the packet; there is no need to pad out to
 +
a cluster boundary (although it is necessary that the packet be an
 +
integral multiple of 64 bits; padding octets may have any value and are
 +
included in the checksum and in the transmitted packet).  If either of
 +
the resulting sums is zero, it is changed to 0xFFFF.  The two sums are
 +
appended to the transmitted packet, with the first sum being transmitted
 +
first.  Four bytes of zero in place of the checksum may be used to
 +
indicate that no checksum was computed.
  
As an experimental aspect of the protocol, VMTP supports the Server
+
The 16-bit, ones-complement addition in this algorithm is the same as
sending a group Response which is sent to the Client as well as members
+
used in IP and, therefore, subject to the same optimizationsIn
of the destination group of Servers to which the original Request was
+
particular, the words may be added up 32-bits at a time as long as the
sentThe MDG bit indicates whether the Client is a member of this
+
carry-out of each addition is added to the sum on the following
group, allowing the Server module to determine whether separately
+
addition, using an "add-with-carry" type of instruction(64-bit or
addressed packet groups are required to send the Response to both the
+
128-bit additions would also work on machines that have registers that
Client and the Server group.  Normally, a Server accepts a group
+
big.)
Response only if it has received the Request and not yet responded to
 
the Client.  Also, the Server must explicitly indicate it wants to
 
accept group ResponsesLogically, this facility is analogous to
 
responding to a mail message sent to a distribution list by sending a
 
copy of the Response to the distribution list.
 
  
 +
A particular weakness of this algorithm (shared by IP) is that it does
 +
not detect the erroneous swapping of 16-bit words, which may easily
 +
occur due to software errors.  A future version of VMTP is expected to
 +
include a more secure algorithm, but such an algorithm appears to
 +
require hardware support for efficient execution.
  
2.8. Real-time Communication
+
Not all of these fields are used in every packet. The specific packet
 +
formats are described below.  If a field is not mentioned in the
 +
description of a packet type, its use is assumed to be clear from the
 +
above description.
  
VMTP provides three forms of support for real-time communication, in
+
Cheriton                                                      [page 44]
addition to its standard facilities, which make it applicable to a wide
 
range of real-time applications.  First, a priority is transmitted in
 
each Request and Response which governs the priority of its handling.
 
The priority levels are intended to correspond roughly to:
 
  
  - urgent/emergency.
+
=== Request Packet ===
  
  - important
+
The Request packet (or packet group) is sent from the client to the
 +
server or group of servers to solicit processing plus the return of zero
 +
or more responses.  A Request packet is identified by a 0 in the LSB of
 +
the fourth 32-bit word in the packet.
  
  - normal
+
  0                  1                  2                  3
 
+
  0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1
   - background.
+
+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
 
+
+                      Client (8 octets)                      +
with additional gradations for each level. The interpretation and
+
+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
implementation of these priority levels is otherwise host-specific, e.g.
+
|Ver  |                        |H|E|M|                        |
the assignment to host processing priorities.
+
|sion |          Domain        |C|P|P|      Length            |
 
+
|    |                        |O|G|G|                        |
Second, datagram Requests allow the Client to send a datagram to another
+
+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
entity or entity group using the VMTP naming, transmission and delivery
+
|N|A|N|N|N|M|C|S|D|Retra|Forward|   Inter-     |      |R|R|R| |
mechanism, but without blocking, retransmissions or acknowledgment.
+
|R|P|S|E|R|D|M|T|R|nsmit| Count |    Packet    | Prior |E|E|E|0|
(The client can still request acknowledgment using the APG bit although
+
  |S|G|R|R|T|G|G|I|T|Count|      |    Gap      | -ity  |S|S|S| |
the Server does not expect missing portions of a multi-packet datagram
+
+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
Request to be retransmitted even if some are not received.) A datagram
+
|                      Transaction                              |
Request in non-streamed mode supersedes all previous Requests from the
+
+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
same Client. A datagram Request in stream mode is queued (if necessary)
+
|                    PacketDelivery                            |
after previous datagram Requests on the same stream. (See Section
+
+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
2.11.)
+
+                    Server (8 octets)                          +
 +
+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
 +
|C|D|M|S|R|C|M|P|                                              |
 +
|M|G|D|D|E|R|R|I|        RequestCode                            |
 +
  |D|M|M|A|S|E|D|C|                                              |
 +
+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
 +
  +                CoResidentEntity (8 octets)                   +
 +
+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
 +
  >                  User Data (12 octets)                      <
 +
+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
 +
|                      MsgDelivery                              |
 +
+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
 +
|                      SegmentSize                            |
 +
+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
 +
>                  segment data, if any                        <
 +
+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
 +
|                        Checksum                              |
 +
+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
 +
 
 +
              Figure 3-1:  Request Packet Format
 +
 
 +
The fields of the Request packet are set according to the semantics
 +
described in Section 3.2 with the following qualifications.
  
Finally, VMTP provides several control bit flags to modify the handling
+
Cheriton                                                      [page 45]
of Requests and Responses for real-time requirements.  First, the
 
  
 +
InterPacketGap  The estimated interpacket gap time the client would like
 +
            for the Response packet group to be sent by the Server
 +
            in responding to this Request.
  
Cheriton                                                      [page 22]
+
Transaction    Identifier for transaction, at least one greater than
 +
            the previously issued Request from this Client.
  
 +
Server          Server to which this Request is destined.
  
 +
RequestCode    Request code for this request, indicating the operation
 +
            to perform.
  
RFC 1045                      VMTP                        February 1988
+
Cheriton                                                      [page 46]
  
 +
=== Response Packet ===
  
conditional message delivery (CMD) flag causes a Request to be discarded
+
The Response packet is sent from the Server to the Client in response to
if the recipient is not waiting for it when it arrives, similarly for
+
a Request, identified by a 1 in the LSB of the fourth 32-bit word in the
the Response.  This option allows a client to send a Request that is
+
packet.
contingent on the server being able to process it immediately.  The
 
header checksum only (HCO) flag indicates that the checksum has been
 
calculated only on the VMTP header and not on the data segment.
 
Applications such as voice and video can avoid the overhead of
 
calculating the checksum on data whose utility is insensitive to typical
 
bit errors without losing protection on the header information.
 
Finally, the No Retransmission (NRT) flag indicates that the recipient
 
of a message should not ask for retransmission if part of the message is
 
missing but rather either use what was received or discard it.
 
  
None of these facilities introduce new protocol states.  In fact, the
+
  0                  1                  2                  3
total processing overhead in the normal case is a bit flag test for CMD,
+
  0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1
HCO or NRT plus assignment of priority on packet transmission and
+
+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
reception. (In fact, CMD and NRT are not tested in the normal case.)
+
  +                      Client (8 octets)                       +
The additional code complexity is minimal. We feel that the overhead
+
  +-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
for providing these real-time facilities is minimal and that these
+
|Ver  |                        |H|E|M|                        |
facilities are both important and adequate for a wide class of real-time
+
|sion |          Domain        |C|P|P|      Length            |
applications.
+
|    |                        |O|G|G|                        |
 
+
+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
Several of the normal facilities of VMTP appear useful for real-time
+
|N|A|N|N|N|R|C|S|R|Retra|Forward|              |      |R|R|R| |
applications. First, multicast is useful for distributed, replicated
+
|R|P|S|E|R|E|M|T|E|nsmit| Count |    PGcount    | Prior |E|E|E|1|
(fault-tolerant) real-time applications, allowing efficient state query
+
|S|G|R|R|T|S|G|I|S|Count|      |              | -ity  |S|S|S| |
and update for (for example) sensors and control state. Second, the DGM
+
+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
or idempotent flag for Responses has some real-time benefits, namely: a
+
|                      Transaction                              |
Request is redone to get the latest values when the Response is lost,
+
+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
rather than just returning the old values. The desirability of this
+
  |                      PacketDelivery                          |
behavior is illustrated by considering a request for the current time of
+
+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
day. An idempotent handling of this request gives better accuracy in
+
+                        Server (8 octets)                     +
returning the current time in the case that a retransmission is
+
+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
necessary. Finally, the request-response semantics (in the absence of
+
  |C|D|M|S|R|R|R|R|                                              |
streaming) of each new Request from a Client terminating the previous
+
  |M|G|D|D|E|E|E|E|        ResponseCode                          |
message transactions from that Client, if any, provides the "most recent
+
|D|M|M|A|S|S|S|S|                                              |
is most important" handling of processing that most real-time
+
  +-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
applications require.
+
>                  UserData (20 octets)                        <
 +
  +-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
 +
|                    MsgDelivery                              |
 +
  +-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
 +
|                    Segment Size                              |
 +
+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
 +
>                  segment data, if any                         <
 +
+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
 +
|                      Checksum                                |
 +
+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
  
In general, a key design goal of VMTP was provide an efficient
+
              Figure 3-2:  Response Packet Format
general-purpose transport protocol with the features required for
 
real-time communication.  Further experience is required to determine
 
whether this goal has been achieved.
 
  
 +
The fields of the Response packet are set according to the semantics
 +
described in Section 3.2 with the following qualifications.
  
 +
Client, Version, Domain, Transaction
 +
            Match those in the Request packet group to which this is
  
 +
Cheriton                                                      [page 47]
  
 +
            a response.
  
 +
STI            1 if this Response is using one or more of the
 +
            transaction identifiers skipped by the Client after the
 +
            Request to which this is a Response.  STI in the Request
 +
            essentially allocates up to 256 transaction identifiers
 +
            for the Server to use in a run of Response packet
 +
            groups.
  
 +
RetransmitCount The retransmit count from the last Request packet
 +
            received to which this is a response.
  
Cheriton                                                      [page 23]
+
ForwardCount    The number of times the corresponding Request was
 +
            forwarded before this Response was generated.
  
 +
PGcount        The number of consecutively previous packet groups that
 +
            this response is acknowledging in addition to the one
 +
            identified by the Transaction identifier.
  
 +
Server          Server sending this response.  This may differ from that
 +
            originally specified in the Request packet if the
 +
            original Server was a server group, or the request was
 +
            forwarded.
  
RFC 1045                      VMTP                        February 1988
+
The next two chapters describes the protocol operation using these
 +
packet formats, with the the Client and the Server portions described
 +
separately.
  
 +
Cheriton                                                      [page 48]
  
2.9. Forwarded Message Transactions
+
== Client Protocol Operation ==
  
A Server may invoke another Server to handle a Request.  It is fairly
+
This chapter describes the operation of the client portion of VMTP in
common for the invocation of the second Server to be the last action
+
terms of the procedures for handling VMTP user events, packet reception
performed by the first Server as part of handling the Request.  For
+
events, management operations and timeout eventsNote that the client
example, the original Server may function primarily to select a process
+
portion of VMTP is separable from the server portionIt is feasible to
to handle the RequestAlso, the Server may simply check the
+
have a node that only implements the client end of VMTP.
authorization on the RequestDescribing this situation in the context
 
of RPC, a nested remote procedure call may be the last action in the
 
remote procedure and the return parameters are exactly those of the
 
nested call.  (This situation is analogous to tail recursion.)
 
  
As an optimization to support this case, VMTP provides a Forward
+
To simplify the description, we define a client state record (CSR) plus
operation that allows the server to send the nested Request to the other
+
some standard utility routines.
server and have this other server respond directly to the Client.
 
  
If the message transaction being forwarded was not multicast, not secure
+
=== Client State Record Fields ===
or the two Servers are the same principal and the ForwardCount of the
 
Request is less than the maximum forward count of 15, the Forward
 
operation is implemented by the Server sending a Request onto the next
 
Server with the forwarded Request identified by the same Client and
 
Transaction as the original Request and a ForwardCount one greater than
 
the Request received from the Client.  In this case, the new Server
 
responds directly to the Client.  A forwarded Request is illustrated in
 
the following figure.
 
  
+---------+  Request      +----------+
+
In the following protocol description, there is one client state record
  | Client  +---------------->| Server 1 |
+
(CSR) per (client,transaction) outstanding message transaction. Here is
+---------+                +----------+
+
a suggested set of fields.
      ^                        |
 
      |                        | forwarded Request
 
      |                        V
 
      |  Response          +----------+
 
      +----------------------| Server 2 |
 
                            +----------+
 
  
If the message transaction does not meet the above requirements, the
+
Link            Link to next CSR when queued in one of the transmission,
Server's VMTP module issues a nested call and simply maps the returned
+
            timeout or message queues.
Response to a Response to original Request without further Server-level
 
processing.  In this case, the only optimization over a user-level
 
nested call is one fewer VMTP service operation; the VMTP module handles
 
the return to the invoking call directly.  The Server may also use this
 
form of forwarding when the Request is part of a stream of message
 
transactions.  Otherwise, it must wait until the forwarded message
 
transaction completes before proceeding with the subsequent message
 
transactions in the stream.
 
  
 +
QueuePtr        Pointer to queue head in which this CSR is contained or
 +
            NULL if none.  Queue could be one of transmission queue,
 +
            timeout queue, server queue or response queue.
  
 +
ProcessIdentification
 +
            The process identification and address space.
  
Cheriton                                                      [page 24]
+
Priority        Priority for processing, network service, etc.
  
 +
State          One of the client states described below.
  
 +
FinishupFunc    Procedure to be executed on the CSR when it is completes
 +
            its processing in transmission or timeout queues.
  
RFC 1045                      VMTP                        February 1988
+
TimeoutCount    Time to remain in timeout queue.
  
 +
TimeoutLimit    User-specified time after which the message transaction
 +
            is aborted. The timeout is infinite if set to zero.
  
Implementation of the user-level Forward operation is optional,
+
RetransCount    Number of retransmissions since last hearing from the
depending on whether the server modules require this facility. Handling
+
            Server.
an incoming forwarded Request is a minor modification of handling a
+
 
normal incoming Request.  In particular, it is only necessary to examine
+
LastTransmitTime
the ForwardCount field when the Transaction of the Request matches that
+
            The time at which the last packet was sentThis field
of the last message transaction received from the ClientThus, the
+
            is used to calculate roundtrip times, using the
additional complexity in the VMTP module for the required forwarding
+
            RetransmitCount to match the responding packet to a
support is minimal; the complexity is concentrated in providing a highly
+
 
optimized user-level Forward primitive, and that is optional.
+
Cheriton                                                      [page 49]
  
 +
            particular transmission.  I.e. Response or management
 +
            NotifyVmtpClient operation to Request and a management
 +
            NotifyVmtpServer operation to a Response.
  
2.10. VMTP Management
+
TimetoLive      Time to live to be used on transmission of IP packets.
  
VMTP management includes operations for creating, deleting, modifying
+
TransmissionMask
and querying VMTP entities and entity groups.  VMTP management is
+
            Bit mask indicating the portions of the segment to
logically implemented by a VMTP management server module that is invoked
+
            transmitSet before entering the transmission queue
using a message transaction addressed to the Server, VMTP_MANAGER_GROUP,
+
            and cleared incrementally as the 512-byte segment blocks
a well-known group entity identifier, in conjunction with Coresident
+
            of the segment are transmitted.
Entity mechanism introduced in Section 2.7A particular Request may
 
address the local module, the module managing a particular entity, the
 
set of modules managing those entities contained in a specific group or
 
all management modules, as appropriate.
 
  
The VMTP management procedures are specified in Appendix III.
+
LocalClientLink Link to next CSR hashing to same hash index in the
 +
            ClientMap.
  
 +
LocalClient    Entity identifier for client when this CSR is used to
 +
            send a Request packet.
  
2.11. Streamed Message Transactions
+
LocalTransaction
 +
            Transaction identifier for current message transaction
 +
            the local client has outstanding.
  
Streamed message transactions refer to two or more message transactions
+
LocalPrincipal Account identification, possibly including key and key
initiated by a Client before it receives the response to the first
+
            timeout.
message transaction, with each transaction being processed and responded
 
to in order but asynchronous relative to the initiation of the
 
transactions. A Client streams messages transactions, and thereby has
 
multiple message transactions outstanding, by sending them as part of a
 
single run of message transactions. A run  of message transactions is a
 
sequence of message transactions with the same Client and Server and
 
consecutive Transaction identifiers, with all but the first and last
 
Requests and Responses flagged with the NSR (Not Start Run)  and NER
 
(Not End Run)  control bits.  (Conversely, the first Request and
 
Response does not have the NSR set and the last Request and Response
 
does not have the NER bit set.)  The message transactions in a run use
 
  
 +
LocalDelivery  Bit mask of segment blocks that have not been
 +
            acknowledged in the Request or have been received in the
 +
            Response, depending on the state.
  
 +
ResponseQueue  Queue of CSR's representing the queued Responses for
 +
            this entity.
  
 +
VMTP Header    Prototype VMTP header, used to generate and store the
 +
            header portion of a Request for transmission and
 +
            retransmission on timeout.
  
 +
SegmentDesc    Description of the segment data associated with the CSR,
 +
            either the area storing the original Request data, the
 +
            area for receiving Request data, or the area storing the
 +
            Response data that is returned.
  
 +
HostAddr        The network or internetwork host address to which the
 +
            Client last transmitted.  This field also indicates the
 +
            type of the address, e.g. IP, Ethernet, etc.
  
 +
Note: the CSR can be combined with a light-weight process descriptor
 +
with considerable benefit if the process is designed to block when it
  
 +
Cheriton                                                      [page 50]
  
Cheriton                                                      [page 25]
+
issues a message transaction.  In particular, by combining the two
 +
descriptors, the implementation saves time because it only needs to
 +
locate and queue one descriptor with various operations (rather than
 +
having to locate two descriptors).  It also saves space, given that the
 +
VMTP header prototype provides space such as the user data field which
 +
may serve to store processor state for when the process is preempted.
 +
Non-preemptive blocking can use the process stack to store the processor
 +
state so only a program counter and stack pointer may be required in the
 +
process descriptor beyond what we have described.  (This is the approach
 +
used in the V kernel.)
  
 +
=== Client Protocol States ===
  
 +
A Client State Record records the state of message transaction generated
 +
by this host, identified by the (Client, Transaction) values in the CSR.
 +
As a client originating a transaction, it is in one of the following
 +
states.
  
RFC 1045                      VMTP                        February 1988
+
AwaitingResponse
 +
            Waiting for a Response packet group to arrive with the
 +
            same (Client,Transaction) identification.
  
 +
ReceivingResponse
 +
            Waiting for additional packets in the Response packet
 +
            group it is currently receiving.
  
consecutive transaction identifiers (except if the STI bit <4> is used
+
"Other"        Not waiting for a response, which can be Processing or
in one, in which case the transaction identifier for the next message
+
            some other operating system state, or one of the Server
transaction is 256 greater, rather than 1).
+
            states if it also acts as a server.
 +
 
 +
This covers all the states for a client.
 +
 
 +
=== State Transition Diagrams ===
  
The Client retains a record for each outstanding transaction until it
+
The client state transitions are illustrated in Figure 4-1.  The client
gets a Response or is timed out in errorThe record provides the
+
goes into the state AwaitingResponse on sending a request unless it is a
information required to retransmit the Request.  On retransmission
+
datagram request.  In the AwaitingResponse state, it can timeout and
timeout, the client retransmits the last Request for which it has not
+
retry and eventually give up and return to the processing state unless
received a Response the same as is done with non-streamed communication.
+
it receives a Response.  (A NotifyVmtpClient operation resets the
(I.e. there need be only one timeout for all the outstanding message
+
timeout but does not change the state.) On receipt of a single packet
transactions associated with a single client.)
+
response, it returns to the processing state. Otherwise, it goes to
 +
ReceivingResponse state. After timeout or final response packet is
 +
received, the client returns to the processing state.  The processing
 +
state also includes any other state besides those associated with
 +
issuing a message transaction.
  
The consecutive transaction identifiers within a run of message
+
Cheriton                                                      [page 51]
transactions are used as sequence numbers for error control.  The Server
 
handles each message transaction in the sequence specified by its
 
transaction identifier.  When it receives a message transaction that is
 
not marked as the beginning of a run, it checks that it previously
 
received a message transaction with the predecessor transaction
 
identifier, either 1 less than the current one or 256 less if the
 
previous one had the STI bit set.  If not, the Server sends a
 
NotifyVmtpClient operation to the Client's manager indicating either:
 
(1) the first message transaction was not fully received, or else (2) it
 
has no record of the last one received.  If the NRT control flag is set,
 
it does not await nor expect retransmission but proceeds with handling
 
this Request.  This flag is used primarily when datagram Requests are
 
used as part of a stream of message transactions.  If NRT was not
 
specified, the Client must retransmit from the first message transaction
 
not fully received (either at all or in part) before the Server can
 
proceed with handling this run of Requests or else restart the run of
 
message transactions.
 
  
The Client expects to receive the Responses in a consecutive sequence,
+
+------------+
using the Transaction identifier to detect missing Responses. Thus, the
+
| Processing |<--------------------|
Server must return Responses in sequence except possibly for some gaps,
+
|            |<-------------|      |
as follows. The Server can specify in the PGcount field in a Response,
+
|            |<---|        |      |
the number of consecutively previous Responses that this Response
+
+|------^--^-+  Single    Last    |
 +
Transmit  |  |    Packet    Response |
 +
|      |  |    Response  Packet  |
 +
|      |  |      |        |      |
 +
+-DGM->+ Timeout |        |  Final timeout
 +
  |        |      |        |      |
 +
+V-----------+    |      +-----------+
 +
|  Awaiting |----+      | Receiving |->Response-+
 +
|  Response  |->Response->| Response |          |
 +
|            |  (multi-  |          |<----------+
 +
+-|--------^-+  packet)  +----------^+
 +
  V        |                |        |
 +
  +-Timeout+                +>Timeout+
  
 +
              Figure 4-1:  Client State Transitions
  
 +
=== User Interface ===
  
 +
The RPC or user interface to VMTP is implementation-dependent and may
 +
use systems calls, functions or some other mechanism.  The list of
 +
requests that follow is intended to suggest the basic functionality that
 +
should be available.
 +
 +
Send( mcb, timeout, segptr, segsize )
 +
            Initiate a message transaction to the server and request
 +
            message specified by mcb and return a response in mcb,
 +
            if it is received within the specified timeout period
 +
            (or else return USER_TIMEOUT in the Code field).  The
 +
            segptr parameter specifies the location from which the
 +
            segment data is sent and the location into which the
 +
            response data is to be delivered.  The segsize field
 +
            indicates the maximum length of this area.
  
_______________
+
GetResponse( responsemcb, timeout, segptr, segsize )
 
+
            Get the next response sent to this client as part of the
<4>  The STI bit is used by the Client to effectively allocate 255
+
            current message transaction, returning the segment data,
transaction identifiers for use by the Server in returning a large
+
            if any, into the memory specified by segptr and segsize.
Response or stream of Responses.
 
  
 +
This interface assumes that there is a client entity associated with the
 +
invoking process that is to be used with these operations.  Otherwise,
 +
the client entity must be specified as an additional parameter.
  
Cheriton                                                      [page 26]
+
Cheriton                                                      [page 52]
  
 +
=== Event Processing ===
  
 +
The following events may occur in the VMTP client:
  
RFC 1045                      VMTP                        February 1988
+
- User Requests
  
 +
    * Send
  
corresponds to, up to a maximum of 255 previous Responses <5>.  Thus,
+
    * GetResponse
for example, a Response with Transaction identifier 46 and PGcount 3
 
represents Responses 43, 44, 45 and 46.  This facility allows the Server
 
to eliminate sending Responses to Requests that require no Response,
 
effectively batching the Responses into one.  It also allows the Server
 
to effectively maintain strictly consecutive sequencing when the Client
 
has skipped 256 Transaction identifiers using the STI bit and the Server
 
does not have that many Responses to return.
 
  
If the Client receives a Response that is not consecutive, it
+
- Packet Arrival
retransmits the Request(s) for which the Response(s) is/are missing
 
(unless, of course, the corresponding Requests were sent as datagrams).
 
The Client should wait at the end of a run of message transactions for
 
the last one to complete.
 
  
When a Server receives a Request with the NSR bit clear and a higher
+
    * Response Packet
transaction identifier than it currently has for the Client, it
 
terminates all processing and discards Responses associated with the
 
previous Requests.  Thus, a stream of message transactions is
 
effectively aborted by starting a new run, even if the Server was in the
 
middle of handling the previous run.
 
  
Using a mixture of datagram and normal Requests as part of a stream of
+
    * Request
message transactions, particularly with the use of the NRT bit, can lead
 
to complex behavior under packet loss.  It is recommended that a run of
 
message transactions be all of one type to avoid problems, i.e. all
 
normal or all datagrams.  Finally, when a Server forwards a Request that
 
is part of a run, it must suspend further processing of the subsequent
 
Requests until the forwarded Request has been handled, to preserve order
 
of processing.  The simplest handling of this situation is to use a real
 
nested call when forwarding with streamed message transactions.
 
  
Flow control of streamed message transactions relies on rate control at
+
  The minimal Client implementation handles Request packets for
the Client plus receipt (or non-receipt) of management notify operations
+
  its VMTP management (server) module and sends NotifyVmtpClient
indicating the presence of overrunning.  A Client must reduce the number
+
  requests in response to others, indicating the specified
of outstanding message transactions at the Server when it receives a
+
  server does not exist.
NotifyVmtpServer operation with the MSGTRANS_OVERFLOW ResponseCode.  The
 
transact parameter indicates the last packet group that was accepted.
 
  
 +
- Management Operation - NotifyVmtpClient
  
_______________
+
- Timeouts
  
<5>  PGcount actually corresponds to packet groups which are described
+
    * Client Retransmission Timeout
in Section 2.13.  This (simplified) description is accurate when there
 
is one Request or Response per packet group.
 
  
 +
The handling of these events is described in detail in the following
 +
subsections.
  
Cheriton                                                      [page 27]
+
We first describe some conventions and procedures used in the
 +
description.  A field of the received packet is indicated as (for
 +
example) p.Transaction, for the Transaction field.  Optional portions of
 +
the code, such as the streaming handling code are prefixed with a "|" in
 +
the first column.
  
 +
MapClient( client )
 +
            Return pointer to CSR for client with the specified
 +
            clientId, else NULL.
  
 +
SendPacketGroup( csr )
 +
            Send the packet group (Request, Response) according to
 +
            that specified by the CSR.
  
RFC 1045                      VMTP                        February 1988
+
NotifyClient( csr, p, code )
 +
            Invoke the NotifyVmtpClient operation with the
 +
            parameters csr.RemoteClient, p.control,
  
 +
Cheriton                                                      [page 53]
  
The implementation of multiple outstanding message transactions requires
+
            csr.ReceiveSeqNumber, csr.RemoteTransaction and
the ability to record, timeout and buffer multiple outstanding message
+
            csr.RemoteDelivery, and code.  If csr is NULL, use
transactions at the Client end as well as the Server endHowever, this
+
            p.Client, p.Transaction and p.PacketDelivery instead and
facility is optional for both the Client and the Server.  Client systems
+
            the global ReceiveSequenceNumber, if supported.  This
with heavy-weight processes and high network access cost are most likely
+
            function simplifies the description over calling
to benefit from this facilityServers that serve a wide variety of
+
            NotifyVmtpClient directly in the procedural
client machines should implement streaming to accommodate these types of
+
            specification below(See Appendix III.)
clients.
+
 
 +
NotifyServer( csr, p, code )
 +
            Invoke the NotifyVmtpServer operation with the
 +
            parameters p.Server, csr.LocalClient,
 +
            csr.LocalTransaction, csr.LocalDelivery and codeUse
 +
            p.Client, P.Transaction and 0 for the clientId, transact
 +
            and delivery parameters if csr is NULL.  This function
 +
            simplifies the description over calling NotifyVmtpServer
 +
            directly in the procedural specification below(See
 +
            Appendix III.)
 +
 
 +
DGMset(p)      True if DGM bit set in packet (or csr) else False.
 +
            (Similar functions are used for other bits.)
  
 +
Timeout( csr, timeperiod, func )
 +
            Set or reset timer on csr record for timeperiod later
 +
            and invoke func if the timeout expires.
  
2.12. Fault-Tolerant Applications
+
=== Client User-invoked Events ===
  
One approach to fault-tolerant systems is to maintain a log of all
+
A user event occurs when a VMTP user application invokes one of the VMTP
messages sent at each node and replay the messages at a node when the
+
interface procedures.
node fails, after restarting it from the last checkpoint <6>.  As an
 
experimental facility, VMTP provides a Receive Sequence Number field in
 
the NotifyVmtpClient and NotifyVmtpServer operations as well as the Next
 
Receive Sequence (NRS) flag in the Response packet to allow a sender to
 
log a receive sequence number with each message sent, allowing the
 
packets to be replayed at a recovering node in the same sequence as they
 
were originally received, thereby recovering to the same state as
 
before.
 
  
Basically, each sending node maintains a receive sequence number for
+
==== Send ====
each receiving node.  On sending a Request to a node, it presume that
 
the receive sequence number is one greater than the one it has recorded
 
for that node.  If not, the receiving node sends a notify operation
 
indicating the receive sequence number assigned the Request.  The NRS in
 
the Response confirms that the Request message was the next receive
 
sequence number, so the sender can detect if it failed to receive the
 
notify operation in the previous case.  With Responses, the packets are
 
ordered by the Transaction identifier except for multicast message
 
transactions, in which there may be multiple Responses with the same
 
identification.  In this case, NotifyVmtpServer operations are used to
 
provide receive sequence numbers.
 
  
This experimental extension of the protocol is focused on support for
+
Send( mcb, timeout, segptr, segsize )
fault-tolerant real-time distributed systems required in various
+
map to main CSR for this client.
critical applicationsIt may be removed or extended, depending on
+
increment csr.LocalTransaction
further investigations.
+
Init csr and check parameters and segment if any.
 +
  Set SDA if sending appended data.
 +
Flush queued replies from previous transaction, if any.
 +
if local non-group server then
 +
    deliver locally
 +
    await response
 +
    return
 +
if GroupId(server) then
 +
    Check for and deliver to local members.
 +
    if CRE request and non-group local CR entity then
  
_______________
+
Cheriton                                                      [page 54]
  
<6> The sender-based logging is being investigated by Willy Zwaenepoel
+
        await response
of Rice University.
+
        return
 +
    endif
 +
    set MDG if member of this group.
 +
endif
 +
clear csr.RetransCount
 +
set csr.TransmissionMask
 +
set csr.TimeLimit to timeout
 +
  set csr.HostAddr for csr.Server
 +
SendPacketGroup( csr )
 +
if DGMset(csr) then
 +
    return
 +
endif
 +
set csr.State to AwaitingResponse
 +
Timeout( rootcsr, TC1(csr.Server), LocalClientTimeout )
 +
return
 +
end Send
  
 +
Notes:
  
Cheriton                                                      [page 28]
+
1. Normally, the HostAddr is extracted from the ServerHost
 +
  cache, which maps server entity identifiers to host
 +
  addresses.  However, on cache miss, the client first queries
 +
  the network using the ProbeEntity operation, as specified in
 +
  Appendix III, determining the host address from the Response.
 +
  The ProbeEntity operation is handled as a separate message
 +
  transaction by the Client.
  
 +
The stream interface incorporates a parameter to pass a responseHandler
 +
procedure that is invoked when the message transaction completes.
  
 +
StreamSend( mcb, timeout, segptr, segsize, responseHandler )
 +
map to main CSR for this client.
 +
|  Allocate a new csr if root in use.
 +
|  lastcsr := First csr for last request.
 +
|  if STIset(lastcsr)
 +
|      csr.LocalTransaction := lastcsr.LocalTransaction + 256
 +
|  else
 +
|      csr.LocalTransaction := lastcsr.LocalTransaction + 1
 +
Init csr and check parameters and segment if any.
 +
. . . ( rest is the same as for the normal Send)
  
RFC 1045                      VMTP                        February 1988
+
Notes:
  
 +
1. Each outstanding message transaction is represented by a CSR
 +
  queued on the root CSR for this client entity.  The root CSR
 +
  is used to handle timeouts, etc.  On timeout, the last packet
  
2.13. Packet Groups
+
Cheriton                                                      [page 55]
  
A message (whether Request or Response) is sent as one or more packet
+
  from the last packet group is retransmitted (with or without
groups.  A packet group is one or more packets, each containing the same
+
  the segment data).
transaction identification and message control block.  Each packet is
 
formatted as below with the message control block logically embedded in
 
the VMTP header.
 
  
+------------------------------------++---------------------+
+
==== GetResponse ====
|            VMTP Header            ||                    |
 
+------------+-----------------------||  segment data      |
 
|VMTP Control| Message Control Block ||                    |
 
+------------+-----------------------++---------------------+
 
  
The some fields of the VMTP control portion of the packet and data
+
GetResponse( req, timeout, segptr, segsize )
segment portion can differ between packets within the same packet group.
+
csr := CurrentCSR;
 +
if responses queued then return next response
 +
  (in req, segptr to max of segsize )
 +
if timeout is zero then return KERNEL_TIMEOUT error
 +
set state to AWAITING_RESPONSE
 +
Timeout( csr, timeout, ReturnKernelTimeout );
 +
end GetResponse
  
The segment data portion of a packet group represents up to 16
+
Notes:
kilooctets of the segment specified in the message control block.  The
 
portion contained in each packet is indicated by the PacketDelivery
 
field contained in the VMTP header.  The PacketDelivery field as a bit
 
mask has a similar interpretation to the MsgDelivery field in that each
 
bit corresponds to a segment data block of 512 octets.  The
 
PacketDelivery field limits a packet group to 16 kilooctets and a
 
maximum of 32 VMTP packets (with a minimum of 1 packet).  Data can be
 
sent in fewer packets by sending multiple data blocks per packet.  We
 
require that the underlying datagram service support delivery of (at
 
minimum) the basic 580 octet VMTP packet <7>.  To illustrate the use of
 
the PacketDelivery field, consider for example the Ethernet which has a
 
MTU of 1536 octets.  so one would send 2 512-octet segment data blocks
 
per packet.  (In fact, if a third block is last in the segment and less
 
than 512 octets and fits in the packet without making it too big, an
 
Ethernet packet could contain three data blocks.  Thus, an Ethernet
 
packet group for a segment of size 0x1D00 octets (14.5 blocks) and
 
MsgDelivery 0x000074FF consists of 6 packets indicated as follows <8>.
 
  
_______________
+
1. GetResponse is only used with multicast Requests, which is
 
+
  the only case in which multiple (different) Responses should
<7>  Note that with a 20 octet IP header, a VMTP packet is 600
+
  be received.
octets.  We propose the convention that any host implementing VMTP
 
implicitly agrees to accept IP/VMTP packets of at least 600 octets.
 
  
<8>  We use the C notation 0xHHHH to represent a hexadecimal number.
+
2. A response must remain queued until the next message
 +
  transaction is invoked to filter out duplicates of this
 +
  response.
  
 +
3. If the response is incomplete (only relevant if a
 +
  multi-packet response), then the client may wait for the
 +
  response to be fully received, including issuing requests for
 +
  retransmission (using NotifyVmtpServer operations) before
 +
  returning the response.
  
Cheriton                                                      [page 29]
+
4. As an optimization, a response may be stored in the CSR of
 +
  the client.  In this case, the response must be transferred
 +
  to a separate buffer (for duplicate suppression) before
 +
  waiting for another response.  Using this optimization, a
 +
  response buffer is not allocated in the common case of the
 +
  client receiving only one response.
  
 +
=== Packet Arrival ===
  
 +
In general, on packet reception, a packet is mapped to the client state
 +
record, decrypted if necessary using the key in the CSR.  It then has
 +
its checksum verified and then is transformed to the right byte order.
 +
The packet is then processed fully relative to its packet function code.
 +
It is discarded immediately if it is addressed to a different domain
 +
than the domain(s) in which the receiving host participates.
  
RFC 1045                      VMTP                        February 1988
+
Cheriton                                                      [page 56]
  
 +
For each of the 2 packet types, we assume a procedure called with a
 +
pointer p to the VMTP packet and psize, the size of the packet in
 +
octets.  Thus, generic packet reception is:
  
Packet
+
if not LocalDomain(p.Domain) then return;
Delivery  1 1  1 1  1 1  1 1  0 0  1 0  1 0  1 0  0 0 0 0 0 . . .
 
          0000 0400 0800 0C00 1000 1400 1800 1C00
 
          +----+----+----+----+----+----+----+-+
 
Segment  |....|....|....|....|....|....|....|.|
 
          +----+----+----+----+----+----+----+-+
 
          :    :    :    :    :    :  : /  /  :
 
          v    v    v    v    v    v  v  /|  v
 
          +----+----+----+----+    +----+  +---+
 
Packets  |  1 |  2 |  3 |  4 |    |  5 |  | 6 |
 
          +----+----+----+----+    +----+  +---+
 
  
Each '.' is 256 octets of data.  The PacketDelivery masks for the 6
+
csr := MapClient( p.Client )
packets are: 0x00000003, 0x0000000C, 0x00000030, 0x000000C0, 0x00001400
 
and 0x00006000, indicating the segment blocks contained in each of the
 
packets.  (Note that the delivery bits are in little endian order.)
 
  
A packet group is sent as a single "blast" of packets with no explicit
+
if csr is NULL then
flow control. However, the sender should estimate and transmit at a
+
  HandleNoCsr( p, psize )
rate of packet transmission to avoid congesting the network or
+
  return
overwhelming the receiver, as described in Section 2.5.6. Packets in a
 
packet group can be sent in any order with no change in semantics.
 
  
When the first packet of a packet group is received (assuming the Server
+
if Secure(p) then
does not decide to discard the packet group), the Server saves a copy of
+
if SecureVMTP not supported then
the VMTP packet header, indicates it is currently receiving a packet
+
    { Assume a Request. }
group, initializes a "current delivery mask" (indicating the data in the
+
    if not Multicast(p) then
segment received so far) to 0, accepts this packet (updating the current
+
        NotifyClient(NULL, p, SECURITY_NOT_SUPPORTED )
delivery mask) and sets the timer for the packet group. Subsequent
+
    return
packets in the packet group update the current delivery mask.
+
  endif
 +
|  Decrypt( csr.Key, p, psize )
  
Reception of a packet group is terminated when either the current
+
if p.Checksum not null then
delivery mask indicates that all the packets in the packet group have
+
if not VerifyChecksum(p, psize) then return;
been received or the packet group reception timer expires (set to TC3 or
+
if OppositeByteOrder(p) then ByteSwap( p, psize )
TS1).  If the packet group reception timer expires, if the NRT bit is
+
if psize not equal sizeof(VmtpHeader) + 4*p.Length then
set in the Control flags then the packet group is discarded if not
+
  NotifyClient(NULL, p, VMTP_ERROR )
complete unless MDM is set. In this case, the MsgDelivery field in the
+
return
message control block is set to indicate the segment data blocks
+
Invoke Procedure[p.FuncCode]( csr, p, psize )
actually received and the message control block and segment data
+
Discard packet and return
received is delivered to application level.
 
  
If NRT is not set and not all data blocks have been received, a
+
Notes:
NotifyVmtpClient (if a Request) or NotifyVmtpServer (if a Response) is
 
sent back with a PacketDelivery field indicating the blocks received.
 
The source of the packet group is then expected to retransmit the
 
missing blocks.  If not all blocks of a Request are received after
 
RequestAckRetries(Client) retransmissions, the Request is discarded and
 
  
 +
1. The Procedure[p.FuncCode] refers to one of the 2 procedures
 +
  corresponding to the two different packet types of VMTP,
 +
  Requests and Responses.
  
Cheriton                                                      [page 30]
+
2. In all the following descriptions, a packet is discarded on
 +
  "return" unless otherwise stated.
  
 +
3. The procedure HandleNoCSR is a management routine that
 +
  allocates and initializes a CSR and processes the packet or
 +
  else sends an error indication to the sender of the packet.
 +
  This procedure is described in greater detail in Section
 +
  4.8.1.
  
 +
Cheriton                                                      [page 57]
  
RFC 1045                      VMTP                        February 1988
+
==== Response ====
  
 +
This procedure handles incoming Response packets.
  
a NotifyVmtpClient operation with an error response code is sent to the
+
HandleResponse( csr, p, psize )
client's manager unless MDM is set. With a Response, there are
+
  if not LocalClient( csr ) then
ResponseAckRetries(Server) retransmissions and then, if MDM is not set,
+
    if Multicast then return
the requesting entity is returned the message control block with an
+
|      if Migrated( p.Client ) then
indication of the amount of segment data received extending contiguously
+
|          NotifyServer(csr, p ENTITY_MIGRATED )
from the start of the segment.  E.g. if the sender sent 6 512-octet
+
|      else
blocks and only the first two and the last two arrived, the receiver
+
        NotifyServer(csr, p, ENTITY_NOT_HERE )
would be told that 1024 octets were received.  The ResponseCode field is
+
    return
set to BAD_REPLY_SEGMENT. (Note that VMTP is only able to indicate the
+
  endif
specific segment blocks received if MDM is set.)
 
  
The parameters RequestAckRetries(Client) and ResponseAckRetries(Server)
+
if NSRset(p) then
could be set on a per-client and per-server basis in a sophisticated
+
    if Streaming not supported then
implementation based on knowledge of packet loss.
+
        NotifyServer(csr, p, STREAMING_NOT_SUPPORTED )
 +
        return STREAMED_RESPONSE
 +
|      Find csr corresponding to p.Transaction
 +
|      if none found then
 +
|          NotifyServer(csr, p, BAD_TRANSACTION_ID )
 +
|          return
 +
  else
 +
  if csr.LocalTransaction not equal p.Transaction then
 +
    NotifyServer(csr, p, BAD_TRANSACTION_ID )
 +
    return
 +
endif
 +
Locate reply buffer rb for this p.Server
 +
if found then
 +
    if rb.State is not ReceivingResponse then
 +
      { Duplicate }
 +
        if APGset(p) or NERset(p) then
 +
            { Send Response to stop response packets. }
 +
            NotifyServer(csr, p, RESPONSE_DISCARDED )
 +
        endif
 +
        return
 +
      endif
 +
      { rb.State is ReceivingRequest}
 +
      if new segment data then retain in CSR segment area.
 +
      if packetgroup not complete then
 +
          Timeout( rb, TC3(p.Server), LocalClientTimeout )
 +
          return;
 +
      endif
 +
      goto EndPacketGroup
 +
endif
 +
{ Otherwise, a new response message. }
  
If the APG flag is set, a NotifyVmtpClient or NotifyVmtpServer
+
Cheriton                                                      [page 58]
operation is sent back at the end of the packet group reception,
 
depending on whether it is a Request or a Response.
 
  
At minimum, a Server should check that each packet in the packet group
+
if (NSRset(p) or NERset(p)) and NoStreaming then
contains the same Client, Server, Transaction identifier and SegmentSize
+
    NotifyServer(csr, p, VMTP_ERROR )
fields. It is a protocol error for any field other than the Checksum,
+
    return
packet group control flags, Length and PacketDelivery in the VMTP header
+
|    if NSRset(p) then
to differ between any two packets in one packet group.  A packet group
+
|      { Check consecutive with previous packet group }
containing a protocol error of this nature should be discarded.
+
|      Find last packet group CSR from p.Server.
 +
|      if p.Transaction not
 +
|            lastcsr.RemoteTransaction+1 mod 2**32 then
 +
|        { Out of order packet group }
 +
|            NotifyServer(csr, p, BAD_TRANSACTION_ID)
 +
|          return
 +
|      endif
 +
|      if lastcsr not completed then
 +
|          NotifyServer(lastcsr, p, RETRY )
 +
|      endif
 +
|      if CMG(lastcsr) then
 +
|          Add segment data to lastcsr Response
 +
|          Notify lastcsr with new packet group.
 +
|          Clear lastcsr.VerifyInterval
 +
|      else
 +
|          if lastcsr available then
 +
|                use it for this packet group
 +
|          else allocate and initialize new CSR
 +
|          Save message and segment data in new CSR area.
 +
|      endif
 +
|  else { First packet group }
 +
    Allocate and init reply buffer rb for this response.
 +
    if allocation fails then
 +
        NotifyServer(csr, p, BUSY )
 +
        return
 +
    Set rb.State to ReceivingResponse
 +
    Copy message and segment data to rb's segment area
 +
      and set rb.PacketDelivery to that delivered.
 +
    Save p.Server host address in ServerHost cache.
 +
endif
 +
if packetgroup not complete then
 +
    Timeout( rb, TS1(p.Client), LocalClientTimeout )
 +
    return;
 +
endif
 +
endPacketGroup:
 +
{ We have received last packet in packet group. }
 +
  if APGset(p) then NotifyServer(csr, p, OK )
 +
|  if NERset(p) and CMGset(p) then
 +
|      Queue waiting for continuation packet group.
 +
|      Timeout( rb, TC2(rb.Server), LocalClientTimeout )
 +
|      return
 +
|  endif
 +
 
 +
Cheriton                                                      [page 59]
 +
 
 +
{ Deliver response message. }
 +
Deliver response to Client, or queue as appropriate.
 +
end HandleResponse
  
Notify operations should be sent (or invoked) in the manager whenever
+
Notes:
there is a problem with a unicast packet.  i.e. negative acknowledgments
+
 
are always sent in this case. In the case of problems with multicast
+
1. The mechanism for handling streaming is optional and can be
packets, the default is to send nothing in response to an error
+
  replaced with the tests for use of streamingNote that the
condition unless there is some clear reason why no other node can
+
  server should never stream at the Client unless the Client
respond positively.  For example, the packet might be a Probe for an
+
  has streamed at the Server or has used the STI control bit.
entity that is known to have been recently existing on the receiving
+
  Otherwise, streamed Responses are a protocol error.
host but now invalid and could not have migratedIn this case, the
 
receiving host responds to the Probe indicating the entity is
 
nonexistent, knowing that no other host can respond to the Probe. For
 
packets and packet groups that are received and processed without
 
problems, a Notify operation is invoked only if the APG bit is set.
 
  
 +
2. As an optimization, a Response can be stored into the CSR for
 +
  the Client rather than allocating a separate CSR for a
 +
  response buffer.  However, if multiple responses are handled,
 +
  the code must be careful to perform duplicate detection on
 +
  the Response stored there as well as those queued.  In
 +
  addition, GetResponse must create a queued version of this
 +
  Response before allowing it to be overwritten.
  
2.14. Runs of Packet Groups
+
3. The handling of Group Responses has been omitted for brevity.
 +
  Basically, a Response is accepted if there has been a Request
 +
  received locally from the same Client and same Transaction
 +
  that has not been responded to.  In this case, the Response
 +
  is delivered to the Server or queued.
  
A run of packet groups is a sequence of packet groups, all Request
+
Cheriton                                                      [page 60]
packets or all Response packets, with the same Client and consecutive
 
transaction identifiers, all but the first and last packets flagged with
 
the NSR (Not Start Run) and NER (Not End Run) control bits.  When each
 
packet group in the run corresponds to a single Request or Response, it
 
  
 +
=== Management Operations ===
  
Cheriton                                                      [page 31]
+
VMTP uses management operations (invoked as remote procedure calls) to
 +
effectively acknowledge packet groups and request retransmissions.  The
 +
following routine is invoked by the Client's management module on
 +
request from the Server.
  
 +
NotifyVmtpClient( clientId,ctrl,receiveSeqNumber,transact,delivery,code)
 +
Get csr for clientId
 +
if none then return
 +
if RemoteClient( csr ) and not NotifyVmtpRemoteClient then
 +
    return
 +
|  else (for streaming)
 +
|      Find csr with same LocalTransaction as transact
 +
|      if csr is NULL then return
 +
if csr.State not AwaitingResponse then return
 +
if ctrl.PGcount then ack previous packet groups.
 +
select on code
 +
  case OK:
 +
    Notify ack'ed segment blocks from delivery
 +
    Clear csr.RetransCount;
 +
    Timeout( csr, TC1(csr.Server), LocalClientTimeout )
 +
    return
 +
  case RETRY:
 +
    Set csr.TransmissionMask to missing segment blocks,
 +
        as specified by delivery
 +
    SendPacketGroup( csr )
 +
    Timeout( csr, TC1(csr.Server), LocalClientTimeout )
 +
  case RETRY_ALL
 +
    Set csr.TransmissionMask to retransmit all blocks.
 +
    SendPacketGroup( csr )
 +
    Timeout( csr, TC1(csr.Server), LocalClientTimeout )
 +
|      if streaming then
 +
|          Restart transmission of packet groups,
 +
|                starting from transact+1
 +
      return
 +
  case BUSY:
 +
      if csr.TimeLimit exceeded then
 +
          Set csr.Code to USER_TIMEOUT
 +
          return Response to application
 +
          return;
 +
    Set csr.TransmissionMask for full retransmission
 +
    Clear csr.RetransCount
 +
    Timeout( csr, TC1(csr.Server), LocalClientTimeout )
 +
    return
 +
  case ENTITY_MIGRATED:
 +
    Get new host address for entity
  
 +
Cheriton                                                      [page 61]
  
RFC 1045                      VMTP                        February 1988
+
    Set csr.TransmissionMask for full retransmission
 +
    Clear csr.RetransCount
 +
    SendPacketGroup( csr )
 +
    Timeout( csr, TC1(csr.Server), LocalClientTimeout )
 +
    return
  
 +
  case STREAMING_NOT_SUPPORTED:
 +
    Record that server does not support streaming
 +
    if CMG(csr) then forget this packet group
 +
    else resend Request as separate packet group.
 +
    return
 +
  default:
 +
      Set csr.Code to code
 +
      return Response to application
 +
      return;
 +
endselect
 +
end NotifyVmtpClient
  
is identical to a run of message transactions. (See Section 2.11)
+
Notes:
However, a Request message or a Response message may consists of up to
 
256 packet groups within a run, for a maximum of 4 megaoctets of segment
 
data.  A message that is continued in the next packet group in the run
 
is flagged in the current packet group by the CMG flag.  Otherwise, the
 
next packet group in the run (if any) is treated as a separate Request
 
or Response.
 
  
Normally, each Request and Response message is sent as a single packet
+
1. The delivery parameter indicates the segment blocks received
group and each run consists of a single packet group. In this case
+
  by the ServerThat is, a 1 bit in the i-th position
neither NSR or NER are setFor multi-packet group messages, the
+
  indicates that the i-th segment block in the segment data of
PacketDelivery mask in the i-th packet group of a message corresponds to
+
  the Request was received.  All subsequent NotifyVmtpClient
the portion of the segment offset by i-1 times 16 kilooctets,
+
  operations for this transaction should be set to acknowledge
designating the the first packet group to have i = 1.
+
  a superset of the segment blocks in this packet.  In
 +
  particular, the Client need not be prepared to retransmit the
 +
  segment data once it has been acknowledged by a Notify
 +
  operation.
  
 +
==== HandleNoCSR ====
  
2.15. Byte Order
+
HandleNoCSR is called when a packet arrives for which there is no CSR
 +
matching the client field of the packet.
  
For purposes of transmission and reception, the MCB is treated as
+
HandleNoCSR( p, psize )
consisting of 8 32-bit fields and the segment is a sequence of bytes.
+
if Secure(p) then
VMTP transmits the MCB in big-endian order, performing byte-swapping, if
+
    if SecureVMTP not supported then
necessary, before transmission.  A little-endian host must byte-swap the
+
        { Assume a Request }
MCB on reception.  (The data segment is transmitted as a sequence of
+
        if not Multicast(p) then
bytes with no reordering.) The byte order of the sender of a message is
+
            NotifyClient(NULL,p,SECURITY_NOT_SUPPORTED)
indicated by the LEE  bit in the entity identifier for the sender, the
+
        return
Client field if a Request and the Server field if a Response.  The
+
    endif
sender and receiver of a message are required to agree in some higher
+
    HandleRequestNoCSR( p, psize )
level protocol (such as an RPC presentation protocol) on who does
+
    return
further swapping of the MCB and data segment if required by the types of
+
endif
the data actually being transmitted.  For example, the segment data may
 
contain a record with 8-bit, 16-bit and 32-bit fields, so additional
 
transformation is required to move the segment from a host of one byte
 
order to another.
 
  
VMTP to date has used a higher-level presentation protocol in which
+
Cheriton                                                      [page 62]
segment data is sent in the native order of the sending host and
 
byte-swapped as necessary by the receiving host.  This approach
 
minimizes the byte-swapping overhead between machines of common byte
 
order (including when the communication is transparently local to one
 
host), avoids a strong bias in the protocol to one byte-order, and
 
allows for the sending entity to be sending to a group of hosts with
 
different byte orders.  (Note that the byte-swap overhead for the MCB is
 
minimal.)  The presentation-level overhead is minimal because most
 
common operations, such as file access operations, have parameters that
 
fit the MCB and data segment data types exactly.
 
  
 +
if p.Checksum not null then
 +
    if not VerifyChecksum(p, psize) then return;
 +
if OppositeByteOrder(p) then ByteSwap( p, psize )
 +
if psize not equal sizeof(VmtpHeader) + 4*p.Length then
 +
    NotifyClient(NULL, p, VMTP_ERROR )
 +
    return
  
 +
if p.FuncCode is Response then
 +
|        if Migrated( p.Client ) then
 +
|          NotifyServer(csr, p ENTITY_MIGRATED )
 +
|      else
 +
        NotifyServer(csr, p, NONEXISTENT_ENTITY )
 +
    return
 +
endif
  
 +
if p.FuncCode is Request then
 +
    HandleRequestNoCSR( p, psize )
 +
return
 +
end HandleNoCSR
  
Cheriton                                                      [page 32]
+
Notes:
  
 +
1. The node need only check to see if the client entity has
 +
  migrated if in fact it supports migration of entities.
  
 +
2. The procedure HandleRequestNoCSR is specified in Section
 +
  5.8.1.  In the minimal client version, it need only handle
 +
  Probe requests and can do so directly without allocating a
 +
  new CSR.
  
RFC 1045                      VMTP                        February 1988
+
Cheriton                                                      [page 63]
  
 +
=== Timeouts ===
  
2.16. Minimal VMTP Implementation
+
A client with a message transaction in progress has a single timer
 +
corresponding to the first unacknowledged request message. (In the
 +
absence of streaming, this request is also the last request sent.)  This
 +
timeout is handled as follows:
  
A minimal VMTP client needs to be able to send a Request packet group
+
LocalClientTimeout( csr )
and receive a Response packet group as well as accept and respond to
+
  select on csr.State
Requests sent to its management module, including Probe and NotifyClient
+
case AwaitingResponse:
operations. It may also require the ability to invoke Probe and Notify
+
  if csr.RetransCount > MaxRetrans(csr.Server) then
operations to locate a Server and acknowledge responses.  (the latter
+
          terminate Client's message transactions up to
only if it is involved in transactions that are not idempotent or
+
          and including the current message transaction.
datagram message transactions. However, a simple sensor, for example,
+
          set return code to KERNEL_TIMEOUT
can transmit VMTP datagram Requests indicating its current state with
+
      return
even less mechanism.)  The minimal client thus requires very little code
+
  increment csr.RetransCount
and is suitable as a basis for (e.g.) a network boot loader.
+
  Resend current packet group with APG set.
 +
  Timeout( csr, TC2(csr.Server), LocalClientTimeout )
 +
  return
 +
  case ReceivingResponse:
 +
  if DGMset(csr) or csr.RetransCount > Max then
 +
      if MDMset(csr) then
 +
        Set MCB.MsgDeliveryMask to blocks received.
 +
      else
 +
        Set csr.Code to BAD_REPLY_SEGMENT
 +
      return to user Client
 +
  endif
 +
  increment csr.RetransCount
 +
  NotifyServer with RETRY
 +
  Timeout( csr, TC3(csr.Server), LocalClientTimeout )
 +
  return
 +
  end select
 +
end LocalClientTimeout
  
A minimal VMTP server implements idempotent, non-encrypted message
+
Notes:
transactions, possibly with no segment data support.  It should use an
 
entity state record for each Request but need only retain it while
 
processing the Request.  Without segment data larger than a packet,
 
there is no need for any timers, buffering (outside of immediate request
 
processing) or queuing.  In particular, it needs only as many records as
 
message transactions it handles simultaneously (e.g. 1).  The entity
 
state record is required to recognize and respond to Request
 
retransmissions during request processing.
 
  
The minimal server need only receive Requests and and be able to send
+
1. A Client can only request retransmission of a Response if the
Response packets. It need have only a minimal management module
+
  Response is not idempotentIf idempotent, it must
supporting Probe operations.  (Support for the NotifyVmtpClient
+
  retransmit the RequestThe Server should generally support
operation is only required if it does not respond immediately to a
+
  the MsgDeliveryMask for Requests that it treats as idempotent
Request.) Thus the VMTP support for say a time server, sensor, or
+
  and that require multi-packet ResponsesOtherwise, there is
actuator can be extremely simpleNote that the server need never issue
+
  no selective retransmission for idempotent message
a Probe operation if it uses the host address of the Request for the
+
  transactions.
Response and does not require the Client information returned by the
 
Probe operationThe minimal server should also support reception of
 
forwarded Requests.
 
  
 +
2. The current packet group is the last one transmitted.  Thus,
 +
  with streaming, there may be several packet groups
 +
  outstanding that precede the current packet group.
  
2.17. Message vs. Procedural Request Handling
+
Cheriton                                                      [page 64]
  
A request-response protocol can be used to implement two forms of
+
3. The Request packet group should be retransmitted without the
semantics on reception. With procedural handling of a Request, a
+
  segment data, resulting in a single short packet in the
Request is handled by a process associated with the Server that
+
  retransmission.  The Server must then send a
effectively takes on the identity of the calling process, treating the
+
  NotifyVmtpClient with a RETRY or RETRY_ALL code to get the
Request message as invoking a procedure, and relinquishing its
+
  segment data transmitted as neededThis strategy minimizes
association to the calling process on returnVMTP supports multiple
+
  the overhead on the network and the server(s) for
nested calls spanning multiple machines.  In this case, the distributed
+
  retransmissions.
call stack that results is associated with a single process from the
 
standpoint of authentication and resource management, using the
 
ProcessId field supported by VMTP. The entity identifiers effectively
 
  
 +
Cheriton                                                      [page 65]
  
Cheriton                                                      [page 33]
+
== Server Protocol Operation ==
  
 +
This section describes the operation of the server portion of the
 +
protocol in terms of the procedures for handling VMTP user events,
 +
packet reception events and timeout events.  Each server is assumed to
 +
implement the client procedures described in the previous chapter.
 +
(This is not strictly necessary but it simplifies the exposition.)
  
 +
=== Remote Client State Record Fields ===
  
RFC 1045                      VMTP                        February 1988
+
The CSR for a server is extended with the following fields, in addition
 +
to the ones listed for the client version.
  
 +
RemoteClient    Identifier for remote client that sent the Request that
 +
            this CSR is handling.
  
link these call frames together.  That is, the Client field in a Request
+
RemoteClientLink
is effectively the return link to the previous call frame.
+
            Link to next CSR hashing to same hash index in the
 +
            ClientMap.
  
With message handling of a Request, a Request message is queued for a
+
RemoteTransaction
server process.  The server process dequeues, reads, processes and
+
            Transaction identifier for Request from remote client.
responds to the Request message, executing as a separate process.
 
Subsequent Requests to the same server are queued until the server asks
 
to receive the next Request.
 
  
Procedural semantics have the advantage of allowing each Request (up to
+
RemoteDelivery  The segment blocks received so far as part of a Request
the resource limits of the Server) to execute concurrently at the
+
            or yet to be acknowledged as part of a Response.
Server, with Request-specific synchronization.  Message semantics have
 
the advantage that Requests are serialized at the Server and that the
 
request processing logically executes with the priority, protection and
 
independent execution of a separate process.  Note that procedural and
 
message handling of a request appear no differently to the client
 
invoking the message transaction, except possibly for differences in
 
performance.
 
  
We view the two Request handling approaches as appropriate under
+
VerifyInterval  Time interval since there was confirmation that the
different circumstances.  VMTP supports both models.
+
            remote Client was still valid.
  
 +
RemotePrincipal Account identification, possibly including key and key
 +
            timeout for secure communication.
  
2.18. Bibliography
+
=== Remote Client Protocol States ===
  
The basic protocol is similar to that used in the original form of the V
+
A CSR in the server end is in one of the following states.
kernel [3, 4] as well as the transport protocol of Birrell and
 
Nelson's [2] remote procedure call mechanism.  An earlier version of the
 
protocol was described in SIGCOMM'86 [6].  The rate-based flow control
 
is similar to the techniques of Netblt [9].  The support for idempotency
 
draws, in part, on the favorable experience with idempotency in the V
 
distributed system.  Its use was originally inspired by the Woodstock
 
File Server [11].  The multicast support draws on the multicast
 
facilities in V [5] and is designed to work with, and is now implemented
 
using, the multicast extensions to the Internet [8] described in RFC 966
 
and 988.  The secure version of the protocol is similar to that
 
described by Birrell [1] for secure RPC.  The use of runs of packet
 
groups is similar to Fletcher and Watson's delta-T protocol [10].  The
 
use of "management" operations implemented using VMTP in place of
 
specialized packet types is viewed as part of a general strategy of
 
using recursion to simplify protocol architectures [7].
 
  
Finally, this protocol was designed, in part, to respond to the
+
AwaitingRequest Waiting for a Request packet groupIt may be marked as
requirements identified by Braden in RFC 955We believe that VMTP
+
            waiting on a specific Client, or on any Client.
satisfies the requirements stated in RFC 955.
 
  
 +
ReceivingRequest
 +
            Waiting to receive additional Request packets in a
 +
            multi-packet group Request.
  
 +
Responded      The Response has been sent and the CSR is timing out,
 +
            providing duplicate suppression and retransmission (if
  
 +
Cheriton                                                      [page 66]
  
Cheriton                                                      [page 34]
+
            the Response was not idempotent).
  
 +
ResponseDiscarded
 +
            Response has been acknowledged or has timed out so
 +
            cannot be retransmitted.  However, duplicates are still
 +
            filtered and CSR can be reused for new message
 +
            transaction.
  
 +
Processing      Executing on behalf of the Client.
  
RFC 1045                      VMTP                        February 1988
+
Forwarded      The message transaction has been forwarded to another
 +
            Server that is to respond directly to the Client.
  
 +
=== State Transition Diagrams ===
  
 +
The CSR state transitions in the server are illustrated in Figure 5-1.
 +
The CSR generally starts in the AwaitingRequest state.  On receipt of a
 +
Request, the Server either has an up-to-date CSR for the Client or else
 +
it sends a Probe request (as a separate VMTP message transaction) to the
 +
VMTP management module associated with the Client.  In the latter case,
 +
the processing of the Request is delayed until a Response to the Probe
 +
request is received.  At that time, the CSR information is brought up to
 +
date and the Request is processed.  If the Request is a single-packet
 +
request, the CSR is then set in the Processing state to handle the
 +
request.  Otherwise (a multi-packet Request), the CSR is put into the
 +
ReceivingResponse state, waiting to receive subsequent Request packets
 +
that constitute the Request message.  It exits the ReceivingRequest
 +
state on timeout or on receiving the last Request packet.  In the former
 +
case, the request is delivered with an indication of the portion
 +
received, using the MsgDelivery field if MDM is set.  After request
 +
processing is complete, either the Response is sent and the CSR enters
 +
the Responded state or the message transaction is forwarded and the CSR
 +
enters the Forwarded state.
  
[1]  A.D. Birrell, "Secure Communication using Remote Procedure
+
In the Responded state, if the Response is not marked as idempotent, the
      Calls", ACM. Trans. on Computer Systems 3(1), February, 1985.
+
Response is retransmitted on receipt of a retransmission of the
 
+
corresponding Request, on receipt of a NotifyVmtpServer operation
 
+
requesting retransmission or on timeout at which time APG is set,
[2]  A. Birrell and B. Nelson, "Implementing Remote Procedure Calls",
+
requesting an acknowledgment from the Client. The Response is
      ACM Trans. on Computer Systems 2(1), February, 1984.
+
retransmitted some maximum number of times at which time the Response is
 
+
discarded and the CSR is marked accordingly. If a Request or a
 
+
NotifyVmtpServer operation is received expecting retransmission of the
[3]  D.R. Cheriton and W. Zwaenepoel, "The Distributed V Kernel and its
+
Response after the CSR has entered the ResponseDiscarded state, a
      Performance for Diskless Workstations", In Proceedings of the 9th
+
NotifyVmtpClient operation is sent back (or invoked in the Client
      Symposium on Operating System Principles, ACM, 1983.
+
management module) indicating that the response was discarded unless the
 +
Request was multicast, in which case no action is taken. After a
  
 +
Cheriton                                                      [page 67]
  
[4]   D.R. Cheriton, "The V Kernel: A Software Base for Distributed
+
   (Retransmit Forwarded Request and NotifyVmtpClient)
       Systems", IEEE Software 1(2), April, 1984.
+
                Request/
 +
                Ack/
 +
                +Timeout+
 +
                V      |
 +
              +-|-------^-+
 +
              |          |
 +
      +-Time-| Forwarded |<-------------+
 +
      |  out +-----------+              |
 +
      |                                |
 +
      |          (Retransmit Response)  |
 +
      |                      Request    |
 +
      V                      Ack        |
 +
      |                    +-Timeout-+  |
 +
      |                    V         |  |
 +
    +---------+ Ack/ +|---------^+ |
 +
+-Time-|Response |<-Timeout--| Responded | |
 +
|  out |Discarded|          +----^------+ |
 +
|      +---------+                |        |
 +
|  +------------+                |        |
 +
|  |            |->-Send Response-+        |
 +
|  |            |->-forward Request--------+
 +
+->| Processing |<----------------------+
 +
|  |            |<----------------+    |
 +
|  |            |<---|            |    |
 +
|  +-|--------^-+    |          Last    |
 +
| Receive    |      |          Request |
 +
|    |  Timeout  Single       Packet  |
 +
|    |        |    Packet        |  Timeout
 +
|    |        |    Request        ^    ^
 +
|    |        |      ^          +|-----|--+
 +
|  +-V--------|-+    |          |Receiving|<-+Time
 +
+->|  Awaiting  |->--+->Request->| Request |--+ out
 +
|  Request  |    |  (multi-  +---------+
 +
+------|-----+    ^  packet)
 +
    Request      |
 +
        |        Response
 +
  Send Probe    to
 +
        |        Probe
 +
    +---V----+    |
 +
    |Awaiting|    ^
 +
    |Response|-->--+
 +
    |to Probe|
 +
    +--------+
  
 +
          Figure 5-1:  Remote Client State Transitions
  
[5]  D.R. Cheriton and W. Zwaenepoel, "Distributed Process Groups in
+
timeout corresponding to the time required to filter out duplicates, the
      the V Kernel", ACM Trans. on Computer Systems 3(2), May, 1985.
 
  
 +
Cheriton                                                      [page 68]
  
[6]  D.R. Cheriton, "VMTP: A Transport Protocol for the Next
+
CSR returns either to the AwaitingRequest state or to the Processing
      Generation of Communication Systems", In Proceedings of
+
state. Note that "Ack" refers to acknowledgment by a Notify operation.
      SIGCOMM'86, ACM, Aug 5-7, 1986.
 
  
 +
A Request that is forwarded leaves the CSR in the Forwarded state.  In
 +
the Forwarded state, the forwarded Request is retransmitted
 +
periodically, expecting NotifyRemoteClient operations back from the
 +
Server to which the Request was forwarded, analogous to the Client
 +
behavior in the AwaitingResponse state.  In this state, a
 +
NotifyRemoteClient from this Server acknowledges the Request or asks
 +
that it be retransmitted or reports an error.  A retransmission of the
 +
Request from the Client causes a NotifyVmtpClient to be returned to the
 +
Client if APG is set.  The CSR leaves the Forwarded state after timing
 +
out in the absence of NotifyRemoteClient operations from the forward
 +
Server or on receipt of a NotifyRemoteClient operation indicating the
 +
forward Server has sent a Response and received an acknowledgement.  It
 +
then enters the ResponseDiscarded state.
  
[7]  D.R. Cheriton, "Exploiting Recursion to Simplify an RPC
+
Receipt of a new Request from the same Client aborts the current
      Communication Architecture", in preparation, 1988.
+
transaction, independent of its state, and initiates a new transaction
 +
unless the new Request is part of a run of message transactions. If it
 +
is part of a run of message transactions, the handling follows the state
 +
diagram except the new Request is not Processed until there has been a
 +
response sent to the previous transaction.
  
 +
=== User Interface ===
  
[8]  D.R. Cheriton and S.E. Deering, "Host Groups: A Multicast
+
The RPC or user interface to VMTP is implementation-dependent and may
      Extension for Datagram Internetworks", In 9th Data Communication
+
use systems calls, functions or some other mechanism. The list of
      Symposium, IEEE Computer Society and ACM SIGCOMM, September, 1985.
+
requests that follow is intended to suggest the basic functionality that
 +
should be available.
  
 +
AcceptMessage( reqmcb, segptr, segsize, client, transid, timeout )
 +
            Accept a new Request message in the specified reqmcb
 +
            area, placing the segment data, if any, in the area
 +
            described by segptr and segsize.  This returns the
 +
            Server in the entityId field of the reqmcb and actual
 +
            segment size in the segsize parameters.  It also returns
 +
            the Client and Transaction for this message transaction
 +
            in the corresponding parameters.  This procedure
 +
            supports message semantics for request processing.  When
 +
            a server process executes this call, it blocks until a
 +
            Request message has been queued for the server.
 +
            AcceptMessage returns after the specified timeout period
 +
            if a message has not been received by that time.
  
[9]  D.D. Clark and M. Lambert and L. Zhang, "NETBLT: A Bulk Data
+
RespondMessage( responsemcb, client, transid, segptr )
      Transfer Protocol", Technical Report RFC 969, Defense Advanced
 
      Research Projects Agency, 1985.
 
  
 +
Cheriton                                                      [page 69]
  
[10]  J.G. Fletcher and R.W. Watson, "Mechanism for a Reliable Timer-
+
            Respond to the client with the specified response
      based Protocol", Computer Networks 2:271-290, 1978.
+
            message and segment, again with message semantics.
  
 +
RespondCall( responsemcb, segptr )
 +
            Respond to the client with the specified response
 +
            message and segment, with remote procedure call
 +
            semantics.  This procedure does not return.  The
 +
            lightweight process that executes this procedure is
 +
            matched to a stack, program counter, segment area and
 +
            priority from the information provided in a
 +
            ModifyService call, as specified in Appendix III.
  
 +
ForwardMessage( requestmcb, transid, segptr, segsize, forwardserver )
 +
            Forward the client to the specified forwardserver with
 +
            the request specified in mcb.
  
 +
ForwardCall( requestmcb, segptr, segsize, forwardserver )
 +
            Forward the client transaction to the specified
 +
            forwardserver with the request specified by requestmcb.
 +
            This procedure does not return.
  
 +
GetRemoteClientId()
 +
            Return the entityId for the remote client on whose
 +
            behave the process is executing.  This is only
 +
            applicable in the procedure call model of request
 +
            handling.
  
 +
GetForwarder( client )
 +
            Return the entity that forwarded this Request, if any.
  
 +
GetProcess( client )
 +
            Return an identifier for the process associated with
 +
            this client entity-id.
  
 +
GetPrincipal( client )
 +
            Return the principal associated with this client
 +
            entity-id.
  
 +
=== Event Processing ===
  
 +
The following events may occur in VMTP servers.
  
Cheriton                                                      [page 35]
+
- User Requests
  
 +
    * Receive
  
 +
Cheriton                                                      [page 70]
  
RFC 1045                      VMTP                        February 1988
+
    * Respond
  
 +
    * Forward
  
 +
    * GetForwarder
  
 +
    * GetProcess
  
[11]  D. Swinehart and G. McDaniel and D. Boggs, "WFS: A Simple File
+
    * GetPrincipal
      System for a Distributed Environment", In Proc. 7th Symp.
 
      Operating Systems Principles, 1979.
 
  
 +
- Packet Arrival
  
 +
    * Request Packet
  
 +
- Management Operations
  
 +
    * NotifyVmtpServer
  
 +
- Timeouts
  
 +
    * Client State Record Timeout
  
 +
The handling of these events is described in detail in the following
 +
subsections.  The conventions of the previous chapter are followed,
 +
including the use of the various subroutines in the description.
  
 +
=== Server User-invoked Events ===
  
 +
A user event occurs when a VMTP server invokes one of the VMTP interface
 +
procedures.
  
 +
==== Receive ====
  
 +
AcceptMessage(reqmcb, segptr, segsize, client, transid, timeout)
 +
Locate server's request queue.
 +
if request is queued then
 +
    Remember CSR associated with this Request.
 +
    return Request in reqmcb, segptr and segsize
 +
            and client and transaction id.
 +
Wait on server's request queue for next request
 +
up time timeout seconds.
 +
end ReceiveCall
  
 +
Notes:
  
 +
Cheriton                                                      [page 71]
  
 +
1. If a multi-packet Request is partially received at the time
 +
  of the AcceptMessage, the process waits until it completes.
  
 +
2. The behavior of a process accepting a Request as a
 +
  lightweight thread is similar except that the process
 +
  executes using the Request data logically as part of the
 +
  requesting Client process.
  
 +
==== Respond ====
  
 +
RespondCall is described as one case of the Respond transmission
 +
procedure; RespondMessage is similar.
  
 +
RespondCall( responsemcb, responsesegptr )
 +
Locate csr for this client.
 +
Check segment data accessible, if any
 +
if local client then
 +
    Handle locally
 +
    return
 +
endif
 +
if responsemcb.Code is RESPONSE_DISCARDED then
 +
    Mark as RESPONSE_DISCARDED
 +
    return
 +
SendPacketGroup( csr )
 +
set csr.State to Responded.
 +
if DGM reply then { Idempotent }
 +
    release segment data
 +
    Timeout( csr, TS4(csr.Client), FreeCsr );
 +
else { Await acknowledgement or new Request else ask for ack. }
 +
    Timeout( csr, TS5(csr.Client), RemoteClientTimeout )
 +
end RespondCall
  
 +
Notes:
  
 +
1. RespondMessage is similar except the Server process must be
 +
  synchronized with the release of the segment data (if any).
  
 +
2. The non-idempotent Response with segment data is sent first
 +
  without a request for an acknowledgement.  The Response is
 +
  retransmitted after time TS5(client) if no acknowledgment or
 +
  new Request is received from the client in the meantime.  At
 +
  this point, the APG bit is sent.
  
 +
3. The MCB of the Response is buffered in the client CSR, which
 +
  remains for TS4 seconds, sufficient to filter old duplicates.
 +
  The segment data (if any) must be retained intact until:  (1)
  
 +
Cheriton                                                      [page 72]
  
 +
  after transmission if idempotent or (2) after acknowledged or
 +
  timeout has occurred if not idempotent.  Techniques such as
 +
  copy-on-write might be used to keep a copy of the Response
 +
  segment data without incurring the cost of a copy.
  
 +
==== Forward ====
  
 +
Forwarding is logically initiating a new message transaction between the
 +
Server (now acting as a Client) and the server to which the Request is
 +
forwarded.  When the second server returns a Response, the same Response
 +
is immediately returned to the Client.  The forwarding support in VMTP
 +
preserves these semantics while providing some performance optimizations
 +
in some cases.
  
 +
ForwardCall( req, segptr, segsize, forwardserver )
 +
Locate csr for this client.
 +
Check segment data accessible, if any
  
 +
if local client or Request was multicast or secure
 +
    or csr.ForwardCount == 15 then
 +
    Handle as a new Send operation
 +
    return
 +
if forwardserver is local then
 +
    Handle locally
 +
    return
 +
Set csr.funccode to Request
 +
Increment csr.ForwardCount
 +
Set csr.State to Responded
 +
SendPacketGroup( csr ) { To ForwardServer }
 +
Timeout( csr, TS4(csr.Client), FreeAlien )
 +
end ForwardCall
  
 +
Notes:
  
 +
1. A Forward is logically a new call or message transaction.  It
 +
  must be really implemented as a new message transaction if
 +
  the original Request was multicast or secure (with the
 +
  optional further refinement that it can be used with a secure
 +
  message transaction when the Server and ForwardServer are the
 +
  same principal and the Request was not multicast).
  
 +
2. A Forward operation is never handled as an idempotent
 +
  operation because it requires knowledge that the
 +
  ForwardServer will treat the forwarded operation as
 +
  idempotent as well.  Thus, a Forward operation that includes
 +
  a segment should set APG on the first transmission of the
  
 +
Cheriton                                                      [page 73]
  
 +
  forwarded Request to get an acknowledgement for this data.
 +
  Once the acknowledgement is received, the forwarding Server
 +
  can discard the segment data, leaving only the basic CSR to
 +
  handle retransmissions from the Client.
  
 +
==== Other Functions ====
  
 +
GetRemoteClient is a simple local query of the CSR.  GetProcess and
 +
GetPrincipal also extract this information from the CSR.  A server
 +
module may defer the Probe callback to the Client to get that
 +
information until it is requested by the Server (assuming it is not
 +
using secure communication and duplicate suppression is adequate without
 +
callback.)  GetForwarder is implemented as a callback to the Client,
 +
using a GetRequestForwarder VMTP management operation.  Additional
 +
management procedures for VMTP are described in Appendix III.
  
 +
=== Request Packet Arrival ===
  
 +
The basic packet reception follows that described for the Client
 +
routines.  A Request packet is handled by the procedure HandleRequest.
  
 +
HandleRequest( csr, p, psize )
  
 +
if LocalClient(csr) then
 +
    { Forwarded Request on local Client }
 +
    if csr.LocalTransaction != p.Transaction then return
 +
    if csr.State != AwaitingResponse then return
 +
    if p.ForwardCount < csr.ForwardCount then
 +
        Discard Request and return.
 +
    Find a CSR for Client as a remote Client.
 +
    if not found then
 +
        if packet group complete then
 +
            handle as a local message transaction
 +
            return
 +
        Allocate and init CSR
 +
        goto newTransaction
 +
    { Otherwise part of current transaction }
 +
    { Handle directly below. }n
 +
if csr.RemoteTransaction = p.Transaction then
 +
  { Matches current transaction }
 +
    if OldForward(p.ForwardCount,csr.ForwardCount) then
 +
        return
 +
    if p.ForwardCount > csr.ForwardCount then
 +
      { New forwarded transaction }
 +
        goto newTransaction
  
 +
Cheriton                                                      [page 74]
  
 +
    { Otherwise part of current transaction }
 +
    if csr.State = ReceivingRequest then
 +
        if new segment data then retain in CSR segment area.
 +
        if Request not complete then
 +
            Timeout( csr, TS1(p.Client), RemoteClientTimeout )
 +
            return;
 +
        endif
 +
        goto endPacketGroup
 +
    endif
 +
    if csr.State is Responded then
 +
      { Duplicate }
 +
        if csr.Code is RESPONSE_DISCARDED
 +
            and Multicast(p) then
 +
            return
 +
        endif
 +
        if not DGM(csr) then { Not idempotent }
 +
            if SegmentData(csr) then set APG
 +
            { Resend Response or Request, if Forwarded }
 +
            SendPacketGroup( csr )
 +
            timeout=if SegmentData(csr) then TS5(csr.Client)
 +
                      else TS4(csr.Client)
 +
            Timeout( csr, timeout, RemoteClientTimeout )
 +
            return
 +
        { Else idempotent - fall thru to newTransaction }
 +
    else { Presume it is a retransmission }
 +
        NotifyClient( csr, p, OK )
 +
        return
 +
else if OldTransaction(csr.RemoteTransact,p.Transaction) then
 +
    return
 +
{ Otherwise, a new message transaction. }
 +
newTransaction:
 +
Abort handling of previous transactions for this Client.
  
 +
if (NSRset(p) or NERset(p)) and NoStreaming then
 +
    NotifyClient( csr, p, STREAMING_NOT_SUPPORTED )
 +
    return
 +
|  if NSRset(p) then { Streaming }
 +
|    { Check that consecutive with previous packet group }
 +
|      Find last packet group CSR from this client.
 +
|      if p.Transaction not lastcsr.RemoteTransaction+1 mod 2**32
 +
|        and not STIset(lastcsr) or
 +
|        p.Transaction not lastcsr.RemoteTransaction+256 mod **32
 +
|        then
 +
|        { Out of order packet group }
 +
|        NotifyClient(csr, p, BAD_TRANSACTION_ID )
 +
|        return
 +
|      endif
  
 +
Cheriton                                                      [page 75]
  
 +
|      if lastcsr not completed then
 +
|          NotifyClient( lastcsr, p, RETRY )
 +
|      endif
 +
|      if lastcsr available then use it for this packet group
 +
|      else allocate and initialize new CSR
 +
|      if CMG(lastcsr) then
 +
|          Add segment data to lastcsr Request
 +
|          Keep csr as record of this packet group.
 +
|          Clear lastcsr.VerifyInterval
 +
|      endif
 +
|  else { First packet group }
 +
    if MultipleRemoteClients(csr) then ScavengeCsrs(p.Client)
 +
    Set csr.RemoteTransaction, csr.Priority
 +
    Copy message and segment data to csr's segment area
 +
      and set csr.PacketDelivery to that delivered.
 +
    Clear csr.PacketDelivery
 +
    Clear csr.VerifyInterval
 +
    SaveNetworkAddress( csr, p )
 +
endif
 +
if packetgroup not complete then
 +
    Timeout( csr, TS3(p.Client), RemoteClientTimeout )
 +
    return;
 +
endif
 +
endPacketGroup:
 +
{ We have received complete packet group. }
 +
if APG(p) then NotifyClient( csr, p, OK )
 +
endif
 +
|  if NERset(p) and CMG(p) then
 +
|      Queue waiting for continuation packet group.
 +
|      Timeout( csr, TS3(csr.Client), RemoteClientTimeout )
 +
|      return
 +
|  endif
 +
{ Deliver request message. }
 +
if GroupId(csr.Server) then
 +
    For each server identified by csr.Server
 +
        Replicate csr and associated data segment.
 +
        if CMDset(csr) and Server busy then
 +
            Discard csr and data
 +
        else
 +
            Deliver or invoke csr for each Server.
 +
        if not DGMset(csr) then queue for Response
 +
        else Timeout( csr, TS4(csr.Client), FreeCsr )
 +
    endfor
 +
  else
 +
    if CMDset(csr) and Server busy then
 +
        Discard csr and data
 +
    else
  
Cheriton                                                      [page 36]
+
Cheriton                                                      [page 76]
  
 +
        Deliver or invoke csr for this server.
 +
    if not DGMset(csr) then queue for Response
 +
    else Timeout( csr, TS4(csr.Client), FreeCsr )
 +
  endif
 +
end HandleRequest
  
 +
Notes:
  
RFC 1045                      VMTP                        February 1988
+
1. A Request received that specifies a Client that is a local
 +
  entity should be a Request forwarded by a remote server to a
 +
  local Server.
  
 +
2. An alternative structure for handling a Request sent to a
 +
  group when there are multiple local group members is to
 +
  create a remote CSR for each group member on reception of the
 +
  first packet and deliver a copy of each packet to each such
 +
  remote CSR as each packet arrives.
  
3. VMTP Packet Formats
+
Cheriton                                                      [page 77]
  
VMTP uses 2 basic packet formats corresponding to Request packets and
+
=== Management Operations ===
Response packets.  These packet formats are identical in most of the
 
fields to simplify the implementation.
 
  
We first describe the entity identifier format and the packet fields
+
VMTP uses management operations (invoked as remote procedure calls) to
that are used in general, followed by a detailed description of each of
+
effectively acknowledge packet groups and request retransmissions.  The
the packet formats.  These fields are described below in detail.  The
+
following routine is invoked by the Server's management module on
individual packet formats are described in the following subsections.
+
request from the Client.
The reader and VMTP implementor may wish to refer to Chapters 4 and 5
 
for a description of VMTP event handling and only refer to this detailed
 
description as needed.
 
  
 +
NotifyVmtpServer(server,clientId,transact,delivery,code)
 +
Find csr with same RemoteTransaction and RemoteClient
 +
as clientId and transact.
 +
if not found or csr.State not Responded then return
 +
if DGMset(csr) then
 +
    if transmission of Response in progress then
 +
        Abort transmission
 +
        if code is migrated then
 +
            restart transmission with new host addr.
 +
    if Retry then Report protocol error
 +
    return
 +
endif
 +
select on code
 +
  case RETRY:
 +
    if csr.RetransCount > MaxRetrans(clientId) then
 +
          if response data segment then
 +
              Discard data and mark as RESPONSE_DISCARDED
 +
|                if NERset(csr) and subsequent csr then
 +
|                    Deallocate csr and use later csr for
 +
|                    future duplicate suppression
 +
|                endif
 +
          return
 +
    endif
 +
    increment csr.RetransCount
 +
    Set csr.TransmissionMask to missing segment blocks,
 +
        as specified by delivery
 +
    SendPacketGroup( csr )
 +
    Timeout( csr, TS3(csr.Client), RemoteClientTimeout )
 +
  case BUSY:
 +
    if csr.TimeLimit exceeded then
 +
        if response data segment then
 +
            Discard data and mark as RESPONSE_DISCARDED
 +
|              if NERset(csr) and subsequent csr then
 +
|                  Deallocate csr and use later csr for
 +
|                  future duplicate suppression
 +
|              endif
 +
          endif
 +
    endif
 +
    Set csr.TransmissionMask for full retransmission
 +
    Clear csr.RetransCount
  
3.1. Entity Identifier Format
+
Cheriton                                                      [page 78]
  
The 64-bit non-group entity identifiers have the following substructure.
+
    Timeout( csr, TS3(csr.Server), RemoteClientTimeout )
 +
    return
  
  0                  1                  2                  3
+
  case ENTITY_MIGRATED:
  0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1
+
    Get new host address for entity
+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
+
    Set csr.TransmissionMask for full retransmission
|R| |L|R|
+
    Clear csr.RetransCount
|A|0|E|E|     Domain-specific structure
+
     SendPacketGroup( csr )
|E| |E|S|
+
    Timeout( csr, TS3(csr.Server), RemoteClientTimeout )
+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
+
    return
                Domain-specific structure                        |
 
+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
 
  
The field meanings are as follows:
+
  case default:
 +
    Abort transmission of Response if in progress.
 +
    if response data segment then
 +
        Discard data and mark as RESPONSE_DISCARDED
 +
        if NERset(csr) and subsequent csr then
 +
            Deallocate csr and use later csr for
 +
            future duplicate suppression
 +
        endif
 +
    return
 +
endselect
 +
end NotifyVmtpServer
  
RAE            Remote Alias Entity - the entity identifier identifies
+
Notes:
                an entity that is acting as an alias for some entity
 
                outside this entity domain.  This bit is used by
 
                higher-level protocols.  For instance, servers may take
 
                extra security and protection measures with aliases.
 
  
GRP            Group - 0, for non-group entity identifiers.
+
1. A NotifyVmtpServer operation requesting retransmission of
 +
  the Response is acceptable only if the Response was not
 +
  idempotent.  When the Response is idempotent, the Client must
 +
  be prepared to retransmit the Request to effectively request
 +
  retransmission of the Response.
  
LEE            Little-Endian Entity - the entity transmits data in
+
2. A NotifyVmtpServer operation may be received while the
                little-endian (VAX) order.
+
  Response is being transmitted.  If an error return, as an
 +
  efficiency, the transmission should be aborted, as suggested
 +
  when the Response is a datagram.
  
RES              Reserved - must be 0.
+
3. A NotifyVmtpServer operation indicating OK or an error
 +
  allows the Server to discard segment data and not provide for
 +
  subsequent retransmission of the Response.
  
The 64-bit entity group identifiers have the following substructure.
+
==== HandleRequestNoCSR ====
  
 +
When a Request is received from a Client for which the node has no CSR,
 +
the node allocates and initializes a CSR for this Client and does a
 +
callback to the Client's VMTP management module to get the Principal,
 +
Process and other information associated with this Client.  It also
  
 +
Cheriton                                                      [page 79]
  
 +
checks that the TransactionId is correct in order to filter out
 +
duplicates.
  
Cheriton                                                      [page 37]
+
HandleRequestNoCSR( p, psize )
 +
|  if Secure(p) then
 +
|      Allocate and init CSR
 +
|      SaveSourceHostAddr( csr, p )
 +
|      ProbeRemoteClient( csr, p, AUTH_PROBE )
 +
|      if no response or error then
 +
|          delete CSR
 +
|          return
 +
|      Decrypt( csr.Key, p, psize )
 +
|        if p.Checksum not null then
 +
|      if not VerifyChecksum(p, psize) then return;
 +
|      if OppositeByteOrder(p) then ByteSwap( p, psize )
 +
|      if psize not equal sizeof(VmtpHeader) + 4*p.Length then
 +
|          NotifyClient(NULL, p, VMTP_ERROR )
 +
|          return
 +
|      HandleRequest( csr, p, psize )
 +
|      return
 +
if Server does not exist then
 +
    NotifyClient( csr, p, NONEXISTENT_ENTITY )
 +
    return
 +
endif
 +
if security required by server then
 +
    NotifyClient(csr, p, SECURITY_REQUIRED )
 +
    return
 +
endif
 +
Allocate and init CSR
 +
SaveSourceHostAddr( csr, p );
 +
if server requires Authentication then
 +
    ProbeRemoteClient( csr, p, AUTH_PROBE )
 +
    if no response or error then
 +
        delete CSR
 +
        return
 +
endif
 +
{ Setup immediately as a new message transaction }
 +
set csr.Server to p.Server
 +
set csr.RemoteTransaction to p.Transaction-1
  
 +
HandleRequest( csr, p, psize )
 +
endif
  
 +
Notes:
  
RFC 1045                      VMTP                        February 1988
+
1. A Probe request is always handled as a Request not requiring
 +
  authentication so it never generates a callback Probe to the
  
 +
Cheriton                                                      [page 80]
  
  0                  1                  2                  3
+
  Client.
  0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1
 
+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
 
|R| |U|R|
 
|A|1|G|E|      Domain-specific structure
 
|E| |P|S|
 
+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
 
                Domain-specific structure                        |
 
+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
 
  
The field meanings are as follows:
+
2. If the Server host retains remote client CSR's for longer
 +
  than the maximum packet lifetime and the Request
 +
  retransmission time, and the host has been running for at
 +
  least that long, then it is not necessary to do a Probe
 +
  callback unless the Request is secure.  A Probe callback can
 +
  take place when the Server asks for the Process or
 +
  PrincipalId associated with the Client.
  
RAE            Remote Alias Entity - same as for non-group entity
+
Cheriton                                                      [page 81]
                identifier.
 
  
GRP            Group - 1, for entity group identifiers.
+
=== Timeouts ===
  
UGP            Unrestricted Group - no restrictions are placed on
+
The server must implement a timeout for remote client CSRsThere is a
                joining this groupI.e. any entity can join limited
+
timeout for each CSR in the server.
                only by implementation resources.
 
  
RES              Reserved - must be 0.
+
RemoteClientTimeout( csr )
 +
  select on csr.State
 +
case Responded:
 +
    if RESPONSE_DISCARDED then
 +
        mark as timed out
 +
        Make a candidate for reuse.
 +
        return
 +
    if csr.RetransCount > MaxRetrans(Client) then
 +
        discard Response
 +
        mark CSR as RESPONSE_DISCARDED
 +
        Timeout(csr, TS4(Client), RemoteClientTimeout)
 +
        return
 +
    increment csr.RetransCount
 +
    { Retransmit Response or forwarded Request }
 +
    Set APG to get acknowledgement.
 +
    SendPacketGroup( csr )
 +
    Timeout( csr, TS3(Client), RemoteClientTimeout )
 +
    return
 +
case ReceivingRequest:
 +
  if csr.RetransCount > MaxRetrans(csr.Client)
 +
      or DGMset(csr) or NRTset(csr) then
 +
      Modify csr.segmentSize and csr.MsgDelivery
 +
      to indicate packets received.
 +
      if MDMset(csr) then
 +
          Invoke processing on Request
 +
          return
 +
      else
 +
          discard Request and reuse CSR
 +
          (Note: Need not remember Request discarded.)
 +
          return
 +
  increment csr.RetransCount
 +
  NotifyClient( csr, p, RETRY )
 +
  Timeout( csr, TS3(Client), RemoteClientTimeout )
 +
  return
 +
default:
 +
    Report error - invalid state for RemoteClientTimeout
 +
endselect
 +
end RemoteClientTimeout
  
The all-zero entity identifier is reserved and guaranteed to be
+
Notes:
unallocated in all domains.  In addition, a domain may reserve part of
 
the entity identifier space for statically allocated identifiers.
 
However, this is domain-specific.
 
  
Description of currently defined entity identifier domains is provided
+
1. When a CSR in the Responded state times out after discarding
in Appendix IV.
 
  
 +
Cheriton                                                      [page 82]
  
3.2. Packet Fields
+
  the Response, it can be made available for reuse, either by
 +
  the same Client or a different one. The CSR should be kept
 +
  available for reuse by the Client for as long as possible to
 +
  avoid unnecessary callback Probes.
  
Client          64-bit identifier for the client entity associated with
+
Cheriton                                                      [page 83]
                this packet.  The structure, allocation and binding of
 
                this identifier is specific to the specified Domain.  An
 
                entity identifier always includes 4 types bits as
 
                specified in Section 3.1.
 
  
Version        The 3-bit identifier specifying the version of the
+
== Concluding Remarks ==
                protocol.  Current version is version 0.
 
  
Domain          The 13-bit identifier specifying the naming and
+
This document represents a description of the current state of the VMTP
                administration domain for the client and server named in
+
design.  We are currently engaged in several experimental
                the packet.
+
implementations to explore and refine all aspects of the protocol.
 +
Preliminary implementations are running in the UNIX 4.3BSD kernel and in
 +
the V kernel.
  
 +
Several issues are still being discussed and explored with this
 +
protocol.  First, the size of the checksum field and the algorithm to
 +
use for its calculation are undergoing some discussion.  The author
 +
believes that the conventional 16-bit checksum used with TCP and IP is
 +
too weak for future high-speed networks, arguing for at least a 32-bit
 +
checksum.  Unfortunately, there appears to be limited theory covering
 +
checksum algorithms that are suitable for calculation in software.
  
 +
Implementation of the streaming facilities of VMTP is still in progress.
 +
This facility is expected to be important for wide-area, long delay
 +
communication.
  
Cheriton                                                      [page 38]
+
Cheriton                                                      [page 84]
  
 +
I. Standard VMTP Response Codes
  
 +
The following are the numeric values of the response codes used in VMTP.
  
RFC 1045                      VMTP                        February 1988
+
0              OK
  
 +
1              RETRY
  
Packet Flags: 3 bits. (The normal case has none of the flags set.)
+
2              RETRY_ALL
  
  HCO          Header checksum only - checksum has only been calculated
+
3              BUSY
                on the header.  This is used in some real-time
 
                applications where the strict correctness of the data is
 
                not needed.
 
  
  EPG          Encrypted packet group - part of a secure message
+
4              NONEXISTENT_ENTITY
                transaction.
 
  
  MPG          Multicast packet group - packet was multicast on
+
5              ENTITY_MIGRATED
                transmission.
 
  
Length          A 13-bit field that specifies the number of 32-bit words
+
6              NO_PERMISSION
                in the segment data portion of the packet (if any),
 
                excluding the checksum field.  (Every VMTP packet is
 
                required to be a multiple of 64 bits, possibly by
 
                padding out the segment data.)  The minimum legal Length
 
                is 0, the maximum length is 4096 and it must be an even
 
                number.
 
  
Control Flags: 9 bits. (The normal case has none of the flags set.)
+
7              NOT_AWAITING_MSG
  
  NRS          Next Receive Sequence - the associated Request message
+
8              VMTP_ERROR
                (in a Response) or previous Response (if a Request) was
 
                received consecutive with the last Request from this
 
                entity.  That is, there was no interfering messages
 
                received.
 
  
  APG          Acknowledge Packet Group - Acknowledge packet group on
+
9              MSGTRANS_OVERFLOW
                receipt.  If a Request, send back a Request to the
 
                client's manager providing an update on the state of the
 
                transaction as soon as the request packet group is
 
                received, independent of the response being available.
 
                If a Response, send an update to the server's manager as
 
                soon as possible after response packet group is received
 
                providing an update on the state of the transaction at
 
                the client
 
  
  NSR          Not Start Run - 1 if this packet is not part of the
+
10              BAD_TRANSACTION_ID
                first packet group of a run of packet groups.
 
  
  NER          Not End Run - 1 if this packet is not part of the last
+
11              STREAMING_NOT_SUPPORTED
                packet group of a run of packet groups.
 
  
  NRT          No Retransmission - do not ask for retransmissions of
+
12              NO_RUN_RECORD
                this packet group if not all received within timeout
 
  
 +
13              RETRANS_TIMEOUT
  
Cheriton                                                      [page 39]
+
14              USER_TIMEOUT
  
 +
15              RESPONSE_DISCARDED
  
 +
16              SECURITY_NOT_SUPPORTED
  
RFC 1045                      VMTP                        February 1988
+
17              BAD_REPLY_SEGMENT
  
 +
18              SECURITY_REQUIRED
  
                period, just deliver or discard.
+
19              STREAMED_RESPONSE
  
  MDG          Member of Destination Group - this packet is sent to a
+
20              TOO_MANY_RETRIES
                group and the client is a member of this group.
 
  
  CMG          Continued Message - the message (Request or Response) is
+
21              NO_PRINCIPAL
                continued in the next packet group.  The next packet
 
                group has to be part of the same run of packet groups.
 
  
  STI          Skip Transaction Identifiers - the next transaction
+
Cheriton                                                      [page 85]
                identifier that the Client plans to use is the current
 
                transaction plus 256, if part of the same run and at
 
                least this big if not.  In a Request, this authorizes
 
                the Server to send back up to 256 packet groups
 
                containing the Response.
 
  
  DRT          Delay Response Transmission - set by request sender if
+
22              NO_KEY
                multiple responses are expected (as indicated by the MRD
 
                flag in the RequestCode) and it may be overrun by
 
                multiple responses.  The responder(s) should then
 
                introduce a short random delay in sending the Response
 
                to minimize the danger of overrunning the Client.  This
 
                is normally only used for responding to multicast
 
                Requests where the Client may be receiving a large
 
                number of Responses, as indicated by the MRD flag in the
 
                Request flags.  Otherwise, the Response is sent
 
                immediately.
 
  
RetransmitCount:
+
23              ENCRYPTION_NOT_SUPPORTED
                3 bits - the ordinal number of transmissions of this
 
                packet group prior to this one, modulo 8.  This field is
 
                used in estimation of roundtrip times.  This count may
 
                wrap around during a message transaction.  However, it
 
                should be sufficient to match acknowledgments and
 
                responses with a particular transmission.
 
  
ForwardCount:  4 bits indicating the number of times this Request has
+
24              NO_AUTHENTICATOR
                been forwarded.  The original Request is always sent
 
                with a ForwardCount of 0.
 
  
Interpacket Gap: 8 bits. 
+
25-63          Reserved for future VMTP assignment.
                Indicates the recommended time to use between subsequent
 
                packet transmissions within a multi-packet packet group
 
                transmission.  The Interpacket Gap time is in 1/32nd of
 
                a network packet transmission time for a packet of size
 
                MTU for the node.  (Thus, the maximum gap time is 8
 
                packet times.)
 
  
 +
Other values of the codes are available for use by higher level
 +
protocols.  Separate protocol documents will specify further standard
 +
values.
  
Cheriton                                                      [page 40]
+
Applications are free to use values starting at 0x00800000 (hex) for
 +
application-specific return values.
  
 +
Cheriton                                                      [page 86]
  
 +
II. VMTP RPC Presentation Protocol
  
RFC 1045                      VMTP                       February 1988
+
For complete generality, the mapping of the procedures and the
 +
parameters onto VMTP messages should be defined by a RPC presentation
 +
protocol.  In the absence of an accepted standard protocol, we define an
 +
RPC presentation protocol for VMTP as follows.
  
 +
Each procedure is assigned an identifying Request Code.  The Request
 +
code serves effectively the same as a tag field of variant record,
 +
identifying the format of the Request and associated Response as a
 +
variant of the possible message formats.
  
PGcount: 8 bits
+
The format of the Request for a procedure is its Request Code followed
                The number of packet groups that this packet group
+
by its parameters sequentially in the message control block until it is
                represents in addition to that specified by the
+
full.
                Transaction field.  This is used in acknowledging
 
                multiple packet groups in streamed communication.
 
  
Priority        4-bit identifier for priority for the processing of this
+
The remaining parameters are sent as part of the message segment data
                request both on transmission and receptionThe
+
formatted according to the XDR protocol (RFC ??)In this case, the
                interpretation is:
+
size of the segment is specified in the SegmentSize field.
  
                1100            urgent/emergency
+
The Response for a procedure consists of a ResponseCode field followed
 +
by the return parameters sequentially in the message control block,
 +
except if there is a parameter returned that must be transmitted as
 +
segment data, its size is specified in the SegmentSize field and the
 +
parameter is stored in the SegmentData field.
  
                1000            important
+
Attributes associated with procedure definitions should indicate the
 +
Flags to be used in the RequestCode.  Request Codes are assigned as
 +
described below.
  
                0000            normal
+
II.1. Request Code Management
  
                0100            background
+
Request codes are divided into Public Interface Codes and
 +
application-specific, according to whether the PIC value is set.  An
 +
interface is a set of request codes representing one service or module
 +
function.  A public interface is one that is to be used in multiple
 +
independently developed modules.  In VMTP, public interface codes are
 +
allocated in units of 256 structured as
  
                Viewing the higher-order bit as a sign bit (with 1
+
+-------------+----------------+-------------------+
                meaning negative), low values are high priority and high
+
| ControlFlags|  Interface    | Version/Procedure |
                values are low priorityThe low-order 2 bits indicate
+
+-------------+----------------+-------------------+
                additional (lower) gradations for each level.
+
8 bits          16 bits              8 bits
 +
 +
An interface is free to allocate the 8 bits for version and procedure as
 +
desiredFor example, all 8 bits can be used for procedures. A module
 +
requiring more than 256 Version/Procedure values can be allocated
  
Function Code: 1 bit - types of VMTP packets.  If the low-order bit of
+
Cheriton                                                      [page 87]
                the function code is 0, the packet is sent to the
 
                Server, else it is sent to the Client.
 
  
                0              Request
+
multiple Interface values.  They need not be consecutive Interface
 +
values.
  
                1              Response
+
Cheriton                                                      [page 88]
  
Transaction: 32 bits: 
+
III. VMTP Management Procedures
                Identifier for this message transaction.
 
  
PacketDelivery: 32 bits: 
+
Standard procedures are defined for VMTP management, including creation,
                Delivery indicates the segment blocks contained in this
+
deletion and query of entities and entity groups, probing to get
                packet.  Each bit corresponds to one 512-octet block of
+
information about entities, and updating message transaction information
                segment data.  A 1 bit in the i-th bit position
+
at the client or the server.
                (counting the LSB as 0) indicates the presence of the
 
                i-th segment block.
 
  
Server: 64 bits
+
The procedures are implemented by the VMTP manager that constitutes a
                Entity identifier for the server or server group
+
portion of every complete VMTP module.  Each procedure is invoked by
                associated with this transactionThis is the receiver
+
sending a Request to the VMTP manager that handles the entity specified
                when a Request packet and the sender when a Response
+
in the operation or the local manager.  The Request sent using the
                packet.
+
normal Send operation with the Server specified as the well-known entity
 +
group VMTP_MANGER_GROUP, using the CoResident Entity mechanism to direct
 +
the request to the specific manager that should handle the Request.
 +
(The ProbeEntity operation is multicast to the VMTP_MANAGER_GROUP if the
 +
host address for the entity is not known locally and the host address is
 +
determined as the host address of the responderFor all other
 +
operations, a ProbeEntity operation is used to determine the host
 +
address if it is not known.)  Specifying co-resident entity 0 is
 +
interpreted as the co-resident with the invoking process.  The
 +
co-resident entity identifier may also specify a group in which case,
 +
the Request is sent to all managers with members in this group.
  
 +
The standard procedures with their RequestCode and parameters are listed
 +
below with their semantics.  (The RequestCode range 0xVV000100 to
 +
0xVV0001FF is reserved for use by the VMTP management routines, where VV
 +
is any choice of control flags with the PIC bit set.  The flags are set
 +
below as required for each procedure.)
  
 +
0x05000101 - ProbeEntity(CREntity, entityId, authDomain) -> (code,
 +
            <staterec>)
 +
            Request and return information on the specified entity
 +
            in the specified authDomain, sending the Request to the
 +
            VMTP management module coresident with CREntity.  An
 +
            error return is given if the requested information
 +
            cannot be provided in the specified authDomain.  The
 +
            <staterec> returned is structured as the following
 +
            fields.
  
Cheriton                                                      [page 41]
+
            Transaction identifier
 +
                            The current or next transaction
 +
                            identifier being used by the probed
 +
                            entity.
  
 +
            ProcessId: 64 bits
 +
                            Identifier for client process.  The
 +
                            meaning of this is specified as part of
  
 +
Cheriton                                                      [page 89]
  
RFC 1045                      VMTP                        February 1988
+
                            the Domain definition.
  
 +
            PrincipalId    The identifier for the principal or
 +
                            account associated with the process
 +
                            specified by ProcessId.  The meaning of
 +
                            this field is specified as part of the
 +
                            Domain definition.
  
Code: 32 bits  The Request Code and Response Code, set either at the
+
            EffectivePrincipalId
                user level or VMTP level depending on use and packet
+
                            The identifier for the principal or
                typeBoth the Request and Response codes include 8
+
                            account associated with the Client port,
                high-order bits from the following set of control bits:
+
                            which may be different from the
 +
                            PrincipalId especially if this is an
 +
                            nested callThe meaning of this field
 +
                            is specified as part of the Domain
 +
                            definition.
  
  CMD          Conditional Message Delivery - only deliver the request
+
            The code field indicates whether this is an error
                or response if the receiving entity is waiting for it at
+
            response or not. The codes and their interpretation
                the time of delivery, otherwise drop the message.
+
            are:
 +
 
 +
              OK
 +
            No error. Probe was completed OK.
 +
 
 +
              NONEXISTENT_ENTITY
 +
            Specified entity does not exist.
  
  DGM          DataGram Message - indicates that the message is being
+
              ENTITY_MIGRATED
                sent as a datagram.  If a Request message, do not wait
+
            The entity has migrated and is no longer at the host to
                for reply, or retransmit.  If a Response message, treat
+
            which the request was sent.
                this message transaction as idempotent.
 
  
  MDM          Message Delivery Mask - indicates that the MsgDelivery
+
              NO_PERMISSION
                field is being used.  Otherwise, the MsgDelivery field
+
            Entity has refused to provide ProbeResponse.
                is available for general use.
 
  
  SDA          Segment Data Appended - segment data is appended to the
+
              VMTP_ERROR
                message control block, with the total size of the
+
            The Request packet group was in error relative to the
                segment specified by the SegmentSize field.  Otherwise,
+
            VMTP protocol specification.
                the segment data is null and the SegmentSize field is
 
                not used by VMTP and available for user- or RPC-level
 
                uses.
 
  
  CRE          CoResident Entity - indicates that the CoResidentEntity
+
              "default"
                field in the message should be interpreted by VMTP.
+
            Some type of error - discard ProbeResponse.
                Otherwise, this field is available for additional user
 
                data.
 
  
  MRD          Multiple Responses Desired - multiple Responses are
+
0x0D000102 - AuthProbeEntity(CREntity,entityId,authDomain,randomId) ->
                desired to to this Request if it is multicast.
+
            (code,ProbeAuthenticator,EncryptType,EntityAuthenticator)
                Otherwise, the VMTP module can discard subsequent
+
           
                Responses after the first Response.
+
            Request authentication of the entity specified by
 +
            entityId from the VMTP manager coresident with CREntity
 +
            in authDomain authentication domain, returning the
  
  PIC          Public Interface Code - Values for Code with this bit
+
Cheriton                                                      [page 90]
                set are reserved for definition by the VMTP
 
                specification and other standard protocols defined on
 
                top of VMTP.
 
  
  RES          Reserved for future use. Must be 0.
+
            information contained in the return parameters.  The
 +
            fields are set the same as that specified for the basic
 +
            ProbeResponse except as noted below.
  
CoResidentEntity
+
            ProbeAuthenticator
                64-bit Identifier for an entity or group of entities
+
                            20 bytes consisting of the EntityId, the
                with which the Server entity or entities must be
+
                            randomId and the probed Entity's current
                co-resident, i.e. route only to entities (identified by
+
                            Transaction value plus a 32-bit checksum
                Server) on the same host(s) as that specified by
+
                            for these two fields (checksummed using
 +
                            the standard packet Checksum algorithm),
 +
                            all encrypted with the Key supplied in
 +
                            the Authenticator.
  
 +
            EncryptType    An identifier that identifies the
 +
                            variant of encryption method being used
 +
                            by the probed Entity for packets it
 +
                            transmits and packets it is able to
 +
                            receive.  (See Appendix V.)  The
 +
                            high-order 8 bits of the EncryptType
 +
                            contain the XOR of the 8 octets of the
 +
                            PrincipalId associated with private key
 +
                            used to encrypt the EntityAuthenticator.
 +
                            This value is used by the requestor or
 +
                            Client as an aid in locating the key to
 +
                            decrypt the authenticator.
  
Cheriton                                                      [page 42]
+
            EntityAuthenticator
 +
                            (returned as segment data) The
 +
                            ProcessId, PrincipalId,
 +
                            EffectivePrincipal associated with the
 +
                            ProbedEntity plus the private
 +
                            encryption/decryption key and its
 +
                            lifetime limit to be used for
 +
                            communication with the Entity.  The
 +
                            authenticator is encrypted with a
 +
                            private key associated with the Client
 +
                            entity such that it can be neither read
 +
                            nor forged by a party not trusted by the
 +
                            Client Entity.  The format of the
 +
                            Authenticator in the message segment is
 +
                            shown in detail in Figure III-1.
  
 +
            Key: 64 bits    Encryption key to be used for encrypting
 +
                            and decrypting packets sent to and
 +
                            received from the probed Entity.  This
 +
                            is the "working" key for packet
 +
                            transmissions.  VMTP only uses private
  
 +
Cheriton                                                      [page 91]
  
RFC 1045                       VMTP                        February 1988
+
            +-----------------------------------------------+
 +
            |            ProcessId  (8 octets)            |
 +
            +-----------------------------------------------+
 +
            |          PrincipalId  (8 octets)            |
 +
            +-----------------------------------------------+
 +
            |          EffectivePrincipalId  (8 octets)    |
 +
            +-----------------------------------------------+
 +
            |            Key  (8 octets)                    |
 +
            +-----------------------------------------------+
 +
            |              KeyTimeLimit                    |
 +
            +-----------------------------------------------+
 +
            |              AuthDomain                       |
 +
            +-----------------------------------------------+
 +
            |              AuthChecksum                    |
 +
            +-----------------------------------------------+
  
 +
              Figure III-1:  Authenticator Format
  
                CoResidentEntity, Only meaningful if CRE is set in the
+
                            key encryption for data transmission.
                Code field.
 
  
User Data      12 octets Space in the header for the VMTP user to
+
            KeyTimeLimit: 32 bits
                specify user-specific control and data.
+
                            The time in seconds since Dec. 31st,
 +
                            1969 GMT at which one should cease to
 +
                            use the Key.
  
MsgDelivery: 32 bits  
+
            AuthDomain: 32 bits  
                The segment blocks being transmitted (in total) in this
+
                            The authentication domain in which to
                packet group following the conventions for the
+
                            interpret the principal identifiers.
                PacketDelivery field.  This field is ignored by the
+
                            This may be different from the
                protocol and treated as an additional user data field if
+
                            authDomain specified in the call if the
                MDM is 0.  On transmission, the user level sets the
+
                            Server cannot provide the authentication
                MsgDelivery to indicate those portions of the segment to
+
                            information in the request domain.
                be transmitted.  On receipt, the MsgDelivery field is
 
                modified by the VMTP module to indicate the segment data
 
                blocks that were actually received before the message
 
                control block is passed to the user or RPC level.  In
 
                particular, the kernel does not discard the packet group
 
                if segment data blocks are missing.  A Server or Client
 
                entity receiving a message with a MsgDelivery in use
 
                must check the field to ensure adequate delivery and
 
                retry the operation if necessary.
 
  
SegmentSize: 32 bits  
+
            AuthChecksum: 32 bits  
                Size of segment in octets, up to a maximum of 16
+
                            Contains the checksum (using the same
                kilooctets without streaming and 4 megaoctets with
+
                            Checksum algorithm as for packet) of
                streaming, if SDA is set.  Otherwise, this field is
+
                            KeyTimeLimit, Key, PrincipalId and
                ignored by the protocol and treated as an additional
+
                            EffectivePrincipalId.
                user data field.
 
  
Segment Data: 0-16 kilooctets
+
            Notes:
                0 octets if SDA is 0, else the portion of the segment
 
                corresponding to the Delivery Mask, limited by the
 
                SegmentSize and the MTU, padded out to a multiple of 64
 
                bits.
 
  
Checksum: 32 bits.
+
                1. A authentication Probe Request and Response
                The 32-bit checksum for the header and segment data.
+
                  are sent unencrypted in general because it is
 +
                  used prior to there being a secure channel.
 +
                  Therefore, specific fields or groups of
 +
                  fields checksummed and encrypted to prevent
 +
                  unauthorized modification or forgery. In
  
 +
Cheriton                                                      [page 92]
  
The VMTP checksum algorithm <9> develops a 32-bit checksum by computing
+
                  particular, the ProbeAuthenticator is
 +
                  checksummed and encrypted with the Key.
  
_______________
+
                2. The ProbeAuthenticator authenticates the
 +
                  Response as responding to the Request when
 +
                  its EntityId, randomId and Transaction values
 +
                  match those in the Probe request.  The
 +
                  ProbeAutenticator is bound to the
 +
                  EntityAutenticator by being encrypted by the
 +
                  private Key contained in that authenticator.
  
<9> This algorithm and description are largely due to Steve Deering of
+
                3. The authenticator is encrypted such that it
Stanford University.
+
                  can be decrypted by a private key, known to
 +
                  the Client. This authenticator is presumably
 +
                  obtained from a key distribution center that
 +
                  the Client trusts.  The AuthChecksum prevents
 +
                  undetected modifications to the
 +
                  authenticator.
  
 +
0x05000103 - ProbeEntityBlock( entityId ) -> ( code, entityId )
 +
            Check whether the block of 256 entity identifiers
 +
            associated with this entityId are in use.  The entityId
 +
            returned should match that being queried or else the
 +
            return value should be ignored and the operation redone.
  
Cheriton                                                      [page 43]
+
0x05000104 - QueryVMTPNode( entityId ) -> (code, MTU, flags, authdomain,
 +
            domains, authdomains, domainlist)
 +
            Query the VMTP management module for entityId to get
 +
            various module- or node-wide parameters, including:  (1)
 +
            MTU - Maximum transmission unit or packet size handled
 +
            by this node.  (2) flags- zero or more of the following
 +
            bit fields:
  
 +
            1              Handles streamed Requests.
  
 +
            2              Can issue streamed message transactions
 +
                            for clients.
  
RFC 1045                      VMTP                        February 1988
+
            4              Handles secure Requests.
  
 +
            8              Can issue secure message transactions.
  
two 16-bit, ones-complement sums (like IP), each covering different
+
            The authdomain indicates the primary authentication
parts of the packet.  The packet is divided into clusters of 16 16-bit
+
            domain supported.  The domains and authdomains
words.  The first, third, fifth,... clusters are added to the first sum,
+
            parameters indicate the number of entity domains and
and the second, fourth, sixth,... clusters are added to the second sum.
+
            authentication domains supported by this node, which are
Addition stops at the end of the packet; there is no need to pad out to
+
            listed in the data segment parameter domainlist if
a cluster boundary (although it is necessary that the packet be an
 
integral multiple of 64 bits; padding octets may have any value and are
 
included in the checksum and in the transmitted packet).  If either of
 
the resulting sums is zero, it is changed to 0xFFFF.  The two sums are
 
appended to the transmitted packet, with the first sum being transmitted
 
first.  Four bytes of zero in place of the checksum may be used to
 
indicate that no checksum was computed.
 
  
The 16-bit, ones-complement addition in this algorithm is the same as
+
Cheriton                                                      [page 93]
used in IP and, therefore, subject to the same optimizations. In
+
 
particular, the words may be added up 32-bits at a time as long as the
+
            either parameter is non-zero. (All the entity domains
carry-out of each addition is added to the sum on the following
+
            precede the authentication domains in the data segment.)
addition, using an "add-with-carry" type of instruction.  (64-bit or
+
 
128-bit additions would also work on machines that have registers that
+
0x05000105 - GetRequestForwarder( CREntity, entityId1 ) -> (code,
big.)
+
            entityId2, principal, authDomain)
 +
            Return the forwarding server's entity identifer and
 +
            principal for the forwarder of entityId1.  CREntity
 +
            should be zero to get the local VMTP management module.
 +
 
 +
0x05000106 - CreateEntity( entityId1 ) -> ( code, entityId2 )
 +
            Create a new entity and return its entity identifier in
 +
            entityId2.  The entity is created local to the entity
 +
            specified in entityId1 and local to the requestor if
 +
            entityId1 is 0.
 +
 
 +
0x05000107 - DeleteEntity( entityId ) -> ( code )
 +
            Delete the entity specified by entityId, which may be a
 +
            group.  If a group, the deletion is only on a best
 +
            efforts basisThe client must take additional measures
 +
            to ensure complete deletion if required.
 +
 
 +
0x0D000108 -QueryEntity( entityId ) -> ( code, descriptor )
 +
            Return a descriptor of entityId in arg of a maximum of
 +
            segmentSize bytes.
  
A particular weakness of this algorithm (shared by IP) is that it does
+
0x05000109 - SignalEntity( entityId, arg )->( code )  
not detect the erroneous swapping of 16-bit words, which may easily
+
            Send the signal specified by arg to the entity specified
occur due to software errorsA future version of VMTP is expected to
+
            by entityId(arg is 32 bits.)
include a more secure algorithm, but such an algorithm appears to
 
require hardware support for efficient execution.
 
  
Not all of these fields are used in every packet.  The specific packet
+
0x0500010A - CreateGroup(CREntity,entityGroupId,entityId,perms)->(code)
formats are described belowIf a field is not mentioned in the
+
            Request that the VMTP manager local to CREntity create
description of a packet type, its use is assumed to be clear from the
+
            an new entity group, using the specified entityGroupId
above description.
+
            with entityId as the first member and permissions
 +
            "perms", a 32-bit field described laterThe invoker is
 +
            registered as a manager of the new group, giving it the
 +
            permissions to add or remove members.  (Normally
 +
            CREntity is 0, indicating the VMTP manager local to the
 +
            requestor.)
  
 +
0x0500010B - AddToGroup(CREntity, entityGroupId, entityId,
 +
            perms)->(code)
 +
            Request that the VMTP manager local to CREntity add the
 +
            specified entityId to the entityGroupId with the
 +
            specified permissions.  If entityGroupId specifies a
 +
            restricted group, the invoker must have permission to
 +
            add members to the group, either because the invoker is
  
 +
Cheriton                                                      [page 94]
  
 +
            a manager of the group or because it was added to the
 +
            group with the required permissions.  If CREntity is 0,
 +
            then the local VMTP manager checks permissions and
 +
            forwards the request with CREntity set to entityId and
 +
            the entityId field set to a digital signature (see
 +
            below) of the Request by the VMTP manager, certifying
 +
            that the Client has the permissions required by the
 +
            Request.  (If entityGroupId specifies an unrestricted
 +
            group, the Request can be sent directly to the handling
 +
            VMTP manager by setting CREntity to entityId.)
  
 +
0x0500010C - RemoveFromGroup(CREntity, entityGroupId, entityId)->(code)
 +
            Request that the VMTP manager local to CREntity remove
 +
            the specified entityId from the group specified by
 +
            entityGroupId.  Normally CREntity is 0, indicating the
 +
            VMTP manager local to the requestor.  If CREntity is 0,
 +
            then the local VMTP manager checks permissions and
 +
            forwards the request with CREntity set to entityId and
 +
            the entityId field a digital signature of the Request by
 +
            the VMTP manager, certifying that the Client has the
 +
            permissions required by the Request.
  
 +
0x0500010D - QueryGroup( entityId )->( code, record )... 
 +
            Return information on the specified entity.  The
 +
            Response from each responding VMTP manager is (code,
 +
            record).  The format of the record is (memberCount,
 +
            member1, member2, ...).  The Responses are returned on a
 +
            best efforts basis; there is no guarantee that responses
 +
            from all managers with members in the specified group
 +
            will be received.
  
 +
0x0500010E - ModifyService(entityId,flags,count,pc,threadlist)->(code,
 +
            count)
 +
            Modify the service associated with the entity specified
 +
            by entityId.  The flags may indicate a message service
 +
            model, in which case the call "count" parameter
 +
            indicates the maximum number of queued messages desired;
 +
            the return "count" parameter indicates the number of
 +
            queued message allowed.  Alternatively, the "flags"
 +
            parameters indicates the RPC thread service model, in
 +
            which case "count" threads are requested, each with an
 +
            inital program counter as specified and stack, priority
 +
            and message receive area indicated by the threadlist.
 +
            In particular, "threadlist" consists of "count" records
 +
            of the form
 +
            (priority,stack,stacksize,segment,segmentsize), each one
 +
            assigned to one of the threads.  Flags defined for the
  
 +
Cheriton                                                      [page 95]
  
 +
            "flags" parameter are:
  
 +
            1              THREAD_SERVICE - otherwise the message
 +
                            model.
  
 +
            2              AUTHENTICATION_REQUIRED - Sent a Probe
 +
                            request to determine principal
 +
                            associated with the Client, if not
 +
                            known.
  
 +
            4              SECURITY_REQUIRED - Request must be
 +
                            encrypted or else reject.
  
 +
            8              INCREMENTAL - treat the count value as
 +
                            an increment (or decrement) relative to
 +
                            the current value rather than an
 +
                            absolute value for the maximum number of
 +
                            queued messages or threads.
  
 +
            In the thread model, the count must be a positive
 +
            increment or else 0, which disables the service.  Only a
 +
            count of 0 terminates currently queued requests or
 +
            in-progress request handling.
  
 +
0x4500010F -
 +
            NotifyVmtpClient(client,cntrl,recSeq,transact,delivery,code)->()
 +
           
 +
            Update the state associated with the transaction
 +
            specified by client and transact, an entity identifier
 +
            and transaction identifier, respectively.  This
 +
            operation is normally used only by another VMTP
 +
            management module.  (Note that it is a datagram
 +
            operation.)  The other parameters are as follows:
  
 +
            ctrl            A 32-bit value corresponding to 4th
 +
                            32-bit word of the VMTP header of a
 +
                            Response packet that would be sent in
 +
                            response to the Request that this is
 +
                            responding to.  That is, the control
 +
                            flags, ForwardCount, RetransmitCount and
 +
                            Priority fields match those of the
 +
                            Request.  (The NRS flag is set if the
 +
                            receiveSeqNumber field is used.)  The
 +
                            PGCount subfield indicates the number of
 +
                            previous Request packet groups being
 +
                            acknowledged by this Notify operation.
 +
                            (The bit fields that are reserved in
  
 +
Cheriton                                                      [page 96]
  
 +
                            this word in the header are also
 +
                            reserved here and must be zero.)
  
Cheriton                                                      [page 44]
+
            recSeq          Sequence number of reception at the
 +
                            Server if the NRS flag is set in the
 +
                            ctrl parameter, otherwise reserved and
 +
                            zero.  (This is used for sender-based
 +
                            logging of message activity for replay
 +
                            in case of failure - an optional
 +
                            facility.)
  
 +
            delivery        Indicates the segment blocks of the
 +
                            packet group have been received at the
 +
                            Server.
  
 +
            code            indicates the action the client should
 +
                            take, as described below.
  
RFC 1045                      VMTP                       February 1988
+
            The VMTP management module should take action on this
 +
            operation according to the code, as specified below.
  
 +
            OK              Do nothing at this time, continue
 +
                            waiting for the response with a reset
 +
                            timer.
  
3.3. Request Packet
+
            RETRY          Retransmit the request packet group
 +
                            immediately with at least the segment
 +
                            blocks that the Server failed to
 +
                            receive, the complement of those
 +
                            indicated by the delivery parameter.
  
The Request packet (or packet group) is sent from the client to the
+
            RETRY_ALL      Retransmit the request packet group
server or group of servers to solicit processing plus the return of zero
+
                            immediately with at least the segment
or more responsesA Request packet is identified by a 0 in the LSB of
+
                            blocks that the Server failed to
the fourth 32-bit word in the packet.
+
                            receive, as indicated by the delivery
 +
                            field plus all subsequently transmitted
 +
                            packets that are part of this packet
 +
                            run(The latter is applicable only for
 +
                            streamed message transactions.)
  
  0                  1                  2                  3
+
            BUSY            The server was unable to accept the
  0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1
+
                            Request at this time. Retry later if
  +-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
+
                             desired to continue with the message
+                      Client (8 octets)                      +
+
                             transaction.
+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
 
|Ver  |                        |H|E|M|                        |
 
|sion |          Domain        |C|P|P|      Length            |
 
|    |                        |O|G|G|                        |
 
+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
 
|N|A|N|N|N|M|C|S|D|Retra|Forward|    Inter-    |      |R|R|R| |
 
|R|P|S|E|R|D|M|T|R|nsmit| Count |    Packet    | Prior |E|E|E|0|
 
|S|G|R|R|T|G|G|I|T|Count|      |    Gap      | -ity  |S|S|S| |
 
+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
 
|                      Transaction                             |
 
+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
 
|                    PacketDelivery                            |
 
+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
 
+                    Server (8 octets)                          +
 
+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
 
|C|D|M|S|R|C|M|P|                                              |
 
|M|G|D|D|E|R|R|I|        RequestCode                            |
 
|D|M|M|A|S|E|D|C|                                              |
 
+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
 
+                CoResidentEntity (8 octets)                  +
 
+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
 
>                  User Data (12 octets)                      <
 
+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
 
|                      MsgDelivery                             |
 
+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
 
|                      SegmentSize                            |
 
+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
 
>                  segment data, if any                        <
 
+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
 
|                        Checksum                              |
 
+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
 
  
                  Figure 3-1:  Request Packet Format
+
            NONEXISTENT_ENTITY
 +
                            Specified Server entity does not exist.
  
The fields of the Request packet are set according to the semantics
+
Cheriton                                                      [page 97]
described in Section 3.2 with the following qualifications.
 
  
 +
            ENTITY_MIGRATED The server entity has migrated and is no
 +
                            longer at the host to which the request
 +
                            was sent.  The Server should attempt to
 +
                            determine the new host address of the
 +
                            Client using the VMTP management
 +
                            ProbeEntity operation (described
 +
                            earlier).
  
Cheriton                                                      [page 45]
+
            NO_PERMISSION  Server has not authorized reception of
 +
                            messages from this client.
  
 +
            NOT_AWAITING_MSG
 +
                            The conditional message delivery bit was
 +
                            set for the Request packet group and the
 +
                            Server was not waiting for it so the
 +
                            Request packet group was discarded.
  
 +
            VMTP_ERROR      The Request packet group was in error
 +
                            relative to the VMTP protocol
 +
                            specification.
  
RFC 1045                      VMTP                        February 1988
+
            BAD_TRANSACTION_ID
 +
                            Transaction identifier is old relative
 +
                            to the transaction identifier held for
 +
                            the Client by the Server.
  
 +
            STREAMING_NOT_SUPPORTED
 +
                            Server does not support multiple
 +
                            outstanding message transactions from
 +
                            the same Client, i.e. streamed message
 +
                            transactions.
  
InterPacketGap  The estimated interpacket gap time the client would like
+
            SECURITY_NOT_SUPPORTED
                for the Response packet group to be sent by the Server
+
                            The Request was secure and this Server
                in responding to this Request.
+
                            does not support security.
  
Transaction    Identifier for transaction, at least one greater than
+
            SECURITY_REQUIRED
                the previously issued Request from this Client.
+
                            The Server is refusing the Request
 +
                            because it was not encrypted.
  
Server         Server to which this Request is destined.
+
            NO_RUN_RECORD  Server has no record of previous packets
 +
                            in this run of packet groups.  This can
 +
                            occur if the first packet group is lost
 +
                            or if the current packet group is sent
 +
                            significantly later than the last one
 +
                            and the Server has discarded its client
 +
                            state record.
  
RequestCode    Request code for this request, indicating the operation
+
Cheriton                                                      [page 98]
                to perform.
 
  
 +
0x45000110 - NotifyVmtpServer(server,client,transact,delivery,code)->()
 +
            Update the server state associated with the transaction
 +
            specified by client and transact, an entity identifier
 +
            and transaction identifier, respectively.  This
 +
            operation is normally used only by another VMTP
 +
            management module.  (Note that it is a datagram
 +
            operation.)  The other parameters are as follows:
  
 +
            delivery        Indicates the segment blocks of the
 +
                            Response packet group that have been
 +
                            received at the Client.
  
 +
            code            indicates the action the Server should
 +
                            take, as listed below.
  
 +
            The VMTP management module should take action on this
 +
            operation according to the code, as specified below.
  
 +
            OK              Client is satisfied with Response data.
 +
                            The Server can discard the response
 +
                            data, if any.
  
 +
            RETRY          Retransmit the Response packet group
 +
                            immediately with at least the segment
 +
                            blocks that the Client failed to
 +
                            receive, as indicated by the delivery
 +
                            parameter.  (The delivery parameter
 +
                            indicates those segment blocks received
 +
                            by the Client).
  
 +
            RETRY_ALL      Retransmit the Response packet group
 +
                            immediately with at least the segment
 +
                            blocks that the Client failed to
 +
                            receive, as indicated by the (complement
 +
                            of) the delivery parameter.  Also,
 +
                            retransmit all Response packet groups
 +
                            send subsequent to the specified packet
 +
                            group.
  
 +
            NONEXISTENT_ENTITY
 +
                            Specified Client entity does not exist.
  
 +
            ENTITY_MIGRATED The Client entity has migrated and is no
 +
                            longer at the host to which the response
 +
                            was sent.
  
 +
            RESPONSE_DISCARDED
  
 +
Cheriton                                                      [page 99]
  
 +
                            The Response was discarded and no longer
 +
                            of interest to the Client.  This may
 +
                            occur if the conditional message
 +
                            delivery bit was set for the Response
 +
                            packet group and the Client was not
 +
                            waiting for it so the Response packet
 +
                            group was discarded.
  
 +
            VMTP_ERROR      The Response packet group was in error
 +
                            relative to the VMTP protocol
 +
                            specification.
  
 +
0x41000111 -
 +
            NotifyRemoteVmtpClient(client,ctrl,recSeq,transact,delivery,code->()
 +
           
 +
            The same as NotifyVmtpClient except the co-resident
 +
            addressing is not used.  This operation is used to
 +
            update client state that is remote when a Request is
 +
            forwarded.
  
 +
Note the use of the CRE bit in the RequestCodes to route the request to
 +
the correct VMTP management module(s) to handle the request.
  
 +
III.1. Entity Group Management
  
 +
An entity in a group has a set of permissions associated with its
 +
membership, controling whether it can add or remove others, whether it
 +
can remove itself, and whether others can remove it from the group.  The
 +
permissions for entity groups are as follows:
 +
VMTP_GRP_MANAGER    0x00000001 { Manager of group. }
 +
VMTP_REM_BY_SELF    0x00000002 { Can be removed self. }
 +
VMTP_REM_BY_PRIN    0x00000004 { Can be rem'ed by same principal}
 +
VMTP_REM_BY_OTHE    0x00000008 { Can be removed any others. }
 +
VMTP_ADD_PRIN      0x00000010 { Can add by same principal. }
 +
VMTP_ADD_OTHE      0x00000020 { Can add any others. }
 +
VMTP_REM_PRIN      0x00000040 { Can remove same principal. }
 +
VMTP_REM_OTHE      0x00000080 { Can remove any others. }
  
 +
To remove an entity from a restricted group, the invoker must have
 +
permission to remove that entity and the entity must have permissions
 +
that allow it to be removed by that entity.  With an unrestricted group,
 +
only the latter condition applies.
  
 +
With a restricted group, a member can only be added by another entity
 +
with the permissions to add other entities.  The creator of a group is
 +
given full permissions on a group.  A entity adding another entity to a
  
 +
Cheriton                                                      [page 100]
  
 +
group can only give the entity it adds a subset of its permissions.
 +
With unrestricted groups, any entity can add itself to the group.  It
 +
can also add other entities to the group providing the entity is not
 +
marked as immune to such requests.  (This is an implementation
 +
restriction that individual entities can impose.)
  
 +
III.2. VMTP Management Digital Signatures
  
 +
As mentioned above, the entityId field of the AddToGroup and
 +
RemoveFromGroup is used to transmit a digital signature indicating the
 +
permission for the operation has been checked by the sending kernel.
 +
The digital signature procedures have not yet been defined.  This field
 +
should be set to 0 for now to indicate no signature after the CREntity
 +
parameter is set to the entity on which the operation is to be
 +
performed.
  
 +
Cheriton                                                      [page 101]
  
 +
IV. VMTP Entity Identifier Domains
  
 +
VMTP allows for several disjoint naming domains for its endpoints.  The
 +
64-bit entity identifier is only unique and meaningful within its
 +
domain.  Each domain can define its own algorithm or mechanism for
 +
assignment of entity identifiers, although each domain mechanism must
 +
ensure uniqueness, stability of identifiers and host independence.
  
 +
IV.1. Domain 1
  
 +
For initial use of VMTP, we define the domain with Domain identifier 1
 +
as follows:
  
 +
+-----------+----------------+------------------------+
 +
| TypeFlags | Discriminator  |    Internet Address    |
 +
+-----------+----------------+------------------------+
 +
4 bits          28 bits                32 bits
 +
 +
The Internet address is the Internet address of the host on which this
 +
entity-id is originally allocated.  The Discriminator is an arbitrary
 +
value that is unique relative to this Internet host address.  In
 +
addition, the host must guarantee that this identifier does not get
 +
reused for a long period of time after it becomes invalid.  ("Invalid"
 +
means that no VMTP module considers in bound to an entity.)  One
 +
technique is to use the lower order bits of a 1 second clock.  The clock
 +
need not represent real-time but must never be set back after a crash.
 +
In a simple implementation, using the low order bits of a clock as the
 +
time stamp, the generation of unique identifiers is overall limited to
 +
no more than 1 per second on average.  The type flags were described in
 +
Section 3.1.
  
 +
An entity may migrate between hosts.  Thus, an implementation can
 +
heuristically use the embedded Internet address to locate an entity but
 +
should be prepared to maintain a cache of redirects for migrated
 +
entities, plus accept Notify operations indicating that migration has
 +
occurred.
  
 +
Entity group identifiers in Domain 1 are structured in one of two forms,
 +
depending on whether they are well-known or dynamically allocated
 +
identifiers.  A well-known entity identifier is structured as:
  
 +
+-----------+----------------+------------------------+
 +
| TypeFlags |  Discriminator |Internet Host Group Addr|
 +
+-----------+----------------+------------------------+
 +
4 bits          28 bits                32 bits
  
 +
Cheriton                                                      [page 102]
  
 +
with the second high-order bit (GRP) set to 1.  This form of entity
 +
identifier is mapped to the Internet host group address specified in the
 +
low-order 32 bits.  The Discriminator distinguishes group identifiers
 +
using the same Internet host group.  Well-known entity group identifiers
 +
should be allocated to correspond to the basic services provided by
 +
hosts that are members of the group, not specifically because that
 +
service is provided by VMTP.  For example, the well-known entity group
 +
identifier for the domain name service should contain as its embedded
 +
Internet host group address the host group for Domain Name servers.
  
 +
A dynamically allocated entity identifier is structured as:
  
 +
+-----------+----------------+------------------------+
 +
| TypeFlags |  Discriminator |  Internet Host Addr  |
 +
+-----------+----------------+------------------------+
 +
4 bits          28 bits            32 bits
  
 +
with the second high-order bit (GRP) set to 1.  The Internet address in
 +
the low-order 32 bits is a Internet address assigned to the host that
 +
dynamically allocates this entity group identifier.  A dynamically
 +
allocated entity group identifier is mapped to Internet host group
 +
address 232.X.X.X where X.X.X are the low-order 24 bits of the
 +
Discriminator subfield of the entity group identifier.
 +
 +
We use the following notation for Domain 1 entity identifiers <10> and
 +
propose it use as a standard convention.
 +
 +
    <flags>-<discriminator>-<Internet address>
 +
 +
where <flags> are [X]{BE,LE,RG,UG}[A]
  
Cheriton                                                      [page 46]
+
X = reserved
 +
BE = big-endian entity
 +
LE = little-endian entity
 +
RG = restricted group
 +
UG = unrestricted group
 +
A  = alias
  
 +
and <discriminator> is a decimal integer and <Internet address> is in
 +
standard dotted decimal IP address notation.
  
 +
Examples:
  
RFC 1045                      VMTP                        February 1988
+
_______________
  
 +
<10>  This notation was developed by Steve Deering.
  
3.4. Response Packet
+
Cheriton                                                      [page 103]
  
The Response packet is sent from the Server to the Client in response to
+
BE-25593-36.8.0.49 is big-endian entity #25593 created on host
a Request, identified by a 1 in the LSB of the fourth 32-bit word in the
+
            36.8.0.49.
packet.
+
 
 +
RG-1-224.0.1.0 is the well-known restricted VMTP managers group.
 +
 
 +
UG-565338-36.8.0.77 is unrestricted entity group #565338 created on host
 +
            36.8.0.77.
 +
 
 +
LEA-7823-36.8.0.77 is a little-endian alias entity #7823 created on host
 +
            36.8.0.77.
  
  0                  1                  2                  3
+
This notation makes it easy to communicate and understand entity
  0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1
+
identifiers for Domain 1.
+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
 
+                      Client (8 octets)                      +
 
+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
 
|Ver  |                        |H|E|M|                        |
 
|sion |          Domain         |C|P|P|      Length            |
 
|    |                        |O|G|G|                        |
 
+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
 
|N|A|N|N|N|R|C|S|R|Retra|Forward|              |      |R|R|R| |
 
|R|P|S|E|R|E|M|T|E|nsmit| Count |    PGcount    | Prior |E|E|E|1|
 
|S|G|R|R|T|S|G|I|S|Count|      |              | -ity  |S|S|S| |
 
+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
 
|                      Transaction                              |
 
+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
 
|                      PacketDelivery                          |
 
+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
 
+                        Server (8 octets)                      +
 
+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
 
|C|D|M|S|R|R|R|R|                                              |
 
|M|G|D|D|E|E|E|E|        ResponseCode                          |
 
|D|M|M|A|S|S|S|S|                                              |
 
+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
 
>                  UserData (20 octets)                        <
 
+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
 
|                    MsgDelivery                              |
 
+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
 
|                    Segment Size                              |
 
+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
 
>                  segment data, if any                        <
 
+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
 
|                      Checksum                                |
 
+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
 
  
                  Figure 3-2:   Response Packet Format
+
The well-known entity identifiers specified to date are:
  
The fields of the Response packet are set according to the semantics
+
VMTP_MANAGER_GROUP  RG-1-224.0.1.0
described in Section 3.2 with the following qualifications.
+
            Managers for VMTP operations.
  
Client, Version, Domain, Transaction
+
VMTP_DEFAULT_BECLIENT  BE-1-224.0.1.0
                Match those in the Request packet group to which this is
+
            Client entity identifier to use when a (big-endian) host
 +
            has not determined or been allocated any client entity
 +
            identifiers.
  
 +
VMTP_DEFAULT_LECLIENT  LE-1-224.0.1.0
 +
            Client entity identifier to use when a (little-endian)
 +
            host has not determined or been allocated any client
 +
            entity identifiers.
  
Cheriton                                                      [page 47]
+
Note that 224.0.1.0 is the host group address assigned to VMTP and to
 +
which all VMTP hosts belong.
  
 +
Other well-known entity group identifiers will be specified in
 +
subsequent extensions to VMTP and in higher-level protocols that use
 +
VMTP.
  
 +
IV.2. Domain 3
  
RFC 1045                      VMTP                        February 1988
+
Domain 3 is reserved for embedded systems that are restricted to a
 +
single network and are independent of IP.  Entity identifiers are
 +
allocated using the decentralized approach described below.  The mapping
 +
of entity group identifiers is specific to the type of network being
 +
used and not defined here.  In general, there should be a simple
 +
algorithmic mapping from entity group identifier to multicast address,
 +
similar to that described for Domain 1.  Similarly, the values for
 +
default client identifier are specific to the type of network and not
  
 +
Cheriton                                                      [page 104]
  
                a response.
+
defined here.
  
STI            1 if this Response is using one or more of the
+
IV.3. Other Domains
                transaction identifiers skipped by the Client after the
 
                Request to which this is a Response. STI in the Request
 
                essentially allocates up to 256 transaction identifiers
 
                for the Server to use in a run of Response packet
 
                groups.
 
  
RetransmitCount The retransmit count from the last Request packet
+
Definition of additional VMTP domains is planned for the future.
                received to which this is a response.
+
Requests for allocation of VMTP Domains should be addressed to the
 +
Internet protocol administrator.
  
ForwardCount    The number of times the corresponding Request was
+
IV.4. Decentralized Entity Identifier Allocation
                forwarded before this Response was generated.
 
  
PGcount        The number of consecutively previous packet groups that
+
The ProbeEntityBlock operation may be used to determine whether a block
                this response is acknowledging in addition to the one
+
of entity identifiers is in use.  ("In use" means valid or reserved by a
                identified by the Transaction identifier.
+
host for allocation.)  This mechanism is used to detect collisions in
 +
allocation of blocks of entity identifiers as part of the implementation
 +
of decentralized allocation of entity identifiers.  (Decentralized
 +
allocation is used in local domain use of VMTP such as in embedded
 +
systems- see Domain 3.)
  
Server          Server sending this responseThis may differ from that
+
Basically, a group of hosts can form a Domain or sub-Domain, a group of
                originally specified in the Request packet if the
+
hosts managing their own entity identifier space or subspace,
                original Server was a server group, or the request was
+
respectivelyAs an example of a sub-Domain, a group of hosts in Domain
                forwarded.
+
1 all identified with a particular host group address can manage the
 
+
sub-Domain corresponding to all entity identifiers that contain that
The next two chapters describes the protocol operation using these
+
host group address. The ProbeEntityBlock operation is used to allocate
packet formats, with the the Client and the Server portions described
+
the random bits of these identifiers as follows.
separately.
 
  
 +
When a host requires a new block of entity identifiers, it selects a new
 +
block (randomly or by some choice algorithm) and then multicasts a
 +
ProbeEntityBlock request to the members of the (sub-)Domain some R
 +
times.  If no response is received after R (re)transmissions, the host
 +
concludes that it is free to use this block of identifiers.  Otherwise,
 +
it picks another block and tries again.
  
 +
Notes:
  
 +
1. A block of 256 identifiers is specified by an entity
 +
  identifier with the low-order 8 bits all zero.
  
 +
2. When a host allocates an initial block of entity identifiers
 +
  (and therefore does not yet have a specified entity
 +
  identifier to use) it uses VMTP_DEFAULT_BECLIENT (if
 +
  big-endian, else VMTP_DEFAULT_LECLIENT if little-endian) as
 +
  its client identifier in the ProbeEntityBlock Request and a
 +
  transaction identifier of 0.  As soon as it has allocated a
 +
  block of entity identifiers, it should use these identifiers
  
 +
Cheriton                                                      [page 105]
  
 +
RFC 1045                      VMTP                        February 1988
  
 +
  for all subsequent communication.  The default client
 +
  identifier values are defined for each Domain.
  
 +
3. The set of hosts using this decentralized allocation must not
 +
  be subject to network partitioning.  That is, the R
 +
  transmissions must be sufficient to ensure that every host
 +
  sees the ProbeEntityBlock request and (reliably) sends a
 +
  response.  (A host that detects a collision can retransmit
 +
  the response multiple times until it sees a new
 +
  ProbeEntityBlock operation from the same host/Client up to a
 +
  maximum number of times.)  For instance, a set of machines
 +
  connected by a single local network may able to use this type
 +
  of allocation.
  
 +
4. To guarantee T-stability, a host must prevent reuse of a
 +
  block of identifiers if any of the identifiers in the block
 +
  are currently valid or have been valid less than T seconds
 +
  previously.  To this end, a host must remember recently used
 +
  identifiers and object to their reuse in response to a
 +
  ProbeEntityBlock operation.
  
 +
5. Care is required in a VMTP implementation to ensure that
 +
  Probe operations cannot be discarded due to lack of buffer
 +
  space or queued or delayed so that a response is not
 +
  generated quickly.  This is required not only to detect
 +
  collisions but also to provide accurate roundtrip estimates
 +
  as part of ProbeEntity operations.
  
 +
Cheriton                                                      [page 106]
  
 +
V. Authentication Domains
  
 +
A VMTP authentication domain defines the format and interpretation for
 +
principal identifiers and encryption keys.  In particular, an
 +
authentication domain must specify a means by which principal
 +
identifiers are allocated and guaranteed unique and stable.  The
 +
currently defined authentication domains are as follows (0 is reserved).
  
 +
Ideally, all entities within one entity domain are also associated with
 +
one authentication domain.  However, authentication domains are
 +
orthogonal to entity domains.  Entities within one domain may have
 +
different authentication domains.  (In this case, it is generally
 +
necessary to have some correspondence between principals in the
 +
different domains.)  Also, one entity identifier may be associated with
 +
multiple authentication domains.  Finally, one authentication domain may
 +
be used across multiple entity domains.
  
 +
V.1. Authentication Domain 1
  
 +
A principal identifier is structured as follows.
  
 +
+---------------------------+------------------------+
 +
|    Internet Address      | Local User Identifier  |
 +
+---------------------------+------------------------+
 +
          32 bits                    32 bits
  
 +
The Internet Address may specify an individual host (such as a UNIX
 +
machine) or may specify a host group address corresponding to a cluster
 +
of machines operating under a single adminstration.  In both cases,
 +
there is assumed to be an adminstration associated with the embedded
 +
Internet address that guarantees the uniqueness and stability of the
 +
User Identifier relative to the Internet address.  In particular, that
 +
administration is the only one authorized to allocate principal
 +
identifiers with that Internet address prefix, and it may allocate any
 +
of these identifiers.
  
 +
In authentication domain 1, the standard EncryptionQualifiers are:
  
 +
0              Clear text - no encryption.
  
 +
1              use 64-bit CBC DES for encryption and decryption.
  
Cheriton                                                      [page 48]
+
V.2. Other Authentication Domains
  
 +
Other authentication domains will be defined in the future as needed.
  
 +
Cheriton                                                      [page 107]
  
RFC 1045                      VMTP                        February 1988
+
VI. IP Implementation
  
 +
VMTP is designed to be implemented on the DoD IP Internet Datagram
 +
Protocol (although it may also be implemented as a local network
 +
protocol directly in "raw" network packets.)
  
4. Client Protocol Operation
+
VMTP is assigned the protocol number 81.
  
This chapter describes the operation of the client portion of VMTP in
+
With a 20 octet IP header and one segment block, a VMTP packet is 600
terms of the procedures for handling VMTP user events, packet reception
+
octetsBy convention, any host implementing VMTP implicitly agrees to
events, management operations and timeout eventsNote that the client
+
accept VMTP/IP packets of at least 600 octets.
portion of VMTP is separable from the server portion.  It is feasible to
 
have a node that only implements the client end of VMTP.
 
  
To simplify the description, we define a client state record (CSR) plus
+
VMTP multicast facilities are designed to work with, and have been
some standard utility routines.
+
implemented using, the multicast extensions to the Internet [8]
 +
described in RFC 966 and 988.  The wide-scale use of full VMTP/IP
 +
depends on the availability of IP multicast in this form.
  
 +
Cheriton                                                      [page 108]
  
4.1. Client State Record Fields
+
VII. Implementation Notes
  
In the following protocol description, there is one client state record
+
The performance and reliability of a protocol in operation is highly
(CSR) per (client,transaction) outstanding message transactionHere is
+
dependent on the quality of its implementation, in addition to the
a suggested set of fields.
+
"intrinsic" quality of the protocol design.  One of the design goals of
 +
the VMTP effort was to produce an efficiently implementable protocol.
 +
The following notes and suggestions are based on experience with
 +
implementing VMTP in the V distributed system and the UNIX 4.3 BSD
 +
kernel.  The following is described for a client and server handling
 +
only one domainA multi-domain client or server would replicate these
 +
structures for each domain, although buffer space may be shared.
  
Link            Link to next CSR when queued in one of the transmission,
+
VII.1. Mapping Data Structures
                timeout or message queues.
 
  
QueuePtr        Pointer to queue head in which this CSR is contained or
+
The ClientMap procedure is implemented using a hash table that maps to
                NULL if none.  Queue could be one of transmission queue,
+
the Client State Record whether this entity is local or remote, as shown
                timeout queue, server queue or response queue.
+
in Figure VII-1.
  
ProcessIdentification
+
          +---+---+--------------------------+
                 The process identification and address space.
+
ClientMap  |  | x |                          |
 +
          +---+-|-+--------------------------+
 +
                |  +--------------+    +--------------+
 +
                 +-->| LocalClient  |--->| LocalClient  |
 +
                    +--------------+    +--------------+
 +
                    | RemoteClient |    | RemoteClient |-> ...
 +
                    +--------------+    +--------------+
 +
                    |              |    |              |
 +
                    |              |    |              |
 +
                    +--------------+    +--------------+
  
Priority        Priority for processing, network service, etc.
+
        Figure VII-1:  Mapping Client Identifier to CSR
  
State          One of the client states described below.
+
Local clients are linked through the LocalClientLink, similarly for the
 +
RemoteClientLink.  Once a CSR with the specified Entity Id is found,
 +
some field or flag indicates whether it is identifying a local or remote
 +
Entity.  Hash collisions are handled with the overflow pointers
 +
LocalClientLink and RemoteClientLink (not shown) in the CSR for the
 +
LocalClient and RemoteClient fields, respectively.  Note that a CSR
 +
representing an RPC request has both a local and remote entity
 +
identifier mapping to the same CSR.
  
FinishupFunc    Procedure to be executed on the CSR when it is completes
+
The Server specified in a Request is mapped to a server descriptor using
                its processing in transmission or timeout queues.
+
the ServerMap (with collisions handled by the overflow pointer.).  The
 +
server descriptor is the root of a queue of CSR's for handling requests
 +
plus flags that modify the handling of the Request. Flags include:
  
TimeoutCount    Time to remain in timeout queue.
+
Cheriton                                                      [page 109]
  
TimeoutLimit    User-specified time after which the message transaction
+
              +-------+---+-------------------------+
                is aborted. The timeout is infinite if set to zero.
+
  ServerMap      |      | x |                        |
 +
              +-------+-|-+-------------------------+
 +
                        |  +--------------+
 +
                        |  | OverflowLink |
 +
                        |  +--------------+
 +
                        +-->|  Server    |
 +
                            +--------------+
 +
                            | Flags | Lock |
 +
                            +--------------+
 +
                            | Head Pointer |
 +
                            +--------------+
 +
                            | Tail Pointer |
 +
                            +--------------+
  
RetransCount    Number of retransmissions since last hearing from the
+
            Figure VII-2:  Mapping Server Identifiers
                Server.
 
  
LastTransmitTime
+
THREAD_QUEUE    Request is to be invoked directly as a remote procedure
                The time at which the last packet was sent.  This field
+
            invocation, rather than by a server process in the
                is used to calculate roundtrip times, using the
+
            message model.
                RetransmitCount to match the responding packet to a
 
  
 +
AUTHENTICATION_REQUIRED
 +
            Sent a Probe request to determine principal associated
 +
            with the Client, if not known.
  
Cheriton                                                      [page 49]
+
SECURITY_REQUIRED
 +
            Request must be encrypted or else reject.
  
 +
REQUESTS_QUEUED Queue contains waiting requests, rather than free CSR's.
 +
            Queue this request as well.
  
 +
SERVER_WAITING  The server is waiting and available to handle incoming
 +
            Request immediately, as required by CMD.
  
RFC 1045                      VMTP                       February 1988
+
Alternatively, the Server identifiers can be mapped to a CSR using the
 +
MapToClient mechanism with a pointer in the CSR refering to the server
 +
descriptor, if any.  This scheme is attractive if there are client CSR's
 +
associated with a service to allow it to communicate as a client using
 +
VMTP with other services.
  
 +
Finally, a similar structure is used to expand entity group identifiers
 +
to the local membership, as shown in Figure VII-3.  A group identifier
 +
is hashed to an index in the GroupMap.  The list of group descriptors
 +
rooted at that index in the GroupMap contains a group descriptor for
 +
each local member of the group.  The flags are the group permissions
 +
defined in Appendix III.
  
                particular transmission.  I.e. Response or management
+
Cheriton                                                      [page 110]
                NotifyVmtpClient operation to Request and a management
 
                NotifyVmtpServer operation to a Response.
 
  
TimetoLive      Time to live to be used on transmission of IP packets.
+
              +-------+---+----------------------------------+
 +
  GroupMap      |      | x |                                  |
 +
              +-------+-|-+----------------------------------+
 +
                        |  +--------------+
 +
                        |  | OverflowLink |
 +
                        |  +--------------+
 +
                        +-->|EntityGroupId |
 +
                            +--------------+
 +
                            | Flags        |
 +
                            +--------------+
 +
                            | Member Entity|
 +
                            +--------------+
  
TransmissionMask
+
            Figure VII-3:  Mapping Group Identifiers
                Bit mask indicating the portions of the segment to
 
                transmit.  Set before entering the transmission queue
 
                and cleared incrementally as the 512-byte segment blocks
 
                of the segment are transmitted.
 
  
LocalClientLink Link to next CSR hashing to same hash index in the
+
Note that the same pool of descriptors could be used for the server and
                ClientMap.
+
group descriptors given that they are similar in size.
  
LocalClient    Entity identifier for client when this CSR is used to
+
VII.2. Client Data Structures
                send a Request packet.
 
  
LocalTransaction
+
Each client entity is represented as a client state record.  The CSR
                Transaction identifier for current message transaction
+
contains a VMTP header as well as other bookkeeping fields, including
                the local client has outstanding.
+
timeout count, retransmission count, as described in Section 4.1.  In
 +
addition, there is a timeout queue, transmission queue and reception
 +
queue.  Finally, there is a ServerHost cache that maps from server
 +
entity-id records to host address, estimated round trip time,
 +
interpacket gap, MTU size and (optimally) estimated processing time for
 +
this server entity.
  
LocalPrincipal Account identification, possibly including key and key
+
VII.3. Server Data Structures
                timeout.
+
 
 +
The server maintains a heap of client state records (CSR), one for each
 +
(Client, Transaction). (If streams are not supported, there is, at
 +
worst, a CSR per Client with which the server has communicated with
 +
recently.)  The CSR contains a VMTP header as well as various
 +
bookkeeping fields including timeout count, retransmission count.  The
 +
server maintains a hash table mapping of Client to CSR as well as the
 +
transmission, timeout and reception queues.  In a VMTP module
 +
implementing both the client and server functions, the same timeout
 +
queue and transmission queue are used for both.
  
LocalDelivery  Bit mask of segment blocks that have not been
+
Cheriton                                                      [page 111]
                acknowledged in the Request or have been received in the
 
                Response, depending on the state.
 
  
ResponseQueue  Queue of CSR's representing the queued Responses for
+
VII.4. Packet Group transmission
                this entity.
 
  
VMTP Header    Prototype VMTP header, used to generate and store the
+
The procedure SendPacketGroup( csr ) transmits the packet group
                header portion of a Request for transmission and
+
specified by the record CSR. It performs:
                retransmission on timeout.
 
  
SegmentDesc    Description of the segment data associated with the CSR,
+
1. Fragmentation of the segment data, if any, into packets.
                either the area storing the original Request data, the
+
  (Note, segment data flagged by SDA bit.)
                area for receiving Request data, or the area storing the
 
                Response data that is returned.
 
  
HostAddr        The network or internetwork host address to which the
+
2. Modifies the VMTP header for each packet as required e.g.
                Client last transmitted. This field also indicates the
+
  changing the delivery mask as appropriate.
                type of the address, e.g. IP, Ethernet, etc.
 
  
Note: the CSR can be combined with a light-weight process descriptor
+
3. Computes the VMTP checksum.
with considerable benefit if the process is designed to block when it
 
  
 +
4. Encrypts the appropriate portion of the packet, if required.
  
Cheriton                                                      [page 50]
+
5. Prepends and appends network-level header and trailer using
 +
  network address from ServerHost cache, or from the responding
 +
  CSR.
  
 +
6. Transmits the packet with the interpacket gap specified in
 +
  the cache.  This may involve round-robin scheduling between
 +
  hosts as well as delaying transmissions slightly.
  
 +
7. Invokes the finish-up procedure specified by the CSR record,
 +
  completing the processing.  Generally, this finish-up
 +
  procedure adds the record to the timeout queue with the
 +
  appropriate timeout queue.
  
RFC 1045                      VMTP                        February 1988
+
The CSR includes a 32-bit transmission mask that indicates the portions
 +
of the segment to transmit.  The SendPacketGroup procedure is assumed to
 +
handle queuing at the network transmission queue, queuing in priority
 +
order according to the priority field specified in the CSR record.
 +
(This priority may be reflected in network transmission behavior for
 +
networks that support priority.)
  
 +
The SendPacketGroup procedure only looks at the following fields of a
 +
CSR
  
issues a message transaction.  In particular, by combining the two
+
- Transmission mask
descriptors, the implementation saves time because it only needs to
 
locate and queue one descriptor with various operations (rather than
 
having to locate two descriptors).  It also saves space, given that the
 
VMTP header prototype provides space such as the user data field which
 
may serve to store processor state for when the process is preempted.
 
Non-preemptive blocking can use the process stack to store the processor
 
state so only a program counter and stack pointer may be required in the
 
process descriptor beyond what we have described.  (This is the approach
 
used in the V kernel.)
 
  
 +
- FuncCode
  
4.2. Client Protocol States
+
- SDA
  
A Client State Record records the state of message transaction generated
+
- Client
by this host, identified by the (Client, Transaction) values in the CSR.
 
As a client originating a transaction, it is in one of the following
 
states.
 
  
AwaitingResponse
+
- Server
                Waiting for a Response packet group to arrive with the
 
                same (Client,Transaction) identification.
 
  
ReceivingResponse
+
Cheriton                                                      [page 112]
                Waiting for additional packets in the Response packet
 
                group it is currently receiving.
 
  
"Other"        Not waiting for a response, which can be Processing or
+
- CoResidentEntity
                some other operating system state, or one of the Server
 
                states if it also acts as a server.
 
  
This covers all the states for a client.
+
- Key
  
 +
It modifies the following fields
  
4.3. State Transition Diagrams
+
- Length
  
The client state transitions are illustrated in Figure 4-1.  The client
+
- Delivery
goes into the state AwaitingResponse on sending a request unless it is a
 
datagram request.  In the AwaitingResponse state, it can timeout and
 
retry and eventually give up and return to the processing state unless
 
it receives a Response.  (A NotifyVmtpClient operation resets the
 
timeout but does not change the state.)  On receipt of a single packet
 
response, it returns to the processing state.  Otherwise, it goes to
 
ReceivingResponse state.  After timeout or final response packet is
 
received, the client returns to the processing state.  The processing
 
state also includes any other state besides those associated with
 
issuing a message transaction.
 
  
 +
- Checksum
  
Cheriton                                                      [page 51]
+
In the case of encrypted transmission, it encrypts the entire packet,
 +
not including the Client field and the following 32-bits.
  
 +
If the packet group is a Response, (i.e. lower-order bit of function
 +
code is 1) the destination network address is determined from the
 +
Client, otherwise the Server.  The HostAddr field is set either from the
 +
ServerHost cache (if a Request) or from the original Request if a
 +
Response, before SendPacketGroup is called.
  
 +
The CSR includes a timeout and TTL fields indicating the maximum time to
 +
complete the processing and the time-to-live for the packets to be
 +
transmitted.
  
RFC 1045                      VMTP                        February 1988
+
SendPacketGroup is viewed as the right functionality to implement for
 +
transmission in an "intelligent" network interface.
  
 +
Finally, it appears preferable to be able to assume that all portions of
 +
the segment remain memory-resident (no page faults) during transmission.
 +
In a demand-paged systems, some form of locking is required to keep the
 +
segment data in memory.
  
  +------------+
+
VII.5. VMTP Management Module
  | Processing |<--------------------|
 
  |            |<-------------|      |
 
  |            |<---|        |      |
 
  +|------^--^-+  Single    Last    |
 
Transmit  |  |    Packet    Response |
 
    |      |  |    Response  Packet  |
 
    |      |  |      |        |      |
 
    +-DGM->+ Timeout |        |  Final timeout
 
    |        |      |        |      |
 
  +V-----------+    |      +-----------+
 
  |  Awaiting  |----+      | Receiving |->Response-+
 
  |  Response  |->Response->| Response  |          |
 
  |            |  (multi-  |          |<----------+
 
  +-|--------^-+  packet)  +----------^+
 
    V        |                |        |
 
    +-Timeout+                +>Timeout+
 
  
                Figure 4-1:  Client State Transitions
+
The implementation should implement the management operations as a
 
+
separate module that is invoked from within the VMTP module.  When a
 
+
Request is received, either from the local user level or the network,
4.4. User Interface
+
for the VMTP management module, the management module is invoked as a
 +
remote or local procedure call to handle this request and return a
 +
response (if not a datagram request).  By registering as a local server,
 +
the management module should minimize the special-case code required for
 +
its invocation.  The management module is basically a case statement
 +
that selects the operation based on the RequestCode and then invokes the
 +
specified management operation. The procedure implementing the
 +
management operation, especially operations like NotifyVmtpClient and
  
The RPC or user interface to VMTP is implementation-dependent and may
+
Cheriton                                                      [page 113]
use systems calls, functions or some other mechanism.  The list of
 
requests that follow is intended to suggest the basic functionality that
 
should be available.
 
  
Send( mcb, timeout, segptr, segsize )
+
NotifyVmtpServer, are logically part of the VMTP module because they
                Initiate a message transaction to the server and request
+
require full access to the basic data structures of the VMTP
                message specified by mcb and return a response in mcb,
+
implementation.
                if it is received within the specified timeout period
 
                (or else return USER_TIMEOUT in the Code field).  The
 
                segptr parameter specifies the location from which the
 
                segment data is sent and the location into which the
 
                response data is to be delivered.  The segsize field
 
                indicates the maximum length of this area.
 
  
GetResponse( responsemcb, timeout, segptr, segsize )
+
The management module should be implemented so that it can respond
                Get the next response sent to this client as part of the
+
quickly to all requests, particularly since the timing of management
                current message transaction, returning the segment data,
+
interactions is used to estimate round trip time.  To date, all
                if any, into the memory specified by segptr and segsize.
+
implementations of the management module have been done at the kernel
 +
level, along with VMTP proper.
  
This interface assumes that there is a client entity associated with the
+
VII.6. Timeout Handling
invoking process that is to be used with these operations. Otherwise,
 
the client entity must be specified as an additional parameter.
 
  
 +
The timeout queue is a queue of CSR records, ordered by timeout count,
 +
as specified in the CSR record.  On entry into the timeout queue, the
 +
CSR record has the timeout field set to the time (preferable in
 +
milliseconds or similar unit) to remain in the queue plus the finishup
 +
field set to the procedure to execute on removal on timeout from the
 +
queue.  The timeout field for a CSR in the queue is the time relative to
 +
the record preceding it in the queue (if any) at which it is to be
 +
removed.  Some system-specific mechanism decrements the time for the
 +
record at the front of the queue, invoking the finishup procedure when
 +
the count goes to zero.
  
 +
Using this scheme, a special CSR is used to timeout and scan CSR's for
 +
non-recently pinged CSR's.  That is, this CSR times out and invokes a
 +
finishup procedure that scans for non-recently pinged CSR that are
 +
"AwaitingResponse" and signals the request processing entity and deletes
 +
the CSR.  It then returns to the timeout queue.
  
Cheriton                                                      [page 52]
+
The timeout mechanism tends to be specific to an operating system.  The
 +
scheme described may have to be adapted to the operating system in which
 +
VMTP is to be implemented.
  
 +
This mechanism handles client request timeout and client response
 +
timeout.  It is not intended to handle interpacket gaps given that these
 +
times are expected to be under 1 millisecond in general and possibly
 +
only a few microseconds.
  
 +
VII.7. Timeout Values
  
RFC 1045                      VMTP                        February 1988
+
Roundtrip timeout values are estimated by matching Responses or
 +
NotifyVmtpClient Requests to Request transmission, relying on the
 +
retransmitCount to identify the particular transmission of the Request
 +
that generated the response.  A similar technique can be used with
 +
Responses and NotifyVmtpServer Requests.  The retransmitCount is
  
 +
Cheriton                                                      [page 114]
  
4.5. Event Processing
+
incremented each time the Response is sent, whether the retransmission
 +
was caused by timeout or retransmission of the Request.
  
The following events may occur in the VMTP client:
+
The ProbeEntity request is recommended as a basic way of getting
 +
up-to-date information about a Client as well as predictable host
 +
machine turnaround in processing a request.  (VMTP assumes and requires
 +
an efficient, bounded response time implementation of the ProbeEntity
 +
operation.)
  
  - User Requests
+
Using this mechanism for measuring RTT, it is recommended that the
 +
various estimation and smoothing techniques developed for TCP RTT
 +
estimation be adapted and used.
  
        * Send
+
VII.8. Packet Reception
  
        * GetResponse
+
Logically a network packet containing a VMTP packet is 5 portions:
  
  - Packet Arrival
+
- network header, possibly including lower-level headers
  
        * Response Packet
+
- VMTP header
  
        * Request
+
- data segment
  
    The minimal Client implementation handles Request packets for
+
- VMTP checksum
    its VMTP management (server) module and sends NotifyVmtpClient
 
    requests in response to others, indicating the specified
 
    server does not exist.
 
  
  - Management Operation - NotifyVmtpClient
+
- network trailer, etc.
  
  - Timeouts
+
It may be advantageous to receive a packet fragmented into these
 +
portions, if supported by the network module.  In this case, ideally the
 +
VMTP header may be received directly into a CSR, the data segment into a
 +
page that can be mapped, rather than copied, to its final destination,
 +
with VMTP checksum and network header in a separate area (used to
 +
extract the network address corresponding to the sender).
  
        * Client Retransmission Timeout
+
Packet reception is described in detail by the pseudo-code in Section
 +
4.7.
  
The handling of these events is described in detail in the following
+
With a response, normally the CSR has an associated segment area
subsections.
+
immediately available so delivery of segment data is immediate.
 
+
Similarly, server entities should be "armed" with CSR's with segment
We first describe some conventions and procedures used in the
+
areas that provide for immediate delivery of requestsIt is reasonable
descriptionA field of the received packet is indicated as (for
+
to discard segment data that cannot be immediately delivered in this
example) p.Transaction, for the Transaction fieldOptional portions of
+
way, providing that clients and servers are able to preallocate CSR's
the code, such as the streaming handling code are prefixed with a "|" in
+
with segment areas for requests and responsesIn particular, a client
the first column.
+
should be able to provide some number of additional CSR's for receiving
 +
multiple responses to a multicast request.
  
MapClient( client )
+
Cheriton                                                      [page 115]
                Return pointer to CSR for client with the specified
 
                clientId, else NULL.
 
  
SendPacketGroup( csr )
+
The CSR data structure is intended to be the interface data structure
                Send the packet group (Request, Response) according to
+
for an intelligent network interface.  For reception, the interface is
                that specified by the CSR.
+
"armed" with CSR's that may point to segment areas in main memory, into
 +
which it can deliver a packet group.  Ideally, the interface handles all
 +
the processing of all packets, interacting with the host after receiving
 +
a complete Request or Response packet group.  An implementation should
 +
use an interface based on SendPacketGroup(CSR) and
 +
ReceivePacketGroup(CSR) to facilitate the introduction of an intelligent
 +
network interface.
  
NotifyClient( csr, p, code )
+
ReceivePacketGroup(csr) provides the interface with a CSR descriptor and
                Invoke the NotifyVmtpClient operation with the
+
zero or more bytes of main memory to receive segment data. The CSR
                parameters csr.RemoteClient, p.control,
+
describes whether it is to receive responses (and if so, for which
 +
client) or requests (and if so for which server).
  
 +
The procedure ReclaimCSR(CSR) reclaims the specified record from the
 +
interface before it has been returned after receiving the specified
 +
packet group.
  
Cheriton                                                      [page 53]
+
A finishup procedure is set in the CSR to be invoked when the CSR is
 +
returned to the host by the normal processing sequence in the interface.
 +
Similarly, the timeout parameter is set to indicate the maximum time the
 +
host is providing for the routine to perform the specified function.
 +
The CSR and associated segment memory is returned to the host after the
 +
timeout period with an indication of progress after the timeout period.
 +
It is not returned earlier.
  
 +
VII.9. Streaming
  
 +
The implementation of streaming is optional in both VMTP clients and
 +
servers.  Ideally, all performance-critical servers should implement
 +
streaming.  In addition, clients that have high context switch overhead,
 +
network access overhead or expect to be communicating over long delay
 +
links should also implement streaming.
  
RFC 1045                      VMTP                        February 1988
+
A client stream is implemented by allocating a CSR for each outstanding
 
+
message transactionA stream of transactions is handled similarly to
 
+
multiple outstanding transactions from separate clients except for the
                csr.ReceiveSeqNumber, csr.RemoteTransaction and
+
interaction between consecutive numbered transactions in a stream.
                csr.RemoteDelivery, and codeIf csr is NULL, use
 
                p.Client, p.Transaction and p.PacketDelivery instead and
 
                the global ReceiveSequenceNumber, if supported.  This
 
                function simplifies the description over calling
 
                NotifyVmtpClient directly in the procedural
 
                specification below.  (See Appendix III.)
 
  
NotifyServer( csr, p, code )
+
For the server VMTP module, streamed message transactions to a server
                Invoke the NotifyVmtpServer operation with the
+
are queued (if accepted) subordinate to the first unprocessed CSR
                parameters p.Server, csr.LocalClient,
+
corresponding to this Client. Thus, streamed transactions from a given
                csr.LocalTransaction, csr.LocalDelivery and code.  Use
+
Client are always performed in the order specified by the transaction
                p.Client, P.Transaction and 0 for the clientId, transact
+
identifiers.
                and delivery parameters if csr is NULL.  This function
 
                simplifies the description over calling NotifyVmtpServer
 
                directly in the procedural specification below.  (See
 
                Appendix III.)
 
  
DGMset(p)      True if DGM bit set in packet (or csr) else False.
+
Cheriton                                                      [page 116]
                (Similar functions are used for other bits.)
 
  
Timeout( csr, timeperiod, func )
+
If a server does not implement streaming, it must refuse streamed
                Set or reset timer on csr record for timeperiod later
+
message transactions using the NotifyVmtpClient operation.  Also, all
                and invoke func if the timeout expires.
+
client VMTP's that support streaming must support the streamed interface
 +
to a server that does not support streaming.  That is, it must perform
 +
the message transactions one at a time.  Consequently, a program that
 +
uses the streaming interface to a non-streaming server experiences
 +
degraded performance, but not failure.
  
 +
VII.10. Implementation Experience
  
4.6. Client User-invoked Events
+
The implementation experience to date includes a partial implementation
 +
(minus the streaming and full security) in the V kernel plus a similar
 +
preliminary implementation in the 4.3 BSD Unix kernel.  In the V kernel
 +
implementation, the CSR's are part of the (lightweight) process
 +
descriptor.
  
A user event occurs when a VMTP user application invokes one of the VMTP
+
The V kernel implementation is able to perform a VMTP message
interface procedures.
+
transaction with no data segment between two Sun-3/75's connected by 10
 +
Mb Ethernet in 2.25 milliseconds.  It is also able to transfer data at
 +
=== megabits per second using 16 kilobyte Requests (but null checksums.) ===
 +
The UNIX kernel implementation running on Microvax II's achieves a basic
 +
message transaction time of 9 milliseconds and data rate of 1.9 megabits
 +
per second using 16 kilobyte Responses.  This implementation is using
 +
the standard VMTP checksum.
  
 +
We hope to report more extensive implementation experience in future
 +
revisions of this document.
  
4.6.1. Send
+
Cheriton                                                      [page 117]
  
Send( mcb, timeout, segptr, segsize )
+
VIII. UNIX 4.3 BSD Kernel Interface for VMTP
    map to main CSR for this client.
 
    increment csr.LocalTransaction
 
    Init csr and check parameters and segment if any.
 
    Set SDA if sending appended data.
 
    Flush queued replies from previous transaction, if any.
 
    if local non-group server then
 
        deliver locally
 
        await response
 
        return
 
    if GroupId(server) then
 
        Check for and deliver to local members.
 
        if CRE request and non-group local CR entity then
 
  
 +
UNIX 4.3 BSD includes a socket-based design for program interfaces to a
 +
variety of protocol families and types of protocols (streams,
 +
datagrams).  In this appendix, we sketch an extension to this design to
 +
support a transaction-style protocol.  (Some familiarity with UNIX 4.2/3
 +
IPC is assumed.)  Several extensions are required to the system
 +
interface, rather than just adding a protocol, because no provision was
 +
made for supporting transaction protocols in the original design.  These
 +
extensions include a new "transaction" type of socket plus new system
 +
calls invoke, getreply, probeentity, recreq, sendreply and forward.
  
Cheriton                                                      [page 54]
+
A socket of type transaction bound to the VMTP protocol type
 +
IPPROTO_VMTP is created by the call
  
 +
s = socket(AF_INET, SOCK_TRANSACT, VMTP);
  
 +
This socket is bound to an entity identifier by
  
RFC 1045                      VMTP                        February 1988
+
bind(s, &entityid, sizeof(entityid));
  
 +
The first address/port bound to a socket is considered its primary name
 +
and is the one used on packet transmission.  A message transaction is
 +
invoked between the socket named by s and the Server specified by mcb by
  
          await response
+
invoke(s, mcb, segptr, seglen, timeout );
          return
 
        endif
 
        set MDG if member of this group.
 
    endif
 
    clear csr.RetransCount
 
    set csr.TransmissionMask
 
    set csr.TimeLimit to timeout
 
    set csr.HostAddr for csr.Server
 
    SendPacketGroup( csr )
 
    if DGMset(csr) then
 
      return
 
    endif
 
    set csr.State to AwaitingResponse
 
    Timeout( rootcsr, TC1(csr.Server), LocalClientTimeout )
 
    return
 
end Send
 
  
Notes:
+
The mcb is a message control block whose format was described in Section
 
+
=== The message control block specifies the request to send plus the ===
  1. Normally, the HostAddr is extracted from the ServerHost
+
destination Server.  The response message control block returned by the
      cache, which maps server entity identifiers to host
+
server is stored in mcb when invoke returns.  The invoking process is
      addresses.  However, on cache miss, the client first queries
+
blocked until a response is received or the message transaction times
      the network using the ProbeEntity operation, as specified in
+
out unless the request is a datagram request.  (Non-blocking versions
      Appendix III, determining the host address from the Response.
+
with signals on completion could also be provided, especially with a
      The ProbeEntity operation is handled as a separate message
+
streaming implementation.)
      transaction by the Client.
 
 
 
The stream interface incorporates a parameter to pass a responseHandler
 
procedure that is invoked when the message transaction completes.
 
 
 
StreamSend( mcb, timeout, segptr, segsize, responseHandler )
 
    map to main CSR for this client.
 
|  Allocate a new csr if root in use.
 
|  lastcsr := First csr for last request.
 
|  if STIset(lastcsr)
 
|      csr.LocalTransaction := lastcsr.LocalTransaction + 256
 
|  else
 
|      csr.LocalTransaction := lastcsr.LocalTransaction + 1
 
    Init csr and check parameters and segment if any.
 
    . . . ( rest is the same as for the normal Send)
 
 
 
Notes:
 
 
 
  1. Each outstanding message transaction is represented by a CSR
 
      queued on the root CSR for this client entity.  The root CSR
 
      is used to handle timeouts, etc.  On timeout, the last packet
 
 
 
 
 
Cheriton                                                      [page 55]
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
RFC 1045                      VMTP                        February 1988
 
 
 
 
 
      from the last packet group is retransmitted (with or without
 
      the segment data).
 
 
 
 
 
4.6.2. GetResponse
 
 
 
GetResponse( req, timeout, segptr, segsize )
 
    csr := CurrentCSR;
 
    if responses queued then return next response
 
      (in req, segptr to max of segsize )
 
    if timeout is zero then return KERNEL_TIMEOUT error
 
    set state to AWAITING_RESPONSE
 
    Timeout( csr, timeout, ReturnKernelTimeout );
 
end GetResponse
 
 
 
Notes:
 
 
 
  1. GetResponse is only used with multicast Requests, which is
 
      the only case in which multiple (different) Responses should
 
      be received.
 
 
 
  2. A response must remain queued until the next message
 
      transaction is invoked to filter out duplicates of this
 
      response.
 
 
 
  3. If the response is incomplete (only relevant if a
 
      multi-packet response), then the client may wait for the
 
      response to be fully received, including issuing requests for
 
      retransmission (using NotifyVmtpServer operations) before
 
      returning the response.
 
 
 
  4. As an optimization, a response may be stored in the CSR of
 
      the client.  In this case, the response must be transferred
 
      to a separate buffer (for duplicate suppression) before
 
      waiting for another response.  Using this optimization, a
 
      response buffer is not allocated in the common case of the
 
      client receiving only one response.
 
 
 
 
 
4.7. Packet Arrival
 
 
 
In general, on packet reception, a packet is mapped to the client state
 
record, decrypted if necessary using the key in the CSR.  It then has
 
its checksum verified and then is transformed to the right byte order.
 
The packet is then processed fully relative to its packet function code.
 
It is discarded immediately if it is addressed to a different domain
 
than the domain(s) in which the receiving host participates.
 
 
 
 
 
Cheriton                                                      [page 56]
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
RFC 1045                      VMTP                        February 1988
 
 
 
 
 
For each of the 2 packet types, we assume a procedure called with a
 
pointer p to the VMTP packet and psize, the size of the packet in
 
octets.  Thus, generic packet reception is:
 
 
 
if not LocalDomain(p.Domain) then return;
 
 
 
csr := MapClient( p.Client )
 
 
 
if csr is NULL then
 
    HandleNoCsr( p, psize )
 
    return
 
 
 
if Secure(p) then
 
    if SecureVMTP not supported then
 
        { Assume a Request. }
 
        if not Multicast(p) then
 
            NotifyClient(NULL, p, SECURITY_NOT_SUPPORTED )
 
        return
 
    endif
 
|  Decrypt( csr.Key, p, psize )
 
 
 
if p.Checksum not null then
 
    if not VerifyChecksum(p, psize) then return;
 
if OppositeByteOrder(p) then ByteSwap( p, psize )
 
if psize not equal sizeof(VmtpHeader) + 4*p.Length then
 
    NotifyClient(NULL, p, VMTP_ERROR )
 
    return
 
Invoke Procedure[p.FuncCode]( csr, p, psize )
 
Discard packet and return
 
 
 
Notes:
 
 
 
  1. The Procedure[p.FuncCode] refers to one of the 2 procedures
 
      corresponding to the two different packet types of VMTP,
 
      Requests and Responses.
 
 
 
  2. In all the following descriptions, a packet is discarded on
 
      "return" unless otherwise stated.
 
 
 
  3. The procedure HandleNoCSR is a management routine that
 
      allocates and initializes a CSR and processes the packet or
 
      else sends an error indication to the sender of the packet.
 
      This procedure is described in greater detail in Section
 
      4.8.1.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Cheriton                                                      [page 57]
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
RFC 1045                      VMTP                        February 1988
 
 
 
 
 
4.7.1. Response
 
 
 
This procedure handles incoming Response packets.
 
 
 
HandleResponse( csr, p, psize )
 
    if not LocalClient( csr ) then
 
        if Multicast then return
 
|      if Migrated( p.Client ) then
 
|          NotifyServer(csr, p ENTITY_MIGRATED )
 
|      else
 
            NotifyServer(csr, p, ENTITY_NOT_HERE )
 
        return
 
    endif
 
 
 
    if NSRset(p) then
 
        if Streaming not supported then
 
            NotifyServer(csr, p, STREAMING_NOT_SUPPORTED )
 
            return STREAMED_RESPONSE
 
|      Find csr corresponding to p.Transaction
 
|      if none found then
 
|          NotifyServer(csr, p, BAD_TRANSACTION_ID )
 
|          return
 
    else
 
      if csr.LocalTransaction not equal p.Transaction then
 
        NotifyServer(csr, p, BAD_TRANSACTION_ID )
 
        return
 
    endif
 
    Locate reply buffer rb for this p.Server
 
    if found then
 
        if rb.State is not ReceivingResponse then
 
          { Duplicate }
 
            if APGset(p) or NERset(p) then
 
                { Send Response to stop response packets. }
 
                NotifyServer(csr, p, RESPONSE_DISCARDED )
 
            endif
 
            return
 
        endif
 
        { rb.State is ReceivingRequest}
 
        if new segment data then retain in CSR segment area.
 
        if packetgroup not complete then
 
            Timeout( rb, TC3(p.Server), LocalClientTimeout )
 
            return;
 
          endif
 
          goto EndPacketGroup
 
    endif
 
    { Otherwise, a new response message. }
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Cheriton                                                      [page 58]
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
RFC 1045                      VMTP                        February 1988
 
 
 
 
 
    if (NSRset(p) or NERset(p)) and NoStreaming then
 
        NotifyServer(csr, p, VMTP_ERROR )
 
        return
 
|    if NSRset(p) then
 
|      { Check consecutive with previous packet group }
 
|      Find last packet group CSR from p.Server.
 
|      if p.Transaction not
 
|            lastcsr.RemoteTransaction+1 mod 2**32 then
 
|        { Out of order packet group }
 
|            NotifyServer(csr, p, BAD_TRANSACTION_ID)
 
|          return
 
|      endif
 
|      if lastcsr not completed then
 
|          NotifyServer(lastcsr, p, RETRY )
 
|      endif
 
|      if CMG(lastcsr) then
 
|          Add segment data to lastcsr Response
 
|          Notify lastcsr with new packet group.
 
|          Clear lastcsr.VerifyInterval
 
|      else
 
|          if lastcsr available then
 
|                use it for this packet group
 
|          else allocate and initialize new CSR
 
|          Save message and segment data in new CSR area.
 
|      endif
 
|  else { First packet group }
 
        Allocate and init reply buffer rb for this response.
 
        if allocation fails then
 
            NotifyServer(csr, p, BUSY )
 
            return
 
        Set rb.State to ReceivingResponse
 
        Copy message and segment data to rb's segment area
 
        and set rb.PacketDelivery to that delivered.
 
        Save p.Server host address in ServerHost cache.
 
    endif
 
    if packetgroup not complete then
 
        Timeout( rb, TS1(p.Client), LocalClientTimeout )
 
        return;
 
    endif
 
endPacketGroup:
 
    { We have received last packet in packet group. }
 
    if APGset(p) then NotifyServer(csr, p, OK )
 
|  if NERset(p) and CMGset(p) then
 
|      Queue waiting for continuation packet group.
 
|      Timeout( rb, TC2(rb.Server), LocalClientTimeout )
 
|      return
 
|  endif
 
 
 
 
 
Cheriton                                                      [page 59]
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
RFC 1045                      VMTP                        February 1988
 
 
 
 
 
    { Deliver response message. }
 
    Deliver response to Client, or queue as appropriate.
 
end HandleResponse
 
 
 
Notes:
 
 
 
  1. The mechanism for handling streaming is optional and can be
 
      replaced with the tests for use of streaming.  Note that the
 
      server should never stream at the Client unless the Client
 
      has streamed at the Server or has used the STI control bit.
 
      Otherwise, streamed Responses are a protocol error.
 
 
 
  2. As an optimization, a Response can be stored into the CSR for
 
      the Client rather than allocating a separate CSR for a
 
      response buffer.  However, if multiple responses are handled,
 
      the code must be careful to perform duplicate detection on
 
      the Response stored there as well as those queued.  In
 
      addition, GetResponse must create a queued version of this
 
      Response before allowing it to be overwritten.
 
 
 
  3. The handling of Group Responses has been omitted for brevity.
 
      Basically, a Response is accepted if there has been a Request
 
      received locally from the same Client and same Transaction
 
      that has not been responded to.  In this case, the Response
 
      is delivered to the Server or queued.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Cheriton                                                      [page 60]
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
RFC 1045                      VMTP                        February 1988
 
 
 
 
 
4.8. Management Operations
 
 
 
VMTP uses management operations (invoked as remote procedure calls) to
 
effectively acknowledge packet groups and request retransmissions.  The
 
following routine is invoked by the Client's management module on
 
request from the Server.
 
 
 
NotifyVmtpClient( clientId,ctrl,receiveSeqNumber,transact,delivery,code)
 
    Get csr for clientId
 
    if none then return
 
    if RemoteClient( csr ) and not NotifyVmtpRemoteClient then
 
      return
 
|  else (for streaming)
 
|      Find csr with same LocalTransaction as transact
 
|      if csr is NULL then return
 
    if csr.State not AwaitingResponse then return
 
    if ctrl.PGcount then ack previous packet groups.
 
    select on code
 
      case OK:
 
        Notify ack'ed segment blocks from delivery
 
        Clear csr.RetransCount;
 
        Timeout( csr, TC1(csr.Server), LocalClientTimeout )
 
        return
 
      case RETRY:
 
        Set csr.TransmissionMask to missing segment blocks,
 
            as specified by delivery
 
        SendPacketGroup( csr )
 
        Timeout( csr, TC1(csr.Server), LocalClientTimeout )
 
      case RETRY_ALL
 
        Set csr.TransmissionMask to retransmit all blocks.
 
        SendPacketGroup( csr )
 
        Timeout( csr, TC1(csr.Server), LocalClientTimeout )
 
|      if streaming then
 
|          Restart transmission of packet groups,
 
|                starting from transact+1
 
        return
 
      case BUSY:
 
        if csr.TimeLimit exceeded then
 
            Set csr.Code to USER_TIMEOUT
 
            return Response to application
 
            return;
 
        Set csr.TransmissionMask for full retransmission
 
        Clear csr.RetransCount
 
        Timeout( csr, TC1(csr.Server), LocalClientTimeout )
 
        return
 
      case ENTITY_MIGRATED:
 
        Get new host address for entity
 
 
 
 
 
Cheriton                                                      [page 61]
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
RFC 1045                      VMTP                        February 1988
 
 
 
 
 
        Set csr.TransmissionMask for full retransmission
 
        Clear csr.RetransCount
 
        SendPacketGroup( csr )
 
        Timeout( csr, TC1(csr.Server), LocalClientTimeout )
 
        return
 
 
 
      case STREAMING_NOT_SUPPORTED:
 
        Record that server does not support streaming
 
        if CMG(csr) then forget this packet group
 
        else resend Request as separate packet group.
 
        return
 
      default:
 
        Set csr.Code to code
 
        return Response to application
 
        return;
 
    endselect
 
end NotifyVmtpClient
 
 
 
Notes:
 
 
 
  1. The delivery parameter indicates the segment blocks received
 
      by the Server.  That is, a 1 bit in the i-th position
 
      indicates that the i-th segment block in the segment data of
 
      the Request was received.  All subsequent NotifyVmtpClient
 
      operations for this transaction should be set to acknowledge
 
      a superset of the segment blocks in this packet.  In
 
      particular, the Client need not be prepared to retransmit the
 
      segment data once it has been acknowledged by a Notify
 
      operation.
 
 
 
 
 
4.8.1. HandleNoCSR
 
 
 
HandleNoCSR is called when a packet arrives for which there is no CSR
 
matching the client field of the packet.
 
 
 
HandleNoCSR( p, psize )
 
    if Secure(p) then
 
        if SecureVMTP not supported then
 
            { Assume a Request }
 
            if not Multicast(p) then
 
                NotifyClient(NULL,p,SECURITY_NOT_SUPPORTED)
 
            return
 
        endif
 
        HandleRequestNoCSR( p, psize )
 
        return
 
    endif
 
 
 
 
 
Cheriton                                                      [page 62]
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
RFC 1045                      VMTP                        February 1988
 
 
 
 
 
    if p.Checksum not null then
 
        if not VerifyChecksum(p, psize) then return;
 
    if OppositeByteOrder(p) then ByteSwap( p, psize )
 
    if psize not equal sizeof(VmtpHeader) + 4*p.Length then
 
        NotifyClient(NULL, p, VMTP_ERROR )
 
        return
 
 
 
    if p.FuncCode is Response then
 
|        if Migrated( p.Client ) then
 
|          NotifyServer(csr, p ENTITY_MIGRATED )
 
|      else
 
            NotifyServer(csr, p, NONEXISTENT_ENTITY )
 
        return
 
    endif
 
 
 
    if p.FuncCode is Request then
 
      HandleRequestNoCSR( p, psize )
 
    return
 
end HandleNoCSR
 
 
 
Notes:
 
 
 
  1. The node need only check to see if the client entity has
 
      migrated if in fact it supports migration of entities.
 
 
 
  2. The procedure HandleRequestNoCSR is specified in Section
 
      5.8.1.  In the minimal client version, it need only handle
 
      Probe requests and can do so directly without allocating a
 
      new CSR.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Cheriton                                                      [page 63]
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
RFC 1045                      VMTP                        February 1988
 
 
 
 
 
4.9. Timeouts
 
 
 
A client with a message transaction in progress has a single timer
 
corresponding to the first unacknowledged request message.  (In the
 
absence of streaming, this request is also the last request sent.)  This
 
timeout is handled as follows:
 
 
 
LocalClientTimeout( csr )
 
  select on csr.State
 
    case AwaitingResponse:
 
      if csr.RetransCount > MaxRetrans(csr.Server) then
 
            terminate Client's message transactions up to
 
            and including the current message transaction.
 
            set return code to KERNEL_TIMEOUT
 
          return
 
      increment csr.RetransCount
 
      Resend current packet group with APG set.
 
      Timeout( csr, TC2(csr.Server), LocalClientTimeout )
 
      return
 
    case ReceivingResponse:
 
      if DGMset(csr) or csr.RetransCount > Max then
 
        if MDMset(csr) then
 
            Set MCB.MsgDeliveryMask to blocks received.
 
        else
 
            Set csr.Code to BAD_REPLY_SEGMENT
 
        return to user Client
 
      endif
 
      increment csr.RetransCount
 
      NotifyServer with RETRY
 
      Timeout( csr, TC3(csr.Server), LocalClientTimeout )
 
      return
 
  end select
 
end LocalClientTimeout
 
 
 
Notes:
 
 
 
  1. A Client can only request retransmission of a Response if the
 
      Response is not idempotent.  If idempotent, it must
 
      retransmit the Request.  The Server should generally support
 
      the MsgDeliveryMask for Requests that it treats as idempotent
 
      and that require multi-packet Responses.  Otherwise, there is
 
      no selective retransmission for idempotent message
 
      transactions.
 
 
 
  2. The current packet group is the last one transmitted.  Thus,
 
      with streaming, there may be several packet groups
 
      outstanding that precede the current packet group.
 
 
 
 
 
Cheriton                                                      [page 64]
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
RFC 1045                      VMTP                        February 1988
 
 
 
 
 
  3. The Request packet group should be retransmitted without the
 
      segment data, resulting in a single short packet in the
 
      retransmission.  The Server must then send a
 
      NotifyVmtpClient with a RETRY or RETRY_ALL code to get the
 
      segment data transmitted as needed.  This strategy minimizes
 
      the overhead on the network and the server(s) for
 
      retransmissions.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Cheriton                                                      [page 65]
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
RFC 1045                      VMTP                        February 1988
 
 
 
 
 
5. Server Protocol Operation
 
 
 
This section describes the operation of the server portion of the
 
protocol in terms of the procedures for handling VMTP user events,
 
packet reception events and timeout events.  Each server is assumed to
 
implement the client procedures described in the previous chapter.
 
(This is not strictly necessary but it simplifies the exposition.)
 
 
 
 
 
5.1. Remote Client State Record Fields
 
 
 
The CSR for a server is extended with the following fields, in addition
 
to the ones listed for the client version.
 
 
 
RemoteClient    Identifier for remote client that sent the Request that
 
                this CSR is handling.
 
 
 
RemoteClientLink
 
                Link to next CSR hashing to same hash index in the
 
                ClientMap.
 
 
 
RemoteTransaction
 
                Transaction identifier for Request from remote client.
 
 
 
RemoteDelivery  The segment blocks received so far as part of a Request
 
                or yet to be acknowledged as part of a Response.
 
 
 
VerifyInterval  Time interval since there was confirmation that the
 
                remote Client was still valid.
 
 
 
RemotePrincipal Account identification, possibly including key and key
 
                timeout for secure communication.
 
 
 
 
 
5.2. Remote Client Protocol States
 
 
 
A CSR in the server end is in one of the following states.
 
 
 
AwaitingRequest Waiting for a Request packet group.  It may be marked as
 
                waiting on a specific Client, or on any Client.
 
 
 
ReceivingRequest
 
                Waiting to receive additional Request packets in a
 
                multi-packet group Request.
 
 
 
Responded      The Response has been sent and the CSR is timing out,
 
                providing duplicate suppression and retransmission (if
 
 
 
 
 
Cheriton                                                      [page 66]
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
RFC 1045                      VMTP                        February 1988
 
 
 
 
 
                the Response was not idempotent).
 
 
 
ResponseDiscarded
 
                Response has been acknowledged or has timed out so
 
                cannot be retransmitted.  However, duplicates are still
 
                filtered and CSR can be reused for new message
 
                transaction.
 
 
 
Processing      Executing on behalf of the Client.
 
 
 
Forwarded      The message transaction has been forwarded to another
 
                Server that is to respond directly to the Client.
 
 
 
 
 
5.3. State Transition Diagrams
 
 
 
The CSR state transitions in the server are illustrated in Figure 5-1.
 
The CSR generally starts in the AwaitingRequest state.  On receipt of a
 
Request, the Server either has an up-to-date CSR for the Client or else
 
it sends a Probe request (as a separate VMTP message transaction) to the
 
VMTP management module associated with the Client.  In the latter case,
 
the processing of the Request is delayed until a Response to the Probe
 
request is received.  At that time, the CSR information is brought up to
 
date and the Request is processed.  If the Request is a single-packet
 
request, the CSR is then set in the Processing state to handle the
 
request.  Otherwise (a multi-packet Request), the CSR is put into the
 
ReceivingResponse state, waiting to receive subsequent Request packets
 
that constitute the Request message.  It exits the ReceivingRequest
 
state on timeout or on receiving the last Request packet.  In the former
 
case, the request is delivered with an indication of the portion
 
received, using the MsgDelivery field if MDM is set.  After request
 
processing is complete, either the Response is sent and the CSR enters
 
the Responded state or the message transaction is forwarded and the CSR
 
enters the Forwarded state.
 
 
 
In the Responded state, if the Response is not marked as idempotent, the
 
Response is retransmitted on receipt of a retransmission of the
 
corresponding Request, on receipt of a NotifyVmtpServer operation
 
requesting retransmission or on timeout at which time APG is set,
 
requesting an acknowledgment from the Client.  The Response is
 
retransmitted some maximum number of times at which time the Response is
 
discarded and the CSR is marked accordingly.  If a Request or a
 
NotifyVmtpServer operation is received expecting retransmission of the
 
Response after the CSR has entered the ResponseDiscarded state, a
 
NotifyVmtpClient operation is sent back (or invoked in the Client
 
management module) indicating that the response was discarded unless the
 
Request was multicast, in which case no action is taken.  After a
 
 
 
 
 
Cheriton                                                      [page 67]
 
 
 
 
 
RFC 1045                      VMTP                        February 1988
 
 
 
 
 
    (Retransmit Forwarded Request and NotifyVmtpClient)
 
                    Request/
 
                    Ack/
 
                  +Timeout+
 
                  V      |
 
                +-|-------^-+
 
                |          |
 
          +-Time-| Forwarded |<-------------+
 
          |  out +-----------+              |
 
          |                                |
 
          |          (Retransmit Response)  |
 
          |                      Request    |
 
          V                      Ack        |
 
          |                    +-Timeout-+  |
 
          |                    V        |  |
 
        +---------+ Ack/ +|---------^+ |
 
+-Time-|Response |<-Timeout--| Responded | |
 
|  out |Discarded|          +----^------+ |
 
|      +---------+                |        |
 
|  +------------+                |        |
 
|  |            |->-Send Response-+        |
 
|  |            |->-forward Request--------+
 
+->| Processing |<----------------------+
 
|  |            |<----------------+    |
 
|  |            |<---|            |    |
 
|  +-|--------^-+    |          Last    |
 
| Receive    |      |          Request |
 
|    |  Timeout  Single      Packet  |
 
|    |        |    Packet        |  Timeout
 
|    |        |    Request        ^    ^
 
|    |        |      ^          +|-----|--+
 
|  +-V--------|-+    |          |Receiving|<-+Time
 
+->|  Awaiting  |->--+->Request->| Request |--+ out
 
    |  Request  |    |  (multi-  +---------+
 
    +------|-----+    ^  packet)
 
        Request      |
 
          |        Response
 
      Send Probe    to
 
          |        Probe
 
      +---V----+    |
 
      |Awaiting|    ^
 
      |Response|-->--+
 
      |to Probe|
 
      +--------+
 
 
 
            Figure 5-1:  Remote Client State Transitions
 
 
 
timeout corresponding to the time required to filter out duplicates, the
 
 
 
Cheriton                                                      [page 68]
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
RFC 1045                      VMTP                        February 1988
 
 
 
 
 
CSR returns either to the AwaitingRequest state or to the Processing
 
state.  Note that "Ack" refers to acknowledgment by a Notify operation.
 
 
 
A Request that is forwarded leaves the CSR in the Forwarded state.  In
 
the Forwarded state, the forwarded Request is retransmitted
 
periodically, expecting NotifyRemoteClient operations back from the
 
Server to which the Request was forwarded, analogous to the Client
 
behavior in the AwaitingResponse state.  In this state, a
 
NotifyRemoteClient from this Server acknowledges the Request or asks
 
that it be retransmitted or reports an error.  A retransmission of the
 
Request from the Client causes a NotifyVmtpClient to be returned to the
 
Client if APG is set.  The CSR leaves the Forwarded state after timing
 
out in the absence of NotifyRemoteClient operations from the forward
 
Server or on receipt of a NotifyRemoteClient operation indicating the
 
forward Server has sent a Response and received an acknowledgement.  It
 
then enters the ResponseDiscarded state.
 
 
 
Receipt of a new Request from the same Client aborts the current
 
transaction, independent of its state, and initiates a new transaction
 
unless the new Request is part of a run of message transactions.  If it
 
is part of a run of message transactions, the handling follows the state
 
diagram except the new Request is not Processed until there has been a
 
response sent to the previous transaction.
 
 
 
 
 
5.4. User Interface
 
 
 
The RPC or user interface to VMTP is implementation-dependent and may
 
use systems calls, functions or some other mechanism.  The list of
 
requests that follow is intended to suggest the basic functionality that
 
should be available.
 
 
 
AcceptMessage( reqmcb, segptr, segsize, client, transid, timeout )
 
                Accept a new Request message in the specified reqmcb
 
                area, placing the segment data, if any, in the area
 
                described by segptr and segsize.  This returns the
 
                Server in the entityId field of the reqmcb and actual
 
                segment size in the segsize parameters.  It also returns
 
                the Client and Transaction for this message transaction
 
                in the corresponding parameters.  This procedure
 
                supports message semantics for request processing.  When
 
                a server process executes this call, it blocks until a
 
                Request message has been queued for the server.
 
                AcceptMessage returns after the specified timeout period
 
                if a message has not been received by that time.
 
 
 
RespondMessage( responsemcb, client, transid, segptr )
 
 
 
 
 
Cheriton                                                      [page 69]
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
RFC 1045                      VMTP                        February 1988
 
 
 
 
 
                Respond to the client with the specified response
 
                message and segment, again with message semantics.
 
 
 
RespondCall( responsemcb, segptr )
 
                Respond to the client with the specified response
 
                message and segment, with remote procedure call
 
                semantics.  This procedure does not return.  The
 
                lightweight process that executes this procedure is
 
                matched to a stack, program counter, segment area and
 
                priority from the information provided in a
 
                ModifyService call, as specified in Appendix III.
 
 
 
ForwardMessage( requestmcb, transid, segptr, segsize, forwardserver )
 
                Forward the client to the specified forwardserver with
 
                the request specified in mcb.
 
 
 
ForwardCall( requestmcb, segptr, segsize, forwardserver )
 
                Forward the client transaction to the specified
 
                forwardserver with the request specified by requestmcb.
 
                This procedure does not return.
 
 
 
GetRemoteClientId()
 
                Return the entityId for the remote client on whose
 
                behave the process is executing.  This is only
 
                applicable in the procedure call model of request
 
                handling.
 
 
 
GetForwarder( client )
 
                Return the entity that forwarded this Request, if any.
 
 
 
GetProcess( client )
 
                Return an identifier for the process associated with
 
                this client entity-id.
 
 
 
GetPrincipal( client )
 
                Return the principal associated with this client
 
                entity-id.
 
 
 
 
 
5.5. Event Processing
 
 
 
The following events may occur in VMTP servers.
 
 
 
  - User Requests
 
 
 
        * Receive
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Cheriton                                                      [page 70]
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
RFC 1045                      VMTP                        February 1988
 
 
 
 
 
        * Respond
 
 
 
        * Forward
 
 
 
        * GetForwarder
 
 
 
        * GetProcess
 
 
 
        * GetPrincipal
 
 
 
  - Packet Arrival
 
 
 
        * Request Packet
 
 
 
  - Management Operations
 
 
 
        * NotifyVmtpServer
 
 
 
  - Timeouts
 
 
 
        * Client State Record Timeout
 
 
 
The handling of these events is described in detail in the following
 
subsections.  The conventions of the previous chapter are followed,
 
including the use of the various subroutines in the description.
 
 
 
 
 
5.6. Server User-invoked Events
 
 
 
A user event occurs when a VMTP server invokes one of the VMTP interface
 
procedures.
 
 
 
 
 
5.6.1. Receive
 
 
 
AcceptMessage(reqmcb, segptr, segsize, client, transid, timeout)
 
    Locate server's request queue.
 
    if request is queued then
 
        Remember CSR associated with this Request.
 
        return Request in reqmcb, segptr and segsize
 
              and client and transaction id.
 
    Wait on server's request queue for next request
 
    up time timeout seconds.
 
end ReceiveCall
 
 
 
Notes:
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Cheriton                                                      [page 71]
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
RFC 1045                      VMTP                        February 1988
 
 
 
 
 
  1. If a multi-packet Request is partially received at the time
 
      of the AcceptMessage, the process waits until it completes.
 
 
 
  2. The behavior of a process accepting a Request as a
 
      lightweight thread is similar except that the process
 
      executes using the Request data logically as part of the
 
      requesting Client process.
 
 
 
 
 
5.6.2. Respond
 
 
 
RespondCall is described as one case of the Respond transmission
 
procedure; RespondMessage is similar.
 
 
 
RespondCall( responsemcb, responsesegptr )
 
    Locate csr for this client.
 
    Check segment data accessible, if any
 
    if local client then
 
        Handle locally
 
        return
 
    endif
 
    if responsemcb.Code is RESPONSE_DISCARDED then
 
        Mark as RESPONSE_DISCARDED
 
        return
 
    SendPacketGroup( csr )
 
    set csr.State to Responded.
 
    if DGM reply then { Idempotent }
 
        release segment data
 
        Timeout( csr, TS4(csr.Client), FreeCsr );
 
    else { Await acknowledgement or new Request else ask for ack. }
 
        Timeout( csr, TS5(csr.Client), RemoteClientTimeout )
 
end RespondCall
 
 
 
Notes:
 
 
 
  1. RespondMessage is similar except the Server process must be
 
      synchronized with the release of the segment data (if any).
 
 
 
  2. The non-idempotent Response with segment data is sent first
 
      without a request for an acknowledgement.  The Response is
 
      retransmitted after time TS5(client) if no acknowledgment or
 
      new Request is received from the client in the meantime.  At
 
      this point, the APG bit is sent.
 
 
 
  3. The MCB of the Response is buffered in the client CSR, which
 
      remains for TS4 seconds, sufficient to filter old duplicates.
 
      The segment data (if any) must be retained intact until:  (1)
 
 
 
 
 
Cheriton                                                      [page 72]
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
RFC 1045                      VMTP                        February 1988
 
 
 
 
 
      after transmission if idempotent or (2) after acknowledged or
 
      timeout has occurred if not idempotent.  Techniques such as
 
      copy-on-write might be used to keep a copy of the Response
 
      segment data without incurring the cost of a copy.
 
 
 
 
 
5.6.3. Forward
 
 
 
Forwarding is logically initiating a new message transaction between the
 
Server (now acting as a Client) and the server to which the Request is
 
forwarded.  When the second server returns a Response, the same Response
 
is immediately returned to the Client.  The forwarding support in VMTP
 
preserves these semantics while providing some performance optimizations
 
in some cases.
 
 
 
ForwardCall( req, segptr, segsize, forwardserver )
 
    Locate csr for this client.
 
    Check segment data accessible, if any
 
 
 
    if local client or Request was multicast or secure
 
      or csr.ForwardCount == 15 then
 
        Handle as a new Send operation
 
        return
 
    if forwardserver is local then
 
        Handle locally
 
        return
 
    Set csr.funccode to Request
 
    Increment csr.ForwardCount
 
    Set csr.State to Responded
 
    SendPacketGroup( csr ) { To ForwardServer }
 
    Timeout( csr, TS4(csr.Client), FreeAlien )
 
end ForwardCall
 
 
 
Notes:
 
 
 
  1. A Forward is logically a new call or message transaction.  It
 
      must be really implemented as a new message transaction if
 
      the original Request was multicast or secure (with the
 
      optional further refinement that it can be used with a secure
 
      message transaction when the Server and ForwardServer are the
 
      same principal and the Request was not multicast).
 
 
 
  2. A Forward operation is never handled as an idempotent
 
      operation because it requires knowledge that the
 
      ForwardServer will treat the forwarded operation as
 
      idempotent as well.  Thus, a Forward operation that includes
 
      a segment should set APG on the first transmission of the
 
 
 
 
 
Cheriton                                                      [page 73]
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
RFC 1045                      VMTP                        February 1988
 
 
 
 
 
      forwarded Request to get an acknowledgement for this data.
 
      Once the acknowledgement is received, the forwarding Server
 
      can discard the segment data, leaving only the basic CSR to
 
      handle retransmissions from the Client.
 
 
 
 
 
5.6.4. Other Functions
 
 
 
GetRemoteClient is a simple local query of the CSR.  GetProcess and
 
GetPrincipal also extract this information from the CSR.  A server
 
module may defer the Probe callback to the Client to get that
 
information until it is requested by the Server (assuming it is not
 
using secure communication and duplicate suppression is adequate without
 
callback.)  GetForwarder is implemented as a callback to the Client,
 
using a GetRequestForwarder VMTP management operation.  Additional
 
management procedures for VMTP are described in Appendix III.
 
 
 
 
 
5.7. Request Packet Arrival
 
 
 
The basic packet reception follows that described for the Client
 
routines.  A Request packet is handled by the procedure HandleRequest.
 
 
 
HandleRequest( csr, p, psize )
 
 
 
    if LocalClient(csr) then
 
        { Forwarded Request on local Client }
 
        if csr.LocalTransaction != p.Transaction then return
 
        if csr.State != AwaitingResponse then return
 
        if p.ForwardCount < csr.ForwardCount then
 
          Discard Request and return.
 
        Find a CSR for Client as a remote Client.
 
        if not found then
 
            if packet group complete then
 
                handle as a local message transaction
 
                return
 
            Allocate and init CSR
 
            goto newTransaction
 
        { Otherwise part of current transaction }
 
        { Handle directly below. }n
 
    if csr.RemoteTransaction = p.Transaction then
 
      { Matches current transaction }
 
        if OldForward(p.ForwardCount,csr.ForwardCount) then
 
            return
 
        if p.ForwardCount > csr.ForwardCount then
 
          { New forwarded transaction }
 
            goto newTransaction
 
 
 
 
 
Cheriton                                                      [page 74]
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
RFC 1045                      VMTP                        February 1988
 
 
 
 
 
        { Otherwise part of current transaction }
 
        if csr.State = ReceivingRequest then
 
            if new segment data then retain in CSR segment area.
 
            if Request not complete then
 
              Timeout( csr, TS1(p.Client), RemoteClientTimeout )
 
              return;
 
            endif
 
            goto endPacketGroup
 
        endif
 
        if csr.State is Responded then
 
          { Duplicate }
 
            if csr.Code is RESPONSE_DISCARDED
 
              and Multicast(p) then
 
                return
 
            endif
 
            if not DGM(csr) then { Not idempotent }
 
                if SegmentData(csr) then set APG
 
                { Resend Response or Request, if Forwarded }
 
                SendPacketGroup( csr )
 
                timeout=if SegmentData(csr) then TS5(csr.Client)
 
                          else TS4(csr.Client)
 
                Timeout( csr, timeout, RemoteClientTimeout )
 
                return
 
            { Else idempotent - fall thru to newTransaction }
 
        else { Presume it is a retransmission }
 
            NotifyClient( csr, p, OK )
 
            return
 
  else if OldTransaction(csr.RemoteTransact,p.Transaction) then
 
        return
 
    { Otherwise, a new message transaction. }
 
newTransaction:
 
    Abort handling of previous transactions for this Client.
 
 
 
    if (NSRset(p) or NERset(p)) and NoStreaming then
 
        NotifyClient( csr, p, STREAMING_NOT_SUPPORTED )
 
        return
 
|  if NSRset(p) then { Streaming }
 
|    { Check that consecutive with previous packet group }
 
|      Find last packet group CSR from this client.
 
|      if p.Transaction not lastcsr.RemoteTransaction+1 mod 2**32
 
|        and not STIset(lastcsr) or
 
|        p.Transaction not lastcsr.RemoteTransaction+256 mod **32
 
|        then
 
|        { Out of order packet group }
 
|        NotifyClient(csr, p, BAD_TRANSACTION_ID )
 
|        return
 
|      endif
 
 
 
 
 
Cheriton                                                      [page 75]
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
RFC 1045                      VMTP                        February 1988
 
 
 
 
 
|      if lastcsr not completed then
 
|          NotifyClient( lastcsr, p, RETRY )
 
|      endif
 
|      if lastcsr available then use it for this packet group
 
|      else allocate and initialize new CSR
 
|      if CMG(lastcsr) then
 
|          Add segment data to lastcsr Request
 
|          Keep csr as record of this packet group.
 
|          Clear lastcsr.VerifyInterval
 
|      endif
 
|  else { First packet group }
 
        if MultipleRemoteClients(csr) then ScavengeCsrs(p.Client)
 
        Set csr.RemoteTransaction, csr.Priority
 
        Copy message and segment data to csr's segment area
 
        and set csr.PacketDelivery to that delivered.
 
        Clear csr.PacketDelivery
 
        Clear csr.VerifyInterval
 
        SaveNetworkAddress( csr, p )
 
    endif
 
    if packetgroup not complete then
 
        Timeout( csr, TS3(p.Client), RemoteClientTimeout )
 
        return;
 
    endif
 
endPacketGroup:
 
    { We have received complete packet group. }
 
    if APG(p) then NotifyClient( csr, p, OK )
 
    endif
 
|  if NERset(p) and CMG(p) then
 
|      Queue waiting for continuation packet group.
 
|      Timeout( csr, TS3(csr.Client), RemoteClientTimeout )
 
|      return
 
|  endif
 
    { Deliver request message. }
 
    if GroupId(csr.Server) then
 
        For each server identified by csr.Server
 
            Replicate csr and associated data segment.
 
            if CMDset(csr) and Server busy then
 
              Discard csr and data
 
            else
 
              Deliver or invoke csr for each Server.
 
            if not DGMset(csr) then queue for Response
 
            else Timeout( csr, TS4(csr.Client), FreeCsr )
 
        endfor
 
    else
 
      if CMDset(csr) and Server busy then
 
          Discard csr and data
 
        else
 
 
 
 
 
Cheriton                                                      [page 76]
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
RFC 1045                      VMTP                        February 1988
 
 
 
 
 
          Deliver or invoke csr for this server.
 
        if not DGMset(csr) then queue for Response
 
        else Timeout( csr, TS4(csr.Client), FreeCsr )
 
    endif
 
end HandleRequest
 
 
 
Notes:
 
 
 
  1. A Request received that specifies a Client that is a local
 
      entity should be a Request forwarded by a remote server to a
 
      local Server.
 
 
 
  2. An alternative structure for handling a Request sent to a
 
      group when there are multiple local group members is to
 
      create a remote CSR for each group member on reception of the
 
      first packet and deliver a copy of each packet to each such
 
      remote CSR as each packet arrives.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Cheriton                                                      [page 77]
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
RFC 1045                      VMTP                        February 1988
 
 
 
 
 
5.8. Management Operations
 
 
 
VMTP uses management operations (invoked as remote procedure calls) to
 
effectively acknowledge packet groups and request retransmissions.  The
 
following routine is invoked by the Server's management module on
 
request from the Client.
 
 
 
NotifyVmtpServer(server,clientId,transact,delivery,code)
 
    Find csr with same RemoteTransaction and RemoteClient
 
    as clientId and transact.
 
    if not found or csr.State not Responded then return
 
    if DGMset(csr) then
 
        if transmission of Response in progress then
 
            Abort transmission
 
            if code is migrated then
 
              restart transmission with new host addr.
 
        if Retry then Report protocol error
 
        return
 
    endif
 
    select on code
 
      case RETRY:
 
        if csr.RetransCount > MaxRetrans(clientId) then
 
            if response data segment then
 
                Discard data and mark as RESPONSE_DISCARDED
 
|                if NERset(csr) and subsequent csr then
 
|                    Deallocate csr and use later csr for
 
|                    future duplicate suppression
 
|                endif
 
            return
 
        endif
 
        increment csr.RetransCount
 
        Set csr.TransmissionMask to missing segment blocks,
 
            as specified by delivery
 
        SendPacketGroup( csr )
 
        Timeout( csr, TS3(csr.Client), RemoteClientTimeout )
 
      case BUSY:
 
        if csr.TimeLimit exceeded then
 
            if response data segment then
 
                Discard data and mark as RESPONSE_DISCARDED
 
|              if NERset(csr) and subsequent csr then
 
|                  Deallocate csr and use later csr for
 
|                  future duplicate suppression
 
|              endif
 
            endif
 
        endif
 
        Set csr.TransmissionMask for full retransmission
 
        Clear csr.RetransCount
 
 
 
 
 
Cheriton                                                      [page 78]
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
RFC 1045                      VMTP                        February 1988
 
 
 
 
 
        Timeout( csr, TS3(csr.Server), RemoteClientTimeout )
 
        return
 
 
 
      case ENTITY_MIGRATED:
 
        Get new host address for entity
 
        Set csr.TransmissionMask for full retransmission
 
        Clear csr.RetransCount
 
        SendPacketGroup( csr )
 
        Timeout( csr, TS3(csr.Server), RemoteClientTimeout )
 
        return
 
 
 
      case default:
 
        Abort transmission of Response if in progress.
 
        if response data segment then
 
          Discard data and mark as RESPONSE_DISCARDED
 
          if NERset(csr) and subsequent csr then
 
              Deallocate csr and use later csr for
 
              future duplicate suppression
 
          endif
 
        return
 
    endselect
 
end NotifyVmtpServer
 
 
 
Notes:
 
 
 
  1. A NotifyVmtpServer operation requesting retransmission of
 
      the Response is acceptable only if the Response was not
 
      idempotent.  When the Response is idempotent, the Client must
 
      be prepared to retransmit the Request to effectively request
 
      retransmission of the Response.
 
 
 
  2. A NotifyVmtpServer operation may be received while the
 
      Response is being transmitted.  If an error return, as an
 
      efficiency, the transmission should be aborted, as suggested
 
      when the Response is a datagram.
 
 
 
  3. A NotifyVmtpServer operation indicating OK or an error
 
      allows the Server to discard segment data and not provide for
 
      subsequent retransmission of the Response.
 
 
 
 
 
5.8.1. HandleRequestNoCSR
 
 
 
When a Request is received from a Client for which the node has no CSR,
 
the node allocates and initializes a CSR for this Client and does a
 
callback to the Client's VMTP management module to get the Principal,
 
Process and other information associated with this Client.  It also
 
 
 
 
 
Cheriton                                                      [page 79]
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
RFC 1045                      VMTP                        February 1988
 
 
 
 
 
checks that the TransactionId is correct in order to filter out
 
duplicates.
 
 
 
HandleRequestNoCSR( p, psize )
 
|  if Secure(p) then
 
|      Allocate and init CSR
 
|      SaveSourceHostAddr( csr, p )
 
|      ProbeRemoteClient( csr, p, AUTH_PROBE )
 
|      if no response or error then
 
|          delete CSR
 
|          return
 
|      Decrypt( csr.Key, p, psize )
 
|        if p.Checksum not null then
 
|      if not VerifyChecksum(p, psize) then return;
 
|      if OppositeByteOrder(p) then ByteSwap( p, psize )
 
|      if psize not equal sizeof(VmtpHeader) + 4*p.Length then
 
|          NotifyClient(NULL, p, VMTP_ERROR )
 
|          return
 
|      HandleRequest( csr, p, psize )
 
|      return
 
    if Server does not exist then
 
        NotifyClient( csr, p, NONEXISTENT_ENTITY )
 
        return
 
    endif
 
    if security required by server then
 
        NotifyClient(csr, p, SECURITY_REQUIRED )
 
        return
 
    endif
 
    Allocate and init CSR
 
    SaveSourceHostAddr( csr, p );
 
    if server requires Authentication then
 
        ProbeRemoteClient( csr, p, AUTH_PROBE )
 
        if no response or error then
 
          delete CSR
 
          return
 
    endif
 
    { Setup immediately as a new message transaction }
 
    set csr.Server to p.Server
 
    set csr.RemoteTransaction to p.Transaction-1
 
 
 
    HandleRequest( csr, p, psize )
 
    endif
 
 
 
Notes:
 
 
 
  1. A Probe request is always handled as a Request not requiring
 
      authentication so it never generates a callback Probe to the
 
 
 
 
 
Cheriton                                                      [page 80]
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
RFC 1045                      VMTP                        February 1988
 
 
 
 
 
      Client.
 
 
 
  2. If the Server host retains remote client CSR's for longer
 
      than the maximum packet lifetime and the Request
 
      retransmission time, and the host has been running for at
 
      least that long, then it is not necessary to do a Probe
 
      callback unless the Request is secure.  A Probe callback can
 
      take place when the Server asks for the Process or
 
      PrincipalId associated with the Client.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Cheriton                                                      [page 81]
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
RFC 1045                      VMTP                        February 1988
 
 
 
 
 
5.9. Timeouts
 
 
 
The server must implement a timeout for remote client CSRs.  There is a
 
timeout for each CSR in the server.
 
 
 
RemoteClientTimeout( csr )
 
  select on csr.State
 
    case Responded:
 
        if RESPONSE_DISCARDED then
 
            mark as timed out
 
            Make a candidate for reuse.
 
            return
 
        if csr.RetransCount > MaxRetrans(Client) then
 
            discard Response
 
            mark CSR as RESPONSE_DISCARDED
 
            Timeout(csr, TS4(Client), RemoteClientTimeout)
 
            return
 
        increment csr.RetransCount
 
        { Retransmit Response or forwarded Request }
 
        Set APG to get acknowledgement.
 
        SendPacketGroup( csr )
 
        Timeout( csr, TS3(Client), RemoteClientTimeout )
 
        return
 
    case ReceivingRequest:
 
      if csr.RetransCount > MaxRetrans(csr.Client)
 
        or DGMset(csr) or NRTset(csr) then
 
          Modify csr.segmentSize and csr.MsgDelivery
 
          to indicate packets received.
 
          if MDMset(csr) then
 
              Invoke processing on Request
 
              return
 
          else
 
              discard Request and reuse CSR
 
              (Note: Need not remember Request discarded.)
 
              return
 
      increment csr.RetransCount
 
      NotifyClient( csr, p, RETRY )
 
      Timeout( csr, TS3(Client), RemoteClientTimeout )
 
      return
 
    default:
 
        Report error - invalid state for RemoteClientTimeout
 
    endselect
 
end RemoteClientTimeout
 
 
 
Notes:
 
 
 
  1. When a CSR in the Responded state times out after discarding
 
 
 
 
 
Cheriton                                                      [page 82]
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
RFC 1045                      VMTP                        February 1988
 
 
 
 
 
      the Response, it can be made available for reuse, either by
 
      the same Client or a different one.  The CSR should be kept
 
      available for reuse by the Client for as long as possible to
 
      avoid unnecessary callback Probes.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Cheriton                                                      [page 83]
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
RFC 1045                      VMTP                        February 1988
 
 
 
 
 
6. Concluding Remarks
 
 
 
This document represents a description of the current state of the VMTP
 
design.  We are currently engaged in several experimental
 
implementations to explore and refine all aspects of the protocol.
 
Preliminary implementations are running in the UNIX 4.3BSD kernel and in
 
the V kernel.
 
 
 
Several issues are still being discussed and explored with this
 
protocol.  First, the size of the checksum field and the algorithm to
 
use for its calculation are undergoing some discussion.  The author
 
believes that the conventional 16-bit checksum used with TCP and IP is
 
too weak for future high-speed networks, arguing for at least a 32-bit
 
checksum.  Unfortunately, there appears to be limited theory covering
 
checksum algorithms that are suitable for calculation in software.
 
 
 
Implementation of the streaming facilities of VMTP is still in progress.
 
This facility is expected to be important for wide-area, long delay
 
communication.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Cheriton                                                      [page 84]
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
RFC 1045                      VMTP                        February 1988
 
 
 
 
 
I. Standard VMTP Response Codes
 
 
 
The following are the numeric values of the response codes used in VMTP.
 
 
 
0              OK
 
 
 
1              RETRY
 
 
 
2              RETRY_ALL
 
 
 
3              BUSY
 
 
 
4              NONEXISTENT_ENTITY
 
 
 
5              ENTITY_MIGRATED
 
 
 
6              NO_PERMISSION
 
 
 
7              NOT_AWAITING_MSG
 
 
 
8              VMTP_ERROR
 
 
 
9              MSGTRANS_OVERFLOW
 
 
 
10              BAD_TRANSACTION_ID
 
 
 
11              STREAMING_NOT_SUPPORTED
 
 
 
12              NO_RUN_RECORD
 
 
 
13              RETRANS_TIMEOUT
 
 
 
14              USER_TIMEOUT
 
 
 
15              RESPONSE_DISCARDED
 
 
 
16              SECURITY_NOT_SUPPORTED
 
 
 
17              BAD_REPLY_SEGMENT
 
 
 
18              SECURITY_REQUIRED
 
 
 
19              STREAMED_RESPONSE
 
 
 
20              TOO_MANY_RETRIES
 
 
 
21              NO_PRINCIPAL
 
 
 
 
 
Cheriton                                                      [page 85]
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
RFC 1045                      VMTP                        February 1988
 
 
 
 
 
22              NO_KEY
 
 
 
23              ENCRYPTION_NOT_SUPPORTED
 
 
 
24              NO_AUTHENTICATOR
 
 
 
25-63          Reserved for future VMTP assignment.
 
 
 
Other values of the codes are available for use by higher level
 
protocols.  Separate protocol documents will specify further standard
 
values.
 
 
 
Applications are free to use values starting at 0x00800000 (hex) for
 
application-specific return values.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Cheriton                                                      [page 86]
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
RFC 1045                      VMTP                        February 1988
 
 
 
 
 
II. VMTP RPC Presentation Protocol
 
 
 
For complete generality, the mapping of the procedures and the
 
parameters onto VMTP messages should be defined by a RPC presentation
 
protocol.  In the absence of an accepted standard protocol, we define an
 
RPC presentation protocol for VMTP as follows.
 
 
 
Each procedure is assigned an identifying Request Code.  The Request
 
code serves effectively the same as a tag field of variant record,
 
identifying the format of the Request and associated Response as a
 
variant of the possible message formats.
 
 
 
The format of the Request for a procedure is its Request Code followed
 
by its parameters sequentially in the message control block until it is
 
full.
 
 
 
The remaining parameters are sent as part of the message segment data
 
formatted according to the XDR protocol (RFC ??).  In this case, the
 
size of the segment is specified in the SegmentSize field.
 
 
 
The Response for a procedure consists of a ResponseCode field followed
 
by the return parameters sequentially in the message control block,
 
except if there is a parameter returned that must be transmitted as
 
segment data, its size is specified in the SegmentSize field and the
 
parameter is stored in the SegmentData field.
 
 
 
Attributes associated with procedure definitions should indicate the
 
Flags to be used in the RequestCode.  Request Codes are assigned as
 
described below.
 
 
 
 
 
II.1. Request Code Management
 
 
 
Request codes are divided into Public Interface Codes and
 
application-specific, according to whether the PIC value is set.  An
 
interface is a set of request codes representing one service or module
 
function.  A public interface is one that is to be used in multiple
 
independently developed modules.  In VMTP, public interface codes are
 
allocated in units of 256 structured as
 
 
 
+-------------+----------------+-------------------+
 
| ControlFlags|  Interface    | Version/Procedure |
 
+-------------+----------------+-------------------+
 
    8 bits          16 bits              8 bits
 
 
An interface is free to allocate the 8 bits for version and procedure as
 
desired.  For example, all 8 bits can be used for procedures.  A module
 
requiring more than 256 Version/Procedure values can be allocated
 
 
 
Cheriton                                                      [page 87]
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
RFC 1045                      VMTP                        February 1988
 
 
 
 
 
multiple Interface values.  They need not be consecutive Interface
 
values.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Cheriton                                                      [page 88]
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
RFC 1045                      VMTP                        February 1988
 
 
 
 
 
III. VMTP Management Procedures
 
 
 
Standard procedures are defined for VMTP management, including creation,
 
deletion and query of entities and entity groups, probing to get
 
information about entities, and updating message transaction information
 
at the client or the server.
 
 
 
The procedures are implemented by the VMTP manager that constitutes a
 
portion of every complete VMTP module.  Each procedure is invoked by
 
sending a Request to the VMTP manager that handles the entity specified
 
in the operation or the local manager.  The Request sent using the
 
normal Send operation with the Server specified as the well-known entity
 
group VMTP_MANGER_GROUP, using the CoResident Entity mechanism to direct
 
the request to the specific manager that should handle the Request.
 
(The ProbeEntity operation is multicast to the VMTP_MANAGER_GROUP if the
 
host address for the entity is not known locally and the host address is
 
determined as the host address of the responder.  For all other
 
operations, a ProbeEntity operation is used to determine the host
 
address if it is not known.)  Specifying co-resident entity 0 is
 
interpreted as the co-resident with the invoking process.  The
 
co-resident entity identifier may also specify a group in which case,
 
the Request is sent to all managers with members in this group.
 
 
 
The standard procedures with their RequestCode and parameters are listed
 
below with their semantics.  (The RequestCode range 0xVV000100 to
 
0xVV0001FF is reserved for use by the VMTP management routines, where VV
 
is any choice of control flags with the PIC bit set.  The flags are set
 
below as required for each procedure.)
 
 
 
0x05000101 - ProbeEntity(CREntity, entityId, authDomain) -> (code,
 
                <staterec>)
 
                Request and return information on the specified entity
 
                in the specified authDomain, sending the Request to the
 
                VMTP management module coresident with CREntity.  An
 
                error return is given if the requested information
 
                cannot be provided in the specified authDomain.  The
 
                <staterec> returned is structured as the following
 
                fields.
 
 
 
                Transaction identifier
 
                                The current or next transaction
 
                                identifier being used by the probed
 
                                entity.
 
 
 
                ProcessId: 64 bits
 
                                Identifier for client process.  The
 
                                meaning of this is specified as part of
 
 
 
 
 
Cheriton                                                      [page 89]
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
RFC 1045                      VMTP                        February 1988
 
 
 
 
 
                                the Domain definition.
 
 
 
                PrincipalId    The identifier for the principal or
 
                                account associated with the process
 
                                specified by ProcessId.  The meaning of
 
                                this field is specified as part of the
 
                                Domain definition.
 
 
 
                EffectivePrincipalId
 
                                The identifier for the principal or
 
                                account associated with the Client port,
 
                                which may be different from the
 
                                PrincipalId especially if this is an
 
                                nested call.  The meaning of this field
 
                                is specified as part of the Domain
 
                                definition.
 
 
 
                The code field indicates whether this is an error
 
                response or not.  The codes and their interpretation
 
                are:
 
 
 
                  OK
 
                No error. Probe was completed OK.
 
 
 
                  NONEXISTENT_ENTITY
 
                Specified entity does not exist.
 
 
 
                  ENTITY_MIGRATED
 
                The entity has migrated and is no longer at the host to
 
                which the request was sent.
 
 
 
                  NO_PERMISSION
 
                Entity has refused to provide ProbeResponse.
 
 
 
                  VMTP_ERROR
 
                The Request packet group was in error relative to the
 
                VMTP protocol specification.
 
 
 
                  "default"
 
                Some type of error - discard ProbeResponse.
 
 
 
0x0D000102 - AuthProbeEntity(CREntity,entityId,authDomain,randomId) ->
 
                (code,ProbeAuthenticator,EncryptType,EntityAuthenticator)
 
               
 
                Request authentication of the entity specified by
 
                entityId from the VMTP manager coresident with CREntity
 
                in authDomain authentication domain, returning the
 
 
 
 
 
Cheriton                                                      [page 90]
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
RFC 1045                      VMTP                        February 1988
 
 
 
 
 
                information contained in the return parameters.  The
 
                fields are set the same as that specified for the basic
 
                ProbeResponse except as noted below.
 
 
 
                ProbeAuthenticator
 
                                20 bytes consisting of the EntityId, the
 
                                randomId and the probed Entity's current
 
                                Transaction value plus a 32-bit checksum
 
                                for these two fields (checksummed using
 
                                the standard packet Checksum algorithm),
 
                                all encrypted with the Key supplied in
 
                                the Authenticator.
 
 
 
                EncryptType    An identifier that identifies the
 
                                variant of encryption method being used
 
                                by the probed Entity for packets it
 
                                transmits and packets it is able to
 
                                receive.  (See Appendix V.)  The
 
                                high-order 8 bits of the EncryptType
 
                                contain the XOR of the 8 octets of the
 
                                PrincipalId associated with private key
 
                                used to encrypt the EntityAuthenticator.
 
                                This value is used by the requestor or
 
                                Client as an aid in locating the key to
 
                                decrypt the authenticator.
 
 
 
                EntityAuthenticator
 
                                (returned as segment data) The
 
                                ProcessId, PrincipalId,
 
                                EffectivePrincipal associated with the
 
                                ProbedEntity plus the private
 
                                encryption/decryption key and its
 
                                lifetime limit to be used for
 
                                communication with the Entity.  The
 
                                authenticator is encrypted with a
 
                                private key associated with the Client
 
                                entity such that it can be neither read
 
                                nor forged by a party not trusted by the
 
                                Client Entity.  The format of the
 
                                Authenticator in the message segment is
 
                                shown in detail in Figure III-1.
 
 
 
                Key: 64 bits    Encryption key to be used for encrypting
 
                                and decrypting packets sent to and
 
                                received from the probed Entity.  This
 
                                is the "working" key for packet
 
                                transmissions.  VMTP only uses private
 
 
 
 
 
Cheriton                                                      [page 91]
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
RFC 1045                      VMTP                        February 1988
 
 
 
 
 
                +-----------------------------------------------+
 
                |            ProcessId  (8 octets)            |
 
                +-----------------------------------------------+
 
                |          PrincipalId  (8 octets)            |
 
                +-----------------------------------------------+
 
                |          EffectivePrincipalId  (8 octets)    |
 
                +-----------------------------------------------+
 
                |            Key  (8 octets)                    |
 
                +-----------------------------------------------+
 
                |              KeyTimeLimit                    |
 
                +-----------------------------------------------+
 
                |              AuthDomain                      |
 
                +-----------------------------------------------+
 
                |              AuthChecksum                    |
 
                +-----------------------------------------------+
 
 
 
                  Figure III-1:  Authenticator Format
 
 
 
                                key encryption for data transmission.
 
 
 
                KeyTimeLimit: 32 bits
 
                                The time in seconds since Dec. 31st,
 
                                1969 GMT at which one should cease to
 
                                use the Key.
 
 
 
                AuthDomain: 32 bits
 
                                The authentication domain in which to
 
                                interpret the principal identifiers.
 
                                This may be different from the
 
                                authDomain specified in the call if the
 
                                Server cannot provide the authentication
 
                                information in the request domain.
 
 
 
                AuthChecksum: 32 bits
 
                                Contains the checksum (using the same
 
                                Checksum algorithm as for packet) of
 
                                KeyTimeLimit, Key, PrincipalId and
 
                                EffectivePrincipalId.
 
 
 
                Notes:
 
 
 
                  1. A authentication Probe Request and Response
 
                      are sent unencrypted in general because it is
 
                      used prior to there being a secure channel.
 
                      Therefore, specific fields or groups of
 
                      fields checksummed and encrypted to prevent
 
                      unauthorized modification or forgery.  In
 
 
 
 
 
Cheriton                                                      [page 92]
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
RFC 1045                      VMTP                        February 1988
 
 
 
 
 
                      particular, the ProbeAuthenticator is
 
                      checksummed and encrypted with the Key.
 
 
 
                  2. The ProbeAuthenticator authenticates the
 
                      Response as responding to the Request when
 
                      its EntityId, randomId and Transaction values
 
                      match those in the Probe request.  The
 
                      ProbeAutenticator is bound to the
 
                      EntityAutenticator by being encrypted by the
 
                      private Key contained in that authenticator.
 
 
 
                  3. The authenticator is encrypted such that it
 
                      can be decrypted by a private key, known to
 
                      the Client.  This authenticator is presumably
 
                      obtained from a key distribution center that
 
                      the Client trusts.  The AuthChecksum prevents
 
                      undetected modifications to the
 
                      authenticator.
 
 
 
0x05000103 - ProbeEntityBlock( entityId ) -> ( code, entityId )
 
                Check whether the block of 256 entity identifiers
 
                associated with this entityId are in use.  The entityId
 
                returned should match that being queried or else the
 
                return value should be ignored and the operation redone.
 
 
 
0x05000104 - QueryVMTPNode( entityId ) -> (code, MTU, flags, authdomain,
 
                domains, authdomains, domainlist)
 
                Query the VMTP management module for entityId to get
 
                various module- or node-wide parameters, including:  (1)
 
                MTU - Maximum transmission unit or packet size handled
 
                by this node.  (2) flags- zero or more of the following
 
                bit fields:
 
 
 
                1              Handles streamed Requests.
 
 
 
                2              Can issue streamed message transactions
 
                                for clients.
 
 
 
                4              Handles secure Requests.
 
 
 
                8              Can issue secure message transactions.
 
 
 
                The authdomain indicates the primary authentication
 
                domain supported.  The domains and authdomains
 
                parameters indicate the number of entity domains and
 
                authentication domains supported by this node, which are
 
                listed in the data segment parameter domainlist if
 
 
 
 
 
Cheriton                                                      [page 93]
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
RFC 1045                      VMTP                        February 1988
 
 
 
 
 
                either parameter is non-zero. (All the entity domains
 
                precede the authentication domains in the data segment.)
 
 
 
0x05000105 - GetRequestForwarder( CREntity, entityId1 ) -> (code,
 
                entityId2, principal, authDomain)
 
                Return the forwarding server's entity identifer and
 
                principal for the forwarder of entityId1.  CREntity
 
                should be zero to get the local VMTP management module.
 
 
 
0x05000106 - CreateEntity( entityId1 ) -> ( code, entityId2 )
 
                Create a new entity and return its entity identifier in
 
                entityId2.  The entity is created local to the entity
 
                specified in entityId1 and local to the requestor if
 
                entityId1 is 0.
 
 
 
0x05000107 - DeleteEntity( entityId ) -> ( code )
 
                Delete the entity specified by entityId, which may be a
 
                group.  If a group, the deletion is only on a best
 
                efforts basis.  The client must take additional measures
 
                to ensure complete deletion if required.
 
 
 
0x0D000108 -QueryEntity( entityId ) -> ( code, descriptor )
 
                Return a descriptor of entityId in arg of a maximum of
 
                segmentSize bytes.
 
 
 
0x05000109 - SignalEntity( entityId, arg )->( code )
 
                Send the signal specified by arg to the entity specified
 
                by entityId.  (arg is 32 bits.)
 
 
 
0x0500010A - CreateGroup(CREntity,entityGroupId,entityId,perms)->(code)
 
                Request that the VMTP manager local to CREntity create
 
                an new entity group, using the specified entityGroupId
 
                with entityId as the first member and permissions
 
                "perms", a 32-bit field described later.  The invoker is
 
                registered as a manager of the new group, giving it the
 
                permissions to add or remove members.  (Normally
 
                CREntity is 0, indicating the VMTP manager local to the
 
                requestor.)
 
 
 
0x0500010B - AddToGroup(CREntity, entityGroupId, entityId,
 
                perms)->(code)
 
                Request that the VMTP manager local to CREntity add the
 
                specified entityId to the entityGroupId with the
 
                specified permissions.  If entityGroupId specifies a
 
                restricted group, the invoker must have permission to
 
                add members to the group, either because the invoker is
 
 
 
 
 
Cheriton                                                      [page 94]
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
RFC 1045                      VMTP                        February 1988
 
 
 
 
 
                a manager of the group or because it was added to the
 
                group with the required permissions.  If CREntity is 0,
 
                then the local VMTP manager checks permissions and
 
                forwards the request with CREntity set to entityId and
 
                the entityId field set to a digital signature (see
 
                below) of the Request by the VMTP manager, certifying
 
                that the Client has the permissions required by the
 
                Request.  (If entityGroupId specifies an unrestricted
 
                group, the Request can be sent directly to the handling
 
                VMTP manager by setting CREntity to entityId.)
 
 
 
0x0500010C - RemoveFromGroup(CREntity, entityGroupId, entityId)->(code)
 
                Request that the VMTP manager local to CREntity remove
 
                the specified entityId from the group specified by
 
                entityGroupId.  Normally CREntity is 0, indicating the
 
                VMTP manager local to the requestor.  If CREntity is 0,
 
                then the local VMTP manager checks permissions and
 
                forwards the request with CREntity set to entityId and
 
                the entityId field a digital signature of the Request by
 
                the VMTP manager, certifying that the Client has the
 
                permissions required by the Request.
 
 
 
0x0500010D - QueryGroup( entityId )->( code, record )... 
 
                Return information on the specified entity.  The
 
                Response from each responding VMTP manager is (code,
 
                record).  The format of the record is (memberCount,
 
                member1, member2, ...).  The Responses are returned on a
 
                best efforts basis; there is no guarantee that responses
 
                from all managers with members in the specified group
 
                will be received.
 
 
 
0x0500010E - ModifyService(entityId,flags,count,pc,threadlist)->(code,
 
                count)
 
                Modify the service associated with the entity specified
 
                by entityId.  The flags may indicate a message service
 
                model, in which case the call "count" parameter
 
                indicates the maximum number of queued messages desired;
 
                the return "count" parameter indicates the number of
 
                queued message allowed.  Alternatively, the "flags"
 
                parameters indicates the RPC thread service model, in
 
                which case "count" threads are requested, each with an
 
                inital program counter as specified and stack, priority
 
                and message receive area indicated by the threadlist.
 
                In particular, "threadlist" consists of "count" records
 
                of the form
 
                (priority,stack,stacksize,segment,segmentsize), each one
 
                assigned to one of the threads.  Flags defined for the
 
 
 
 
 
Cheriton                                                      [page 95]
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
RFC 1045                      VMTP                        February 1988
 
 
 
 
 
                "flags" parameter are:
 
 
 
                1              THREAD_SERVICE - otherwise the message
 
                                model.
 
 
 
                2              AUTHENTICATION_REQUIRED - Sent a Probe
 
                                request to determine principal
 
                                associated with the Client, if not
 
                                known.
 
 
 
                4              SECURITY_REQUIRED - Request must be
 
                                encrypted or else reject.
 
 
 
                8              INCREMENTAL - treat the count value as
 
                                an increment (or decrement) relative to
 
                                the current value rather than an
 
                                absolute value for the maximum number of
 
                                queued messages or threads.
 
 
 
                In the thread model, the count must be a positive
 
                increment or else 0, which disables the service.  Only a
 
                count of 0 terminates currently queued requests or
 
                in-progress request handling.
 
 
 
0x4500010F -
 
                NotifyVmtpClient(client,cntrl,recSeq,transact,delivery,code)->()
 
               
 
                Update the state associated with the transaction
 
                specified by client and transact, an entity identifier
 
                and transaction identifier, respectively.  This
 
                operation is normally used only by another VMTP
 
                management module.  (Note that it is a datagram
 
                operation.)  The other parameters are as follows:
 
 
 
                ctrl            A 32-bit value corresponding to 4th
 
                                32-bit word of the VMTP header of a
 
                                Response packet that would be sent in
 
                                response to the Request that this is
 
                                responding to.  That is, the control
 
                                flags, ForwardCount, RetransmitCount and
 
                                Priority fields match those of the
 
                                Request.  (The NRS flag is set if the
 
                                receiveSeqNumber field is used.)  The
 
                                PGCount subfield indicates the number of
 
                                previous Request packet groups being
 
                                acknowledged by this Notify operation.
 
                                (The bit fields that are reserved in
 
 
 
 
 
Cheriton                                                      [page 96]
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
RFC 1045                      VMTP                        February 1988
 
 
 
 
 
                                this word in the header are also
 
                                reserved here and must be zero.)
 
 
 
                recSeq          Sequence number of reception at the
 
                                Server if the NRS flag is set in the
 
                                ctrl parameter, otherwise reserved and
 
                                zero.  (This is used for sender-based
 
                                logging of message activity for replay
 
                                in case of failure - an optional
 
                                facility.)
 
 
 
                delivery        Indicates the segment blocks of the
 
                                packet group have been received at the
 
                                Server.
 
 
 
                code            indicates the action the client should
 
                                take, as described below.
 
 
 
                The VMTP management module should take action on this
 
                operation according to the code, as specified below.
 
 
 
                OK              Do nothing at this time, continue
 
                                waiting for the response with a reset
 
                                timer.
 
 
 
                RETRY          Retransmit the request packet group
 
                                immediately with at least the segment
 
                                blocks that the Server failed to
 
                                receive, the complement of those
 
                                indicated by the delivery parameter.
 
 
 
                RETRY_ALL      Retransmit the request packet group
 
                                immediately with at least the segment
 
                                blocks that the Server failed to
 
                                receive, as indicated by the delivery
 
                                field plus all subsequently transmitted
 
                                packets that are part of this packet
 
                                run.  (The latter is applicable only for
 
                                streamed message transactions.)
 
 
 
                BUSY            The server was unable to accept the
 
                                Request at this time.  Retry later if
 
                                desired to continue with the message
 
                                transaction.
 
 
 
                NONEXISTENT_ENTITY
 
                                Specified Server entity does not exist.
 
 
 
 
 
Cheriton                                                      [page 97]
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
RFC 1045                      VMTP                        February 1988
 
 
 
 
 
                ENTITY_MIGRATED The server entity has migrated and is no
 
                                longer at the host to which the request
 
                                was sent.  The Server should attempt to
 
                                determine the new host address of the
 
                                Client using the VMTP management
 
                                ProbeEntity operation (described
 
                                earlier).
 
 
 
                NO_PERMISSION  Server has not authorized reception of
 
                                messages from this client.
 
 
 
                NOT_AWAITING_MSG
 
                                The conditional message delivery bit was
 
                                set for the Request packet group and the
 
                                Server was not waiting for it so the
 
                                Request packet group was discarded.
 
 
 
                VMTP_ERROR      The Request packet group was in error
 
                                relative to the VMTP protocol
 
                                specification.
 
 
 
                BAD_TRANSACTION_ID
 
                                Transaction identifier is old relative
 
                                to the transaction identifier held for
 
                                the Client by the Server.
 
 
 
                STREAMING_NOT_SUPPORTED
 
                                Server does not support multiple
 
                                outstanding message transactions from
 
                                the same Client, i.e. streamed message
 
                                transactions.
 
 
 
                SECURITY_NOT_SUPPORTED
 
                                The Request was secure and this Server
 
                                does not support security.
 
 
 
                SECURITY_REQUIRED
 
                                The Server is refusing the Request
 
                                because it was not encrypted.
 
 
 
                NO_RUN_RECORD  Server has no record of previous packets
 
                                in this run of packet groups.  This can
 
                                occur if the first packet group is lost
 
                                or if the current packet group is sent
 
                                significantly later than the last one
 
                                and the Server has discarded its client
 
                                state record.
 
 
 
 
 
Cheriton                                                      [page 98]
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
RFC 1045                      VMTP                        February 1988
 
 
 
 
 
0x45000110 - NotifyVmtpServer(server,client,transact,delivery,code)->()
 
                Update the server state associated with the transaction
 
                specified by client and transact, an entity identifier
 
                and transaction identifier, respectively.  This
 
                operation is normally used only by another VMTP
 
                management module.  (Note that it is a datagram
 
                operation.)  The other parameters are as follows:
 
 
 
                delivery        Indicates the segment blocks of the
 
                                Response packet group that have been
 
                                received at the Client.
 
 
 
                code            indicates the action the Server should
 
                                take, as listed below.
 
 
 
                The VMTP management module should take action on this
 
                operation according to the code, as specified below.
 
 
 
                OK              Client is satisfied with Response data.
 
                                The Server can discard the response
 
                                data, if any.
 
 
 
                RETRY          Retransmit the Response packet group
 
                                immediately with at least the segment
 
                                blocks that the Client failed to
 
                                receive, as indicated by the delivery
 
                                parameter.  (The delivery parameter
 
                                indicates those segment blocks received
 
                                by the Client).
 
 
 
                RETRY_ALL      Retransmit the Response packet group
 
                                immediately with at least the segment
 
                                blocks that the Client failed to
 
                                receive, as indicated by the (complement
 
                                of) the delivery parameter.  Also,
 
                                retransmit all Response packet groups
 
                                send subsequent to the specified packet
 
                                group.
 
 
 
                NONEXISTENT_ENTITY
 
                                Specified Client entity does not exist.
 
 
 
                ENTITY_MIGRATED The Client entity has migrated and is no
 
                                longer at the host to which the response
 
                                was sent.
 
 
 
                RESPONSE_DISCARDED
 
 
 
 
 
Cheriton                                                      [page 99]
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
RFC 1045                      VMTP                        February 1988
 
 
 
 
 
                                The Response was discarded and no longer
 
                                of interest to the Client.  This may
 
                                occur if the conditional message
 
                                delivery bit was set for the Response
 
                                packet group and the Client was not
 
                                waiting for it so the Response packet
 
                                group was discarded.
 
 
 
                VMTP_ERROR      The Response packet group was in error
 
                                relative to the VMTP protocol
 
                                specification.
 
 
 
0x41000111 -
 
                NotifyRemoteVmtpClient(client,ctrl,recSeq,transact,delivery,code->()
 
               
 
                The same as NotifyVmtpClient except the co-resident
 
                addressing is not used.  This operation is used to
 
                update client state that is remote when a Request is
 
                forwarded.
 
 
 
Note the use of the CRE bit in the RequestCodes to route the request to
 
the correct VMTP management module(s) to handle the request.
 
 
 
 
 
III.1. Entity Group Management
 
 
 
An entity in a group has a set of permissions associated with its
 
membership, controling whether it can add or remove others, whether it
 
can remove itself, and whether others can remove it from the group.  The
 
permissions for entity groups are as follows:
 
VMTP_GRP_MANAGER    0x00000001 { Manager of group. }
 
VMTP_REM_BY_SELF    0x00000002 { Can be removed self. }
 
VMTP_REM_BY_PRIN    0x00000004 { Can be rem'ed by same principal}
 
VMTP_REM_BY_OTHE    0x00000008 { Can be removed any others. }
 
VMTP_ADD_PRIN      0x00000010 { Can add by same principal. }
 
VMTP_ADD_OTHE      0x00000020 { Can add any others. }
 
VMTP_REM_PRIN      0x00000040 { Can remove same principal. }
 
VMTP_REM_OTHE      0x00000080 { Can remove any others. }
 
 
 
To remove an entity from a restricted group, the invoker must have
 
permission to remove that entity and the entity must have permissions
 
that allow it to be removed by that entity.  With an unrestricted group,
 
only the latter condition applies.
 
 
 
With a restricted group, a member can only be added by another entity
 
with the permissions to add other entities.  The creator of a group is
 
given full permissions on a group.  A entity adding another entity to a
 
 
 
 
 
Cheriton                                                      [page 100]
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
RFC 1045                      VMTP                        February 1988
 
 
 
 
 
group can only give the entity it adds a subset of its permissions.
 
With unrestricted groups, any entity can add itself to the group.  It
 
can also add other entities to the group providing the entity is not
 
marked as immune to such requests.  (This is an implementation
 
restriction that individual entities can impose.)
 
 
 
 
 
III.2. VMTP Management Digital Signatures
 
 
 
As mentioned above, the entityId field of the AddToGroup and
 
RemoveFromGroup is used to transmit a digital signature indicating the
 
permission for the operation has been checked by the sending kernel.
 
The digital signature procedures have not yet been defined.  This field
 
should be set to 0 for now to indicate no signature after the CREntity
 
parameter is set to the entity on which the operation is to be
 
performed.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Cheriton                                                      [page 101]
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
RFC 1045                      VMTP                        February 1988
 
 
 
 
 
IV. VMTP Entity Identifier Domains
 
 
 
VMTP allows for several disjoint naming domains for its endpoints.  The
 
64-bit entity identifier is only unique and meaningful within its
 
domain.  Each domain can define its own algorithm or mechanism for
 
assignment of entity identifiers, although each domain mechanism must
 
ensure uniqueness, stability of identifiers and host independence.
 
 
 
 
 
IV.1. Domain 1
 
 
 
For initial use of VMTP, we define the domain with Domain identifier 1
 
as follows:
 
 
 
+-----------+----------------+------------------------+
 
| TypeFlags | Discriminator  |    Internet Address    |
 
+-----------+----------------+------------------------+
 
    4 bits          28 bits                32 bits
 
 
The Internet address is the Internet address of the host on which this
 
entity-id is originally allocated.  The Discriminator is an arbitrary
 
value that is unique relative to this Internet host address.  In
 
addition, the host must guarantee that this identifier does not get
 
reused for a long period of time after it becomes invalid.  ("Invalid"
 
means that no VMTP module considers in bound to an entity.)  One
 
technique is to use the lower order bits of a 1 second clock.  The clock
 
need not represent real-time but must never be set back after a crash.
 
In a simple implementation, using the low order bits of a clock as the
 
time stamp, the generation of unique identifiers is overall limited to
 
no more than 1 per second on average.  The type flags were described in
 
Section 3.1.
 
 
 
An entity may migrate between hosts.  Thus, an implementation can
 
heuristically use the embedded Internet address to locate an entity but
 
should be prepared to maintain a cache of redirects for migrated
 
entities, plus accept Notify operations indicating that migration has
 
occurred.
 
 
 
Entity group identifiers in Domain 1 are structured in one of two forms,
 
depending on whether they are well-known or dynamically allocated
 
identifiers.  A well-known entity identifier is structured as:
 
 
 
+-----------+----------------+------------------------+
 
| TypeFlags |  Discriminator |Internet Host Group Addr|
 
+-----------+----------------+------------------------+
 
    4 bits          28 bits                32 bits
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Cheriton                                                      [page 102]
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
RFC 1045                      VMTP                        February 1988
 
 
 
 
 
with the second high-order bit (GRP) set to 1.  This form of entity
 
identifier is mapped to the Internet host group address specified in the
 
low-order 32 bits.  The Discriminator distinguishes group identifiers
 
using the same Internet host group.  Well-known entity group identifiers
 
should be allocated to correspond to the basic services provided by
 
hosts that are members of the group, not specifically because that
 
service is provided by VMTP.  For example, the well-known entity group
 
identifier for the domain name service should contain as its embedded
 
Internet host group address the host group for Domain Name servers.
 
 
 
A dynamically allocated entity identifier is structured as:
 
 
 
+-----------+----------------+------------------------+
 
| TypeFlags |  Discriminator |  Internet Host Addr  |
 
+-----------+----------------+------------------------+
 
    4 bits          28 bits            32 bits
 
 
 
with the second high-order bit (GRP) set to 1.  The Internet address in
 
the low-order 32 bits is a Internet address assigned to the host that
 
dynamically allocates this entity group identifier.  A dynamically
 
allocated entity group identifier is mapped to Internet host group
 
address 232.X.X.X where X.X.X are the low-order 24 bits of the
 
Discriminator subfield of the entity group identifier.
 
 
 
We use the following notation for Domain 1 entity identifiers <10> and
 
propose it use as a standard convention.
 
 
 
        <flags>-<discriminator>-<Internet address>
 
 
 
where <flags> are [X]{BE,LE,RG,UG}[A]
 
 
 
    X = reserved
 
    BE = big-endian entity
 
    LE = little-endian entity
 
    RG = restricted group
 
    UG = unrestricted group
 
    A  = alias
 
 
 
and <discriminator> is a decimal integer and <Internet address> is in
 
standard dotted decimal IP address notation.
 
 
 
Examples:
 
 
 
_______________
 
 
 
<10>  This notation was developed by Steve Deering.
 
 
 
 
 
Cheriton                                                      [page 103]
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
RFC 1045                      VMTP                        February 1988
 
 
 
 
 
BE-25593-36.8.0.49 is big-endian entity #25593 created on host
 
                36.8.0.49.
 
 
 
RG-1-224.0.1.0 is the well-known restricted VMTP managers group.
 
 
 
UG-565338-36.8.0.77 is unrestricted entity group #565338 created on host
 
                36.8.0.77.
 
 
 
LEA-7823-36.8.0.77 is a little-endian alias entity #7823 created on host
 
                36.8.0.77.
 
 
 
This notation makes it easy to communicate and understand entity
 
identifiers for Domain 1.
 
 
 
The well-known entity identifiers specified to date are:
 
 
 
VMTP_MANAGER_GROUP  RG-1-224.0.1.0
 
                Managers for VMTP operations.
 
 
 
VMTP_DEFAULT_BECLIENT  BE-1-224.0.1.0
 
                Client entity identifier to use when a (big-endian) host
 
                has not determined or been allocated any client entity
 
                identifiers.
 
 
 
VMTP_DEFAULT_LECLIENT  LE-1-224.0.1.0
 
                Client entity identifier to use when a (little-endian)
 
                host has not determined or been allocated any client
 
                entity identifiers.
 
 
 
Note that 224.0.1.0 is the host group address assigned to VMTP and to
 
which all VMTP hosts belong.
 
 
 
Other well-known entity group identifiers will be specified in
 
subsequent extensions to VMTP and in higher-level protocols that use
 
VMTP.
 
 
 
 
 
IV.2. Domain 3
 
 
 
Domain 3 is reserved for embedded systems that are restricted to a
 
single network and are independent of IP.  Entity identifiers are
 
allocated using the decentralized approach described below.  The mapping
 
of entity group identifiers is specific to the type of network being
 
used and not defined here.  In general, there should be a simple
 
algorithmic mapping from entity group identifier to multicast address,
 
similar to that described for Domain 1.  Similarly, the values for
 
default client identifier are specific to the type of network and not
 
 
 
 
 
Cheriton                                                      [page 104]
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
RFC 1045                      VMTP                        February 1988
 
 
 
 
 
defined here.
 
 
 
 
 
IV.3. Other Domains
 
 
 
Definition of additional VMTP domains is planned for the future.
 
Requests for allocation of VMTP Domains should be addressed to the
 
Internet protocol administrator.
 
 
 
 
 
IV.4. Decentralized Entity Identifier Allocation
 
 
 
The ProbeEntityBlock operation may be used to determine whether a block
 
of entity identifiers is in use.  ("In use" means valid or reserved by a
 
host for allocation.)  This mechanism is used to detect collisions in
 
allocation of blocks of entity identifiers as part of the implementation
 
of decentralized allocation of entity identifiers.  (Decentralized
 
allocation is used in local domain use of VMTP such as in embedded
 
systems- see Domain 3.)
 
 
 
Basically, a group of hosts can form a Domain or sub-Domain, a group of
 
hosts managing their own entity identifier space or subspace,
 
respectively.  As an example of a sub-Domain, a group of hosts in Domain
 
1 all identified with a particular host group address can manage the
 
sub-Domain corresponding to all entity identifiers that contain that
 
host group address.  The ProbeEntityBlock operation is used to allocate
 
the random bits of these identifiers as follows.
 
 
 
When a host requires a new block of entity identifiers, it selects a new
 
block (randomly or by some choice algorithm) and then multicasts a
 
ProbeEntityBlock request to the members of the (sub-)Domain some R
 
times.  If no response is received after R (re)transmissions, the host
 
concludes that it is free to use this block of identifiers.  Otherwise,
 
it picks another block and tries again.
 
 
 
Notes:
 
 
 
  1. A block of 256 identifiers is specified by an entity
 
      identifier with the low-order 8 bits all zero.
 
 
 
  2. When a host allocates an initial block of entity identifiers
 
      (and therefore does not yet have a specified entity
 
      identifier to use) it uses VMTP_DEFAULT_BECLIENT (if
 
      big-endian, else VMTP_DEFAULT_LECLIENT if little-endian) as
 
      its client identifier in the ProbeEntityBlock Request and a
 
      transaction identifier of 0.  As soon as it has allocated a
 
      block of entity identifiers, it should use these identifiers
 
 
 
 
 
Cheriton                                                      [page 105]
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
RFC 1045                      VMTP                        February 1988
 
 
 
 
 
      for all subsequent communication.  The default client
 
      identifier values are defined for each Domain.
 
 
 
  3. The set of hosts using this decentralized allocation must not
 
      be subject to network partitioning.  That is, the R
 
      transmissions must be sufficient to ensure that every host
 
      sees the ProbeEntityBlock request and (reliably) sends a
 
      response.  (A host that detects a collision can retransmit
 
      the response multiple times until it sees a new
 
      ProbeEntityBlock operation from the same host/Client up to a
 
      maximum number of times.)  For instance, a set of machines
 
      connected by a single local network may able to use this type
 
      of allocation.
 
 
 
  4. To guarantee T-stability, a host must prevent reuse of a
 
      block of identifiers if any of the identifiers in the block
 
      are currently valid or have been valid less than T seconds
 
      previously.  To this end, a host must remember recently used
 
      identifiers and object to their reuse in response to a
 
      ProbeEntityBlock operation.
 
 
 
  5. Care is required in a VMTP implementation to ensure that
 
      Probe operations cannot be discarded due to lack of buffer
 
      space or queued or delayed so that a response is not
 
      generated quickly.  This is required not only to detect
 
      collisions but also to provide accurate roundtrip estimates
 
      as part of ProbeEntity operations.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Cheriton                                                      [page 106]
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
RFC 1045                      VMTP                        February 1988
 
 
 
 
 
V. Authentication Domains
 
 
 
A VMTP authentication domain defines the format and interpretation for
 
principal identifiers and encryption keys.  In particular, an
 
authentication domain must specify a means by which principal
 
identifiers are allocated and guaranteed unique and stable.  The
 
currently defined authentication domains are as follows (0 is reserved).
 
 
 
Ideally, all entities within one entity domain are also associated with
 
one authentication domain.  However, authentication domains are
 
orthogonal to entity domains.  Entities within one domain may have
 
different authentication domains.  (In this case, it is generally
 
necessary to have some correspondence between principals in the
 
different domains.)  Also, one entity identifier may be associated with
 
multiple authentication domains.  Finally, one authentication domain may
 
be used across multiple entity domains.
 
 
 
 
 
V.1. Authentication Domain 1
 
 
 
A principal identifier is structured as follows.
 
 
 
+---------------------------+------------------------+
 
|    Internet Address      | Local User Identifier  |
 
+---------------------------+------------------------+
 
            32 bits                    32 bits
 
 
 
The Internet Address may specify an individual host (such as a UNIX
 
machine) or may specify a host group address corresponding to a cluster
 
of machines operating under a single adminstration.  In both cases,
 
there is assumed to be an adminstration associated with the embedded
 
Internet address that guarantees the uniqueness and stability of the
 
User Identifier relative to the Internet address.  In particular, that
 
administration is the only one authorized to allocate principal
 
identifiers with that Internet address prefix, and it may allocate any
 
of these identifiers.
 
 
 
In authentication domain 1, the standard EncryptionQualifiers are:
 
 
 
0              Clear text - no encryption.
 
 
 
1              use 64-bit CBC DES for encryption and decryption.
 
 
 
 
 
V.2. Other Authentication Domains
 
 
 
Other authentication domains will be defined in the future as needed.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Cheriton                                                      [page 107]
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
RFC 1045                      VMTP                        February 1988
 
 
 
 
 
VI. IP Implementation
 
 
 
VMTP is designed to be implemented on the DoD IP Internet Datagram
 
Protocol (although it may also be implemented as a local network
 
protocol directly in "raw" network packets.)
 
 
 
VMTP is assigned the protocol number 81.
 
 
 
With a 20 octet IP header and one segment block, a VMTP packet is 600
 
octets.  By convention, any host implementing VMTP implicitly agrees to
 
accept VMTP/IP packets of at least 600 octets.
 
 
 
VMTP multicast facilities are designed to work with, and have been
 
implemented using, the multicast extensions to the Internet [8]
 
described in RFC 966 and 988.  The wide-scale use of full VMTP/IP
 
depends on the availability of IP multicast in this form.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Cheriton                                                      [page 108]
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
RFC 1045                      VMTP                        February 1988
 
 
 
 
 
VII. Implementation Notes
 
 
 
The performance and reliability of a protocol in operation is highly
 
dependent on the quality of its implementation, in addition to the
 
"intrinsic" quality of the protocol design.  One of the design goals of
 
the VMTP effort was to produce an efficiently implementable protocol.
 
The following notes and suggestions are based on experience with
 
implementing VMTP in the V distributed system and the UNIX 4.3 BSD
 
kernel.  The following is described for a client and server handling
 
only one domain.  A multi-domain client or server would replicate these
 
structures for each domain, although buffer space may be shared.
 
 
 
 
 
VII.1. Mapping Data Structures
 
 
 
The ClientMap procedure is implemented using a hash table that maps to
 
the Client State Record whether this entity is local or remote, as shown
 
in Figure VII-1.
 
 
 
            +---+---+--------------------------+
 
ClientMap  |  | x |                          |
 
            +---+-|-+--------------------------+
 
                  |  +--------------+    +--------------+
 
                  +-->| LocalClient  |--->| LocalClient  |
 
                      +--------------+    +--------------+
 
                      | RemoteClient |    | RemoteClient |-> ...
 
                      +--------------+    +--------------+
 
                      |              |    |              |
 
                      |              |    |              |
 
                      +--------------+    +--------------+
 
 
 
            Figure VII-1:  Mapping Client Identifier to CSR
 
 
 
Local clients are linked through the LocalClientLink, similarly for the
 
RemoteClientLink.  Once a CSR with the specified Entity Id is found,
 
some field or flag indicates whether it is identifying a local or remote
 
Entity.  Hash collisions are handled with the overflow pointers
 
LocalClientLink and RemoteClientLink (not shown) in the CSR for the
 
LocalClient and RemoteClient fields, respectively.  Note that a CSR
 
representing an RPC request has both a local and remote entity
 
identifier mapping to the same CSR.
 
 
 
The Server specified in a Request is mapped to a server descriptor using
 
the ServerMap (with collisions handled by the overflow pointer.).  The
 
server descriptor is the root of a queue of CSR's for handling requests
 
plus flags that modify the handling of the Request.  Flags include:
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Cheriton                                                      [page 109]
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
RFC 1045                      VMTP                        February 1988
 
 
 
 
 
                +-------+---+-------------------------+
 
  ServerMap      |      | x |                        |
 
                +-------+-|-+-------------------------+
 
                          |  +--------------+
 
                          |  | OverflowLink |
 
                          |  +--------------+
 
                          +-->|  Server    |
 
                              +--------------+
 
                              | Flags | Lock |
 
                              +--------------+
 
                              | Head Pointer |
 
                              +--------------+
 
                              | Tail Pointer |
 
                              +--------------+
 
 
 
              Figure VII-2:  Mapping Server Identifiers
 
 
 
THREAD_QUEUE    Request is to be invoked directly as a remote procedure
 
                invocation, rather than by a server process in the
 
                message model.
 
 
 
AUTHENTICATION_REQUIRED
 
                Sent a Probe request to determine principal associated
 
                with the Client, if not known.
 
 
 
SECURITY_REQUIRED
 
                Request must be encrypted or else reject.
 
 
 
REQUESTS_QUEUED Queue contains waiting requests, rather than free CSR's.
 
                Queue this request as well.
 
 
 
SERVER_WAITING  The server is waiting and available to handle incoming
 
                Request immediately, as required by CMD.
 
 
 
Alternatively, the Server identifiers can be mapped to a CSR using the
 
MapToClient mechanism with a pointer in the CSR refering to the server
 
descriptor, if any.  This scheme is attractive if there are client CSR's
 
associated with a service to allow it to communicate as a client using
 
VMTP with other services.
 
 
 
Finally, a similar structure is used to expand entity group identifiers
 
to the local membership, as shown in Figure VII-3.  A group identifier
 
is hashed to an index in the GroupMap.  The list of group descriptors
 
rooted at that index in the GroupMap contains a group descriptor for
 
each local member of the group.  The flags are the group permissions
 
defined in Appendix III.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Cheriton                                                      [page 110]
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
RFC 1045                      VMTP                        February 1988
 
 
 
 
 
                +-------+---+----------------------------------+
 
  GroupMap      |      | x |                                  |
 
                +-------+-|-+----------------------------------+
 
                          |  +--------------+
 
                          |  | OverflowLink |
 
                          |  +--------------+
 
                          +-->|EntityGroupId |
 
                              +--------------+
 
                              | Flags        |
 
                              +--------------+
 
                              | Member Entity|
 
                              +--------------+
 
 
 
              Figure VII-3:  Mapping Group Identifiers
 
 
 
Note that the same pool of descriptors could be used for the server and
 
group descriptors given that they are similar in size.
 
 
 
 
 
VII.2. Client Data Structures
 
 
 
Each client entity is represented as a client state record.  The CSR
 
contains a VMTP header as well as other bookkeeping fields, including
 
timeout count, retransmission count, as described in Section 4.1.  In
 
addition, there is a timeout queue, transmission queue and reception
 
queue.  Finally, there is a ServerHost cache that maps from server
 
entity-id records to host address, estimated round trip time,
 
interpacket gap, MTU size and (optimally) estimated processing time for
 
this server entity.
 
 
 
 
 
VII.3. Server Data Structures
 
 
 
The server maintains a heap of client state records (CSR), one for each
 
(Client, Transaction).  (If streams are not supported, there is, at
 
worst, a CSR per Client with which the server has communicated with
 
recently.)  The CSR contains a VMTP header as well as various
 
bookkeeping fields including timeout count, retransmission count.  The
 
server maintains a hash table mapping of Client to CSR as well as the
 
transmission, timeout and reception queues.  In a VMTP module
 
implementing both the client and server functions, the same timeout
 
queue and transmission queue are used for both.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Cheriton                                                      [page 111]
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
RFC 1045                      VMTP                        February 1988
 
 
 
 
 
VII.4. Packet Group transmission
 
 
 
The procedure SendPacketGroup( csr ) transmits the packet group
 
specified by the record CSR.  It performs:
 
 
 
  1. Fragmentation of the segment data, if any, into packets.
 
      (Note, segment data flagged by SDA bit.)
 
 
 
  2. Modifies the VMTP header for each packet as required e.g.
 
      changing the delivery mask as appropriate.
 
 
 
  3. Computes the VMTP checksum.
 
 
 
  4. Encrypts the appropriate portion of the packet, if required.
 
 
 
  5. Prepends and appends network-level header and trailer using
 
      network address from ServerHost cache, or from the responding
 
      CSR.
 
 
 
  6. Transmits the packet with the interpacket gap specified in
 
      the cache.  This may involve round-robin scheduling between
 
      hosts as well as delaying transmissions slightly.
 
 
 
  7. Invokes the finish-up procedure specified by the CSR record,
 
      completing the processing.  Generally, this finish-up
 
      procedure adds the record to the timeout queue with the
 
      appropriate timeout queue.
 
 
 
The CSR includes a 32-bit transmission mask that indicates the portions
 
of the segment to transmit.  The SendPacketGroup procedure is assumed to
 
handle queuing at the network transmission queue, queuing in priority
 
order according to the priority field specified in the CSR record.
 
(This priority may be reflected in network transmission behavior for
 
networks that support priority.)
 
 
 
The SendPacketGroup procedure only looks at the following fields of a
 
CSR
 
 
 
  - Transmission mask
 
 
 
  - FuncCode
 
 
 
  - SDA
 
 
 
  - Client
 
 
 
  - Server
 
 
 
 
 
Cheriton                                                      [page 112]
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
RFC 1045                      VMTP                        February 1988
 
 
 
 
 
  - CoResidentEntity
 
 
 
  - Key
 
 
 
It modifies the following fields
 
 
 
  - Length
 
 
 
  - Delivery
 
 
 
  - Checksum
 
 
 
In the case of encrypted transmission, it encrypts the entire packet,
 
not including the Client field and the following 32-bits.
 
 
 
If the packet group is a Response, (i.e. lower-order bit of function
 
code is 1) the destination network address is determined from the
 
Client, otherwise the Server.  The HostAddr field is set either from the
 
ServerHost cache (if a Request) or from the original Request if a
 
Response, before SendPacketGroup is called.
 
 
 
The CSR includes a timeout and TTL fields indicating the maximum time to
 
complete the processing and the time-to-live for the packets to be
 
transmitted.
 
 
 
SendPacketGroup is viewed as the right functionality to implement for
 
transmission in an "intelligent" network interface.
 
 
 
Finally, it appears preferable to be able to assume that all portions of
 
the segment remain memory-resident (no page faults) during transmission.
 
In a demand-paged systems, some form of locking is required to keep the
 
segment data in memory.
 
 
 
 
 
VII.5. VMTP Management Module
 
 
 
The implementation should implement the management operations as a
 
separate module that is invoked from within the VMTP module.  When a
 
Request is received, either from the local user level or the network,
 
for the VMTP management module, the management module is invoked as a
 
remote or local procedure call to handle this request and return a
 
response (if not a datagram request).  By registering as a local server,
 
the management module should minimize the special-case code required for
 
its invocation.  The management module is basically a case statement
 
that selects the operation based on the RequestCode and then invokes the
 
specified management operation.  The procedure implementing the
 
management operation, especially operations like NotifyVmtpClient and
 
 
 
 
 
Cheriton                                                      [page 113]
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
RFC 1045                      VMTP                        February 1988
 
 
 
 
 
NotifyVmtpServer, are logically part of the VMTP module because they
 
require full access to the basic data structures of the VMTP
 
implementation.
 
 
 
The management module should be implemented so that it can respond
 
quickly to all requests, particularly since the timing of management
 
interactions is used to estimate round trip time.  To date, all
 
implementations of the management module have been done at the kernel
 
level, along with VMTP proper.
 
 
 
 
 
VII.6. Timeout Handling
 
 
 
The timeout queue is a queue of CSR records, ordered by timeout count,
 
as specified in the CSR record.  On entry into the timeout queue, the
 
CSR record has the timeout field set to the time (preferable in
 
milliseconds or similar unit) to remain in the queue plus the finishup
 
field set to the procedure to execute on removal on timeout from the
 
queue.  The timeout field for a CSR in the queue is the time relative to
 
the record preceding it in the queue (if any) at which it is to be
 
removed.  Some system-specific mechanism decrements the time for the
 
record at the front of the queue, invoking the finishup procedure when
 
the count goes to zero.
 
 
 
Using this scheme, a special CSR is used to timeout and scan CSR's for
 
non-recently pinged CSR's.  That is, this CSR times out and invokes a
 
finishup procedure that scans for non-recently pinged CSR that are
 
"AwaitingResponse" and signals the request processing entity and deletes
 
the CSR.  It then returns to the timeout queue.
 
 
 
The timeout mechanism tends to be specific to an operating system.  The
 
scheme described may have to be adapted to the operating system in which
 
VMTP is to be implemented.
 
 
 
This mechanism handles client request timeout and client response
 
timeout.  It is not intended to handle interpacket gaps given that these
 
times are expected to be under 1 millisecond in general and possibly
 
only a few microseconds.
 
 
 
 
 
VII.7. Timeout Values
 
 
 
Roundtrip timeout values are estimated by matching Responses or
 
NotifyVmtpClient Requests to Request transmission, relying on the
 
retransmitCount to identify the particular transmission of the Request
 
that generated the response.  A similar technique can be used with
 
Responses and NotifyVmtpServer Requests.  The retransmitCount is
 
 
 
 
 
Cheriton                                                      [page 114]
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
RFC 1045                      VMTP                        February 1988
 
 
 
 
 
incremented each time the Response is sent, whether the retransmission
 
was caused by timeout or retransmission of the Request.
 
 
 
The ProbeEntity request is recommended as a basic way of getting
 
up-to-date information about a Client as well as predictable host
 
machine turnaround in processing a request.  (VMTP assumes and requires
 
an efficient, bounded response time implementation of the ProbeEntity
 
operation.)
 
 
 
Using this mechanism for measuring RTT, it is recommended that the
 
various estimation and smoothing techniques developed for TCP RTT
 
estimation be adapted and used.
 
 
 
 
 
VII.8. Packet Reception
 
 
 
Logically a network packet containing a VMTP packet is 5 portions:
 
 
 
  - network header, possibly including lower-level headers
 
 
 
  - VMTP header
 
 
 
  - data segment
 
 
 
  - VMTP checksum
 
 
 
  - network trailer, etc.
 
 
 
It may be advantageous to receive a packet fragmented into these
 
portions, if supported by the network module.  In this case, ideally the
 
VMTP header may be received directly into a CSR, the data segment into a
 
page that can be mapped, rather than copied, to its final destination,
 
with VMTP checksum and network header in a separate area (used to
 
extract the network address corresponding to the sender).
 
 
 
Packet reception is described in detail by the pseudo-code in Section
 
4.7.
 
 
 
With a response, normally the CSR has an associated segment area
 
immediately available so delivery of segment data is immediate.
 
Similarly, server entities should be "armed" with CSR's with segment
 
areas that provide for immediate delivery of requests.  It is reasonable
 
to discard segment data that cannot be immediately delivered in this
 
way, providing that clients and servers are able to preallocate CSR's
 
with segment areas for requests and responses.  In particular, a client
 
should be able to provide some number of additional CSR's for receiving
 
multiple responses to a multicast request.
 
 
 
 
 
Cheriton                                                      [page 115]
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
RFC 1045                      VMTP                        February 1988
 
 
 
 
 
The CSR data structure is intended to be the interface data structure
 
for an intelligent network interface.  For reception, the interface is
 
"armed" with CSR's that may point to segment areas in main memory, into
 
which it can deliver a packet group.  Ideally, the interface handles all
 
the processing of all packets, interacting with the host after receiving
 
a complete Request or Response packet group.  An implementation should
 
use an interface based on SendPacketGroup(CSR) and
 
ReceivePacketGroup(CSR) to facilitate the introduction of an intelligent
 
network interface.
 
 
 
ReceivePacketGroup(csr) provides the interface with a CSR descriptor and
 
zero or more bytes of main memory to receive segment data.  The CSR
 
describes whether it is to receive responses (and if so, for which
 
client) or requests (and if so for which server).
 
 
 
The procedure ReclaimCSR(CSR) reclaims the specified record from the
 
interface before it has been returned after receiving the specified
 
packet group.
 
 
 
A finishup procedure is set in the CSR to be invoked when the CSR is
 
returned to the host by the normal processing sequence in the interface.
 
Similarly, the timeout parameter is set to indicate the maximum time the
 
host is providing for the routine to perform the specified function.
 
The CSR and associated segment memory is returned to the host after the
 
timeout period with an indication of progress after the timeout period.
 
It is not returned earlier.
 
 
 
 
 
VII.9. Streaming
 
 
 
The implementation of streaming is optional in both VMTP clients and
 
servers.  Ideally, all performance-critical servers should implement
 
streaming.  In addition, clients that have high context switch overhead,
 
network access overhead or expect to be communicating over long delay
 
links should also implement streaming.
 
 
 
A client stream is implemented by allocating a CSR for each outstanding
 
message transaction.  A stream of transactions is handled similarly to
 
multiple outstanding transactions from separate clients except for the
 
interaction between consecutive numbered transactions in a stream.
 
 
 
For the server VMTP module, streamed message transactions to a server
 
are queued (if accepted) subordinate to the first unprocessed CSR
 
corresponding to this Client.  Thus, streamed transactions from a given
 
Client are always performed in the order specified by the transaction
 
identifiers.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Cheriton                                                      [page 116]
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
RFC 1045                      VMTP                        February 1988
 
 
 
 
 
If a server does not implement streaming, it must refuse streamed
 
message transactions using the NotifyVmtpClient operation.  Also, all
 
client VMTP's that support streaming must support the streamed interface
 
to a server that does not support streaming.  That is, it must perform
 
the message transactions one at a time.  Consequently, a program that
 
uses the streaming interface to a non-streaming server experiences
 
degraded performance, but not failure.
 
 
 
 
 
VII.10. Implementation Experience
 
 
 
The implementation experience to date includes a partial implementation
 
(minus the streaming and full security) in the V kernel plus a similar
 
preliminary implementation in the 4.3 BSD Unix kernel.  In the V kernel
 
implementation, the CSR's are part of the (lightweight) process
 
descriptor.
 
 
 
The V kernel implementation is able to perform a VMTP message
 
transaction with no data segment between two Sun-3/75's connected by 10
 
Mb Ethernet in 2.25 milliseconds.  It is also able to transfer data at
 
4.7 megabits per second using 16 kilobyte Requests (but null checksums.)
 
The UNIX kernel implementation running on Microvax II's achieves a basic
 
message transaction time of 9 milliseconds and data rate of 1.9 megabits
 
per second using 16 kilobyte Responses.  This implementation is using
 
the standard VMTP checksum.
 
 
 
We hope to report more extensive implementation experience in future
 
revisions of this document.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Cheriton                                                      [page 117]
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
RFC 1045                      VMTP                        February 1988
 
 
 
 
 
VIII. UNIX 4.3 BSD Kernel Interface for VMTP
 
 
 
UNIX 4.3 BSD includes a socket-based design for program interfaces to a
 
variety of protocol families and types of protocols (streams,
 
datagrams).  In this appendix, we sketch an extension to this design to
 
support a transaction-style protocol.  (Some familiarity with UNIX 4.2/3
 
IPC is assumed.)  Several extensions are required to the system
 
interface, rather than just adding a protocol, because no provision was
 
made for supporting transaction protocols in the original design.  These
 
extensions include a new "transaction" type of socket plus new system
 
calls invoke, getreply, probeentity, recreq, sendreply and forward.
 
 
 
A socket of type transaction bound to the VMTP protocol type
 
IPPROTO_VMTP is created by the call
 
 
 
    s = socket(AF_INET, SOCK_TRANSACT, VMTP);
 
 
 
This socket is bound to an entity identifier by
 
 
 
    bind(s, &entityid, sizeof(entityid));
 
 
 
The first address/port bound to a socket is considered its primary name
 
and is the one used on packet transmission.  A message transaction is
 
invoked between the socket named by s and the Server specified by mcb by
 
 
 
    invoke(s, mcb, segptr, seglen, timeout );
 
 
 
The mcb is a message control block whose format was described in Section
 
2.4.  The message control block specifies the request to send plus the
 
destination Server.  The response message control block returned by the
 
server is stored in mcb when invoke returns.  The invoking process is
 
blocked until a response is received or the message transaction times
 
out unless the request is a datagram request.  (Non-blocking versions
 
with signals on completion could also be provided, especially with a
 
streaming implementation.)
 
 
 
For multicast message transactions (sent to an entity group), the next
 
response to the current message transaction (if it arrives in less than
 
timeout milliseconds) is returned by
 
 
 
    getreply( s, mcb, segptr, maxseglen, timeout );
 
 
 
The invoke operation sent to an entity group completes as soon as the
 
first response is received.  A request is retransmitted until the first
 
reply is received (assuming the request is not a datagram).  Thus, the
 
system does not retransmit while getreply is timing out even if no
 
replies are available.
 
 
 
 
 
Cheriton                                                      [page 118]
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
RFC 1045                      VMTP                        February 1988
 
 
 
 
 
The state of an entity associated with entityId is probed using
 
 
 
    probeentity( entityId, state );
 
 
 
A UNIX process acting as a VMTP server accepts a Request by the
 
operation
 
 
 
    recvreq(s, mcb, segptr, maxseglen );
 
 
 
The request message for the next queued transaction request is returned
 
in mcb, plus the segment data of maximum length maxseglen, starting at
 
segptr in the address space.  On return, the message control block
 
contains the values as set in invoke except: (1) the Client field
 
indicates the Client that sent the received Request message.  (2) the
 
Code field indicates the type of request.  (3) the MsgDelivery field
 
indicates the portions of the segment actually received within the
 
specified segment size, if MDM is 1 in the Code field.  A segment block
 
is marked as missing (i.e. the corresponding bit in the MsgDelivery
 
field is 0) unless it is received in its entirety or it is all of the
 
data in last segment contained in the segment.
 
 
 
To complete a transaction, the reply specified by mcb is sent to the
 
client specified by the MCB using
 
 
 
    sendreply(s, mcb, segptr );
 
 
 
The Client field of the MCB indicates the client to respond to.
 
 
 
Finally, a message transaction specified by mcb is forwarded to
 
newserver as though it were sent there by its original invoker using
 
 
 
    forward(s, mcb, segptr, timeout );
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Cheriton                                                      [page 119]
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
RFC 1045                      VMTP                        February 1988
 
 
 
 
 
Index
 
 
 
          Acknowledgment  14
 
          APG  16, 31, 39
 
          Authentication domain  20
 
 
 
          Big-endian  9
 
 
 
          Checksum  14, 43
 
          Checksum, not set  44
 
          Client  7, 10, 38
 
          Client timer  16
 
          CMD  42, 110
 
          CMG  32, 40
 
          Co-resident entity  25
 
          Code  42
 
          CoResidentEntity  42, 43
 
          CRE  21, 42
 
 
 
          DGM  42
 
          Digital signature, VMTP management  95, 101
 
          Diskless workstations  2
 
          Domain  9, 38
 
          Domain 1  102
 
          Domain 3  104
 
 
 
          Entity  7
 
          Entity domain  9
 
          Entity group  8
 
          Entity identifier  37
 
          Entity identifier allocation  105
 
          Entity identifier, all-zero  38
 
          EPG  20, 39
 
 
 
          Features  6
 
          ForwardCount  24
 
          Forwarding  24
 
          FunctionCode  41
 
 
 
          Group  8
 
          Group message transaction  10
 
          Group timeouts  16
 
          GRP  37
 
 
 
          HandleNoCSR  62
 
          HandleRequestNoCSR  79
 
          HCO  14, 23, 39
 
 
 
 
 
Cheriton                                                      [page 120]
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
RFC 1045                      VMTP                        February 1988
 
 
 
 
 
          Host independence  8
 
 
 
          Idempotent  15
 
          Interpacket gap  18, 40
 
          IP  108
 
 
 
          Key  91
 
 
 
          LEE  32, 37
 
          Little-endian  9
 
 
 
          MCB  118
 
          MDG  22, 40
 
          MDM  30, 42
 
          Message control block  118
 
          Message size  6
 
          Message transaction  7, 10
 
          MPG  39
 
          MsgDelivery  43
 
          MSGTRANS_OVERFLOW  27
 
          Multicast  4, 21, 120
 
          Multicast, reliable  21
 
 
 
          Naming  6
 
          Negative acknowledgment  31
 
          NER  25, 31, 39
 
          NRT  26, 30, 39
 
          NSR  25, 27, 31, 39
 
 
 
          Object-oriented  2
 
          Overrun  18
 
 
 
          Packet group  7, 29, 39
 
          Packet group run  31
 
          PacketDelivery  29, 31, 41
 
          PGcount  26, 41
 
          PIC  42
 
          Principal  11
 
          Priority  41
 
          Process  11
 
          ProcessId  89
 
          Protocol number,IP  108
 
 
 
          RAE  37
 
          Rate control  18
 
          Real-time  2, 4
 
          Realtime  22
 
 
 
 
 
Cheriton                                                      [page 121]
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
RFC 1045                      VMTP                        February 1988
 
 
 
 
 
          Reliability  12
 
          Request message  10
 
          RequestAckRetries  30
 
          RequestRetries  15
 
          Response message  10
 
          ResponseAckRetries  31
 
          ResponseRetries  15
 
          Restricted group  8
 
          Retransmission  15
 
          RetransmitCount  17
 
          Roundtrip time  17
 
          RPC  2
 
          Run  31, 39
 
          Run, message transactions  25
 
 
 
          SDA  42
 
          Security  4, 19
 
          Segment block  41
 
          Segment data  43
 
          SegmentSize  42, 43
 
          Selective retransmission  18
 
          Server  7, 10, 41
 
          Server group  8
 
          Sockets, VMTP  118
 
          STI  26, 40
 
          Streaming  25, 55
 
          Strictly stable  8
 
          Subgroups  21
 
 
 
          T-stable  8
 
          TC1(Server)  16
 
          TC2(Server)  16
 
          TC3(Server)  16
 
          TC4  16
 
          TCP  2
 
          Timeouts  15
 
          Transaction  10, 41
 
          Transaction identification  10
 
          TS1(Client)  17
 
          TS2(Client)  17
 
          TS3(Client)  17
 
          TS4(Client)  17
 
          TS5(Client)  17
 
          Type flags  8
 
 
 
          UNIX interface  118
 
          Unrestricted group  8, 38
 
 
 
 
 
Cheriton                                                      [page 122]
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
RFC 1045                      VMTP                        February 1988
 
 
 
 
 
          NotifyVmtpClient  7, 26, 27, 30
 
          NotifyVmtpServer  7, 14, 30
 
          User Data  43
 
 
 
          Version  38
 
          VMTP Management digital signature  95, 101
 
  
 +
For multicast message transactions (sent to an entity group), the next
 +
response to the current message transaction (if it arrives in less than
 +
timeout milliseconds) is returned by
  
 +
getreply( s, mcb, segptr, maxseglen, timeout );
  
 +
The invoke operation sent to an entity group completes as soon as the
 +
first response is received.  A request is retransmitted until the first
 +
reply is received (assuming the request is not a datagram).  Thus, the
 +
system does not retransmit while getreply is timing out even if no
 +
replies are available.
  
 +
Cheriton                                                      [page 118]
  
 +
The state of an entity associated with entityId is probed using
  
 +
probeentity( entityId, state );
  
 +
A UNIX process acting as a VMTP server accepts a Request by the
 +
operation
  
 +
recvreq(s, mcb, segptr, maxseglen );
  
 +
The request message for the next queued transaction request is returned
 +
in mcb, plus the segment data of maximum length maxseglen, starting at
 +
segptr in the address space.  On return, the message control block
 +
contains the values as set in invoke except: (1) the Client field
 +
indicates the Client that sent the received Request message.  (2) the
 +
Code field indicates the type of request.  (3) the MsgDelivery field
 +
indicates the portions of the segment actually received within the
 +
specified segment size, if MDM is 1 in the Code field.  A segment block
 +
is marked as missing (i.e. the corresponding bit in the MsgDelivery
 +
field is 0) unless it is received in its entirety or it is all of the
 +
data in last segment contained in the segment.
  
 +
To complete a transaction, the reply specified by mcb is sent to the
 +
client specified by the MCB using
  
 +
sendreply(s, mcb, segptr );
  
 +
The Client field of the MCB indicates the client to respond to.
  
 +
Finally, a message transaction specified by mcb is forwarded to
 +
newserver as though it were sent there by its original invoker using
  
 +
forward(s, mcb, segptr, timeout );
  
 +
Cheriton                                                      [page 119]
  
 +
Index
  
 +
      Acknowledgment  14
 +
      APG  16, 31, 39
 +
      Authentication domain  20
  
 +
      Big-endian  9
  
 +
      Checksum  14, 43
 +
      Checksum, not set  44
 +
      Client  7, 10, 38
 +
      Client timer  16
 +
      CMD  42, 110
 +
      CMG  32, 40
 +
      Co-resident entity  25
 +
      Code  42
 +
      CoResidentEntity  42, 43
 +
      CRE  21, 42
  
 +
      DGM  42
 +
      Digital signature, VMTP management  95, 101
 +
      Diskless workstations  2
 +
      Domain  9, 38
 +
      Domain 1  102
 +
      Domain 3  104
  
 +
      Entity  7
 +
      Entity domain  9
 +
      Entity group  8
 +
      Entity identifier  37
 +
      Entity identifier allocation  105
 +
      Entity identifier, all-zero  38
 +
      EPG  20, 39
  
 +
      Features  6
 +
      ForwardCount  24
 +
      Forwarding  24
 +
      FunctionCode  41
  
 +
      Group  8
 +
      Group message transaction  10
 +
      Group timeouts  16
 +
      GRP  37
  
 +
      HandleNoCSR  62
 +
      HandleRequestNoCSR  79
 +
      HCO  14, 23, 39
  
 +
Cheriton                                                      [page 120]
  
 +
      Host independence  8
  
 +
      Idempotent  15
 +
      Interpacket gap  18, 40
 +
      IP  108
  
 +
      Key  91
  
 +
      LEE  32, 37
 +
      Little-endian  9
  
 +
      MCB  118
 +
      MDG  22, 40
 +
      MDM  30, 42
 +
      Message control block  118
 +
      Message size  6
 +
      Message transaction  7, 10
 +
      MPG  39
 +
      MsgDelivery  43
 +
      MSGTRANS_OVERFLOW  27
 +
      Multicast  4, 21, 120
 +
      Multicast, reliable  21
  
 +
      Naming  6
 +
      Negative acknowledgment  31
 +
      NER  25, 31, 39
 +
      NRT  26, 30, 39
 +
      NSR  25, 27, 31, 39
  
 +
      Object-oriented  2
 +
      Overrun  18
  
 +
      Packet group  7, 29, 39
 +
      Packet group run  31
 +
      PacketDelivery  29, 31, 41
 +
      PGcount  26, 41
 +
      PIC  42
 +
      Principal  11
 +
      Priority  41
 +
      Process  11
 +
      ProcessId  89
 +
      Protocol number,IP  108
  
 +
      RAE  37
 +
      Rate control  18
 +
      Real-time  2, 4
 +
      Realtime  22
  
 +
Cheriton                                                      [page 121]
  
 +
      Reliability  12
 +
      Request message  10
 +
      RequestAckRetries  30
 +
      RequestRetries  15
 +
      Response message  10
 +
      ResponseAckRetries  31
 +
      ResponseRetries  15
 +
      Restricted group  8
 +
      Retransmission  15
 +
      RetransmitCount  17
 +
      Roundtrip time  17
 +
      RPC  2
 +
      Run  31, 39
 +
      Run, message transactions  25
  
 +
      SDA  42
 +
      Security  4, 19
 +
      Segment block  41
 +
      Segment data  43
 +
      SegmentSize  42, 43
 +
      Selective retransmission  18
 +
      Server  7, 10, 41
 +
      Server group  8
 +
      Sockets, VMTP  118
 +
      STI  26, 40
 +
      Streaming  25, 55
 +
      Strictly stable  8
 +
      Subgroups  21
  
 +
      T-stable  8
 +
      TC1(Server)  16
 +
      TC2(Server)  16
 +
      TC3(Server)  16
 +
      TC4  16
 +
      TCP  2
 +
      Timeouts  15
 +
      Transaction  10, 41
 +
      Transaction identification  10
 +
      TS1(Client)  17
 +
      TS2(Client)  17
 +
      TS3(Client)  17
 +
      TS4(Client)  17
 +
      TS5(Client)  17
 +
      Type flags  8
  
 +
      UNIX interface  118
 +
      Unrestricted group  8, 38
  
 +
Cheriton                                                      [page 122]
  
 +
      NotifyVmtpClient  7, 26, 27, 30
 +
      NotifyVmtpServer  7, 14, 30
 +
      User Data  43
  
 +
      Version  38
 +
      VMTP Management digital signature  95, 101
  
 
Cheriton                                                      [page 123]
 
Cheriton                                                      [page 123]

Revision as of 00:11, 28 September 2020

Network Working Group David Cheriton Request for Comments: 1045 Stanford University

                                                       February 1988
          VMTP: VERSATILE MESSAGE TRANSACTION PROTOCOL
                     Protocol Specification

STATUS OF THIS MEMO

This RFC describes a protocol proposed as a standard for the Internet community. Comments are encouraged. Distribution of this document is unlimited.

OVERVIEW

This memo specifies the Versatile Message Transaction Protocol (VMTP) [Version 0.7 of 19-Feb-88], a transport protocol specifically designed to support the transaction model of communication, as exemplified by remote procedure call (RPC). The full function of VMTP, including support for security, real-time, asynchronous message exchanges, streaming, multicast and idempotency, provides a rich selection to the VMTP user level. Subsettability allows the VMTP module for particular clients and servers to be specialized and simplified to the services actually required. Examples of such simple clients and servers include PROM network bootload programs, network boot servers, data sensors and simple controllers, to mention but a few examples.

                       Table of Contents

Contents

Introduction 1

1.1. Motivation 2

   1.1.1. Poor RPC Performance                                     2
   1.1.2. Weak Naming                                              3
   1.1.3. Function Poor                                            3

1.2. Relation to Other Protocols 4 1.3. Document Overview 5

Protocol Overview 6

2.1. Entities, Processes and Principals 7 2.2. Entity Domains 9 2.3. Message Transactions 10 2.4. Request and Response Messages 11 2.5. Reliability 12

   2.5.1. Transaction Identifiers                                 13
   2.5.2. Checksum                                                14
   2.5.3. Request and Response Acknowledgment                     14
   2.5.4. Retransmissions                                         15
   2.5.5. Timeouts                                                15
   2.5.6. Rate Control                                            18

2.6. Security 19 2.7. Multicast 21 2.8. Real-time Communication 22 2.9. Forwarded Message Transactions 24 2.10. VMTP Management 25 2.11. Streamed Message Transactions 25 2.12. Fault-Tolerant Applications 28 2.13. Packet Groups 29 2.14. Runs of Packet Groups 31 2.15. Byte Order 32 2.16. Minimal VMTP Implementation 33 2.17. Message vs. Procedural Request Handling 33 2.18. Bibliography 34

VMTP Packet Formats 37

3.1. Entity Identifier Format 37 3.2. Packet Fields 38

Cheriton [page i]

3.3. Request Packet 45 3.4. Response Packet 47

Client Protocol Operation 49

4.1. Client State Record Fields 49 4.2. Client Protocol States 51 4.3. State Transition Diagrams 51 4.4. User Interface 52 4.5. Event Processing 53 4.6. Client User-invoked Events 54

   4.6.1. Send                                                    54
   4.6.2. GetResponse                                             56

4.7. Packet Arrival 56

   4.7.1. Response                                                58

4.8. Management Operations 61

   4.8.1. HandleNoCSR                                             62

4.9. Timeouts 64

Server Protocol Operation 66

5.1. Remote Client State Record Fields 66 5.2. Remote Client Protocol States 66 5.3. State Transition Diagrams 67 5.4. User Interface 69 5.5. Event Processing 70 5.6. Server User-invoked Events 71

   5.6.1. Receive                                                 71
   5.6.2. Respond                                                 72
   5.6.3. Forward                                                 73
   5.6.4. Other Functions                                         74

5.7. Request Packet Arrival 74 5.8. Management Operations 78

   5.8.1. HandleRequestNoCSR                                      79

5.9. Timeouts 82

Concluding Remarks 84

I. Standard VMTP Response Codes 85

II. VMTP RPC Presentation Protocol 87

Cheriton [page ii]

II.1. Request Code Management 87

III. VMTP Management Procedures 89

III.1. Entity Group Management 100 III.2. VMTP Management Digital Signatures 101

IV. VMTP Entity Identifier Domains 102

IV.1. Domain 1 102 IV.2. Domain 3 104 IV.3. Other Domains 105 IV.4. Decentralized Entity Identifier Allocation 105

V. Authentication Domains 107

V.1. Authentication Domain 1 107 V.2. Other Authentication Domains 107

VI. IP Implementation 108

VII. Implementation Notes 109

VII.1. Mapping Data Structures 109 VII.2. Client Data Structures 111 VII.3. Server Data Structures 111 VII.4. Packet Group transmission 112 VII.5. VMTP Management Module 113 VII.6. Timeout Handling 114 VII.7. Timeout Values 114 VII.8. Packet Reception 115 VII.9. Streaming 116 VII.10. Implementation Experience 117

VIII. UNIX 4.3 BSD Kernel Interface for VMTP 118

Index 120

Cheriton [page iii]

                        List of Figures

Figure 1-1: Relation to Other Protocols 4 Figure 3-1: Request Packet Format 45 Figure 3-2: Response Packet Format 47 Figure 4-1: Client State Transitions 52 Figure 5-1: Remote Client State Transitions 68 Figure III-1: Authenticator Format 92 Figure VII-1: Mapping Client Identifier to CSR 109 Figure VII-2: Mapping Server Identifiers 110 Figure VII-3: Mapping Group Identifiers 111

Cheriton [page iv]

Introduction

The Versatile Message Transaction Protocol (VMTP) is a transport protocol designed to support remote procedure call (RPC) and general transaction-oriented communication. By transaction-oriented communication, we mean that:

- Communication is request-response: A client sends a request

 for a service to a server, the request is processed, and the
 server responds.  For example, a client may ask for the next
 page of a file as the service.  The transaction is terminated
 by the server responding with the next page.

- A transaction is initiated as part of sending a request to a

 server and terminated by the server responding.  There are no
 separate operations for setting up or terminating associations
 between clients and servers at the transport level.

- The server is free to discard communication state about a

 client between transactions without causing incorrect behavior
 or failures.

The term message transaction (or transaction) is used in the reminder of this document for a request-response exchange in the sense described above.

VMTP handles the error detection, retransmission, duplicate suppression and, optionally, security required for transport-level end-to-end reliability.

The protocol is designed to provide a range of behaviors within the transaction model, including:

- Minimal two packet exchanges for short, simple transactions.

- Streaming of multi-packet requests and responses for efficient

 data transfer.

- Datagram and multicast communication as an extension of the

 transaction model.

Example Uses:

- Page-level file access - VMTP is intended as the transport

 level for file access, allowing simple, efficient operation on
 a local network.  In particular, VMTP is appropriate for use
 by diskless workstations accessing shared network file

Cheriton [page 1]

 servers.

- Distributed programming - VMTP is intended to provide an

 efficient transport level protocol for remote procedure call
 implementations, distributed object-oriented systems plus
 message-based systems that conform to the request-response
 model.

- Multicast communication with groups of servers to: locate a

 specific object within the group, update a replicated object,
 synchronize the commitment of a distributed transaction, etc.

- Distributed real-time control with prioritized message

 handling, including datagrams, multicast and asynchronous
 calls.

The protocol is designed to operate on top of a simple unreliable datagram service, such as is provided by IP.

Motivation

VMTP was designed to address three categories of deficiencies with existing transport protocols in the Internet architecture. We use TCP as the key current transport protocol for comparison.

Poor RPC Performance

First, current protocols provide poor performance for remote procedure call (RPC) and network file access. This is attributable to three key causes:

- TCP requires excessive packets for RPC, especially for

 isolated calls.  In particular, connection setup and clear
 generates extra packets over that needed for VMTP to support
 RPC.

- TCP is difficult to implement, speaking purely from the

 empirical experience over the last 10 years.  VMTP was
 designed concurrently with its implementation, with focus on
 making it easy to implement and providing sensible subsets of
 its functionality.

- TCP handles packet loss due to overruns poorly. We claim that

 overruns are the key source of packet loss in a
 high-performance RPC environment and, with the increasing

Cheriton [page 2]

 performance of networks, will continue to be the key source.
 (Older machines and network interfaces cannot keep up with new
 machines and network interfaces.  Also, low-end network
 interfaces for high-speed networks have limited receive
 buffering.)

VMTP is designed for ease of implementation and efficient RPC. In addition, it provides selective retransmission with rate-based flow control, thus addressing all of the above issues.

Weak Naming

Second, current protocols provide inadequate naming of transport-level endpoints because the names are based on IP addresses. For example, a TCP endpoint is named by an Internet address and port identifier. Unfortunately, this makes the endpoint tied to a particular host interface, not specifically the process-level state associated with the transport-level endpoint. In particular, this form of naming causes problems for process migration, mobile hosts and multi-homed hosts. VMTP provides host-address independent names, thereby solving the above mentioned problems.

In addition, TCP provides no security and reliability guarantees on the dynamically allocated names. In particular, other than well-known ports, (host-addr, port-id)-tuples can change meaning on reboot following a crash. VMTP provides large identifiers with guarantee of stability, meaning that either the identifier never changes in meaning or else remains invalid for a significant time before becoming valid again.

Function Poor

TCP does not support multicast, real-time datagrams or security. In fact, it only supports pair-wise, long-term, streamed reliable interchanges. Yet, multicast is of growing importance and is being developed for the Internet (see RFC 966 and 988). Also, a datagram facility with the same naming, transmission and reception facilities as the normal transport level is a powerful asset for real-time and parallel applications. Finally, security is a basic requirement in an increasing number of environments. We note that security is natural to implement at the transport level to provide end-to-end security (as opposed to (inter)network level security). Without security at the transport level, a transport level protocol cannot guarantee the standard transport level service definition in the presence of an intruder. In particular, the intruder can interject packets or modify

Cheriton [page 3]

packets while updating the checksum, making mockery out of the transport-level claim of "reliable delivery".

In contrast, VMTP provides multicast, real-time datagrams and security, addressing precisely these weaknesses.

In general, VMTP is designed with the next generation of communication systems in mind. These communication systems are characterized as follows. RPC, page-level file access and other request-response behavior dominates. In addition, the communication substrate, both local and wide-area, provides high data rates, low error rates and relatively low delay. Finally, intelligent, high-performance network interfaces are common and in fact required to achieve performance that approximates the network capability. However, VMTP is also designed to function acceptably with existing networks and network interfaces.

Relation to Other Protocols

VMTP is a transport protocol that fits into the layered Internet protocol environment. Figure 1-1 illustrates the place of VMTP in the protocol hierarchy.

+-----------+ +----+ +-----------------+ +------+
|File Access| |Time| |Program Execution| |Naming|... Application
+-----------+ +----+ +-----------------+ +------+      Layer
   |           |           |             |      |
   +-----------+-----------+-------------+------+
                           |
                    +------------------+
                    | RPC Presentation |          Presentation
                    +------------------+          Layer
                              |
        +------+          +--------+
        |  TCP |          | VMTP   |              Transport
        +------+          +--------+              Layer
            |                  |
       +-----------------------------------+
       |       Internet Protocol & ICMP    |      Internetwork
       +-----------------------------------+      Layer
           Figure 1-1:   Relation to Other Protocols

The RPC presentation level is not currently defined in the Internet suite of protocols. Appendix II defines a proposed RPC presentation level for use with VMTP and assumed for the definition of the VMTP management procedures. There is also a need for the definition of the

Cheriton [page 4]

Application layer protocols listed above.

If internetwork services are not required, VMTP can be used without the IP layer, layered directly on top of the network or data link layers.

Document Overview

The next chapter gives an overview of the protocol, covering naming, message structure, reliability, flow control, streaming, real-time, security, byte-ordering and management. Chapter 3 describes the VMTP packet formats. Chapter 4 describes the client VMTP protocol operation in terms of pseudo-code for event handling. Chapter 5 describes the server VMTP protocol operation in terms of pseudo-code for event handling. Chapter 6 summarizes the state of the protocol, some remaining issues and expected directions for the future. Appendix I lists some standard Response codes. Appendix II describes the RPC presentation protocol proposed for VMTP and used with the VMTP management procedures. Appendix III lists the VMTP management procedures. Appendix IV proposes initial approaches for handling entity identification for VMTP. Appendix V proposes initial authentication domains for VMTP. Appendix VI provides some details for implementing VMTP on top of IP. Appendix VII provides some suggestions on host implementation of VMTP, focusing on data structures and support functions. Appendix VIII describes a proposed program interface for UNIX 4.3 BSD and its descendants and related systems.

Cheriton [page 5]

Protocol Overview

VMTP provides an efficient, reliable, optionally secure transport service in the message transaction or request-response model with the following features:

- Host address-independent naming with provision for multiple

 forms of names for endpoints as well as associated (security)
 principals.  (See Sections 2.1, 2.2, 3.1 and Appendix IV.)

- Multi-packet request and response messages, with a maximum

 size of 4 megaoctets per message.  (Sections 2.3 and 2.14.)

- Selective retransmission. (Section 2.13.) and rate-based flow

 control to reduce overrun and the cost of overruns.  (Section
 2.5.6.)

- Secure message transactions with provision for a variety of

 encryption schemes.  (Section 2.6.)

- Multicast message transactions with multiple response messages

 per request message.  (Section 2.7.)

- Support for real-time communication with idempotent message

 transactions with minimal server overhead and state (Section
 2.5.3), datagram request message transactions with no
 response, optional header-only checksum, priority processing
 of transactions, conditional delivery and preemptive handling
 of requests (Section 2.8)

- Forwarded message transactions as an optimization for certain

 forms of nested remote procedure calls or message
 transactions.  (Section 2.9.)

- Multiple outstanding (asynchronous) message transactions per

 client.  (Section 2.11.)

- An integrated management module, defined with a remote

 procedure call interface on top of VMTP providing a variety of
 communication services (Section 2.10.)

- Simple subset implementation for simple clients and simple

 servers.  (Section 2.16.)

This chapter provides an overview of the protocol as introduction to the basic ideas and as preparation for the subsequent chapters that describe the packet formats and event processing procedures in detail.

Cheriton [page 6]

In overview, VMTP provides transport communication between network- visible entities via message transactions. A message transaction consists of a request message sent by the client, or requestor, to a group of server entities followed by zero or more response messages to the client, at most one from each server entity. A message is structured as a message control portion and a segment data portion. A message is transmitted as one or more packet groups. A packet group is one or more packets (up to a maximum of 32 packets) grouped by the protocol for acknowledgment, sequencing, selective retransmission and rate control.

Entities and VMTP operations are managed using a VMTP management mechanism that is accessed through a procedural interface (RPC) implemented on top of VMTP. In particular, information about a remote entity is obtained and maintained using the Probe VMTP management operation. Also, acknowledgment information and requests for retransmission are sent as notify requests to the management module. (In the following description, reference to an "acknowledgment" of a request or a response refers to a management-level notify operation that is acknowledging the request or response.)

Entities, Processes and Principals

VMTP defines and uses three main types of identifiers: entity identifiers, process identifiers and principal identifiers, each 64-bits in length. Communication takes place between network-visible entities, typically mapping to, or representing, a message port or procedure invocation. Thus, entities are the VMTP communication endpoints. The process associated with each entity designates the agent behind the communication activity for purposes of resource allocation and management. For example, when a lock is requested on a file, the lock is associated with the process, not the requesting entity, allowing a process to use multiple entity identifiers to perform operations without lock conflict between these entities. The principal associated with an entity specifies the permissions, security and accounting designation associated with the entity. The process and principal identifiers are included in VMTP solely to make these values available to VMTP users with the security and efficiency provided by VMTP. Only the entity identifiers are actively used by the protocol.

Entity identifiers are required to have three properties;

Uniqueness Each entity identifier is uniquely defined at any given

            time.  (An entity identifier may be reused over time.)

Stability An entity identifier does not change between valid

Cheriton [page 7]

            meanings without suitable provision for removing
            references to the entity identifier.  Certain entity
            identifiers are strictly stable, (i.e. never changing
            meaning), typically being administratively assigned
            (although they need not be bound to a valid entity at
            all times), often called well-known identifiers.  All
            other entity identifiers are required to be T-stable,
            not change meaning without having remained invalid for
            at least a time interval T.

Host address independent

            An entity identifier is unique independent of the host
            address of its current host.  Moreover, an entity
            identifier is not tied to a single Internet host
            address.  An entity can migrate between hosts, reside on
            a mobile host that changes Internet addresses or reside
            on a multi-homed host.  It is up to the VMTP
            implementation to determine and maintain up to date the
            host addresses of entities with which it is
            communicating.

The stability of entity identifiers guarantees that an entity identifier represents the same logical communication entity and principal (in the security sense) over the time that it is valid. For example, if an entity identifier is authenticated as having the privileges of a given user account, it continues to have those privileges as long as it is continuously valid (unless some explicit notice is provided otherwise). Thus, a file server need not fully authenticate the entity on every file access request. With T-stable identifiers, periodically checking the validity of an entity identifier with period less than T seconds detects a change in entity identifier validity.

A group of entities can form an entity group, which is a set of zero or more entities identified by a single entity identifier. For example, one can have a single entity identifier that identifies the group of name servers. An entity identifier representing an entity group is drawn from the same name space as entity identifiers. However, single entity identifiers are flagged as such by a bit in the entity identifier, indicating that the identifier is known to identify at most one entity. In addition to the group bit, each entity identifier includes other standard type flags. One flag indicates whether the identifier is an alias for an entity in another domain (See Section 2.2 below.). Another flag indicates, for an entity group identifier, whether the identifier is a restricted group or not. A restricted group is one in which an entity can be added only by another entity with group management authorization. With an unrestricted group, an entity is allowed to add itself. If an entity identifier does not represent a

Cheriton [page 8]

group, a type bit indicates whether the entity uses big-endian or little-endian data representation (corresponding to Motorola 680X0 and VAX byte orders, respectively). Further specification of the format of entity identifiers is contained in Section 3.1 and Appendix IV.

An entity identifier identifies a Client, a Server or a group of Servers <1>. A Client is always identified by a T-stable identifier. A server or group of servers may be identified by a a T-stable identifier (group or single entity) or by strictly stable (statically assigned) entity group identifier. The same T-stable identifier can be used to identify a Client and Server simultaneously as long as both are logically associated with the same entity. The state required for reliable, secure communication between entities is maintained in client state records (CSRs), which include the entity identifier of the Client, its principal, its current or next transaction identifier and so on.

Entity Domains

An entity domain is an administration or an administration mechanism that guarantees the three required entity identifier properties of uniqueness, stability and host address independence for the entities it administers. That is, entity identifiers are only guaranteed to be unique and stable within one entity domain. For example, the set of all Internet hosts may function as one domain. Independently, the set of hosts local to one autonomous network may function as a separate domain. Each entity domain is identified by an entity domain identifier, Domain. Only entities within the same domain may communicate directly via VMTP. However, hosts and entities may participate in multiple entity domains simultaneously, possibly with different entity identifiers. For example, a file server may participate in multiple entity domains in order to provide file service to each domain. Each entity domain specifies the algorithms for allocation, interpretation and mapping of entity identifiers.

Domains are necessary because it does not appear feasible to specify one universal VMTP entity identification administration that covers all entities for all time. Domains limit the number of entities that need to be managed to maintain the uniqueness and stability of the entity

_______________

<1> Terms such as Client, Server, Request, Response, etc. are capitalized in this document when they refer to their specific meaning in VMTP.

Cheriton [page 9]

name space. Domains can also serve to separate entities of different security levels. For instance, allocation of a unclassified entity identifier cannot conflict with secret level entity identifiers because the former is interpreted only in the unclassified domain, which is disjoint from the secret domain.

It is intended that there be a small number of domains. In particular, there should be one (or a few) domains per installation "type", rather than per installation. For example, the Internet is expected to use one domain per security level, resulting in at most 8 different domains. Cluster-based internetwork architectures, those with a local cluster protocol distinct from the wide-area protocol, may use one domain for local use and one for wide-area use.

Additional details on the specification of specific domains is provided in Appendix IV.

Message Transactions

The message transaction is the unit of interaction between a Client that initiates the transaction and one or more Servers. A message transaction starts with a request message generated by a client. At the service interface, a server becomes involved with a transaction by receiving and accepting the request. A server terminates its involvement with a transaction by sending a response message. In a group message transaction, the server entity designated by the client corresponds to a group of entities. In this case, each server in the group receives a copy of the request. In the client's view, the transaction is terminated when it receives the response message or, in the case of a group message transaction, when it receives the last response message. Because it is normally impractical to determine when the last response message has been received. the current transaction is terminated by VMTP when the next transaction is initiated.

Within an entity domain, a transaction is uniquely identified by the tuple (Client, Transaction, ForwardCount). where Transaction is a 32-bit number and ForwardCount is a 4-bit value. A Client uses monotonically increasing Transaction identifiers for new message transactions. Normally, the next higher transaction number, modulo 2**32, is used for the next message transaction, although there are cases in which it skips a small range of Transaction identifiers. (See the description of the STI control flag.) The ForwardCount is used when a message transaction is forwarded and is zero otherwise.

A Client generates a stream of message transactions with increasing transaction identifiers, directed at a diversity of Servers. We say a

Cheriton [page 10]

Client has a transaction outstanding if it has invoked a message transaction, but has not received the last Response (or possibly any Response). Normally, a Client has only one transaction outstanding at a time. However, VMTP allows a Client to have multiple message transactions outstanding simultaneously, supporting streamed, asynchronous remote procedure call invocations. In addition, VMTP supports nested calls where, for example, procedure A calls procedure B which calls procedure C, each on a separate host with different client entity identifiers for each call but identified with the same process and principal.

Request and Response Messages

A message transaction consists of a request message and one or more Response messages. A message is structured as message control block (MCB) and segment data, passed as parameters, as suggested below.

 +-----------------------+
 | Message Control Block |
 +-----------------------+
 +-----------------------------------+
 |       segment data                |
 +-----------------------------------+

In the request message, the MCB specifies control information about the request plus an optional data segment. The MCB has the following format:

 0                   1                   2                   3
 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1
+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
+                         ServerEntityId  (8 octets)            +
+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
|   Flags       |         RequestCode                           |
+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
+                         CoresidentEntity (8 octets)           +
+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
>                         User Data (12 octets)                 <
+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
|                         MsgDelivery                           |
+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
|                         SegmentSize                           |
+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+

The ServerEntityId is the entity to which the Request MCB is to be sent (or was sent, in the case of reception). The Flags indicate various options in the request and response handling as well as whether the

Cheriton [page 11]

CoresidentEntity, MsgDelivery and SegmentSize fields are in use. The RequestCode field specifies the type of Request. It is analogous to a packet type field of the Ethernet, acting as a switch for higher-level protocols. The CoresidentEntity field, if used, designates a subgroup of the ServerEntityId group to which the Request should be routed, namely those members that are co-resident with the specified entity (or entity group). The primary intended use is to specify the manager for a particular service that is co-resident with a particular entity, using the well-known entity group identifier for the service manager in the ServerEntityId field and the identifier for the entity in the CoresidentEntity field. The next 12 octets are user- or application-specified.

The MsgDelivery field is optionally used by the RPC or user level to specify the portions of the segment data to transmit and on reception, the portions received. It provides the client and server with (optional) access to, and responsibility for, a simple selective transmission and reception facility. For example, a client may request retransmission of just those portions of the segment that it failed to receive as part of the original Response. The primary intended use is to support highly efficient multi-packet reading from a file server. Exploiting user-level selective retransmission using the MsgDelivery field, the file server VMTP module need not save multi-packet Responses for retransmission. Retransmissions, when needed, are instead handled directly from the file server buffers.

The SegmentSize field indicates the size of the data segment, if present. The CoresidentEntity, MsgDelivery and SegmentSize fields are usable as additional user data if they are not otherwise used.

The Flags field provides a simple mechanism for the user level to communicate its use of VMTP options with the VMTP module as well as for VMTP modules to communicate this use among themselves. The use of these options is generally fixed for each remote procedure so that an RPC mechanism using VMTP can treat the Flags as an integral part of the RequestCode field for the purpose of demultiplexing to the correct stub.

A Response message control block follows the same format except the Response is sent from the Server to the Client and there is no Coresident Entity field (and thus 20 octets of user data).

Reliability

VMTP provides reliable, sequenced transfer of request and response messages as well as several variants, such as unreliable datagram requests. The reliability mechanisms include: transaction identifiers,

Cheriton [page 12]

checksums, positive acknowledgment of messages and timeout and retransmission of lost packets.

Transaction Identifiers

Each message transaction is uniquely identified by the pair (Client, Transaction). (We defer discussion of the ForwardCount field to Section 2.9.) The 32-bit transaction identifier is initialized to a random value when the Client entity is created or allocated its entity identifier. The transaction identifier is incremented at the end of each message transaction. All Responses with the same specified (Client, Transaction) pair are associated with this Request.

The transaction identifier is used for duplicate suppression at the Server. A Server maintains a state record for each Client for which it is processing a Request, identified by (Client, Transaction). A Request with the same (Client, Transaction) pair is discarded as a duplicate. (The ForwardCount field must also be equal.) Normally, this record is retained for some period after the Response is sent, allowing the Server to filter out subsequent duplicates of this Request. When a Request arrives and the Server does not have a state record for the sending Client, the Server takes one of three actions:

1. The Server may send a Probe request, a simple query

  operation, to the VMTP management module associated with the
  requesting Client to determine the Client's current
  Transaction identifier (and other information), initialize a
  new state record from this information, and then process the
  Request as above.

2. The Server may reason that the Request must be a new request

  because it does not have a state record for this Client if it
  keeps these state records for the maximum packet lifetime of
  packets in the network (plus the maximum VMTP retransmission
  time) and it has not been rebooted within this time period.
  That is, if the Request is not new either the Request would
  have exceeded the maximum packet lifetime or else the Server
  would have a state record for the Client.

3. The Server may know that the Request is idempotent or can be

  safely redone so it need not care whether the Request is a
  duplicate or not.  For example, a request for the current
  time can be responded to with the current time without being
  concerned whether the Request is a duplicate.  The Response
  is discarded at the Client if it is no longer of interest.

Cheriton [page 13]

Checksum

Each VMTP packet contains a checksum to allow the receiver to detect corrupted packets independent of lower level checks. The checksum field is 32 bits, providing greater protection than the standard 16-bit IP checksum (in combination with an improved checksum algorithm). The large packets, high packet rates and general network characteristics expected in the future warrant a stronger checksum mechanism.

The checksum normally covers both the VMTP header and the segment data. Optionally (for real-time applications), the checksum may apply only to the packet header, as indicated by the HCO control bit being set in the header. The checksum field is placed at the end of the packet to allow it to be calculated as part of a software copy or as part of a hardware transmission or reception packet processing pipeline, as expected in the next generation of network interfaces. Note that the number of header and data octets is an integral multiple of 8 because VMTP requires that the segment data be padded to be a multiple of 64 bits. The checksum field is appended after the padding, if any. The actual algorithm is described in Section 3.2.

A zero checksum field indicates that no checksum was transmitted with the packet. VMTP may be used without a checksum only when there is a host-to-host error detection mechanism and the VMTP security facility is not being used. For example, one could rely on the Ethernet CRC if communication is restricted to hosts on the same Ethernet and the network interfaces are considered sufficiently reliable.

Request and Response Acknowledgment

VMTP assumes an unreliable datagram network and internetwork interface. To guarantee delivery of Requests and Response, VMTP uses positive acknowledgments, retransmissions and timeouts.

A Request is normally acknowledged by receipt of a Response associated with the Request, i.e. with the same (Client, Transaction). With streamed message transactions, it may also be acknowledged by a subsequent Response that acknowledges previous Requests in addition to the transaction it explicitly identifies. A Response may be explicitly acknowledged by a NotifyVmtpServer operation requested of the manager for the Server. In the case of streaming, this is a cumulative acknowledgment, acknowledging all Responses with a lower transaction identifier as well.) In addition, with non-streamed communication, a subsequent Request from the same Client acknowledges Responses to all previous message transactions (at least in the sense that either the client received a Response or is no longer interested in Responses to

Cheriton [page 14]

those earlier message transactions). Finally, a client response timeout (at the server) acknowledges a Response at least in the sense that the server need not be prepared to retransmit the Response subsequently. Note that there is no end-to-end guarantee of the Response being received by the client at the application level.

Retransmissions

In general, a Request or Response is retransmitted periodically until acknowledged as above, up to some maximum number of retransmissions. VMTP uses parameters RequestRetries(Server) and ResponseRetries(Client) that indicate the number of retransmissions for the server and client respectively before giving up. We suggest the value 5 be used for both parameters based on our experience with VMTP and Internet packet loss. Smaller values (such as 3) could be used in low loss environments in which fast detection of failed hosts or communication channels is required. Larger values should be used in high loss environments where transport-level persistence is important.

In a low loss environment, a retransmission only includes the MCB and not the segment data of the Request or Response, resulting in a single (short) packet on retransmission. The intended recipient of the retransmission can request selective retransmission of all or part of the segment data as necessary. The selective retransmission mechanism is described in Section 2.13.

If a Response is specified as idempotent, the Response is neither retransmitted nor stored for retransmission. Instead, the Client must retransmit the Request to effectively get the Response retransmitted. The server VMTP module responds to retransmissions of the Request by passing the Request on to the server again to have it regenerate the Response (by redoing the operation), rather than saving a copy of the Response. Only Request packets for the last transaction from this client are passed on in this fashion; older Request packets from this client are discarded as delayed duplicates. If a Response is not idempotent, the VMTP module must ensure it has a copy of the Response for retransmission either by making a copy of the Response (either physically or copy-on-write) or by preventing the Server from continuing until the Response is acknowledged.

Timeouts

There is one client timer for each Client with an outstanding transaction. Similarly, there is one server timer for each Client transaction that is "active" at the server, i.e. there is a transaction

Cheriton [page 15]

record for a Request from the Client.

When the client transmits a new Request (without streaming), the client timer is set to roughly the time expected for the Response to be returned. On timeout, the Request is retransmitted with the APG (Acknowledge Packet Group) bit set. The timeout is reset to the expected roundtrip time to the Server because an acknowledgment should be returned immediately unless a Response has been sent. The Request may also be retransmitted in response to receipt of a VMTP management operation indicating that selected portions of the Request message segment need to be retransmitted. With streaming, the timeout applies to the oldest outstanding message transaction in the run of outstanding message transactions. Without streaming, there is one message transaction in the run, reducing to the previous situation. After the first packet of a Response is received, the Client resets the timeout to be the time expected before the next packet in the Response packet group is received, assuming it is a multi-packet Response. If not, the timer is stopped. Finally, the client timer is used to timeout waiting for second and subsequent Responses to a multicast Request.

The client timer is set at different times to four different values:

TC1(Server) The expected time required to receive a Response from

            the Server.  Set on initial Request transmission plus
            after its management module receives a NotifyVmtpClient
            operation, acknowledging the Request.

TC2(Server) The estimated round trip delay between the client and

            the server.  Set when retransmitting after receiving no
            Response for TC1(Server) time and retransmitting the
            Request with the APG bit set.

TC3(Server) The estimated maximum expected interpacket time for

            multi-packet Responses from the Server.  Set when
            waiting for subsequent Response packets within a packet
            group before timing out.

TC4 The time to wait for additional Responses to a group

            Request after the first Response is received.  This is
            specified by the user level.

These values are selected as follows. TC1 can be set to TC2 plus a constant, reflecting the time within which most servers respond to most requests. For example, various measurements of VMTP usage at Stanford indicate that 90 percent of the servers respond in less than 200 milliseconds. Setting TC1 to TC2 + 200 means that most Requests receive a Response before timing out and also that overhead for retransmission

Cheriton [page 16]

for long running transactions is insignificant. A sophisticated implementation may make the estimation of TC1 further specific to the Server.

TC2 may be estimated by measuring the time from when a Probe request is sent to the Server to when a response is received. TC2 can also be measured as the time between the transmission of a Request with the APG bit set to receipt of a management operation acknowledging receipt of the Request.

When the Server is an entity group, TC1 and TC2 should be the largest of the values for the members of the group that are expected to respond. This information may be determined by probing the group on first use (and using the values for the last responses to arrive). Alternatively, one can resort to default values.

TC3 is set initially to 10 times the transmission time for the maximum transmission unit (MTU) to be used for the Response. A sophisticated implementation may record TC3 per Server and refine the estimate based on measurements of actual interpacket gaps. However, a tighter estimate of TC3 only improves the reaction time when a packet is lost in a packet group, at some cost in unnecessary retransmissions when the estimate becomes overly tight.

The server timer, one per active Client, takes on the following values:

TS1(Client) The estimated maximum expected interpacket time. Set

            when waiting for subsequent Request packets within a
            packet group before timing out.

TS2(Client) The time to wait to hear from a client before

            terminating the server processing of a Request.  This
            limits the time spent processing orphan calls, as well
            as limiting how out of date the server's record of the
            Client state can be.  In particular, TS2 should be
            significantly less than the minimum time within which it
            is reasonable to reuse a transaction identifier.

TS3(Client) Estimated roundtrip time to the Client,

TS4(Client) The time to wait after sending a Response (or last

            hearing from a client) before discarding the state
            associated with the Request which allows it to filter
            duplicate Request packets and regenerate the Response.

TS5(Client) The time to wait for an acknowledgment after sending a

            Response before retransmitting the Response, or giving

Cheriton [page 17]

            up (after some number of retransmissions).

TS1 is set the same as TC3.

The suggested value for TS2 is TC1 + 3*TC2 for this server, giving the Client time to timeout waiting for a Response and retransmit 3 Request packets, asking for acknowledgments.

TS3 is estimated the same as TC1 except that refinements to the estimate use measurements of the Response-to-acknowledgment times.

In the general case, TS4 is set large enough so that a Client issuing a series of closely-spaced Requests to the same Server reuses the same state record at the Server end and thus does not incur the overhead of recreating this state. (The Server can recreate the state for a Client by performing a Probe on the Client to get the needed information.) It should also be set low enough so that the transaction identifier cannot wrap around and so that the Server does not run out of CSR's. We suggest a value in the range of 500 milliseconds. However, if the Server accepts non-idempotent Requests from this Client without doing a Probe on the Client, the TS4 value for this CSR is set to at least 4 times the maximum packet lifetime.

TS5 is TS3 plus the expected time for transmission and reception of the Response. We suggest that the latter be calculated as 3 times the transmission time for the Response data, allowing time for reception, processing and transmission of an acknowledgment at the Client end. A sophisticated implementation may refine this estimate further over time by timing acknowledgments to Responses.

Rate Control

VMTP is designed to deal with the present and future problem of packet overruns. We expect overruns to be the major cause of dropped packets in the future. A client is expected to estimate and adjust the interpacket gap times so as to not overrun a server or intermediate nodes. The selective retransmission mechanism allows the server to indicate that it is being overrun (or some intermediate point is being overrun). For example, if the server requests retransmission of every Kth block, the client should assume overrun is taking place and increase the interpacket gap times. The client passes the server an indication of the interpacket gap desired for a response. The client may have to increase the interval because packets are being dropped by an intermediate gateway or bridge, even though it can handle a higher rate. A conservative policy is to increase the interpacket gap whenever a packet is lost as part of a multi-packet packet group.

Cheriton [page 18]

The provision of selective retransmission allows the rate of the client and the server to "push up" against the maximum rate (and thus lose packets) without significant penalty. That is, every time that packet transmission exceeds the rate of the channel or receiver, the recovery cost to retransmit the dropped packets is generally far less than retransmitting from the first dropped packet.

The interpacket gap is expressed in 1/32nd's of the MTU packet transmission time. The minimum interpacket gap is 0 and the maximum gap that can be described in the protocol is 8 packet times. This places a limit on the slowest receivers that can be efficiently used on a network, at least those handling multi-packet Requests and Responses. This scheme also limits the granularity of adjustment. However, the granularity is relative to the speed of the network, as opposed to an absolute time. For entities on different networks of significantly different speed, we assume the interconnecting gateways can buffer packets to compensate<2>. With different network speeds and intermediary nodes subject to packet loss, a node must adjust the interpacket gap based on packet loss. The interpacket gap parameter may be of limited use.

Security

VMTP provides an (optional) secure mode that protects against the usual security threats of peeking, impostoring, message tampering and replays. Secure VMTP must be used to guarantee any of the transport-level reliability properties unless it is guaranteed that there are no intruders or agents that can modify packets and update the packet checksums. That is, non-secure VMTP provides no guarantees in the presence of an intelligent intruder.

The design closely follows that described by Birrell [1]. Authenticated information about a remote entity, including an encryption/decryption key, is obtained and maintained using a VMTP management operation, the authenticated Probe operation, which is executed as a non-secure VMTP message transaction. If a server receives a secure Request for which the server has no entity state, it sends a Probe request to the VMTP

_______________

<2> Gateways must also employ techniques to preserve or intelligently modify (if appropriate) the interpacket gaps. In particular, they must be sure not to arbitrarily remove interpacket gaps as a result of their forwarding of packets.

Cheriton [page 19]

management module of the client, "challenging" it to provide an authenticator that both authenticates the client as being associated with a particular principal as well as providing a key for encryption/decryption. The principal can include a real and effective principal, as used in UNIX <3>. Namely, the real principal is the principal on whose behalf the Request is being performed whereas the effective principal is the principal of the module invoking the request or remote procedure call.

Peeking is prevented by encrypting every Request and Response packet with a working Key that is shared between Client and Server. Impostoring and replays are detected by comparing the Transaction identifier with that stored in the corresponding entity state record (which is created and updated by VMTP as needed). Message tampering is detected by encryption of the packet including the Checksum field. An intruder cannot update the checksum after modifying the packet without knowing the Key. The cost of fully encrypting a packet is close to the cost of generating a cryptographic checksum (and of course, encryption is needed in the general case), so there is no explicit provision for cryptographic checksum without packet encryption.

A Client determines the Principal of the Server and acquires an authenticator for this Server and Principal using a higher level protocol. The Server cannot decrypt the authenticator or the Request packets unless it is in fact the Principal expected by the Client.

An encrypted VMTP packet is flagged by the EPG bit in the VMTP packet header. Thus, encrypted packets are easily detected and demultiplexed from unencrypted packets. An encrypted VMTP packet is entirely encrypted except for the Client, Version, Domain, Length and Packet Flags fields at the beginning of the packet. Client identifiers can be assigned, changed and used to have no real meaning to an intruder or to only communicate public information (such as the host Internet address). They are otherwise just a random means of identification and demultiplexing and do not therefore divulge any sensitive information. Further secure measures must be taken at the network or data link levels if this information or traffic behavior is considered sensitive.

VMTP provides multiple authentication domains as well as an encryption qualifier to accommodate different encryption algorithms and their

_______________

<3> Principal group membership must be obtained, if needed, by a higher level protocol.

Cheriton [page 20]

corresponding security/performance trade-offs. (See Appendix V.) A separate key distribution and authentication protocol is required to handle generation and distribution of authenticators and keys. This protocol can be implemented on top of VMTP and can closely follow the Birrell design as well.

Security is optional in the sense that messages may be secure or non-secure, even between consecutive message transactions from the same client. It is also optional in that VMTP clients and servers are not required to implement secure VMTP (although they are required to respond intelligently to attempts to use secure VMTP). At worst, a Client may fail to communicate with a Server if the Server insists on secure communication and the Client does not implement security or vice versa. However, a failure to communicate in this case is necessary from a security standpoint.

Multicast

The Server entity identifier in a message transaction can identify an entity group, in which case the Request is multicast to every Entity in this group (on a best-efforts basis). The Request is retransmitted until at least one Response is received (or an error timeout occurs) unless it is a datagram Request. The Client can receive multiple Responses to the Request.

The VMTP service interface does not directly provide reliable multicast because it is expensive to provide, rarely needed by applications, and can be implemented by applications using the multiple Response feature. However, the protocol itself is adequate for reliable multicast using positive acknowledgments. In particular, a sophisticated Client implementation could maintain a list of members for each entity group of interest and retransmit the Request until acknowledged by all members. No modifications are required to the Server implementations.

VMTP supports a simple form of subgroup addressing. If the CRE bit is set in a Request, the Request is delivered to the subgroup of entities in the Server group that are co-resident with one or more entities in the group (or individual entity) identified by the CoresidentEntity field of the Request. This is commonly used to send to the manager entity for a particular entity, where Server specifies the group of such managers. Co-resident means "using the same VMTP module", and logically on the same network host. In particular, a Probe request can be sent to the particular VMTP management module for an entity by specifying the VMTP management group as the Server and the entity in question as the CoResidentEntity.

Cheriton [page 21]

As an experimental aspect of the protocol, VMTP supports the Server sending a group Response which is sent to the Client as well as members of the destination group of Servers to which the original Request was sent. The MDG bit indicates whether the Client is a member of this group, allowing the Server module to determine whether separately addressed packet groups are required to send the Response to both the Client and the Server group. Normally, a Server accepts a group Response only if it has received the Request and not yet responded to the Client. Also, the Server must explicitly indicate it wants to accept group Responses. Logically, this facility is analogous to responding to a mail message sent to a distribution list by sending a copy of the Response to the distribution list.

Real-time Communication

VMTP provides three forms of support for real-time communication, in addition to its standard facilities, which make it applicable to a wide range of real-time applications. First, a priority is transmitted in each Request and Response which governs the priority of its handling. The priority levels are intended to correspond roughly to:

- urgent/emergency.

- important

- normal

- background.

with additional gradations for each level. The interpretation and implementation of these priority levels is otherwise host-specific, e.g. the assignment to host processing priorities.

Second, datagram Requests allow the Client to send a datagram to another entity or entity group using the VMTP naming, transmission and delivery mechanism, but without blocking, retransmissions or acknowledgment. (The client can still request acknowledgment using the APG bit although the Server does not expect missing portions of a multi-packet datagram Request to be retransmitted even if some are not received.) A datagram Request in non-streamed mode supersedes all previous Requests from the same Client. A datagram Request in stream mode is queued (if necessary) after previous datagram Requests on the same stream. (See Section 2.11.)

Finally, VMTP provides several control bit flags to modify the handling of Requests and Responses for real-time requirements. First, the

Cheriton [page 22]

conditional message delivery (CMD) flag causes a Request to be discarded if the recipient is not waiting for it when it arrives, similarly for the Response. This option allows a client to send a Request that is contingent on the server being able to process it immediately. The header checksum only (HCO) flag indicates that the checksum has been calculated only on the VMTP header and not on the data segment. Applications such as voice and video can avoid the overhead of calculating the checksum on data whose utility is insensitive to typical bit errors without losing protection on the header information. Finally, the No Retransmission (NRT) flag indicates that the recipient of a message should not ask for retransmission if part of the message is missing but rather either use what was received or discard it.

None of these facilities introduce new protocol states. In fact, the total processing overhead in the normal case is a bit flag test for CMD, HCO or NRT plus assignment of priority on packet transmission and reception. (In fact, CMD and NRT are not tested in the normal case.) The additional code complexity is minimal. We feel that the overhead for providing these real-time facilities is minimal and that these facilities are both important and adequate for a wide class of real-time applications.

Several of the normal facilities of VMTP appear useful for real-time applications. First, multicast is useful for distributed, replicated (fault-tolerant) real-time applications, allowing efficient state query and update for (for example) sensors and control state. Second, the DGM or idempotent flag for Responses has some real-time benefits, namely: a Request is redone to get the latest values when the Response is lost, rather than just returning the old values. The desirability of this behavior is illustrated by considering a request for the current time of day. An idempotent handling of this request gives better accuracy in returning the current time in the case that a retransmission is necessary. Finally, the request-response semantics (in the absence of streaming) of each new Request from a Client terminating the previous message transactions from that Client, if any, provides the "most recent is most important" handling of processing that most real-time applications require.

In general, a key design goal of VMTP was provide an efficient general-purpose transport protocol with the features required for real-time communication. Further experience is required to determine whether this goal has been achieved.

Cheriton [page 23]

Forwarded Message Transactions

A Server may invoke another Server to handle a Request. It is fairly common for the invocation of the second Server to be the last action performed by the first Server as part of handling the Request. For example, the original Server may function primarily to select a process to handle the Request. Also, the Server may simply check the authorization on the Request. Describing this situation in the context of RPC, a nested remote procedure call may be the last action in the remote procedure and the return parameters are exactly those of the nested call. (This situation is analogous to tail recursion.)

As an optimization to support this case, VMTP provides a Forward operation that allows the server to send the nested Request to the other server and have this other server respond directly to the Client.

If the message transaction being forwarded was not multicast, not secure or the two Servers are the same principal and the ForwardCount of the Request is less than the maximum forward count of 15, the Forward operation is implemented by the Server sending a Request onto the next Server with the forwarded Request identified by the same Client and Transaction as the original Request and a ForwardCount one greater than the Request received from the Client. In this case, the new Server responds directly to the Client. A forwarded Request is illustrated in the following figure.

+---------+   Request       +----------+
| Client  +---------------->| Server 1 |
+---------+                 +----------+
  ^                        |
  |                        | forwarded Request
  |                        V
  |   Response           +----------+
  +----------------------| Server 2 |
                         +----------+

If the message transaction does not meet the above requirements, the Server's VMTP module issues a nested call and simply maps the returned Response to a Response to original Request without further Server-level processing. In this case, the only optimization over a user-level nested call is one fewer VMTP service operation; the VMTP module handles the return to the invoking call directly. The Server may also use this form of forwarding when the Request is part of a stream of message transactions. Otherwise, it must wait until the forwarded message transaction completes before proceeding with the subsequent message transactions in the stream.

Cheriton [page 24]

Implementation of the user-level Forward operation is optional, depending on whether the server modules require this facility. Handling an incoming forwarded Request is a minor modification of handling a normal incoming Request. In particular, it is only necessary to examine the ForwardCount field when the Transaction of the Request matches that of the last message transaction received from the Client. Thus, the additional complexity in the VMTP module for the required forwarding support is minimal; the complexity is concentrated in providing a highly optimized user-level Forward primitive, and that is optional.

2.10. VMTP Management

VMTP management includes operations for creating, deleting, modifying and querying VMTP entities and entity groups. VMTP management is logically implemented by a VMTP management server module that is invoked using a message transaction addressed to the Server, VMTP_MANAGER_GROUP, a well-known group entity identifier, in conjunction with Coresident Entity mechanism introduced in Section 2.7. A particular Request may address the local module, the module managing a particular entity, the set of modules managing those entities contained in a specific group or all management modules, as appropriate.

The VMTP management procedures are specified in Appendix III.

2.11. Streamed Message Transactions

Streamed message transactions refer to two or more message transactions initiated by a Client before it receives the response to the first message transaction, with each transaction being processed and responded to in order but asynchronous relative to the initiation of the transactions. A Client streams messages transactions, and thereby has multiple message transactions outstanding, by sending them as part of a single run of message transactions. A run of message transactions is a sequence of message transactions with the same Client and Server and consecutive Transaction identifiers, with all but the first and last Requests and Responses flagged with the NSR (Not Start Run) and NER (Not End Run) control bits. (Conversely, the first Request and Response does not have the NSR set and the last Request and Response does not have the NER bit set.) The message transactions in a run use

Cheriton [page 25]

consecutive transaction identifiers (except if the STI bit <4> is used in one, in which case the transaction identifier for the next message transaction is 256 greater, rather than 1).

The Client retains a record for each outstanding transaction until it gets a Response or is timed out in error. The record provides the information required to retransmit the Request. On retransmission timeout, the client retransmits the last Request for which it has not received a Response the same as is done with non-streamed communication. (I.e. there need be only one timeout for all the outstanding message transactions associated with a single client.)

The consecutive transaction identifiers within a run of message transactions are used as sequence numbers for error control. The Server handles each message transaction in the sequence specified by its transaction identifier. When it receives a message transaction that is not marked as the beginning of a run, it checks that it previously received a message transaction with the predecessor transaction identifier, either 1 less than the current one or 256 less if the previous one had the STI bit set. If not, the Server sends a NotifyVmtpClient operation to the Client's manager indicating either: (1) the first message transaction was not fully received, or else (2) it has no record of the last one received. If the NRT control flag is set, it does not await nor expect retransmission but proceeds with handling this Request. This flag is used primarily when datagram Requests are used as part of a stream of message transactions. If NRT was not specified, the Client must retransmit from the first message transaction not fully received (either at all or in part) before the Server can proceed with handling this run of Requests or else restart the run of message transactions.

The Client expects to receive the Responses in a consecutive sequence, using the Transaction identifier to detect missing Responses. Thus, the Server must return Responses in sequence except possibly for some gaps, as follows. The Server can specify in the PGcount field in a Response, the number of consecutively previous Responses that this Response

_______________

<4> The STI bit is used by the Client to effectively allocate 255 transaction identifiers for use by the Server in returning a large Response or stream of Responses.

Cheriton [page 26]

corresponds to, up to a maximum of 255 previous Responses <5>. Thus, for example, a Response with Transaction identifier 46 and PGcount 3 represents Responses 43, 44, 45 and 46. This facility allows the Server to eliminate sending Responses to Requests that require no Response, effectively batching the Responses into one. It also allows the Server to effectively maintain strictly consecutive sequencing when the Client has skipped 256 Transaction identifiers using the STI bit and the Server does not have that many Responses to return.

If the Client receives a Response that is not consecutive, it retransmits the Request(s) for which the Response(s) is/are missing (unless, of course, the corresponding Requests were sent as datagrams). The Client should wait at the end of a run of message transactions for the last one to complete.

When a Server receives a Request with the NSR bit clear and a higher transaction identifier than it currently has for the Client, it terminates all processing and discards Responses associated with the previous Requests. Thus, a stream of message transactions is effectively aborted by starting a new run, even if the Server was in the middle of handling the previous run.

Using a mixture of datagram and normal Requests as part of a stream of message transactions, particularly with the use of the NRT bit, can lead to complex behavior under packet loss. It is recommended that a run of message transactions be all of one type to avoid problems, i.e. all normal or all datagrams. Finally, when a Server forwards a Request that is part of a run, it must suspend further processing of the subsequent Requests until the forwarded Request has been handled, to preserve order of processing. The simplest handling of this situation is to use a real nested call when forwarding with streamed message transactions.

Flow control of streamed message transactions relies on rate control at the Client plus receipt (or non-receipt) of management notify operations indicating the presence of overrunning. A Client must reduce the number of outstanding message transactions at the Server when it receives a NotifyVmtpServer operation with the MSGTRANS_OVERFLOW ResponseCode. The transact parameter indicates the last packet group that was accepted.

_______________

<5> PGcount actually corresponds to packet groups which are described in Section 2.13. This (simplified) description is accurate when there is one Request or Response per packet group.

Cheriton [page 27]

The implementation of multiple outstanding message transactions requires the ability to record, timeout and buffer multiple outstanding message transactions at the Client end as well as the Server end. However, this facility is optional for both the Client and the Server. Client systems with heavy-weight processes and high network access cost are most likely to benefit from this facility. Servers that serve a wide variety of client machines should implement streaming to accommodate these types of clients.

2.12. Fault-Tolerant Applications

One approach to fault-tolerant systems is to maintain a log of all messages sent at each node and replay the messages at a node when the node fails, after restarting it from the last checkpoint <6>. As an experimental facility, VMTP provides a Receive Sequence Number field in the NotifyVmtpClient and NotifyVmtpServer operations as well as the Next Receive Sequence (NRS) flag in the Response packet to allow a sender to log a receive sequence number with each message sent, allowing the packets to be replayed at a recovering node in the same sequence as they were originally received, thereby recovering to the same state as before.

Basically, each sending node maintains a receive sequence number for each receiving node. On sending a Request to a node, it presume that the receive sequence number is one greater than the one it has recorded for that node. If not, the receiving node sends a notify operation indicating the receive sequence number assigned the Request. The NRS in the Response confirms that the Request message was the next receive sequence number, so the sender can detect if it failed to receive the notify operation in the previous case. With Responses, the packets are ordered by the Transaction identifier except for multicast message transactions, in which there may be multiple Responses with the same identification. In this case, NotifyVmtpServer operations are used to provide receive sequence numbers.

This experimental extension of the protocol is focused on support for fault-tolerant real-time distributed systems required in various critical applications. It may be removed or extended, depending on further investigations.

_______________

<6> The sender-based logging is being investigated by Willy Zwaenepoel of Rice University.

Cheriton [page 28]

2.13. Packet Groups

A message (whether Request or Response) is sent as one or more packet groups. A packet group is one or more packets, each containing the same transaction identification and message control block. Each packet is formatted as below with the message control block logically embedded in the VMTP header.

+------------------------------------++---------------------+
|            VMTP Header             ||                     |
+------------+-----------------------||   segment data      |
|VMTP Control| Message Control Block ||                     |
+------------+-----------------------++---------------------+

The some fields of the VMTP control portion of the packet and data segment portion can differ between packets within the same packet group.

The segment data portion of a packet group represents up to 16 kilooctets of the segment specified in the message control block. The portion contained in each packet is indicated by the PacketDelivery field contained in the VMTP header. The PacketDelivery field as a bit mask has a similar interpretation to the MsgDelivery field in that each bit corresponds to a segment data block of 512 octets. The PacketDelivery field limits a packet group to 16 kilooctets and a maximum of 32 VMTP packets (with a minimum of 1 packet). Data can be sent in fewer packets by sending multiple data blocks per packet. We require that the underlying datagram service support delivery of (at minimum) the basic 580 octet VMTP packet <7>. To illustrate the use of the PacketDelivery field, consider for example the Ethernet which has a MTU of 1536 octets. so one would send 2 512-octet segment data blocks per packet. (In fact, if a third block is last in the segment and less than 512 octets and fits in the packet without making it too big, an Ethernet packet could contain three data blocks. Thus, an Ethernet packet group for a segment of size 0x1D00 octets (14.5 blocks) and MsgDelivery 0x000074FF consists of 6 packets indicated as follows <8>.

_______________

<7> Note that with a 20 octet IP header, a VMTP packet is 600 octets. We propose the convention that any host implementing VMTP implicitly agrees to accept IP/VMTP packets of at least 600 octets.

<8> We use the C notation 0xHHHH to represent a hexadecimal number.

Cheriton [page 29]

Packet
Delivery  1 1  1 1  1 1  1 1  0 0  1 0  1 0  1 0  0 0 0 0 0 . . .
       0000 0400 0800 0C00 1000 1400 1800 1C00
      +----+----+----+----+----+----+----+-+
Segment  |....|....|....|....|....|....|....|.|
      +----+----+----+----+----+----+----+-+
      :    :    :    :    :    :  : /  /   :
      v    v    v    v    v    v  v   /|   v
      +----+----+----+----+    +----+  +---+
Packets  |  1 |  2 |  3 |  4 |    |  5 |  | 6 |
      +----+----+----+----+    +----+  +---+

Each '.' is 256 octets of data. The PacketDelivery masks for the 6 packets are: 0x00000003, 0x0000000C, 0x00000030, 0x000000C0, 0x00001400 and 0x00006000, indicating the segment blocks contained in each of the packets. (Note that the delivery bits are in little endian order.)

A packet group is sent as a single "blast" of packets with no explicit flow control. However, the sender should estimate and transmit at a rate of packet transmission to avoid congesting the network or overwhelming the receiver, as described in Section 2.5.6. Packets in a packet group can be sent in any order with no change in semantics.

When the first packet of a packet group is received (assuming the Server does not decide to discard the packet group), the Server saves a copy of the VMTP packet header, indicates it is currently receiving a packet group, initializes a "current delivery mask" (indicating the data in the segment received so far) to 0, accepts this packet (updating the current delivery mask) and sets the timer for the packet group. Subsequent packets in the packet group update the current delivery mask.

Reception of a packet group is terminated when either the current delivery mask indicates that all the packets in the packet group have been received or the packet group reception timer expires (set to TC3 or TS1). If the packet group reception timer expires, if the NRT bit is set in the Control flags then the packet group is discarded if not complete unless MDM is set. In this case, the MsgDelivery field in the message control block is set to indicate the segment data blocks actually received and the message control block and segment data received is delivered to application level.

If NRT is not set and not all data blocks have been received, a NotifyVmtpClient (if a Request) or NotifyVmtpServer (if a Response) is sent back with a PacketDelivery field indicating the blocks received. The source of the packet group is then expected to retransmit the missing blocks. If not all blocks of a Request are received after RequestAckRetries(Client) retransmissions, the Request is discarded and

Cheriton [page 30]

a NotifyVmtpClient operation with an error response code is sent to the client's manager unless MDM is set. With a Response, there are ResponseAckRetries(Server) retransmissions and then, if MDM is not set, the requesting entity is returned the message control block with an indication of the amount of segment data received extending contiguously from the start of the segment. E.g. if the sender sent 6 512-octet blocks and only the first two and the last two arrived, the receiver would be told that 1024 octets were received. The ResponseCode field is set to BAD_REPLY_SEGMENT. (Note that VMTP is only able to indicate the specific segment blocks received if MDM is set.)

The parameters RequestAckRetries(Client) and ResponseAckRetries(Server) could be set on a per-client and per-server basis in a sophisticated implementation based on knowledge of packet loss.

If the APG flag is set, a NotifyVmtpClient or NotifyVmtpServer operation is sent back at the end of the packet group reception, depending on whether it is a Request or a Response.

At minimum, a Server should check that each packet in the packet group contains the same Client, Server, Transaction identifier and SegmentSize fields. It is a protocol error for any field other than the Checksum, packet group control flags, Length and PacketDelivery in the VMTP header to differ between any two packets in one packet group. A packet group containing a protocol error of this nature should be discarded.

Notify operations should be sent (or invoked) in the manager whenever there is a problem with a unicast packet. i.e. negative acknowledgments are always sent in this case. In the case of problems with multicast packets, the default is to send nothing in response to an error condition unless there is some clear reason why no other node can respond positively. For example, the packet might be a Probe for an entity that is known to have been recently existing on the receiving host but now invalid and could not have migrated. In this case, the receiving host responds to the Probe indicating the entity is nonexistent, knowing that no other host can respond to the Probe. For packets and packet groups that are received and processed without problems, a Notify operation is invoked only if the APG bit is set.

2.14. Runs of Packet Groups

A run of packet groups is a sequence of packet groups, all Request packets or all Response packets, with the same Client and consecutive transaction identifiers, all but the first and last packets flagged with the NSR (Not Start Run) and NER (Not End Run) control bits. When each packet group in the run corresponds to a single Request or Response, it

Cheriton [page 31]

is identical to a run of message transactions. (See Section 2.11) However, a Request message or a Response message may consists of up to 256 packet groups within a run, for a maximum of 4 megaoctets of segment data. A message that is continued in the next packet group in the run is flagged in the current packet group by the CMG flag. Otherwise, the next packet group in the run (if any) is treated as a separate Request or Response.

Normally, each Request and Response message is sent as a single packet group and each run consists of a single packet group. In this case neither NSR or NER are set. For multi-packet group messages, the PacketDelivery mask in the i-th packet group of a message corresponds to the portion of the segment offset by i-1 times 16 kilooctets, designating the the first packet group to have i = 1.

2.15. Byte Order

For purposes of transmission and reception, the MCB is treated as consisting of 8 32-bit fields and the segment is a sequence of bytes. VMTP transmits the MCB in big-endian order, performing byte-swapping, if necessary, before transmission. A little-endian host must byte-swap the MCB on reception. (The data segment is transmitted as a sequence of bytes with no reordering.) The byte order of the sender of a message is indicated by the LEE bit in the entity identifier for the sender, the Client field if a Request and the Server field if a Response. The sender and receiver of a message are required to agree in some higher level protocol (such as an RPC presentation protocol) on who does further swapping of the MCB and data segment if required by the types of the data actually being transmitted. For example, the segment data may contain a record with 8-bit, 16-bit and 32-bit fields, so additional transformation is required to move the segment from a host of one byte order to another.

VMTP to date has used a higher-level presentation protocol in which segment data is sent in the native order of the sending host and byte-swapped as necessary by the receiving host. This approach minimizes the byte-swapping overhead between machines of common byte order (including when the communication is transparently local to one host), avoids a strong bias in the protocol to one byte-order, and allows for the sending entity to be sending to a group of hosts with different byte orders. (Note that the byte-swap overhead for the MCB is minimal.) The presentation-level overhead is minimal because most common operations, such as file access operations, have parameters that fit the MCB and data segment data types exactly.

Cheriton [page 32]

2.16. Minimal VMTP Implementation

A minimal VMTP client needs to be able to send a Request packet group and receive a Response packet group as well as accept and respond to Requests sent to its management module, including Probe and NotifyClient operations. It may also require the ability to invoke Probe and Notify operations to locate a Server and acknowledge responses. (the latter only if it is involved in transactions that are not idempotent or datagram message transactions. However, a simple sensor, for example, can transmit VMTP datagram Requests indicating its current state with even less mechanism.) The minimal client thus requires very little code and is suitable as a basis for (e.g.) a network boot loader.

A minimal VMTP server implements idempotent, non-encrypted message transactions, possibly with no segment data support. It should use an entity state record for each Request but need only retain it while processing the Request. Without segment data larger than a packet, there is no need for any timers, buffering (outside of immediate request processing) or queuing. In particular, it needs only as many records as message transactions it handles simultaneously (e.g. 1). The entity state record is required to recognize and respond to Request retransmissions during request processing.

The minimal server need only receive Requests and and be able to send Response packets. It need have only a minimal management module supporting Probe operations. (Support for the NotifyVmtpClient operation is only required if it does not respond immediately to a Request.) Thus the VMTP support for say a time server, sensor, or actuator can be extremely simple. Note that the server need never issue a Probe operation if it uses the host address of the Request for the Response and does not require the Client information returned by the Probe operation. The minimal server should also support reception of forwarded Requests.

2.17. Message vs. Procedural Request Handling

A request-response protocol can be used to implement two forms of semantics on reception. With procedural handling of a Request, a Request is handled by a process associated with the Server that effectively takes on the identity of the calling process, treating the Request message as invoking a procedure, and relinquishing its association to the calling process on return. VMTP supports multiple nested calls spanning multiple machines. In this case, the distributed call stack that results is associated with a single process from the standpoint of authentication and resource management, using the ProcessId field supported by VMTP. The entity identifiers effectively

Cheriton [page 33]

link these call frames together. That is, the Client field in a Request is effectively the return link to the previous call frame.

With message handling of a Request, a Request message is queued for a server process. The server process dequeues, reads, processes and responds to the Request message, executing as a separate process. Subsequent Requests to the same server are queued until the server asks to receive the next Request.

Procedural semantics have the advantage of allowing each Request (up to the resource limits of the Server) to execute concurrently at the Server, with Request-specific synchronization. Message semantics have the advantage that Requests are serialized at the Server and that the request processing logically executes with the priority, protection and independent execution of a separate process. Note that procedural and message handling of a request appear no differently to the client invoking the message transaction, except possibly for differences in performance.

We view the two Request handling approaches as appropriate under different circumstances. VMTP supports both models.

2.18. Bibliography

The basic protocol is similar to that used in the original form of the V kernel [3, 4] as well as the transport protocol of Birrell and Nelson's [2] remote procedure call mechanism. An earlier version of the protocol was described in SIGCOMM'86 [6]. The rate-based flow control is similar to the techniques of Netblt [9]. The support for idempotency draws, in part, on the favorable experience with idempotency in the V distributed system. Its use was originally inspired by the Woodstock File Server [11]. The multicast support draws on the multicast facilities in V [5] and is designed to work with, and is now implemented using, the multicast extensions to the Internet [8] described in RFC 966 and 988. The secure version of the protocol is similar to that described by Birrell [1] for secure RPC. The use of runs of packet groups is similar to Fletcher and Watson's delta-T protocol [10]. The use of "management" operations implemented using VMTP in place of specialized packet types is viewed as part of a general strategy of using recursion to simplify protocol architectures [7].

Finally, this protocol was designed, in part, to respond to the requirements identified by Braden in RFC 955. We believe that VMTP satisfies the requirements stated in RFC 955.

Cheriton [page 34]

[1] A.D. Birrell, "Secure Communication using Remote Procedure

  Calls", ACM. Trans. on Computer Systems 3(1), February, 1985.

[2] A. Birrell and B. Nelson, "Implementing Remote Procedure Calls",

  ACM Trans. on Computer Systems 2(1), February, 1984.

[3] D.R. Cheriton and W. Zwaenepoel, "The Distributed V Kernel and its

  Performance for Diskless Workstations", In Proceedings of the 9th
  Symposium on Operating System Principles,  ACM, 1983.

[4] D.R. Cheriton, "The V Kernel: A Software Base for Distributed

  Systems", IEEE Software 1(2), April, 1984.

[5] D.R. Cheriton and W. Zwaenepoel, "Distributed Process Groups in

  the V Kernel", ACM Trans. on Computer Systems 3(2), May, 1985.

[6] D.R. Cheriton, "VMTP: A Transport Protocol for the Next

  Generation of Communication Systems", In Proceedings of
  SIGCOMM'86, ACM, Aug 5-7, 1986.

[7] D.R. Cheriton, "Exploiting Recursion to Simplify an RPC

  Communication Architecture", in preparation, 1988.

[8] D.R. Cheriton and S.E. Deering, "Host Groups: A Multicast

  Extension for Datagram Internetworks", In 9th Data Communication 
  Symposium, IEEE Computer Society and ACM SIGCOMM, September, 1985.

[9] D.D. Clark and M. Lambert and L. Zhang, "NETBLT: A Bulk Data

  Transfer Protocol", Technical Report RFC 969, Defense Advanced 
  Research Projects Agency, 1985.

[10] J.G. Fletcher and R.W. Watson, "Mechanism for a Reliable Timer-

  based Protocol", Computer Networks 2:271-290, 1978.

Cheriton [page 35]

[11] D. Swinehart and G. McDaniel and D. Boggs, "WFS: A Simple File

  System for a Distributed Environment", In Proc. 7th Symp. 
  Operating Systems Principles, 1979.

Cheriton [page 36]

VMTP Packet Formats

VMTP uses 2 basic packet formats corresponding to Request packets and Response packets. These packet formats are identical in most of the fields to simplify the implementation.

We first describe the entity identifier format and the packet fields that are used in general, followed by a detailed description of each of the packet formats. These fields are described below in detail. The individual packet formats are described in the following subsections. The reader and VMTP implementor may wish to refer to Chapters 4 and 5 for a description of VMTP event handling and only refer to this detailed description as needed.

Entity Identifier Format

The 64-bit non-group entity identifiers have the following substructure.

 0                   1                   2                   3
 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1
+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
|R| |L|R|
|A|0|E|E|      Domain-specific structure
|E| |E|S|
+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
            Domain-specific structure                        |
+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+

The field meanings are as follows:

RAE Remote Alias Entity - the entity identifier identifies

            an entity that is acting as an alias for some entity
            outside this entity domain.  This bit is used by
            higher-level protocols.  For instance, servers may take
            extra security and protection measures with aliases.

GRP Group - 0, for non-group entity identifiers.

LEE Little-Endian Entity - the entity transmits data in

            little-endian (VAX) order.

RES Reserved - must be 0.

The 64-bit entity group identifiers have the following substructure.

Cheriton [page 37]

 0                   1                   2                   3
 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1
+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
|R| |U|R|
|A|1|G|E|      Domain-specific structure
|E| |P|S|
+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
            Domain-specific structure                        |
+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+

The field meanings are as follows:

RAE Remote Alias Entity - same as for non-group entity

            identifier.

GRP Group - 1, for entity group identifiers.

UGP Unrestricted Group - no restrictions are placed on

            joining this group.  I.e. any entity can join limited
            only by implementation resources.

RES Reserved - must be 0.

The all-zero entity identifier is reserved and guaranteed to be unallocated in all domains. In addition, a domain may reserve part of the entity identifier space for statically allocated identifiers. However, this is domain-specific.

Description of currently defined entity identifier domains is provided in Appendix IV.

Packet Fields

Client 64-bit identifier for the client entity associated with

            this packet.  The structure, allocation and binding of
            this identifier is specific to the specified Domain.  An
            entity identifier always includes 4 types bits as
            specified in Section 3.1.

Version The 3-bit identifier specifying the version of the

            protocol.  Current version is version 0.

Domain The 13-bit identifier specifying the naming and

            administration domain for the client and server named in
            the packet.

Cheriton [page 38]

Packet Flags: 3 bits. (The normal case has none of the flags set.)

 HCO           Header checksum only - checksum has only been calculated
            on the header.  This is used in some real-time
            applications where the strict correctness of the data is
            not needed.
 EPG           Encrypted packet group - part of a secure message
            transaction.
 MPG           Multicast packet group - packet was multicast on
            transmission.

Length A 13-bit field that specifies the number of 32-bit words

            in the segment data portion of the packet (if any),
            excluding the checksum field.  (Every VMTP packet is
            required to be a multiple of 64 bits, possibly by
            padding out the segment data.)  The minimum legal Length
            is 0, the maximum length is 4096 and it must be an even
            number.

Control Flags: 9 bits. (The normal case has none of the flags set.)

 NRS           Next Receive Sequence - the associated Request message
            (in a Response) or previous Response (if a Request) was
            received consecutive with the last Request from this
            entity.  That is, there was no interfering messages
            received.
 APG           Acknowledge Packet Group - Acknowledge packet group on
            receipt.  If a Request, send back a Request to the
            client's manager providing an update on the state of the
            transaction as soon as the request packet group is
            received, independent of the response being available.
            If a Response, send an update to the server's manager as
            soon as possible after response packet group is received
            providing an update on the state of the transaction at
            the client
 NSR           Not Start Run - 1 if this packet is not part of the
            first packet group of a run of packet groups.
 NER           Not End Run - 1 if this packet is not part of the last
            packet group of a run of packet groups.
 NRT           No Retransmission - do not ask for retransmissions of
            this packet group if not all received within timeout

Cheriton [page 39]

            period, just deliver or discard.
 MDG           Member of Destination Group - this packet is sent to a
            group and the client is a member of this group.
 CMG           Continued Message - the message (Request or Response) is
            continued in the next packet group.  The next packet
            group has to be part of the same run of packet groups.
 STI           Skip Transaction Identifiers - the next transaction
            identifier that the Client plans to use is the current
            transaction plus 256, if part of the same run and at
            least this big if not.  In a Request, this authorizes
            the Server to send back up to 256 packet groups
            containing the Response.
 DRT           Delay Response Transmission - set by request sender if
            multiple responses are expected (as indicated by the MRD
            flag in the RequestCode) and it may be overrun by
            multiple responses.  The responder(s) should then
            introduce a short random delay in sending the Response
            to minimize the danger of overrunning the Client.  This
            is normally only used for responding to multicast
            Requests where the Client may be receiving a large
            number of Responses, as indicated by the MRD flag in the
            Request flags.  Otherwise, the Response is sent
            immediately.

RetransmitCount:

            3 bits - the ordinal number of transmissions of this
            packet group prior to this one, modulo 8.  This field is
            used in estimation of roundtrip times.  This count may
            wrap around during a message transaction.  However, it
            should be sufficient to match acknowledgments and
            responses with a particular transmission.

ForwardCount: 4 bits indicating the number of times this Request has

            been forwarded.  The original Request is always sent
            with a ForwardCount of 0.

Interpacket Gap: 8 bits.

            Indicates the recommended time to use between subsequent
            packet transmissions within a multi-packet packet group
            transmission.  The Interpacket Gap time is in 1/32nd of
            a network packet transmission time for a packet of size
            MTU for the node.  (Thus, the maximum gap time is 8
            packet times.)

Cheriton [page 40]

PGcount: 8 bits

            The number of packet groups that this packet group
            represents in addition to that specified by the
            Transaction field.  This is used in acknowledging
            multiple packet groups in streamed communication.

Priority 4-bit identifier for priority for the processing of this

            request both on transmission and reception.  The
            interpretation is:
            1100            urgent/emergency
            1000            important
            0000            normal
            0100            background
            Viewing the higher-order bit as a sign bit (with 1
            meaning negative), low values are high priority and high
            values are low priority.  The low-order 2 bits indicate
            additional (lower) gradations for each level.

Function Code: 1 bit - types of VMTP packets. If the low-order bit of

            the function code is 0, the packet is sent to the
            Server, else it is sent to the Client.
            0               Request
            1               Response

Transaction: 32 bits:

            Identifier for this message transaction.

PacketDelivery: 32 bits:

            Delivery indicates the segment blocks contained in this
            packet.  Each bit corresponds to one 512-octet block of
            segment data.  A 1 bit in the i-th bit position
            (counting the LSB as 0) indicates the presence of the
            i-th segment block.

Server: 64 bits

            Entity identifier for the server or server group
            associated with this transaction.  This is the receiver
            when a Request packet and the sender when a Response
            packet.

Cheriton [page 41]

Code: 32 bits The Request Code and Response Code, set either at the

            user level or VMTP level depending on use and packet
            type.  Both the Request and Response codes include 8
            high-order bits from the following set of control bits:
 CMD           Conditional Message Delivery -  only deliver the request
            or response if the receiving entity is waiting for it at
            the time of delivery, otherwise drop the message.
 DGM           DataGram Message - indicates that the message is being
            sent as a datagram.  If a Request message, do not wait
            for reply, or retransmit.  If a Response message, treat
            this message transaction as idempotent.
 MDM           Message Delivery Mask - indicates that the MsgDelivery
            field is being used.  Otherwise, the MsgDelivery field
            is available for general use.
 SDA           Segment Data Appended - segment data is appended to the
            message control block, with the total size of the
            segment specified by the SegmentSize field.  Otherwise,
            the segment data is null and the SegmentSize field is
            not used by VMTP and available for user- or RPC-level
            uses.
 CRE           CoResident Entity - indicates that the CoResidentEntity
            field in the message should be interpreted by VMTP.
            Otherwise, this field is available for additional user
            data.
 MRD           Multiple Responses Desired - multiple Responses are
            desired to to this Request if it is multicast.
            Otherwise, the VMTP module can discard subsequent
            Responses after the first Response.
 PIC           Public Interface Code - Values for Code with this bit
            set are reserved for definition by the VMTP
            specification and other standard protocols defined on
            top of VMTP.
 RES           Reserved for future use. Must be 0.

CoResidentEntity

            64-bit Identifier for an entity or group of entities
            with which the Server entity or entities must be
            co-resident, i.e. route only to entities (identified by
            Server) on the same host(s) as that specified by

Cheriton [page 42]

            CoResidentEntity, Only meaningful if CRE is set in the
            Code field.

User Data 12 octets Space in the header for the VMTP user to

            specify user-specific control and data.

MsgDelivery: 32 bits

            The segment blocks being transmitted (in total) in this
            packet group following the conventions for the
            PacketDelivery field.  This field is ignored by the
            protocol and treated as an additional user data field if
            MDM is 0.  On transmission, the user level sets the
            MsgDelivery to indicate those portions of the segment to
            be transmitted.  On receipt, the MsgDelivery field is
            modified by the VMTP module to indicate the segment data
            blocks that were actually received before the message
            control block is passed to the user or RPC level.  In
            particular, the kernel does not discard the packet group
            if segment data blocks are missing.  A Server or Client
            entity receiving a message with a MsgDelivery in use
            must check the field to ensure adequate delivery and
            retry the operation if necessary.

SegmentSize: 32 bits

            Size of segment in octets, up to a maximum of 16
            kilooctets without streaming and 4 megaoctets with
            streaming, if SDA is set.  Otherwise, this field is
            ignored by the protocol and treated as an additional
            user data field.

Segment Data: 0-16 kilooctets

            0 octets if SDA is 0, else the portion of the segment
            corresponding to the Delivery Mask, limited by the
            SegmentSize and the MTU, padded out to a multiple of 64
            bits.

Checksum: 32 bits.

            The 32-bit checksum for the header and segment data.

The VMTP checksum algorithm <9> develops a 32-bit checksum by computing

_______________

<9> This algorithm and description are largely due to Steve Deering of Stanford University.

Cheriton [page 43]

two 16-bit, ones-complement sums (like IP), each covering different parts of the packet. The packet is divided into clusters of 16 16-bit words. The first, third, fifth,... clusters are added to the first sum, and the second, fourth, sixth,... clusters are added to the second sum. Addition stops at the end of the packet; there is no need to pad out to a cluster boundary (although it is necessary that the packet be an integral multiple of 64 bits; padding octets may have any value and are included in the checksum and in the transmitted packet). If either of the resulting sums is zero, it is changed to 0xFFFF. The two sums are appended to the transmitted packet, with the first sum being transmitted first. Four bytes of zero in place of the checksum may be used to indicate that no checksum was computed.

The 16-bit, ones-complement addition in this algorithm is the same as used in IP and, therefore, subject to the same optimizations. In particular, the words may be added up 32-bits at a time as long as the carry-out of each addition is added to the sum on the following addition, using an "add-with-carry" type of instruction. (64-bit or 128-bit additions would also work on machines that have registers that big.)

A particular weakness of this algorithm (shared by IP) is that it does not detect the erroneous swapping of 16-bit words, which may easily occur due to software errors. A future version of VMTP is expected to include a more secure algorithm, but such an algorithm appears to require hardware support for efficient execution.

Not all of these fields are used in every packet. The specific packet formats are described below. If a field is not mentioned in the description of a packet type, its use is assumed to be clear from the above description.

Cheriton [page 44]

Request Packet

The Request packet (or packet group) is sent from the client to the server or group of servers to solicit processing plus the return of zero or more responses. A Request packet is identified by a 0 in the LSB of the fourth 32-bit word in the packet.

 0                   1                   2                   3
 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1
+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
+                       Client (8 octets)                       +
+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
|Ver  |                         |H|E|M|                         |
|sion |          Domain         |C|P|P|      Length             |
|     |                         |O|G|G|                         |
+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
|N|A|N|N|N|M|C|S|D|Retra|Forward|    Inter-     |       |R|R|R| |
|R|P|S|E|R|D|M|T|R|nsmit| Count |    Packet     | Prior |E|E|E|0|
|S|G|R|R|T|G|G|I|T|Count|       |     Gap       | -ity  |S|S|S| |
+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
|                      Transaction                              |
+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
|                     PacketDelivery                            |
+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
+                    Server (8 octets)                          +
+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
|C|D|M|S|R|C|M|P|                                               |
|M|G|D|D|E|R|R|I|        RequestCode                            |
|D|M|M|A|S|E|D|C|                                               |
+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
+                 CoResidentEntity (8 octets)                   +
+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
>                   User Data (12 octets)                       <
+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
|                      MsgDelivery                              |
+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
|                       SegmentSize                             |
+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
>                  segment data, if any                         <
+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
|                        Checksum                               |
+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
              Figure 3-1:   Request Packet Format

The fields of the Request packet are set according to the semantics described in Section 3.2 with the following qualifications.

Cheriton [page 45]

InterPacketGap The estimated interpacket gap time the client would like

            for the Response packet group to be sent by the Server
            in responding to this Request.

Transaction Identifier for transaction, at least one greater than

            the previously issued Request from this Client.

Server Server to which this Request is destined.

RequestCode Request code for this request, indicating the operation

            to perform.

Cheriton [page 46]

Response Packet

The Response packet is sent from the Server to the Client in response to a Request, identified by a 1 in the LSB of the fourth 32-bit word in the packet.

 0                   1                   2                   3
 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1
+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
+                       Client (8 octets)                       +
+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
|Ver  |                         |H|E|M|                         |
|sion |          Domain         |C|P|P|      Length             |
|     |                         |O|G|G|                         |
+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
|N|A|N|N|N|R|C|S|R|Retra|Forward|               |       |R|R|R| |
|R|P|S|E|R|E|M|T|E|nsmit| Count |    PGcount    | Prior |E|E|E|1|
|S|G|R|R|T|S|G|I|S|Count|       |               | -ity  |S|S|S| |
+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
|                      Transaction                              |
+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
|                      PacketDelivery                           |
+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
+                        Server (8 octets)                      +
+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
|C|D|M|S|R|R|R|R|                                               |
|M|G|D|D|E|E|E|E|        ResponseCode                           |
|D|M|M|A|S|S|S|S|                                               |
+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
>                   UserData (20 octets)                        <
+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
|                     MsgDelivery                               |
+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
|                    Segment Size                               |
+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
>                  segment data, if any                         <
+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
|                       Checksum                                |
+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
              Figure 3-2:   Response Packet Format

The fields of the Response packet are set according to the semantics described in Section 3.2 with the following qualifications.

Client, Version, Domain, Transaction

            Match those in the Request packet group to which this is

Cheriton [page 47]

            a response.

STI 1 if this Response is using one or more of the

            transaction identifiers skipped by the Client after the
            Request to which this is a Response.  STI in the Request
            essentially allocates up to 256 transaction identifiers
            for the Server to use in a run of Response packet
            groups.

RetransmitCount The retransmit count from the last Request packet

            received to which this is a response.

ForwardCount The number of times the corresponding Request was

            forwarded before this Response was generated.

PGcount The number of consecutively previous packet groups that

            this response is acknowledging in addition to the one
            identified by the Transaction identifier.

Server Server sending this response. This may differ from that

            originally specified in the Request packet if the
            original Server was a server group, or the request was
            forwarded.

The next two chapters describes the protocol operation using these packet formats, with the the Client and the Server portions described separately.

Cheriton [page 48]

Client Protocol Operation

This chapter describes the operation of the client portion of VMTP in terms of the procedures for handling VMTP user events, packet reception events, management operations and timeout events. Note that the client portion of VMTP is separable from the server portion. It is feasible to have a node that only implements the client end of VMTP.

To simplify the description, we define a client state record (CSR) plus some standard utility routines.

Client State Record Fields

In the following protocol description, there is one client state record (CSR) per (client,transaction) outstanding message transaction. Here is a suggested set of fields.

Link Link to next CSR when queued in one of the transmission,

            timeout or message queues.

QueuePtr Pointer to queue head in which this CSR is contained or

            NULL if none.  Queue could be one of transmission queue,
            timeout queue, server queue or response queue.

ProcessIdentification

            The process identification and address space.

Priority Priority for processing, network service, etc.

State One of the client states described below.

FinishupFunc Procedure to be executed on the CSR when it is completes

            its processing in transmission or timeout queues.

TimeoutCount Time to remain in timeout queue.

TimeoutLimit User-specified time after which the message transaction

            is aborted. The timeout is infinite if set to zero.

RetransCount Number of retransmissions since last hearing from the

            Server.

LastTransmitTime

            The time at which the last packet was sent.  This field
            is used to calculate roundtrip times, using the
            RetransmitCount to match the responding packet to a

Cheriton [page 49]

            particular transmission.  I.e. Response or management
            NotifyVmtpClient operation to Request and a management
            NotifyVmtpServer operation to a Response.

TimetoLive Time to live to be used on transmission of IP packets.

TransmissionMask

            Bit mask indicating the portions of the segment to
            transmit.  Set before entering the transmission queue
            and cleared incrementally as the 512-byte segment blocks
            of the segment are transmitted.

LocalClientLink Link to next CSR hashing to same hash index in the

            ClientMap.

LocalClient Entity identifier for client when this CSR is used to

            send a Request packet.

LocalTransaction

            Transaction identifier for current message transaction
            the local client has outstanding.

LocalPrincipal Account identification, possibly including key and key

            timeout.

LocalDelivery Bit mask of segment blocks that have not been

            acknowledged in the Request or have been received in the
            Response, depending on the state.

ResponseQueue Queue of CSR's representing the queued Responses for

            this entity.

VMTP Header Prototype VMTP header, used to generate and store the

            header portion of a Request for transmission and
            retransmission on timeout.

SegmentDesc Description of the segment data associated with the CSR,

            either the area storing the original Request data, the
            area for receiving Request data, or the area storing the
            Response data that is returned.

HostAddr The network or internetwork host address to which the

            Client last transmitted.  This field also indicates the
            type of the address, e.g. IP, Ethernet, etc.

Note: the CSR can be combined with a light-weight process descriptor with considerable benefit if the process is designed to block when it

Cheriton [page 50]

issues a message transaction. In particular, by combining the two descriptors, the implementation saves time because it only needs to locate and queue one descriptor with various operations (rather than having to locate two descriptors). It also saves space, given that the VMTP header prototype provides space such as the user data field which may serve to store processor state for when the process is preempted. Non-preemptive blocking can use the process stack to store the processor state so only a program counter and stack pointer may be required in the process descriptor beyond what we have described. (This is the approach used in the V kernel.)

Client Protocol States

A Client State Record records the state of message transaction generated by this host, identified by the (Client, Transaction) values in the CSR. As a client originating a transaction, it is in one of the following states.

AwaitingResponse

            Waiting for a Response packet group to arrive with the
            same (Client,Transaction) identification.

ReceivingResponse

            Waiting for additional packets in the Response packet
            group it is currently receiving.

"Other" Not waiting for a response, which can be Processing or

            some other operating system state, or one of the Server
            states if it also acts as a server.

This covers all the states for a client.

State Transition Diagrams

The client state transitions are illustrated in Figure 4-1. The client goes into the state AwaitingResponse on sending a request unless it is a datagram request. In the AwaitingResponse state, it can timeout and retry and eventually give up and return to the processing state unless it receives a Response. (A NotifyVmtpClient operation resets the timeout but does not change the state.) On receipt of a single packet response, it returns to the processing state. Otherwise, it goes to ReceivingResponse state. After timeout or final response packet is received, the client returns to the processing state. The processing state also includes any other state besides those associated with issuing a message transaction.

Cheriton [page 51]

+------------+ | Processing |<--------------------| | |<-------------| | | |<---| | | +|------^--^-+ Single Last |

Transmit  |  |    Packet    Response |
|      |  |    Response  Packet   |
|      |  |      |         |      |
+-DGM->+ Timeout |         |   Final timeout
|         |      |         |      |

+V-----------+ | +-----------+ | Awaiting |----+ | Receiving |->Response-+ | Response |->Response->| Response | | | | (multi- | |<----------+ +-|--------^-+ packet) +----------^+

 V        |                |        |
 +-Timeout+                +>Timeout+
             Figure 4-1:   Client State Transitions

User Interface

The RPC or user interface to VMTP is implementation-dependent and may use systems calls, functions or some other mechanism. The list of requests that follow is intended to suggest the basic functionality that should be available.

Send( mcb, timeout, segptr, segsize )

            Initiate a message transaction to the server and request
            message specified by mcb and return a response in mcb,
            if it is received within the specified timeout period
            (or else return USER_TIMEOUT in the Code field).  The
            segptr parameter specifies the location from which the
            segment data is sent and the location into which the
            response data is to be delivered.  The segsize field
            indicates the maximum length of this area.

GetResponse( responsemcb, timeout, segptr, segsize )

            Get the next response sent to this client as part of the
            current message transaction, returning the segment data,
            if any, into the memory specified by segptr and segsize.

This interface assumes that there is a client entity associated with the invoking process that is to be used with these operations. Otherwise, the client entity must be specified as an additional parameter.

Cheriton [page 52]

Event Processing

The following events may occur in the VMTP client:

- User Requests

    * Send
    * GetResponse

- Packet Arrival

    * Response Packet
    * Request
 The minimal Client implementation handles Request packets for
 its VMTP management (server) module and sends NotifyVmtpClient
 requests in response to others, indicating the specified
 server does not exist.

- Management Operation - NotifyVmtpClient

- Timeouts

    * Client Retransmission Timeout

The handling of these events is described in detail in the following subsections.

We first describe some conventions and procedures used in the description. A field of the received packet is indicated as (for example) p.Transaction, for the Transaction field. Optional portions of the code, such as the streaming handling code are prefixed with a "|" in the first column.

MapClient( client )

            Return pointer to CSR for client with the specified
            clientId, else NULL.

SendPacketGroup( csr )

            Send the packet group (Request, Response) according to
            that specified by the CSR.

NotifyClient( csr, p, code )

            Invoke the NotifyVmtpClient operation with the
            parameters csr.RemoteClient, p.control,

Cheriton [page 53]

            csr.ReceiveSeqNumber, csr.RemoteTransaction and
            csr.RemoteDelivery, and code.  If csr is NULL, use
            p.Client, p.Transaction and p.PacketDelivery instead and
            the global ReceiveSequenceNumber, if supported.  This
            function simplifies the description over calling
            NotifyVmtpClient directly in the procedural
            specification below.  (See Appendix III.)

NotifyServer( csr, p, code )

            Invoke the NotifyVmtpServer operation with the
            parameters p.Server, csr.LocalClient,
            csr.LocalTransaction, csr.LocalDelivery and code.  Use
            p.Client, P.Transaction and 0 for the clientId, transact
            and delivery parameters if csr is NULL.  This function
            simplifies the description over calling NotifyVmtpServer
            directly in the procedural specification below.  (See
            Appendix III.)

DGMset(p) True if DGM bit set in packet (or csr) else False.

            (Similar functions are used for other bits.)

Timeout( csr, timeperiod, func )

            Set or reset timer on csr record for timeperiod later
            and invoke func if the timeout expires.

Client User-invoked Events

A user event occurs when a VMTP user application invokes one of the VMTP interface procedures.

Send

Send( mcb, timeout, segptr, segsize )

map to main CSR for this client.
increment csr.LocalTransaction
Init csr and check parameters and segment if any.
Set SDA if sending appended data.
Flush queued replies from previous transaction, if any.
if local non-group server then
    deliver locally
    await response
    return
if GroupId(server) then
    Check for and deliver to local members.
    if CRE request and non-group local CR entity then

Cheriton [page 54]

       await response
       return
    endif
    set MDG if member of this group.
endif
clear csr.RetransCount
set csr.TransmissionMask
set csr.TimeLimit to timeout
set csr.HostAddr for csr.Server
SendPacketGroup( csr )
if DGMset(csr) then
   return
endif
set csr.State to AwaitingResponse
Timeout( rootcsr, TC1(csr.Server), LocalClientTimeout )
return

end Send

Notes:

1. Normally, the HostAddr is extracted from the ServerHost

  cache, which maps server entity identifiers to host
  addresses.  However, on cache miss, the client first queries
  the network using the ProbeEntity operation, as specified in
  Appendix III, determining the host address from the Response.
  The ProbeEntity operation is handled as a separate message
  transaction by the Client.

The stream interface incorporates a parameter to pass a responseHandler procedure that is invoked when the message transaction completes.

StreamSend( mcb, timeout, segptr, segsize, responseHandler )

map to main CSR for this client.

| Allocate a new csr if root in use. | lastcsr := First csr for last request. | if STIset(lastcsr) | csr.LocalTransaction := lastcsr.LocalTransaction + 256 | else | csr.LocalTransaction := lastcsr.LocalTransaction + 1

Init csr and check parameters and segment if any.
. . . ( rest is the same as for the normal Send)

Notes:

1. Each outstanding message transaction is represented by a CSR

  queued on the root CSR for this client entity.  The root CSR
  is used to handle timeouts, etc.  On timeout, the last packet

Cheriton [page 55]

  from the last packet group is retransmitted (with or without
  the segment data).

GetResponse

GetResponse( req, timeout, segptr, segsize )

csr := CurrentCSR;
if responses queued then return next response
  (in req, segptr to max of segsize )
if timeout is zero then return KERNEL_TIMEOUT error
set state to AWAITING_RESPONSE
Timeout( csr, timeout, ReturnKernelTimeout );

end GetResponse

Notes:

1. GetResponse is only used with multicast Requests, which is

  the only case in which multiple (different) Responses should
  be received.

2. A response must remain queued until the next message

  transaction is invoked to filter out duplicates of this
  response.

3. If the response is incomplete (only relevant if a

  multi-packet response), then the client may wait for the
  response to be fully received, including issuing requests for
  retransmission (using NotifyVmtpServer operations) before
  returning the response.

4. As an optimization, a response may be stored in the CSR of

  the client.  In this case, the response must be transferred
  to a separate buffer (for duplicate suppression) before
  waiting for another response.  Using this optimization, a
  response buffer is not allocated in the common case of the
  client receiving only one response.

Packet Arrival

In general, on packet reception, a packet is mapped to the client state record, decrypted if necessary using the key in the CSR. It then has its checksum verified and then is transformed to the right byte order. The packet is then processed fully relative to its packet function code. It is discarded immediately if it is addressed to a different domain than the domain(s) in which the receiving host participates.

Cheriton [page 56]

For each of the 2 packet types, we assume a procedure called with a pointer p to the VMTP packet and psize, the size of the packet in octets. Thus, generic packet reception is:

if not LocalDomain(p.Domain) then return;

csr := MapClient( p.Client )

if csr is NULL then

HandleNoCsr( p, psize )
return

if Secure(p) then

if SecureVMTP not supported then
    { Assume a Request. }
    if not Multicast(p) then
        NotifyClient(NULL, p, SECURITY_NOT_SUPPORTED )
    return
endif

| Decrypt( csr.Key, p, psize )

if p.Checksum not null then

if not VerifyChecksum(p, psize) then return;

if OppositeByteOrder(p) then ByteSwap( p, psize ) if psize not equal sizeof(VmtpHeader) + 4*p.Length then

NotifyClient(NULL, p, VMTP_ERROR )
return

Invoke Procedure[p.FuncCode]( csr, p, psize ) Discard packet and return

Notes:

1. The Procedure[p.FuncCode] refers to one of the 2 procedures

  corresponding to the two different packet types of VMTP,
  Requests and Responses.

2. In all the following descriptions, a packet is discarded on

  "return" unless otherwise stated.

3. The procedure HandleNoCSR is a management routine that

  allocates and initializes a CSR and processes the packet or
  else sends an error indication to the sender of the packet.
  This procedure is described in greater detail in Section
  4.8.1.

Cheriton [page 57]

Response

This procedure handles incoming Response packets.

HandleResponse( csr, p, psize )

if not LocalClient( csr ) then
    if Multicast then return

| if Migrated( p.Client ) then | NotifyServer(csr, p ENTITY_MIGRATED ) | else

        NotifyServer(csr, p, ENTITY_NOT_HERE )
    return
endif
if NSRset(p) then
    if Streaming not supported then
        NotifyServer(csr, p, STREAMING_NOT_SUPPORTED )
        return STREAMED_RESPONSE

| Find csr corresponding to p.Transaction | if none found then | NotifyServer(csr, p, BAD_TRANSACTION_ID ) | return

 else
  if csr.LocalTransaction not equal p.Transaction then
    NotifyServer(csr, p, BAD_TRANSACTION_ID )
    return
endif
Locate reply buffer rb for this p.Server
if found then
    if rb.State is not ReceivingResponse then
      { Duplicate }
        if APGset(p) or NERset(p) then
            { Send Response to stop response packets. }
            NotifyServer(csr, p, RESPONSE_DISCARDED )
        endif
        return
     endif
     { rb.State is ReceivingRequest}
     if new segment data then retain in CSR segment area.
     if packetgroup not complete then
         Timeout( rb, TC3(p.Server), LocalClientTimeout )
         return;
      endif
      goto EndPacketGroup
endif
{ Otherwise, a new response message. }

Cheriton [page 58]

if (NSRset(p) or NERset(p)) and NoStreaming then
    NotifyServer(csr, p, VMTP_ERROR )
    return

| if NSRset(p) then | { Check consecutive with previous packet group } | Find last packet group CSR from p.Server. | if p.Transaction not | lastcsr.RemoteTransaction+1 mod 2**32 then | { Out of order packet group } | NotifyServer(csr, p, BAD_TRANSACTION_ID) | return | endif | if lastcsr not completed then | NotifyServer(lastcsr, p, RETRY ) | endif | if CMG(lastcsr) then | Add segment data to lastcsr Response | Notify lastcsr with new packet group. | Clear lastcsr.VerifyInterval | else | if lastcsr available then | use it for this packet group | else allocate and initialize new CSR | Save message and segment data in new CSR area. | endif | else { First packet group }

    Allocate and init reply buffer rb for this response.
    if allocation fails then
        NotifyServer(csr, p, BUSY )
        return
    Set rb.State to ReceivingResponse
    Copy message and segment data to rb's segment area
     and set rb.PacketDelivery to that delivered.
    Save p.Server host address in ServerHost cache.
endif
if packetgroup not complete then
    Timeout( rb, TS1(p.Client), LocalClientTimeout )
    return;
endif

endPacketGroup:

{ We have received last packet in packet group. }
if APGset(p) then NotifyServer(csr, p, OK )

| if NERset(p) and CMGset(p) then | Queue waiting for continuation packet group. | Timeout( rb, TC2(rb.Server), LocalClientTimeout ) | return | endif

Cheriton [page 59]

{ Deliver response message. }
Deliver response to Client, or queue as appropriate.

end HandleResponse

Notes:

1. The mechanism for handling streaming is optional and can be

  replaced with the tests for use of streaming.  Note that the
  server should never stream at the Client unless the Client
  has streamed at the Server or has used the STI control bit.
  Otherwise, streamed Responses are a protocol error.

2. As an optimization, a Response can be stored into the CSR for

  the Client rather than allocating a separate CSR for a
  response buffer.  However, if multiple responses are handled,
  the code must be careful to perform duplicate detection on
  the Response stored there as well as those queued.  In
  addition, GetResponse must create a queued version of this
  Response before allowing it to be overwritten.

3. The handling of Group Responses has been omitted for brevity.

  Basically, a Response is accepted if there has been a Request
  received locally from the same Client and same Transaction
  that has not been responded to.  In this case, the Response
  is delivered to the Server or queued.

Cheriton [page 60]

Management Operations

VMTP uses management operations (invoked as remote procedure calls) to effectively acknowledge packet groups and request retransmissions. The following routine is invoked by the Client's management module on request from the Server.

NotifyVmtpClient( clientId,ctrl,receiveSeqNumber,transact,delivery,code)

Get csr for clientId
if none then return
if RemoteClient( csr ) and not NotifyVmtpRemoteClient then
   return

| else (for streaming) | Find csr with same LocalTransaction as transact | if csr is NULL then return

if csr.State not AwaitingResponse then return
if ctrl.PGcount then ack previous packet groups.
select on code
  case OK:
    Notify ack'ed segment blocks from delivery
    Clear csr.RetransCount;
    Timeout( csr, TC1(csr.Server), LocalClientTimeout )
    return
  case RETRY:
    Set csr.TransmissionMask to missing segment blocks,
        as specified by delivery
    SendPacketGroup( csr )
    Timeout( csr, TC1(csr.Server), LocalClientTimeout )
  case RETRY_ALL
    Set csr.TransmissionMask to retransmit all blocks.
    SendPacketGroup( csr )
    Timeout( csr, TC1(csr.Server), LocalClientTimeout )

| if streaming then | Restart transmission of packet groups, | starting from transact+1

     return
  case BUSY:
     if csr.TimeLimit exceeded then
         Set csr.Code to USER_TIMEOUT
         return Response to application
         return;
    Set csr.TransmissionMask for full retransmission
    Clear csr.RetransCount
    Timeout( csr, TC1(csr.Server), LocalClientTimeout )
    return
  case ENTITY_MIGRATED:
    Get new host address for entity

Cheriton [page 61]

    Set csr.TransmissionMask for full retransmission
    Clear csr.RetransCount
    SendPacketGroup( csr )
    Timeout( csr, TC1(csr.Server), LocalClientTimeout )
    return
  case STREAMING_NOT_SUPPORTED:
    Record that server does not support streaming
    if CMG(csr) then forget this packet group
    else resend Request as separate packet group.
    return
  default:
     Set csr.Code to code
     return Response to application
     return;
endselect

end NotifyVmtpClient

Notes:

1. The delivery parameter indicates the segment blocks received

  by the Server.  That is, a 1 bit in the i-th position
  indicates that the i-th segment block in the segment data of
  the Request was received.  All subsequent NotifyVmtpClient
  operations for this transaction should be set to acknowledge
  a superset of the segment blocks in this packet.  In
  particular, the Client need not be prepared to retransmit the
  segment data once it has been acknowledged by a Notify
  operation.

HandleNoCSR

HandleNoCSR is called when a packet arrives for which there is no CSR matching the client field of the packet.

HandleNoCSR( p, psize )

if Secure(p) then
    if SecureVMTP not supported then
        { Assume a Request }
        if not Multicast(p) then
            NotifyClient(NULL,p,SECURITY_NOT_SUPPORTED)
        return
    endif
    HandleRequestNoCSR( p, psize )
    return
endif

Cheriton [page 62]

if p.Checksum not null then
    if not VerifyChecksum(p, psize) then return;
if OppositeByteOrder(p) then ByteSwap( p, psize )
if psize not equal sizeof(VmtpHeader) + 4*p.Length then
    NotifyClient(NULL, p, VMTP_ERROR )
    return
if p.FuncCode is Response then

| if Migrated( p.Client ) then | NotifyServer(csr, p ENTITY_MIGRATED ) | else

        NotifyServer(csr, p, NONEXISTENT_ENTITY )
    return
endif
if p.FuncCode is Request then
   HandleRequestNoCSR( p, psize )
return

end HandleNoCSR

Notes:

1. The node need only check to see if the client entity has

  migrated if in fact it supports migration of entities.

2. The procedure HandleRequestNoCSR is specified in Section

  5.8.1.  In the minimal client version, it need only handle
  Probe requests and can do so directly without allocating a
  new CSR.

Cheriton [page 63]

Timeouts

A client with a message transaction in progress has a single timer corresponding to the first unacknowledged request message. (In the absence of streaming, this request is also the last request sent.) This timeout is handled as follows:

LocalClientTimeout( csr )

 select on csr.State
case AwaitingResponse:
  if csr.RetransCount > MaxRetrans(csr.Server) then
         terminate Client's message transactions up to
         and including the current message transaction.
         set return code to KERNEL_TIMEOUT
      return
  increment csr.RetransCount
  Resend current packet group with APG set.
  Timeout( csr, TC2(csr.Server), LocalClientTimeout )
  return
case ReceivingResponse:
  if DGMset(csr) or csr.RetransCount > Max then
     if MDMset(csr) then
        Set MCB.MsgDeliveryMask to blocks received.
     else
        Set csr.Code to BAD_REPLY_SEGMENT
     return to user Client
  endif
  increment csr.RetransCount
  NotifyServer with RETRY
  Timeout( csr, TC3(csr.Server), LocalClientTimeout )
  return
 end select

end LocalClientTimeout

Notes:

1. A Client can only request retransmission of a Response if the

  Response is not idempotent.  If idempotent, it must
  retransmit the Request.  The Server should generally support
  the MsgDeliveryMask for Requests that it treats as idempotent
  and that require multi-packet Responses.  Otherwise, there is
  no selective retransmission for idempotent message
  transactions.

2. The current packet group is the last one transmitted. Thus,

  with streaming, there may be several packet groups
  outstanding that precede the current packet group.

Cheriton [page 64]

3. The Request packet group should be retransmitted without the

  segment data, resulting in a single short packet in the
  retransmission.  The Server must then send a
  NotifyVmtpClient with a RETRY or RETRY_ALL code to get the
  segment data transmitted as needed.  This strategy minimizes
  the overhead on the network and the server(s) for
  retransmissions.

Cheriton [page 65]

Server Protocol Operation

This section describes the operation of the server portion of the protocol in terms of the procedures for handling VMTP user events, packet reception events and timeout events. Each server is assumed to implement the client procedures described in the previous chapter. (This is not strictly necessary but it simplifies the exposition.)

Remote Client State Record Fields

The CSR for a server is extended with the following fields, in addition to the ones listed for the client version.

RemoteClient Identifier for remote client that sent the Request that

            this CSR is handling.

RemoteClientLink

            Link to next CSR hashing to same hash index in the
            ClientMap.

RemoteTransaction

            Transaction identifier for Request from remote client.

RemoteDelivery The segment blocks received so far as part of a Request

            or yet to be acknowledged as part of a Response.

VerifyInterval Time interval since there was confirmation that the

            remote Client was still valid.

RemotePrincipal Account identification, possibly including key and key

            timeout for secure communication.

Remote Client Protocol States

A CSR in the server end is in one of the following states.

AwaitingRequest Waiting for a Request packet group. It may be marked as

            waiting on a specific Client, or on any Client.

ReceivingRequest

            Waiting to receive additional Request packets in a
            multi-packet group Request.

Responded The Response has been sent and the CSR is timing out,

            providing duplicate suppression and retransmission (if

Cheriton [page 66]

            the Response was not idempotent).

ResponseDiscarded

            Response has been acknowledged or has timed out so
            cannot be retransmitted.  However, duplicates are still
            filtered and CSR can be reused for new message
            transaction.

Processing Executing on behalf of the Client.

Forwarded The message transaction has been forwarded to another

            Server that is to respond directly to the Client.

State Transition Diagrams

The CSR state transitions in the server are illustrated in Figure 5-1. The CSR generally starts in the AwaitingRequest state. On receipt of a Request, the Server either has an up-to-date CSR for the Client or else it sends a Probe request (as a separate VMTP message transaction) to the VMTP management module associated with the Client. In the latter case, the processing of the Request is delayed until a Response to the Probe request is received. At that time, the CSR information is brought up to date and the Request is processed. If the Request is a single-packet request, the CSR is then set in the Processing state to handle the request. Otherwise (a multi-packet Request), the CSR is put into the ReceivingResponse state, waiting to receive subsequent Request packets that constitute the Request message. It exits the ReceivingRequest state on timeout or on receiving the last Request packet. In the former case, the request is delivered with an indication of the portion received, using the MsgDelivery field if MDM is set. After request processing is complete, either the Response is sent and the CSR enters the Responded state or the message transaction is forwarded and the CSR enters the Forwarded state.

In the Responded state, if the Response is not marked as idempotent, the Response is retransmitted on receipt of a retransmission of the corresponding Request, on receipt of a NotifyVmtpServer operation requesting retransmission or on timeout at which time APG is set, requesting an acknowledgment from the Client. The Response is retransmitted some maximum number of times at which time the Response is discarded and the CSR is marked accordingly. If a Request or a NotifyVmtpServer operation is received expecting retransmission of the Response after the CSR has entered the ResponseDiscarded state, a NotifyVmtpClient operation is sent back (or invoked in the Client management module) indicating that the response was discarded unless the Request was multicast, in which case no action is taken. After a

Cheriton [page 67]

 (Retransmit Forwarded Request and NotifyVmtpClient)
                Request/
                Ack/
               +Timeout+
               V       |
             +-|-------^-+
             |           |
      +-Time-| Forwarded |<-------------+
      |  out +-----------+              |
      |                                 |
      |          (Retransmit Response)  |
      |                      Request    |
      V                      Ack        |
      |                    +-Timeout-+  |
      |                    V         |  |
    +---------+ Ack/ +|---------^+ |
+-Time-|Response |<-Timeout--| Responded | |
|  out |Discarded|           +----^------+ |
|      +---------+                |        |
|  +------------+                 |        |
|  |            |->-Send Response-+        |
|  |            |->-forward Request--------+
+->| Processing |<----------------------+
|  |            |<----------------+     |
|  |            |<---|            |     |
|  +-|--------^-+    |          Last    |
| Receive     |      |          Request |
|    |   Timeout   Single       Packet  |
|    |        |    Packet         |   Timeout
|    |        |    Request        ^     ^
|    |        |      ^           +|-----|--+
|  +-V--------|-+    |           |Receiving|<-+Time
+->|  Awaiting  |->--+->Request->| Request |--+ out
|  Request   |    |  (multi-  +---------+
+------|-----+    ^  packet)
    Request       |
       |        Response
  Send Probe     to
       |        Probe
   +---V----+     |
   |Awaiting|     ^
   |Response|-->--+
   |to Probe|
   +--------+
         Figure 5-1:   Remote Client State Transitions

timeout corresponding to the time required to filter out duplicates, the

Cheriton [page 68]

CSR returns either to the AwaitingRequest state or to the Processing state. Note that "Ack" refers to acknowledgment by a Notify operation.

A Request that is forwarded leaves the CSR in the Forwarded state. In the Forwarded state, the forwarded Request is retransmitted periodically, expecting NotifyRemoteClient operations back from the Server to which the Request was forwarded, analogous to the Client behavior in the AwaitingResponse state. In this state, a NotifyRemoteClient from this Server acknowledges the Request or asks that it be retransmitted or reports an error. A retransmission of the Request from the Client causes a NotifyVmtpClient to be returned to the Client if APG is set. The CSR leaves the Forwarded state after timing out in the absence of NotifyRemoteClient operations from the forward Server or on receipt of a NotifyRemoteClient operation indicating the forward Server has sent a Response and received an acknowledgement. It then enters the ResponseDiscarded state.

Receipt of a new Request from the same Client aborts the current transaction, independent of its state, and initiates a new transaction unless the new Request is part of a run of message transactions. If it is part of a run of message transactions, the handling follows the state diagram except the new Request is not Processed until there has been a response sent to the previous transaction.

User Interface

The RPC or user interface to VMTP is implementation-dependent and may use systems calls, functions or some other mechanism. The list of requests that follow is intended to suggest the basic functionality that should be available.

AcceptMessage( reqmcb, segptr, segsize, client, transid, timeout )

            Accept a new Request message in the specified reqmcb
            area, placing the segment data, if any, in the area
            described by segptr and segsize.  This returns the
            Server in the entityId field of the reqmcb and actual
            segment size in the segsize parameters.  It also returns
            the Client and Transaction for this message transaction
            in the corresponding parameters.  This procedure
            supports message semantics for request processing.  When
            a server process executes this call, it blocks until a
            Request message has been queued for the server.
            AcceptMessage returns after the specified timeout period
            if a message has not been received by that time.

RespondMessage( responsemcb, client, transid, segptr )

Cheriton [page 69]

            Respond to the client with the specified response
            message and segment, again with message semantics.

RespondCall( responsemcb, segptr )

            Respond to the client with the specified response
            message and segment, with remote procedure call
            semantics.  This procedure does not return.  The
            lightweight process that executes this procedure is
            matched to a stack, program counter, segment area and
            priority from the information provided in a
            ModifyService call, as specified in Appendix III.

ForwardMessage( requestmcb, transid, segptr, segsize, forwardserver )

            Forward the client to the specified forwardserver with
            the request specified in mcb.

ForwardCall( requestmcb, segptr, segsize, forwardserver )

            Forward the client transaction to the specified
            forwardserver with the request specified by requestmcb.
            This procedure does not return.

GetRemoteClientId()

            Return the entityId for the remote client on whose
            behave the process is executing.  This is only
            applicable in the procedure call model of request
            handling.

GetForwarder( client )

            Return the entity that forwarded this Request, if any.

GetProcess( client )

            Return an identifier for the process associated with
            this client entity-id.

GetPrincipal( client )

            Return the principal associated with this client
            entity-id.

Event Processing

The following events may occur in VMTP servers.

- User Requests

    * Receive

Cheriton [page 70]

    * Respond
    * Forward
    * GetForwarder
    * GetProcess
    * GetPrincipal

- Packet Arrival

    * Request Packet

- Management Operations

    * NotifyVmtpServer

- Timeouts

    * Client State Record Timeout

The handling of these events is described in detail in the following subsections. The conventions of the previous chapter are followed, including the use of the various subroutines in the description.

Server User-invoked Events

A user event occurs when a VMTP server invokes one of the VMTP interface procedures.

Receive

AcceptMessage(reqmcb, segptr, segsize, client, transid, timeout)

Locate server's request queue.
if request is queued then
    Remember CSR associated with this Request.
    return Request in reqmcb, segptr and segsize
           and client and transaction id.
Wait on server's request queue for next request
up time timeout seconds.

end ReceiveCall

Notes:

Cheriton [page 71]

1. If a multi-packet Request is partially received at the time

  of the AcceptMessage, the process waits until it completes.

2. The behavior of a process accepting a Request as a

  lightweight thread is similar except that the process
  executes using the Request data logically as part of the
  requesting Client process.

Respond

RespondCall is described as one case of the Respond transmission procedure; RespondMessage is similar.

RespondCall( responsemcb, responsesegptr )

Locate csr for this client.
Check segment data accessible, if any
if local client then
    Handle locally
    return
endif
if responsemcb.Code is RESPONSE_DISCARDED then
    Mark as RESPONSE_DISCARDED
    return
SendPacketGroup( csr )
set csr.State to Responded.
if DGM reply then { Idempotent }
    release segment data
    Timeout( csr, TS4(csr.Client), FreeCsr );
else { Await acknowledgement or new Request else ask for ack. }
    Timeout( csr, TS5(csr.Client), RemoteClientTimeout )

end RespondCall

Notes:

1. RespondMessage is similar except the Server process must be

  synchronized with the release of the segment data (if any).

2. The non-idempotent Response with segment data is sent first

  without a request for an acknowledgement.  The Response is
  retransmitted after time TS5(client) if no acknowledgment or
  new Request is received from the client in the meantime.  At
  this point, the APG bit is sent.

3. The MCB of the Response is buffered in the client CSR, which

  remains for TS4 seconds, sufficient to filter old duplicates.
  The segment data (if any) must be retained intact until:  (1)

Cheriton [page 72]

  after transmission if idempotent or (2) after acknowledged or
  timeout has occurred if not idempotent.  Techniques such as
  copy-on-write might be used to keep a copy of the Response
  segment data without incurring the cost of a copy.

Forward

Forwarding is logically initiating a new message transaction between the Server (now acting as a Client) and the server to which the Request is forwarded. When the second server returns a Response, the same Response is immediately returned to the Client. The forwarding support in VMTP preserves these semantics while providing some performance optimizations in some cases.

ForwardCall( req, segptr, segsize, forwardserver )

Locate csr for this client.
Check segment data accessible, if any
if local client or Request was multicast or secure
   or csr.ForwardCount == 15 then
    Handle as a new Send operation
    return
if forwardserver is local then
    Handle locally
    return
Set csr.funccode to Request
Increment csr.ForwardCount
Set csr.State to Responded
SendPacketGroup( csr ) { To ForwardServer }
Timeout( csr, TS4(csr.Client), FreeAlien )

end ForwardCall

Notes:

1. A Forward is logically a new call or message transaction. It

  must be really implemented as a new message transaction if
  the original Request was multicast or secure (with the
  optional further refinement that it can be used with a secure
  message transaction when the Server and ForwardServer are the
  same principal and the Request was not multicast).

2. A Forward operation is never handled as an idempotent

  operation because it requires knowledge that the
  ForwardServer will treat the forwarded operation as
  idempotent as well.  Thus, a Forward operation that includes
  a segment should set APG on the first transmission of the

Cheriton [page 73]

  forwarded Request to get an acknowledgement for this data.
  Once the acknowledgement is received, the forwarding Server
  can discard the segment data, leaving only the basic CSR to
  handle retransmissions from the Client.

Other Functions

GetRemoteClient is a simple local query of the CSR. GetProcess and GetPrincipal also extract this information from the CSR. A server module may defer the Probe callback to the Client to get that information until it is requested by the Server (assuming it is not using secure communication and duplicate suppression is adequate without callback.) GetForwarder is implemented as a callback to the Client, using a GetRequestForwarder VMTP management operation. Additional management procedures for VMTP are described in Appendix III.

Request Packet Arrival

The basic packet reception follows that described for the Client routines. A Request packet is handled by the procedure HandleRequest.

HandleRequest( csr, p, psize )

if LocalClient(csr) then
    { Forwarded Request on local Client }
    if csr.LocalTransaction != p.Transaction then return
    if csr.State != AwaitingResponse then return
    if p.ForwardCount < csr.ForwardCount then
       Discard Request and return.
    Find a CSR for Client as a remote Client.
    if not found then
        if packet group complete then
            handle as a local message transaction
            return
        Allocate and init CSR
        goto newTransaction
    { Otherwise part of current transaction }
    { Handle directly below. }n
if csr.RemoteTransaction = p.Transaction then
  { Matches current transaction }
    if OldForward(p.ForwardCount,csr.ForwardCount) then
        return
    if p.ForwardCount > csr.ForwardCount then
      { New forwarded transaction }
        goto newTransaction

Cheriton [page 74]

    { Otherwise part of current transaction }
    if csr.State = ReceivingRequest then
        if new segment data then retain in CSR segment area.
        if Request not complete then
           Timeout( csr, TS1(p.Client), RemoteClientTimeout )
           return;
        endif
        goto endPacketGroup
    endif
    if csr.State is Responded then
      { Duplicate }
        if csr.Code is RESPONSE_DISCARDED
           and Multicast(p) then
            return
        endif
        if not DGM(csr) then { Not idempotent }
            if SegmentData(csr) then set APG
            { Resend Response or Request, if Forwarded }
            SendPacketGroup( csr )
            timeout=if SegmentData(csr) then TS5(csr.Client)
                      else TS4(csr.Client)
            Timeout( csr, timeout, RemoteClientTimeout )
            return
        { Else idempotent - fall thru to newTransaction }
    else { Presume it is a retransmission }
        NotifyClient( csr, p, OK )
        return

else if OldTransaction(csr.RemoteTransact,p.Transaction) then

    return
{ Otherwise, a new message transaction. }

newTransaction:

Abort handling of previous transactions for this Client.
if (NSRset(p) or NERset(p)) and NoStreaming then
    NotifyClient( csr, p, STREAMING_NOT_SUPPORTED )
    return

| if NSRset(p) then { Streaming } | { Check that consecutive with previous packet group } | Find last packet group CSR from this client. | if p.Transaction not lastcsr.RemoteTransaction+1 mod 2**32 | and not STIset(lastcsr) or | p.Transaction not lastcsr.RemoteTransaction+256 mod **32 | then | { Out of order packet group } | NotifyClient(csr, p, BAD_TRANSACTION_ID ) | return | endif

Cheriton [page 75]

| if lastcsr not completed then | NotifyClient( lastcsr, p, RETRY ) | endif | if lastcsr available then use it for this packet group | else allocate and initialize new CSR | if CMG(lastcsr) then | Add segment data to lastcsr Request | Keep csr as record of this packet group. | Clear lastcsr.VerifyInterval | endif | else { First packet group }

    if MultipleRemoteClients(csr) then ScavengeCsrs(p.Client)
    Set csr.RemoteTransaction, csr.Priority
    Copy message and segment data to csr's segment area
     and set csr.PacketDelivery to that delivered.
    Clear csr.PacketDelivery
    Clear csr.VerifyInterval
    SaveNetworkAddress( csr, p )
endif
if packetgroup not complete then
    Timeout( csr, TS3(p.Client), RemoteClientTimeout )
    return;
endif

endPacketGroup:

{ We have received complete packet group. }
if APG(p) then NotifyClient( csr, p, OK )
endif

| if NERset(p) and CMG(p) then | Queue waiting for continuation packet group. | Timeout( csr, TS3(csr.Client), RemoteClientTimeout ) | return | endif

{ Deliver request message. }
if GroupId(csr.Server) then
    For each server identified by csr.Server
        Replicate csr and associated data segment.
        if CMDset(csr) and Server busy then
           Discard csr and data
        else
           Deliver or invoke csr for each Server.
        if not DGMset(csr) then queue for Response
        else Timeout( csr, TS4(csr.Client), FreeCsr )
    endfor
 else
   if CMDset(csr) and Server busy then
       Discard csr and data
    else

Cheriton [page 76]

       Deliver or invoke csr for this server.
    if not DGMset(csr) then queue for Response
    else Timeout( csr, TS4(csr.Client), FreeCsr )
 endif

end HandleRequest

Notes:

1. A Request received that specifies a Client that is a local

  entity should be a Request forwarded by a remote server to a
  local Server.

2. An alternative structure for handling a Request sent to a

  group when there are multiple local group members is to
  create a remote CSR for each group member on reception of the
  first packet and deliver a copy of each packet to each such
  remote CSR as each packet arrives.

Cheriton [page 77]

Management Operations

VMTP uses management operations (invoked as remote procedure calls) to effectively acknowledge packet groups and request retransmissions. The following routine is invoked by the Server's management module on request from the Client.

NotifyVmtpServer(server,clientId,transact,delivery,code)

Find csr with same RemoteTransaction and RemoteClient
as clientId and transact.
if not found or csr.State not Responded then return
if DGMset(csr) then
    if transmission of Response in progress then
        Abort transmission
        if code is migrated then
           restart transmission with new host addr.
    if Retry then Report protocol error
    return
endif
select on code
  case RETRY:
    if csr.RetransCount > MaxRetrans(clientId) then
         if response data segment then
             Discard data and mark as RESPONSE_DISCARDED

| if NERset(csr) and subsequent csr then | Deallocate csr and use later csr for | future duplicate suppression | endif

         return
    endif
    increment csr.RetransCount
    Set csr.TransmissionMask to missing segment blocks,
        as specified by delivery
    SendPacketGroup( csr )
    Timeout( csr, TS3(csr.Client), RemoteClientTimeout )
  case BUSY:
    if csr.TimeLimit exceeded then
        if response data segment then
            Discard data and mark as RESPONSE_DISCARDED

| if NERset(csr) and subsequent csr then | Deallocate csr and use later csr for | future duplicate suppression | endif

         endif
    endif
    Set csr.TransmissionMask for full retransmission
    Clear csr.RetransCount

Cheriton [page 78]

    Timeout( csr, TS3(csr.Server), RemoteClientTimeout )
    return
  case ENTITY_MIGRATED:
    Get new host address for entity
    Set csr.TransmissionMask for full retransmission
    Clear csr.RetransCount
    SendPacketGroup( csr )
    Timeout( csr, TS3(csr.Server), RemoteClientTimeout )
    return
  case default:
    Abort transmission of Response if in progress.
    if response data segment then
       Discard data and mark as RESPONSE_DISCARDED
       if NERset(csr) and subsequent csr then
           Deallocate csr and use later csr for
           future duplicate suppression
       endif
    return
endselect

end NotifyVmtpServer

Notes:

1. A NotifyVmtpServer operation requesting retransmission of

  the Response is acceptable only if the Response was not
  idempotent.  When the Response is idempotent, the Client must
  be prepared to retransmit the Request to effectively request
  retransmission of the Response.

2. A NotifyVmtpServer operation may be received while the

  Response is being transmitted.  If an error return, as an
  efficiency, the transmission should be aborted, as suggested
  when the Response is a datagram.

3. A NotifyVmtpServer operation indicating OK or an error

  allows the Server to discard segment data and not provide for
  subsequent retransmission of the Response.

HandleRequestNoCSR

When a Request is received from a Client for which the node has no CSR, the node allocates and initializes a CSR for this Client and does a callback to the Client's VMTP management module to get the Principal, Process and other information associated with this Client. It also

Cheriton [page 79]

checks that the TransactionId is correct in order to filter out duplicates.

HandleRequestNoCSR( p, psize ) | if Secure(p) then | Allocate and init CSR | SaveSourceHostAddr( csr, p ) | ProbeRemoteClient( csr, p, AUTH_PROBE ) | if no response or error then | delete CSR | return | Decrypt( csr.Key, p, psize ) | if p.Checksum not null then | if not VerifyChecksum(p, psize) then return; | if OppositeByteOrder(p) then ByteSwap( p, psize ) | if psize not equal sizeof(VmtpHeader) + 4*p.Length then | NotifyClient(NULL, p, VMTP_ERROR ) | return | HandleRequest( csr, p, psize ) | return

if Server does not exist then
    NotifyClient( csr, p, NONEXISTENT_ENTITY )
    return
endif
if security required by server then
    NotifyClient(csr, p, SECURITY_REQUIRED )
    return
endif
Allocate and init CSR
SaveSourceHostAddr( csr, p );
if server requires Authentication then
    ProbeRemoteClient( csr, p, AUTH_PROBE )
    if no response or error then
       delete CSR
       return
endif
{ Setup immediately as a new message transaction }
set csr.Server to p.Server
set csr.RemoteTransaction to p.Transaction-1
HandleRequest( csr, p, psize )
endif

Notes:

1. A Probe request is always handled as a Request not requiring

  authentication so it never generates a callback Probe to the

Cheriton [page 80]

  Client.

2. If the Server host retains remote client CSR's for longer

  than the maximum packet lifetime and the Request
  retransmission time, and the host has been running for at
  least that long, then it is not necessary to do a Probe
  callback unless the Request is secure.  A Probe callback can
  take place when the Server asks for the Process or
  PrincipalId associated with the Client.

Cheriton [page 81]

Timeouts

The server must implement a timeout for remote client CSRs. There is a timeout for each CSR in the server.

RemoteClientTimeout( csr )

 select on csr.State
case Responded:
    if RESPONSE_DISCARDED then
        mark as timed out
        Make a candidate for reuse.
        return
    if csr.RetransCount > MaxRetrans(Client) then
        discard Response
        mark CSR as RESPONSE_DISCARDED
        Timeout(csr, TS4(Client), RemoteClientTimeout)
        return
    increment csr.RetransCount
    { Retransmit Response or forwarded Request }
    Set APG to get acknowledgement.
    SendPacketGroup( csr )
    Timeout( csr, TS3(Client), RemoteClientTimeout )
    return
case ReceivingRequest:
  if csr.RetransCount > MaxRetrans(csr.Client)
     or DGMset(csr) or NRTset(csr) then
      Modify csr.segmentSize and csr.MsgDelivery
      to indicate packets received.
      if MDMset(csr) then
          Invoke processing on Request
          return
      else
          discard Request and reuse CSR
          (Note: Need not remember Request discarded.)
          return
  increment csr.RetransCount
  NotifyClient( csr, p, RETRY )
  Timeout( csr, TS3(Client), RemoteClientTimeout )
  return
default:
    Report error - invalid state for RemoteClientTimeout
endselect

end RemoteClientTimeout

Notes:

1. When a CSR in the Responded state times out after discarding

Cheriton [page 82]

  the Response, it can be made available for reuse, either by
  the same Client or a different one.  The CSR should be kept
  available for reuse by the Client for as long as possible to
  avoid unnecessary callback Probes.

Cheriton [page 83]

Concluding Remarks

This document represents a description of the current state of the VMTP design. We are currently engaged in several experimental implementations to explore and refine all aspects of the protocol. Preliminary implementations are running in the UNIX 4.3BSD kernel and in the V kernel.

Several issues are still being discussed and explored with this protocol. First, the size of the checksum field and the algorithm to use for its calculation are undergoing some discussion. The author believes that the conventional 16-bit checksum used with TCP and IP is too weak for future high-speed networks, arguing for at least a 32-bit checksum. Unfortunately, there appears to be limited theory covering checksum algorithms that are suitable for calculation in software.

Implementation of the streaming facilities of VMTP is still in progress. This facility is expected to be important for wide-area, long delay communication.

Cheriton [page 84]

I. Standard VMTP Response Codes

The following are the numeric values of the response codes used in VMTP.

0 OK

1 RETRY

2 RETRY_ALL

3 BUSY

4 NONEXISTENT_ENTITY

5 ENTITY_MIGRATED

6 NO_PERMISSION

7 NOT_AWAITING_MSG

8 VMTP_ERROR

9 MSGTRANS_OVERFLOW

10 BAD_TRANSACTION_ID

11 STREAMING_NOT_SUPPORTED

12 NO_RUN_RECORD

13 RETRANS_TIMEOUT

14 USER_TIMEOUT

15 RESPONSE_DISCARDED

16 SECURITY_NOT_SUPPORTED

17 BAD_REPLY_SEGMENT

18 SECURITY_REQUIRED

19 STREAMED_RESPONSE

20 TOO_MANY_RETRIES

21 NO_PRINCIPAL

Cheriton [page 85]

22 NO_KEY

23 ENCRYPTION_NOT_SUPPORTED

24 NO_AUTHENTICATOR

25-63 Reserved for future VMTP assignment.

Other values of the codes are available for use by higher level protocols. Separate protocol documents will specify further standard values.

Applications are free to use values starting at 0x00800000 (hex) for application-specific return values.

Cheriton [page 86]

II. VMTP RPC Presentation Protocol

For complete generality, the mapping of the procedures and the parameters onto VMTP messages should be defined by a RPC presentation protocol. In the absence of an accepted standard protocol, we define an RPC presentation protocol for VMTP as follows.

Each procedure is assigned an identifying Request Code. The Request code serves effectively the same as a tag field of variant record, identifying the format of the Request and associated Response as a variant of the possible message formats.

The format of the Request for a procedure is its Request Code followed by its parameters sequentially in the message control block until it is full.

The remaining parameters are sent as part of the message segment data formatted according to the XDR protocol (RFC ??). In this case, the size of the segment is specified in the SegmentSize field.

The Response for a procedure consists of a ResponseCode field followed by the return parameters sequentially in the message control block, except if there is a parameter returned that must be transmitted as segment data, its size is specified in the SegmentSize field and the parameter is stored in the SegmentData field.

Attributes associated with procedure definitions should indicate the Flags to be used in the RequestCode. Request Codes are assigned as described below.

II.1. Request Code Management

Request codes are divided into Public Interface Codes and application-specific, according to whether the PIC value is set. An interface is a set of request codes representing one service or module function. A public interface is one that is to be used in multiple independently developed modules. In VMTP, public interface codes are allocated in units of 256 structured as

+-------------+----------------+-------------------+
| ControlFlags|  Interface     | Version/Procedure |
+-------------+----------------+-------------------+
8 bits          16 bits              8 bits

An interface is free to allocate the 8 bits for version and procedure as desired. For example, all 8 bits can be used for procedures. A module requiring more than 256 Version/Procedure values can be allocated

Cheriton [page 87]

multiple Interface values. They need not be consecutive Interface values.

Cheriton [page 88]

III. VMTP Management Procedures

Standard procedures are defined for VMTP management, including creation, deletion and query of entities and entity groups, probing to get information about entities, and updating message transaction information at the client or the server.

The procedures are implemented by the VMTP manager that constitutes a portion of every complete VMTP module. Each procedure is invoked by sending a Request to the VMTP manager that handles the entity specified in the operation or the local manager. The Request sent using the normal Send operation with the Server specified as the well-known entity group VMTP_MANGER_GROUP, using the CoResident Entity mechanism to direct the request to the specific manager that should handle the Request. (The ProbeEntity operation is multicast to the VMTP_MANAGER_GROUP if the host address for the entity is not known locally and the host address is determined as the host address of the responder. For all other operations, a ProbeEntity operation is used to determine the host address if it is not known.) Specifying co-resident entity 0 is interpreted as the co-resident with the invoking process. The co-resident entity identifier may also specify a group in which case, the Request is sent to all managers with members in this group.

The standard procedures with their RequestCode and parameters are listed below with their semantics. (The RequestCode range 0xVV000100 to 0xVV0001FF is reserved for use by the VMTP management routines, where VV is any choice of control flags with the PIC bit set. The flags are set below as required for each procedure.)

0x05000101 - ProbeEntity(CREntity, entityId, authDomain) -> (code,

            <staterec>) 
            Request and return information on the specified entity
            in the specified authDomain, sending the Request to the
            VMTP management module coresident with CREntity.  An
            error return is given if the requested information
            cannot be provided in the specified authDomain.  The
            <staterec> returned is structured as the following
            fields.
            Transaction identifier
                            The current or next transaction
                            identifier being used by the probed
                            entity.
            ProcessId: 64 bits 
                            Identifier for client process.  The
                            meaning of this is specified as part of

Cheriton [page 89]

                            the Domain definition.
            PrincipalId     The identifier for the principal or
                            account associated with the process
                            specified by ProcessId.  The meaning of
                            this field is specified as part of the
                            Domain definition.
            EffectivePrincipalId
                            The identifier for the principal or
                            account associated with the Client port,
                            which may be different from the
                            PrincipalId especially if this is an
                            nested call.  The meaning of this field
                            is specified as part of the Domain
                            definition.
            The code field indicates whether this is an error
            response or not.  The codes and their interpretation
            are:
              OK
            No error. Probe was completed OK.
              NONEXISTENT_ENTITY
            Specified entity does not exist.
              ENTITY_MIGRATED
            The entity has migrated and is no longer at the host to
            which the request was sent.
              NO_PERMISSION
            Entity has refused to provide ProbeResponse.
              VMTP_ERROR
            The Request packet group was in error relative to the
            VMTP protocol specification.
              "default"
            Some type of error - discard ProbeResponse.

0x0D000102 - AuthProbeEntity(CREntity,entityId,authDomain,randomId) ->

            (code,ProbeAuthenticator,EncryptType,EntityAuthenticator)
            
            Request authentication of the entity specified by
            entityId from the VMTP manager coresident with CREntity
            in authDomain authentication domain, returning the

Cheriton [page 90]

            information contained in the return parameters.  The
            fields are set the same as that specified for the basic
            ProbeResponse except as noted below.
            ProbeAuthenticator
                            20 bytes consisting of the EntityId, the
                            randomId and the probed Entity's current
                            Transaction value plus a 32-bit checksum
                            for these two fields (checksummed using
                            the standard packet Checksum algorithm),
                            all encrypted with the Key supplied in
                            the Authenticator.
            EncryptType     An identifier that identifies the
                            variant of encryption method being used
                            by the probed Entity for packets it
                            transmits and packets it is able to
                            receive.  (See Appendix V.)  The
                            high-order 8 bits of the EncryptType
                            contain the XOR of the 8 octets of the
                            PrincipalId associated with private key
                            used to encrypt the EntityAuthenticator.
                            This value is used by the requestor or
                            Client as an aid in locating the key to
                            decrypt the authenticator.
            EntityAuthenticator
                            (returned as segment data) The
                            ProcessId, PrincipalId,
                            EffectivePrincipal associated with the
                            ProbedEntity plus the private
                            encryption/decryption key and its
                            lifetime limit to be used for
                            communication with the Entity.  The
                            authenticator is encrypted with a
                            private key associated with the Client
                            entity such that it can be neither read
                            nor forged by a party not trusted by the
                            Client Entity.  The format of the
                            Authenticator in the message segment is
                            shown in detail in Figure III-1.
            Key: 64 bits    Encryption key to be used for encrypting
                            and decrypting packets sent to and
                            received from the probed Entity.  This
                            is the "working" key for packet
                            transmissions.  VMTP only uses private

Cheriton [page 91]

            +-----------------------------------------------+
            |            ProcessId   (8 octets)             |
            +-----------------------------------------------+
            |           PrincipalId  (8 octets)             |
            +-----------------------------------------------+
            |           EffectivePrincipalId  (8 octets)    |
            +-----------------------------------------------+
            |            Key  (8 octets)                    |
            +-----------------------------------------------+
            |              KeyTimeLimit                     |
            +-----------------------------------------------+
            |              AuthDomain                       |
            +-----------------------------------------------+
            |               AuthChecksum                    |
            +-----------------------------------------------+
              Figure III-1:   Authenticator Format
                            key encryption for data transmission.
            KeyTimeLimit: 32 bits 
                            The time in seconds since Dec. 31st,
                            1969 GMT at which one should cease to
                            use the Key.
            AuthDomain: 32 bits 
                            The authentication domain in which to
                            interpret the principal identifiers.
                            This may be different from the
                            authDomain specified in the call if the
                            Server cannot provide the authentication
                            information in the request domain.
            AuthChecksum: 32 bits 
                            Contains the checksum (using the same
                            Checksum algorithm as for packet) of
                            KeyTimeLimit, Key, PrincipalId and
                            EffectivePrincipalId.
            Notes:
               1. A authentication Probe Request and Response
                  are sent unencrypted in general because it is
                  used prior to there being a secure channel.
                  Therefore, specific fields or groups of
                  fields checksummed and encrypted to prevent
                  unauthorized modification or forgery.  In

Cheriton [page 92]

                  particular, the ProbeAuthenticator is
                  checksummed and encrypted with the Key.
               2. The ProbeAuthenticator authenticates the
                  Response as responding to the Request when
                  its EntityId, randomId and Transaction values
                  match those in the Probe request.  The
                  ProbeAutenticator is bound to the
                  EntityAutenticator by being encrypted by the
                  private Key contained in that authenticator.
               3. The authenticator is encrypted such that it
                  can be decrypted by a private key, known to
                  the Client.  This authenticator is presumably
                  obtained from a key distribution center that
                  the Client trusts.  The AuthChecksum prevents
                  undetected modifications to the
                  authenticator.

0x05000103 - ProbeEntityBlock( entityId ) -> ( code, entityId )

            Check whether the block of 256 entity identifiers
            associated with this entityId are in use.  The entityId
            returned should match that being queried or else the
            return value should be ignored and the operation redone.

0x05000104 - QueryVMTPNode( entityId ) -> (code, MTU, flags, authdomain,

            domains, authdomains, domainlist) 
            Query the VMTP management module for entityId to get
            various module- or node-wide parameters, including:  (1)
            MTU - Maximum transmission unit or packet size handled
            by this node.  (2) flags- zero or more of the following
            bit fields:
            1               Handles streamed Requests.
            2               Can issue streamed message transactions
                            for clients.
            4               Handles secure Requests.
            8               Can issue secure message transactions.
            The authdomain indicates the primary authentication
            domain supported.  The domains and authdomains
            parameters indicate the number of entity domains and
            authentication domains supported by this node, which are
            listed in the data segment parameter domainlist if

Cheriton [page 93]

            either parameter is non-zero. (All the entity domains
            precede the authentication domains in the data segment.)

0x05000105 - GetRequestForwarder( CREntity, entityId1 ) -> (code,

            entityId2, principal, authDomain) 
            Return the forwarding server's entity identifer and
            principal for the forwarder of entityId1.  CREntity
            should be zero to get the local VMTP management module.

0x05000106 - CreateEntity( entityId1 ) -> ( code, entityId2 )

            Create a new entity and return its entity identifier in
            entityId2.  The entity is created local to the entity
            specified in entityId1 and local to the requestor if
            entityId1 is 0.

0x05000107 - DeleteEntity( entityId ) -> ( code )

            Delete the entity specified by entityId, which may be a
            group.  If a group, the deletion is only on a best
            efforts basis.  The client must take additional measures
            to ensure complete deletion if required.

0x0D000108 -QueryEntity( entityId ) -> ( code, descriptor )

            Return a descriptor of entityId in arg of a maximum of
            segmentSize bytes.

0x05000109 - SignalEntity( entityId, arg )->( code )

            Send the signal specified by arg to the entity specified
            by entityId.  (arg is 32 bits.)

0x0500010A - CreateGroup(CREntity,entityGroupId,entityId,perms)->(code)

            Request that the VMTP manager local to CREntity create
            an new entity group, using the specified entityGroupId
            with entityId as the first member and permissions
            "perms", a 32-bit field described later.  The invoker is
            registered as a manager of the new group, giving it the
            permissions to add or remove members.  (Normally
            CREntity is 0, indicating the VMTP manager local to the
            requestor.)

0x0500010B - AddToGroup(CREntity, entityGroupId, entityId,

            perms)->(code) 
            Request that the VMTP manager local to CREntity add the
            specified entityId to the entityGroupId with the
            specified permissions.  If entityGroupId specifies a
            restricted group, the invoker must have permission to
            add members to the group, either because the invoker is

Cheriton [page 94]

            a manager of the group or because it was added to the
            group with the required permissions.  If CREntity is 0,
            then the local VMTP manager checks permissions and
            forwards the request with CREntity set to entityId and
            the entityId field set to a digital signature (see
            below) of the Request by the VMTP manager, certifying
            that the Client has the permissions required by the
            Request.  (If entityGroupId specifies an unrestricted
            group, the Request can be sent directly to the handling
            VMTP manager by setting CREntity to entityId.)

0x0500010C - RemoveFromGroup(CREntity, entityGroupId, entityId)->(code)

            Request that the VMTP manager local to CREntity remove
            the specified entityId from the group specified by
            entityGroupId.  Normally CREntity is 0, indicating the
            VMTP manager local to the requestor.  If CREntity is 0,
            then the local VMTP manager checks permissions and
            forwards the request with CREntity set to entityId and
            the entityId field a digital signature of the Request by
            the VMTP manager, certifying that the Client has the
            permissions required by the Request.

0x0500010D - QueryGroup( entityId )->( code, record )...

            Return information on the specified entity.  The
            Response from each responding VMTP manager is (code,
            record).  The format of the record is (memberCount,
            member1, member2, ...).  The Responses are returned on a
            best efforts basis; there is no guarantee that responses
            from all managers with members in the specified group
            will be received.

0x0500010E - ModifyService(entityId,flags,count,pc,threadlist)->(code,

            count) 
            Modify the service associated with the entity specified
            by entityId.  The flags may indicate a message service
            model, in which case the call "count" parameter
            indicates the maximum number of queued messages desired;
            the return "count" parameter indicates the number of
            queued message allowed.  Alternatively, the "flags"
            parameters indicates the RPC thread service model, in
            which case "count" threads are requested, each with an
            inital program counter as specified and stack, priority
            and message receive area indicated by the threadlist.
            In particular, "threadlist" consists of "count" records
            of the form
            (priority,stack,stacksize,segment,segmentsize), each one
            assigned to one of the threads.  Flags defined for the

Cheriton [page 95]

            "flags" parameter are:
            1               THREAD_SERVICE - otherwise the message
                            model.
            2               AUTHENTICATION_REQUIRED - Sent a Probe
                            request to determine principal
                            associated with the Client, if not
                            known.
            4               SECURITY_REQUIRED - Request must be
                            encrypted or else reject.
            8               INCREMENTAL - treat the count value as
                            an increment (or decrement) relative to
                            the current value rather than an
                            absolute value for the maximum number of
                            queued messages or threads.
            In the thread model, the count must be a positive
            increment or else 0, which disables the service.  Only a
            count of 0 terminates currently queued requests or
            in-progress request handling.

0x4500010F -

            NotifyVmtpClient(client,cntrl,recSeq,transact,delivery,code)->()
            
            Update the state associated with the transaction
            specified by client and transact, an entity identifier
            and transaction identifier, respectively.  This
            operation is normally used only by another VMTP
            management module.  (Note that it is a datagram
            operation.)  The other parameters are as follows:
            ctrl            A 32-bit value corresponding to 4th
                            32-bit word of the VMTP header of a
                            Response packet that would be sent in
                            response to the Request that this is
                            responding to.  That is, the control
                            flags, ForwardCount, RetransmitCount and
                            Priority fields match those of the
                            Request.  (The NRS flag is set if the
                            receiveSeqNumber field is used.)  The
                            PGCount subfield indicates the number of
                            previous Request packet groups being
                            acknowledged by this Notify operation.
                            (The bit fields that are reserved in

Cheriton [page 96]

                            this word in the header are also
                            reserved here and must be zero.)
            recSeq          Sequence number of reception at the
                            Server if the NRS flag is set in the
                            ctrl parameter, otherwise reserved and
                            zero.  (This is used for sender-based
                            logging of message activity for replay
                            in case of failure - an optional
                            facility.)
            delivery        Indicates the segment blocks of the
                            packet group have been received at the
                            Server.
            code            indicates the action the client should
                            take, as described below.
            The VMTP management module should take action on this
            operation according to the code, as specified below.
            OK              Do nothing at this time, continue
                            waiting for the response with a reset
                            timer.
            RETRY           Retransmit the request packet group
                            immediately with at least the segment
                            blocks that the Server failed to
                            receive, the complement of those
                            indicated by the delivery parameter.
            RETRY_ALL       Retransmit the request packet group
                            immediately with at least the segment
                            blocks that the Server failed to
                            receive, as indicated by the delivery
                            field plus all subsequently transmitted
                            packets that are part of this packet
                            run.  (The latter is applicable only for
                            streamed message transactions.)
            BUSY            The server was unable to accept the
                            Request at this time.  Retry later if
                            desired to continue with the message
                            transaction.
            NONEXISTENT_ENTITY
                            Specified Server entity does not exist.

Cheriton [page 97]

            ENTITY_MIGRATED The server entity has migrated and is no
                            longer at the host to which the request
                            was sent.  The Server should attempt to
                            determine the new host address of the
                            Client using the VMTP management
                            ProbeEntity operation (described
                            earlier).
            NO_PERMISSION   Server has not authorized reception of
                            messages from this client.
            NOT_AWAITING_MSG
                            The conditional message delivery bit was
                            set for the Request packet group and the
                            Server was not waiting for it so the
                            Request packet group was discarded.
            VMTP_ERROR      The Request packet group was in error
                            relative to the VMTP protocol
                            specification.
            BAD_TRANSACTION_ID
                            Transaction identifier is old relative
                            to the transaction identifier held for
                            the Client by the Server.
            STREAMING_NOT_SUPPORTED
                            Server does not support multiple
                            outstanding message transactions from
                            the same Client, i.e. streamed message
                            transactions.
            SECURITY_NOT_SUPPORTED
                            The Request was secure and this Server
                            does not support security.
            SECURITY_REQUIRED
                            The Server is refusing the Request
                            because it was not encrypted.
            NO_RUN_RECORD   Server has no record of previous packets
                            in this run of packet groups.  This can
                            occur if the first packet group is lost
                            or if the current packet group is sent
                            significantly later than the last one
                            and the Server has discarded its client
                            state record.

Cheriton [page 98]

0x45000110 - NotifyVmtpServer(server,client,transact,delivery,code)->()

            Update the server state associated with the transaction
            specified by client and transact, an entity identifier
            and transaction identifier, respectively.  This
            operation is normally used only by another VMTP
            management module.  (Note that it is a datagram
            operation.)  The other parameters are as follows:
            delivery        Indicates the segment blocks of the
                            Response packet group that have been
                            received at the Client.
            code            indicates the action the Server should
                            take, as listed below.
            The VMTP management module should take action on this
            operation according to the code, as specified below.
            OK              Client is satisfied with Response data.
                            The Server can discard the response
                            data, if any.
            RETRY           Retransmit the Response packet group
                            immediately with at least the segment
                            blocks that the Client failed to
                            receive, as indicated by the delivery
                            parameter.  (The delivery parameter
                            indicates those segment blocks received
                            by the Client).
            RETRY_ALL       Retransmit the Response packet group
                            immediately with at least the segment
                            blocks that the Client failed to
                            receive, as indicated by the (complement
                            of) the delivery parameter.  Also,
                            retransmit all Response packet groups
                            send subsequent to the specified packet
                            group.
            NONEXISTENT_ENTITY
                            Specified Client entity does not exist.
            ENTITY_MIGRATED The Client entity has migrated and is no
                            longer at the host to which the response
                            was sent.
            RESPONSE_DISCARDED

Cheriton [page 99]

                            The Response was discarded and no longer
                            of interest to the Client.  This may
                            occur if the conditional message
                            delivery bit was set for the Response
                            packet group and the Client was not
                            waiting for it so the Response packet
                            group was discarded.
            VMTP_ERROR      The Response packet group was in error
                            relative to the VMTP protocol
                            specification.

0x41000111 -

            NotifyRemoteVmtpClient(client,ctrl,recSeq,transact,delivery,code->()
            
            The same as NotifyVmtpClient except the co-resident
            addressing is not used.  This operation is used to
            update client state that is remote when a Request is
            forwarded.

Note the use of the CRE bit in the RequestCodes to route the request to the correct VMTP management module(s) to handle the request.

III.1. Entity Group Management

An entity in a group has a set of permissions associated with its membership, controling whether it can add or remove others, whether it can remove itself, and whether others can remove it from the group. The permissions for entity groups are as follows: VMTP_GRP_MANAGER 0x00000001 { Manager of group. } VMTP_REM_BY_SELF 0x00000002 { Can be removed self. } VMTP_REM_BY_PRIN 0x00000004 { Can be rem'ed by same principal} VMTP_REM_BY_OTHE 0x00000008 { Can be removed any others. } VMTP_ADD_PRIN 0x00000010 { Can add by same principal. } VMTP_ADD_OTHE 0x00000020 { Can add any others. } VMTP_REM_PRIN 0x00000040 { Can remove same principal. } VMTP_REM_OTHE 0x00000080 { Can remove any others. }

To remove an entity from a restricted group, the invoker must have permission to remove that entity and the entity must have permissions that allow it to be removed by that entity. With an unrestricted group, only the latter condition applies.

With a restricted group, a member can only be added by another entity with the permissions to add other entities. The creator of a group is given full permissions on a group. A entity adding another entity to a

Cheriton [page 100]

group can only give the entity it adds a subset of its permissions. With unrestricted groups, any entity can add itself to the group. It can also add other entities to the group providing the entity is not marked as immune to such requests. (This is an implementation restriction that individual entities can impose.)

III.2. VMTP Management Digital Signatures

As mentioned above, the entityId field of the AddToGroup and RemoveFromGroup is used to transmit a digital signature indicating the permission for the operation has been checked by the sending kernel. The digital signature procedures have not yet been defined. This field should be set to 0 for now to indicate no signature after the CREntity parameter is set to the entity on which the operation is to be performed.

Cheriton [page 101]

IV. VMTP Entity Identifier Domains

VMTP allows for several disjoint naming domains for its endpoints. The 64-bit entity identifier is only unique and meaningful within its domain. Each domain can define its own algorithm or mechanism for assignment of entity identifiers, although each domain mechanism must ensure uniqueness, stability of identifiers and host independence.

IV.1. Domain 1

For initial use of VMTP, we define the domain with Domain identifier 1 as follows:

+-----------+----------------+------------------------+
| TypeFlags | Discriminator  |    Internet Address    |
+-----------+----------------+------------------------+
4 bits          28 bits                32 bits

The Internet address is the Internet address of the host on which this entity-id is originally allocated. The Discriminator is an arbitrary value that is unique relative to this Internet host address. In addition, the host must guarantee that this identifier does not get reused for a long period of time after it becomes invalid. ("Invalid" means that no VMTP module considers in bound to an entity.) One technique is to use the lower order bits of a 1 second clock. The clock need not represent real-time but must never be set back after a crash. In a simple implementation, using the low order bits of a clock as the time stamp, the generation of unique identifiers is overall limited to no more than 1 per second on average. The type flags were described in Section 3.1.

An entity may migrate between hosts. Thus, an implementation can heuristically use the embedded Internet address to locate an entity but should be prepared to maintain a cache of redirects for migrated entities, plus accept Notify operations indicating that migration has occurred.

Entity group identifiers in Domain 1 are structured in one of two forms, depending on whether they are well-known or dynamically allocated identifiers. A well-known entity identifier is structured as:

+-----------+----------------+------------------------+
| TypeFlags |  Discriminator |Internet Host Group Addr|
+-----------+----------------+------------------------+
4 bits          28 bits                32 bits

Cheriton [page 102]

with the second high-order bit (GRP) set to 1. This form of entity identifier is mapped to the Internet host group address specified in the low-order 32 bits. The Discriminator distinguishes group identifiers using the same Internet host group. Well-known entity group identifiers should be allocated to correspond to the basic services provided by hosts that are members of the group, not specifically because that service is provided by VMTP. For example, the well-known entity group identifier for the domain name service should contain as its embedded Internet host group address the host group for Domain Name servers.

A dynamically allocated entity identifier is structured as:

+-----------+----------------+------------------------+
| TypeFlags |  Discriminator |   Internet Host Addr   |
+-----------+----------------+------------------------+
4 bits          28 bits             32 bits

with the second high-order bit (GRP) set to 1. The Internet address in the low-order 32 bits is a Internet address assigned to the host that dynamically allocates this entity group identifier. A dynamically allocated entity group identifier is mapped to Internet host group address 232.X.X.X where X.X.X are the low-order 24 bits of the Discriminator subfield of the entity group identifier.

We use the following notation for Domain 1 entity identifiers <10> and propose it use as a standard convention.

    <flags>-<discriminator>-<Internet address>

where <flags> are [X]{BE,LE,RG,UG}[A]

X = reserved
BE = big-endian entity
LE = little-endian entity
RG = restricted group
UG = unrestricted group
A  = alias

and <discriminator> is a decimal integer and <Internet address> is in standard dotted decimal IP address notation.

Examples:

_______________

<10> This notation was developed by Steve Deering.

Cheriton [page 103]

BE-25593-36.8.0.49 is big-endian entity #25593 created on host

            36.8.0.49.

RG-1-224.0.1.0 is the well-known restricted VMTP managers group.

UG-565338-36.8.0.77 is unrestricted entity group #565338 created on host

            36.8.0.77.

LEA-7823-36.8.0.77 is a little-endian alias entity #7823 created on host

            36.8.0.77.

This notation makes it easy to communicate and understand entity identifiers for Domain 1.

The well-known entity identifiers specified to date are:

VMTP_MANAGER_GROUP RG-1-224.0.1.0

            Managers for VMTP operations.

VMTP_DEFAULT_BECLIENT BE-1-224.0.1.0

            Client entity identifier to use when a (big-endian) host
            has not determined or been allocated any client entity
            identifiers.

VMTP_DEFAULT_LECLIENT LE-1-224.0.1.0

            Client entity identifier to use when a (little-endian)
            host has not determined or been allocated any client
            entity identifiers.

Note that 224.0.1.0 is the host group address assigned to VMTP and to which all VMTP hosts belong.

Other well-known entity group identifiers will be specified in subsequent extensions to VMTP and in higher-level protocols that use VMTP.

IV.2. Domain 3

Domain 3 is reserved for embedded systems that are restricted to a single network and are independent of IP. Entity identifiers are allocated using the decentralized approach described below. The mapping of entity group identifiers is specific to the type of network being used and not defined here. In general, there should be a simple algorithmic mapping from entity group identifier to multicast address, similar to that described for Domain 1. Similarly, the values for default client identifier are specific to the type of network and not

Cheriton [page 104]

defined here.

IV.3. Other Domains

Definition of additional VMTP domains is planned for the future. Requests for allocation of VMTP Domains should be addressed to the Internet protocol administrator.

IV.4. Decentralized Entity Identifier Allocation

The ProbeEntityBlock operation may be used to determine whether a block of entity identifiers is in use. ("In use" means valid or reserved by a host for allocation.) This mechanism is used to detect collisions in allocation of blocks of entity identifiers as part of the implementation of decentralized allocation of entity identifiers. (Decentralized allocation is used in local domain use of VMTP such as in embedded systems- see Domain 3.)

Basically, a group of hosts can form a Domain or sub-Domain, a group of hosts managing their own entity identifier space or subspace, respectively. As an example of a sub-Domain, a group of hosts in Domain 1 all identified with a particular host group address can manage the sub-Domain corresponding to all entity identifiers that contain that host group address. The ProbeEntityBlock operation is used to allocate the random bits of these identifiers as follows.

When a host requires a new block of entity identifiers, it selects a new block (randomly or by some choice algorithm) and then multicasts a ProbeEntityBlock request to the members of the (sub-)Domain some R times. If no response is received after R (re)transmissions, the host concludes that it is free to use this block of identifiers. Otherwise, it picks another block and tries again.

Notes:

1. A block of 256 identifiers is specified by an entity

  identifier with the low-order 8 bits all zero.

2. When a host allocates an initial block of entity identifiers

  (and therefore does not yet have a specified entity
  identifier to use) it uses VMTP_DEFAULT_BECLIENT (if
  big-endian, else VMTP_DEFAULT_LECLIENT if little-endian) as
  its client identifier in the ProbeEntityBlock Request and a
  transaction identifier of 0.  As soon as it has allocated a
  block of entity identifiers, it should use these identifiers

Cheriton [page 105]

RFC 1045                       VMTP                        February 1988 
  for all subsequent communication.  The default client
  identifier values are defined for each Domain.

3. The set of hosts using this decentralized allocation must not

  be subject to network partitioning.  That is, the R
  transmissions must be sufficient to ensure that every host
  sees the ProbeEntityBlock request and (reliably) sends a
  response.  (A host that detects a collision can retransmit
  the response multiple times until it sees a new
  ProbeEntityBlock operation from the same host/Client up to a
  maximum number of times.)  For instance, a set of machines
  connected by a single local network may able to use this type
  of allocation.

4. To guarantee T-stability, a host must prevent reuse of a

  block of identifiers if any of the identifiers in the block
  are currently valid or have been valid less than T seconds
  previously.  To this end, a host must remember recently used
  identifiers and object to their reuse in response to a
  ProbeEntityBlock operation.

5. Care is required in a VMTP implementation to ensure that

  Probe operations cannot be discarded due to lack of buffer
  space or queued or delayed so that a response is not
  generated quickly.  This is required not only to detect
  collisions but also to provide accurate roundtrip estimates
  as part of ProbeEntity operations.

Cheriton [page 106]

V. Authentication Domains

A VMTP authentication domain defines the format and interpretation for principal identifiers and encryption keys. In particular, an authentication domain must specify a means by which principal identifiers are allocated and guaranteed unique and stable. The currently defined authentication domains are as follows (0 is reserved).

Ideally, all entities within one entity domain are also associated with one authentication domain. However, authentication domains are orthogonal to entity domains. Entities within one domain may have different authentication domains. (In this case, it is generally necessary to have some correspondence between principals in the different domains.) Also, one entity identifier may be associated with multiple authentication domains. Finally, one authentication domain may be used across multiple entity domains.

V.1. Authentication Domain 1

A principal identifier is structured as follows.

+---------------------------+------------------------+
|     Internet Address      | Local User Identifier  |
+---------------------------+------------------------+
         32 bits                    32 bits

The Internet Address may specify an individual host (such as a UNIX machine) or may specify a host group address corresponding to a cluster of machines operating under a single adminstration. In both cases, there is assumed to be an adminstration associated with the embedded Internet address that guarantees the uniqueness and stability of the User Identifier relative to the Internet address. In particular, that administration is the only one authorized to allocate principal identifiers with that Internet address prefix, and it may allocate any of these identifiers.

In authentication domain 1, the standard EncryptionQualifiers are:

0 Clear text - no encryption.

1 use 64-bit CBC DES for encryption and decryption.

V.2. Other Authentication Domains

Other authentication domains will be defined in the future as needed.

Cheriton [page 107]

VI. IP Implementation

VMTP is designed to be implemented on the DoD IP Internet Datagram Protocol (although it may also be implemented as a local network protocol directly in "raw" network packets.)

VMTP is assigned the protocol number 81.

With a 20 octet IP header and one segment block, a VMTP packet is 600 octets. By convention, any host implementing VMTP implicitly agrees to accept VMTP/IP packets of at least 600 octets.

VMTP multicast facilities are designed to work with, and have been implemented using, the multicast extensions to the Internet [8] described in RFC 966 and 988. The wide-scale use of full VMTP/IP depends on the availability of IP multicast in this form.

Cheriton [page 108]

VII. Implementation Notes

The performance and reliability of a protocol in operation is highly dependent on the quality of its implementation, in addition to the "intrinsic" quality of the protocol design. One of the design goals of the VMTP effort was to produce an efficiently implementable protocol. The following notes and suggestions are based on experience with implementing VMTP in the V distributed system and the UNIX 4.3 BSD kernel. The following is described for a client and server handling only one domain. A multi-domain client or server would replicate these structures for each domain, although buffer space may be shared.

VII.1. Mapping Data Structures

The ClientMap procedure is implemented using a hash table that maps to the Client State Record whether this entity is local or remote, as shown in Figure VII-1.

         +---+---+--------------------------+
ClientMap   |   | x |                          |
         +---+-|-+--------------------------+
               |   +--------------+    +--------------+
               +-->| LocalClient  |--->| LocalClient  |
                   +--------------+    +--------------+
                   | RemoteClient |    | RemoteClient |-> ...
                   +--------------+    +--------------+
                   |              |    |              |
                   |              |    |              |
                   +--------------+    +--------------+
        Figure VII-1:   Mapping Client Identifier to CSR

Local clients are linked through the LocalClientLink, similarly for the RemoteClientLink. Once a CSR with the specified Entity Id is found, some field or flag indicates whether it is identifying a local or remote Entity. Hash collisions are handled with the overflow pointers LocalClientLink and RemoteClientLink (not shown) in the CSR for the LocalClient and RemoteClient fields, respectively. Note that a CSR representing an RPC request has both a local and remote entity identifier mapping to the same CSR.

The Server specified in a Request is mapped to a server descriptor using the ServerMap (with collisions handled by the overflow pointer.). The server descriptor is the root of a queue of CSR's for handling requests plus flags that modify the handling of the Request. Flags include:

Cheriton [page 109]

             +-------+---+-------------------------+
 ServerMap      |       | x |                         |
             +-------+-|-+-------------------------+
                       |   +--------------+
                       |   | OverflowLink |
                       |   +--------------+
                       +-->|   Server     |
                           +--------------+
                           | Flags | Lock |
                           +--------------+
                           | Head Pointer |
                           +--------------+
                           | Tail Pointer |
                           +--------------+
           Figure VII-2:   Mapping Server Identifiers

THREAD_QUEUE Request is to be invoked directly as a remote procedure

            invocation, rather than by a server process in the
            message model.

AUTHENTICATION_REQUIRED

            Sent a Probe request to determine principal associated
            with the Client, if not known.

SECURITY_REQUIRED

            Request must be encrypted or else reject.

REQUESTS_QUEUED Queue contains waiting requests, rather than free CSR's.

            Queue this request as well.

SERVER_WAITING The server is waiting and available to handle incoming

            Request immediately, as required by CMD.

Alternatively, the Server identifiers can be mapped to a CSR using the MapToClient mechanism with a pointer in the CSR refering to the server descriptor, if any. This scheme is attractive if there are client CSR's associated with a service to allow it to communicate as a client using VMTP with other services.

Finally, a similar structure is used to expand entity group identifiers to the local membership, as shown in Figure VII-3. A group identifier is hashed to an index in the GroupMap. The list of group descriptors rooted at that index in the GroupMap contains a group descriptor for each local member of the group. The flags are the group permissions defined in Appendix III.

Cheriton [page 110]

             +-------+---+----------------------------------+
 GroupMap       |       | x |                                  |
             +-------+-|-+----------------------------------+
                       |   +--------------+
                       |   | OverflowLink |
                       |   +--------------+
                       +-->|EntityGroupId |
                           +--------------+
                           | Flags        |
                           +--------------+
                           | Member Entity|
                           +--------------+
           Figure VII-3:   Mapping Group Identifiers

Note that the same pool of descriptors could be used for the server and group descriptors given that they are similar in size.

VII.2. Client Data Structures

Each client entity is represented as a client state record. The CSR contains a VMTP header as well as other bookkeeping fields, including timeout count, retransmission count, as described in Section 4.1. In addition, there is a timeout queue, transmission queue and reception queue. Finally, there is a ServerHost cache that maps from server entity-id records to host address, estimated round trip time, interpacket gap, MTU size and (optimally) estimated processing time for this server entity.

VII.3. Server Data Structures

The server maintains a heap of client state records (CSR), one for each (Client, Transaction). (If streams are not supported, there is, at worst, a CSR per Client with which the server has communicated with recently.) The CSR contains a VMTP header as well as various bookkeeping fields including timeout count, retransmission count. The server maintains a hash table mapping of Client to CSR as well as the transmission, timeout and reception queues. In a VMTP module implementing both the client and server functions, the same timeout queue and transmission queue are used for both.

Cheriton [page 111]

VII.4. Packet Group transmission

The procedure SendPacketGroup( csr ) transmits the packet group specified by the record CSR. It performs:

1. Fragmentation of the segment data, if any, into packets.

  (Note, segment data flagged by SDA bit.)

2. Modifies the VMTP header for each packet as required e.g.

  changing the delivery mask as appropriate.

3. Computes the VMTP checksum.

4. Encrypts the appropriate portion of the packet, if required.

5. Prepends and appends network-level header and trailer using

  network address from ServerHost cache, or from the responding
  CSR.

6. Transmits the packet with the interpacket gap specified in

  the cache.  This may involve round-robin scheduling between
  hosts as well as delaying transmissions slightly.

7. Invokes the finish-up procedure specified by the CSR record,

  completing the processing.  Generally, this finish-up
  procedure adds the record to the timeout queue with the
  appropriate timeout queue.

The CSR includes a 32-bit transmission mask that indicates the portions of the segment to transmit. The SendPacketGroup procedure is assumed to handle queuing at the network transmission queue, queuing in priority order according to the priority field specified in the CSR record. (This priority may be reflected in network transmission behavior for networks that support priority.)

The SendPacketGroup procedure only looks at the following fields of a CSR

- Transmission mask

- FuncCode

- SDA

- Client

- Server

Cheriton [page 112]

- CoResidentEntity

- Key

It modifies the following fields

- Length

- Delivery

- Checksum

In the case of encrypted transmission, it encrypts the entire packet, not including the Client field and the following 32-bits.

If the packet group is a Response, (i.e. lower-order bit of function code is 1) the destination network address is determined from the Client, otherwise the Server. The HostAddr field is set either from the ServerHost cache (if a Request) or from the original Request if a Response, before SendPacketGroup is called.

The CSR includes a timeout and TTL fields indicating the maximum time to complete the processing and the time-to-live for the packets to be transmitted.

SendPacketGroup is viewed as the right functionality to implement for transmission in an "intelligent" network interface.

Finally, it appears preferable to be able to assume that all portions of the segment remain memory-resident (no page faults) during transmission. In a demand-paged systems, some form of locking is required to keep the segment data in memory.

VII.5. VMTP Management Module

The implementation should implement the management operations as a separate module that is invoked from within the VMTP module. When a Request is received, either from the local user level or the network, for the VMTP management module, the management module is invoked as a remote or local procedure call to handle this request and return a response (if not a datagram request). By registering as a local server, the management module should minimize the special-case code required for its invocation. The management module is basically a case statement that selects the operation based on the RequestCode and then invokes the specified management operation. The procedure implementing the management operation, especially operations like NotifyVmtpClient and

Cheriton [page 113]

NotifyVmtpServer, are logically part of the VMTP module because they require full access to the basic data structures of the VMTP implementation.

The management module should be implemented so that it can respond quickly to all requests, particularly since the timing of management interactions is used to estimate round trip time. To date, all implementations of the management module have been done at the kernel level, along with VMTP proper.

VII.6. Timeout Handling

The timeout queue is a queue of CSR records, ordered by timeout count, as specified in the CSR record. On entry into the timeout queue, the CSR record has the timeout field set to the time (preferable in milliseconds or similar unit) to remain in the queue plus the finishup field set to the procedure to execute on removal on timeout from the queue. The timeout field for a CSR in the queue is the time relative to the record preceding it in the queue (if any) at which it is to be removed. Some system-specific mechanism decrements the time for the record at the front of the queue, invoking the finishup procedure when the count goes to zero.

Using this scheme, a special CSR is used to timeout and scan CSR's for non-recently pinged CSR's. That is, this CSR times out and invokes a finishup procedure that scans for non-recently pinged CSR that are "AwaitingResponse" and signals the request processing entity and deletes the CSR. It then returns to the timeout queue.

The timeout mechanism tends to be specific to an operating system. The scheme described may have to be adapted to the operating system in which VMTP is to be implemented.

This mechanism handles client request timeout and client response timeout. It is not intended to handle interpacket gaps given that these times are expected to be under 1 millisecond in general and possibly only a few microseconds.

VII.7. Timeout Values

Roundtrip timeout values are estimated by matching Responses or NotifyVmtpClient Requests to Request transmission, relying on the retransmitCount to identify the particular transmission of the Request that generated the response. A similar technique can be used with Responses and NotifyVmtpServer Requests. The retransmitCount is

Cheriton [page 114]

incremented each time the Response is sent, whether the retransmission was caused by timeout or retransmission of the Request.

The ProbeEntity request is recommended as a basic way of getting up-to-date information about a Client as well as predictable host machine turnaround in processing a request. (VMTP assumes and requires an efficient, bounded response time implementation of the ProbeEntity operation.)

Using this mechanism for measuring RTT, it is recommended that the various estimation and smoothing techniques developed for TCP RTT estimation be adapted and used.

VII.8. Packet Reception

Logically a network packet containing a VMTP packet is 5 portions:

- network header, possibly including lower-level headers

- VMTP header

- data segment

- VMTP checksum

- network trailer, etc.

It may be advantageous to receive a packet fragmented into these portions, if supported by the network module. In this case, ideally the VMTP header may be received directly into a CSR, the data segment into a page that can be mapped, rather than copied, to its final destination, with VMTP checksum and network header in a separate area (used to extract the network address corresponding to the sender).

Packet reception is described in detail by the pseudo-code in Section 4.7.

With a response, normally the CSR has an associated segment area immediately available so delivery of segment data is immediate. Similarly, server entities should be "armed" with CSR's with segment areas that provide for immediate delivery of requests. It is reasonable to discard segment data that cannot be immediately delivered in this way, providing that clients and servers are able to preallocate CSR's with segment areas for requests and responses. In particular, a client should be able to provide some number of additional CSR's for receiving multiple responses to a multicast request.

Cheriton [page 115]

The CSR data structure is intended to be the interface data structure for an intelligent network interface. For reception, the interface is "armed" with CSR's that may point to segment areas in main memory, into which it can deliver a packet group. Ideally, the interface handles all the processing of all packets, interacting with the host after receiving a complete Request or Response packet group. An implementation should use an interface based on SendPacketGroup(CSR) and ReceivePacketGroup(CSR) to facilitate the introduction of an intelligent network interface.

ReceivePacketGroup(csr) provides the interface with a CSR descriptor and zero or more bytes of main memory to receive segment data. The CSR describes whether it is to receive responses (and if so, for which client) or requests (and if so for which server).

The procedure ReclaimCSR(CSR) reclaims the specified record from the interface before it has been returned after receiving the specified packet group.

A finishup procedure is set in the CSR to be invoked when the CSR is returned to the host by the normal processing sequence in the interface. Similarly, the timeout parameter is set to indicate the maximum time the host is providing for the routine to perform the specified function. The CSR and associated segment memory is returned to the host after the timeout period with an indication of progress after the timeout period. It is not returned earlier.

VII.9. Streaming

The implementation of streaming is optional in both VMTP clients and servers. Ideally, all performance-critical servers should implement streaming. In addition, clients that have high context switch overhead, network access overhead or expect to be communicating over long delay links should also implement streaming.

A client stream is implemented by allocating a CSR for each outstanding message transaction. A stream of transactions is handled similarly to multiple outstanding transactions from separate clients except for the interaction between consecutive numbered transactions in a stream.

For the server VMTP module, streamed message transactions to a server are queued (if accepted) subordinate to the first unprocessed CSR corresponding to this Client. Thus, streamed transactions from a given Client are always performed in the order specified by the transaction identifiers.

Cheriton [page 116]

If a server does not implement streaming, it must refuse streamed message transactions using the NotifyVmtpClient operation. Also, all client VMTP's that support streaming must support the streamed interface to a server that does not support streaming. That is, it must perform the message transactions one at a time. Consequently, a program that uses the streaming interface to a non-streaming server experiences degraded performance, but not failure.

VII.10. Implementation Experience

The implementation experience to date includes a partial implementation (minus the streaming and full security) in the V kernel plus a similar preliminary implementation in the 4.3 BSD Unix kernel. In the V kernel implementation, the CSR's are part of the (lightweight) process descriptor.

The V kernel implementation is able to perform a VMTP message transaction with no data segment between two Sun-3/75's connected by 10 Mb Ethernet in 2.25 milliseconds. It is also able to transfer data at

megabits per second using 16 kilobyte Requests (but null checksums.)

The UNIX kernel implementation running on Microvax II's achieves a basic message transaction time of 9 milliseconds and data rate of 1.9 megabits per second using 16 kilobyte Responses. This implementation is using the standard VMTP checksum.

We hope to report more extensive implementation experience in future revisions of this document.

Cheriton [page 117]

VIII. UNIX 4.3 BSD Kernel Interface for VMTP

UNIX 4.3 BSD includes a socket-based design for program interfaces to a variety of protocol families and types of protocols (streams, datagrams). In this appendix, we sketch an extension to this design to support a transaction-style protocol. (Some familiarity with UNIX 4.2/3 IPC is assumed.) Several extensions are required to the system interface, rather than just adding a protocol, because no provision was made for supporting transaction protocols in the original design. These extensions include a new "transaction" type of socket plus new system calls invoke, getreply, probeentity, recreq, sendreply and forward.

A socket of type transaction bound to the VMTP protocol type IPPROTO_VMTP is created by the call

s = socket(AF_INET, SOCK_TRANSACT, VMTP);

This socket is bound to an entity identifier by

bind(s, &entityid, sizeof(entityid));

The first address/port bound to a socket is considered its primary name and is the one used on packet transmission. A message transaction is invoked between the socket named by s and the Server specified by mcb by

invoke(s, mcb, segptr, seglen, timeout );

The mcb is a message control block whose format was described in Section

The message control block specifies the request to send plus the

destination Server. The response message control block returned by the server is stored in mcb when invoke returns. The invoking process is blocked until a response is received or the message transaction times out unless the request is a datagram request. (Non-blocking versions with signals on completion could also be provided, especially with a streaming implementation.)

For multicast message transactions (sent to an entity group), the next response to the current message transaction (if it arrives in less than timeout milliseconds) is returned by

getreply( s, mcb, segptr, maxseglen, timeout );

The invoke operation sent to an entity group completes as soon as the first response is received. A request is retransmitted until the first reply is received (assuming the request is not a datagram). Thus, the system does not retransmit while getreply is timing out even if no replies are available.

Cheriton [page 118]

The state of an entity associated with entityId is probed using

probeentity( entityId, state );

A UNIX process acting as a VMTP server accepts a Request by the operation

recvreq(s, mcb, segptr, maxseglen );

The request message for the next queued transaction request is returned in mcb, plus the segment data of maximum length maxseglen, starting at segptr in the address space. On return, the message control block contains the values as set in invoke except: (1) the Client field indicates the Client that sent the received Request message. (2) the Code field indicates the type of request. (3) the MsgDelivery field indicates the portions of the segment actually received within the specified segment size, if MDM is 1 in the Code field. A segment block is marked as missing (i.e. the corresponding bit in the MsgDelivery field is 0) unless it is received in its entirety or it is all of the data in last segment contained in the segment.

To complete a transaction, the reply specified by mcb is sent to the client specified by the MCB using

sendreply(s, mcb, segptr );

The Client field of the MCB indicates the client to respond to.

Finally, a message transaction specified by mcb is forwarded to newserver as though it were sent there by its original invoker using

forward(s, mcb, segptr, timeout );

Cheriton [page 119]

Index

      Acknowledgment   14
      APG   16, 31, 39
      Authentication domain   20
      Big-endian   9
      Checksum   14, 43
      Checksum, not set   44
      Client   7, 10, 38
      Client timer   16
      CMD   42, 110
      CMG   32, 40
      Co-resident entity   25
      Code   42
      CoResidentEntity   42, 43
      CRE   21, 42
      DGM   42
      Digital signature, VMTP management   95, 101
      Diskless workstations   2
      Domain   9, 38
      Domain 1   102
      Domain 3   104
      Entity   7
      Entity domain   9
      Entity group   8
      Entity identifier   37
      Entity identifier allocation   105
      Entity identifier, all-zero   38
      EPG   20, 39
      Features   6
      ForwardCount   24
      Forwarding   24
      FunctionCode   41
      Group   8
      Group message transaction   10
      Group timeouts   16
      GRP   37
      HandleNoCSR   62
      HandleRequestNoCSR   79
      HCO   14, 23, 39

Cheriton [page 120]

      Host independence   8
      Idempotent   15
      Interpacket gap   18, 40
      IP   108
      Key   91
      LEE   32, 37
      Little-endian   9
      MCB   118
      MDG   22, 40
      MDM   30, 42
      Message control block   118
      Message size   6
      Message transaction   7, 10
      MPG   39
      MsgDelivery   43
      MSGTRANS_OVERFLOW   27
      Multicast   4, 21, 120
      Multicast, reliable   21
      Naming   6
      Negative acknowledgment   31
      NER   25, 31, 39
      NRT   26, 30, 39
      NSR   25, 27, 31, 39
      Object-oriented   2
      Overrun   18
      Packet group   7, 29, 39
      Packet group run   31
      PacketDelivery   29, 31, 41
      PGcount   26, 41
      PIC   42
      Principal   11
      Priority   41
      Process   11
      ProcessId   89
      Protocol number,IP   108
      RAE   37
      Rate control   18
      Real-time   2, 4
      Realtime   22

Cheriton [page 121]

      Reliability   12
      Request message   10
      RequestAckRetries   30
      RequestRetries   15
      Response message   10
      ResponseAckRetries   31
      ResponseRetries   15
      Restricted group   8
      Retransmission   15
      RetransmitCount   17
      Roundtrip time   17
      RPC   2
      Run   31, 39
      Run, message transactions   25
      SDA   42
      Security   4, 19
      Segment block   41
      Segment data   43
      SegmentSize   42, 43
      Selective retransmission   18
      Server   7, 10, 41
      Server group   8
      Sockets, VMTP   118
      STI   26, 40
      Streaming   25, 55
      Strictly stable   8
      Subgroups   21
      T-stable   8
      TC1(Server)   16
      TC2(Server)   16
      TC3(Server)   16
      TC4   16
      TCP   2
      Timeouts   15
      Transaction   10, 41
      Transaction identification   10
      TS1(Client)   17
      TS2(Client)   17
      TS3(Client)   17
      TS4(Client)   17
      TS5(Client)   17
      Type flags   8
      UNIX interface   118
      Unrestricted group   8, 38

Cheriton [page 122]

      NotifyVmtpClient   7, 26, 27, 30
      NotifyVmtpServer   7, 14, 30
      User Data   43
      Version   38
      VMTP Management digital signature   95, 101

Cheriton [page 123]